Home

GSK988T User Manual

1. O Fig 7 3 E HEASURE L a O 4 Input the coordinate axis number axis value to be measured in 5 UR INPUT press Or for in position measuring 5 Calculating the offset value If the cursor is in the tool offset box the tool wearing value is cleared the tool offset value the relative coordinate value the input coordinate value If the cursor is in the tool wearing box the tool wearing value remains unchanged the tool offset value the relative coordinate value the input coordinate value the wearing value relative to the coordinate axis Note The lathe tool setting isn t with the tool compensation value 7 1 3 input mode d i 1 On the setting tool offset window press maost to access the tool offset management window 2 Press Or E to select the window and press Q Or V to select the gt tool offset number to be rewritten and press Or to select the axial tool offset Value or the wearing value to be rewritten NPUT 3 Press the selected tool offset value or the wearing value adds up one input value which is shown as below 284 Chapter VI Tool Offset and Setting Tools DNC ns SETTING TOOL OFFSET Wee x 2 m 1 pt RELAT IYE U 1 8H BRE LU 18 HEE MACHINE i 156 HEE 7 17 BB T i L 2 BE B BE B Enn 4 T 0000 14 41 35 4 Input one numerical value in the value can be negative Press UR INPUT
2. AUI ERU CUTTING selected m ABSOLUTE X a Bla O oO Z 9 8811 45 GH3 X 24 6 Z 1 88 R75 5 F1 0 o E a coy FB The current program being executed shown in RELATIVE eR E 1 U B 8187 le o B X 1 5 22 0 Gl Z F150 y 8 8811 D GBF X23 4 Z 1 8 R75 5 FBBBB E Gl 2 5 4 FTBBB U 6 W 3 F300 Y 8 8187 1 8 1 GA X38 8 M3 Shae 35 0 Z 8 8011 USB p M5 15 38 32 m LOAD SAVE UNDO REDO LOCATE COPY a il DEL BLK gt Fig 1 4 2 CNC stores programs shown in Fig 1 5 AUTO RW CIRCULAR CUTTING PROGRAM gt LOCAL DIRECTORY prog acounts 7 size byte 3 469 free byte 34 620 928 nane comments oles byte modi fied time Opaal OMAHI 2018 88 14 14 57 32 OHSS OMAS 2819 88 18 16 21 24 02864 02084 116 2018 88 13 28 15 58 02865 02885 1 253 281 88 21 16 85 58 02511 02511 135 2018 88 13 11 28 04 02512 02512 1 136 2010 08 11 22 43 24 16 89 19 MDI ees uc NEW LOAD OPEN gt Fig 1 5 185 CGSN CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual gt Current coordinate display The coordinate values of each coordinate system display the position where the tool is and can be taken as the distance display from the current to the target position shown in Fig 1 6 See Chapter 3 1 Position Display Window AUTO AUN CIRCULAR CUTTING ABS REL MAC REM A 8 8418 mm U 8 8418 mm X 8 8514 mm X 4 BB mm Z 1 8595 mm I 1 8585 mm Z 1 8598
3. Parameter Type Word type Value Range VALID RANGE VALUE 7 DEFAULT SETTING UNITS UNITS IS B SETTING IS C Metric machine machine 1mm min 6 15000 Set the speed during dry run Cutting feedrate IFV in auto mode after power on initial value CIFV Parameter Type Word type Value Range II SETTING UNITS VALUE UNITS VALID RANGE DEFAULT SETTING ee D T inch It doesn t require changing the cutting speed in the machine during the processing And the cutting feedrate can be set by the parameter then the cutting feedrate is not required to be set in the program But the actual feedrate is limited by parameter NO 1422 which set the maximum cutting O D m 9 O 5 feedrate for all axes Rapid traverse rate RTT Parameter Type Word axis Value Range VALID RANGE SETTING UNITS VALUE UNITS IS B IS C DEFAULT SETTING Metric machine machine 1 1mm min aie s eom Tdegimin Set the rapid movement speed for each axis when the rapid movement override is 100 FO rate of rapid traverse override for each axis FOR Modification authority Equipment management authority Parameter Type Word axis Value Range SETTING UNITS VALUE VALID RANGE DEFAULT 322 Chapter XI Parameters Metric machine 1 mm min 30 15000 30 12000 Inch machine 0 1 inch min 30 6000 30 4800 400 Rotary axis 1 deg min 30 15000 30 12000
4. Xp Fedmd Xm9 were Xi Space key onthe rghtoFONC o o Xe MANUAL mode Xs M md X4 UNmde 3s woe REFERENCE P ETURN X22 6 CE POSITION RETU mode X22 EDIT mode SS Rapid traverse override ee XBi Zeis moves along direcion Z9 OOO 282 Rapid waverse S0 IMPGKIOO OOOO X83 Repid waverse 25 MPGHIO XB4 Y mis moves along direcion Y OOOO X85 Rapidivaverse FMP X6 Xais moves along dreon O 7 Hykalepesue XM SpxeWyblwheodesat XMi Ck XN2 cation XM3 SpwekyontherghofspndeCCW lt C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual X25 0 X25 7 Connected to terminal strip X26 0 X26 7 Connected to terminal strip X27 0 X2T T Connected to terminal strip X28 0 Connected to terminal strip PREE EARO pane baud swite spindle override OV 1 Connected to panel baud switch spindle override OV 2 Connected to panel baud switch spindle override OV 3 Connected to panel baud switch X28 3 Connected to terminal stri EE oc spindle override OV 4 Connected to panel baud switch X28 4 Connected to terminal stri EE oc feedrate override OV1 C itch X28 5 Connected to terminal strip nope iil PUO UE feedrate override OV2 i Connected to panel baud switch X28 6 Connected to terminal stri EE oov feedrate override OV3 Connected to panel baud switch X28 Connected to terminal
5. User Manual same When GSK CAN is restarted or re connected all the slaves are cut OFF The possible reasons are 1 Poor contact of system GSK CAN communication interface 2 Poor contact of servo slave GSK CAN communication interface 3 End resistor is not installed on the servo slave which is the farthest from the system 4 GSK CAN communication is interrupted 5 Power supply is not grounded The same as the prompt No 5005 but this prompt indicates that only some slave connection is failed GSK CAN interrupted communication The servo configuration file is not found or the data in the file is unusable GSK CAN interrupted communication After the servo is disconnected with the system servo parameter is manually changed on the drive unit When this servo is used the next time after power on an alarm occurs Note When a servo of different version is used the system will automatically select the parameters read in the servo and an alarm will not occur Appendix 1 Alarm List The parameter of This alarm occurs together with the n th alarm No 5030 It occurs only when production servo some parameters such as encoder arameter is zero drift drive unit version are l P l The parameter of the n th l l HDI VO SIT inconsistent with l inconsistent with the current stored production servo parameter the read one et l f parameters is inconsistent with the read l l This parameter incl
6. conditional expression The macro program statement cannot be used with NC statement together and the macro program statement definition is as follows Block including arithmetic or logical operation z Block including the control statement such as TOTO DO END Block including macro program call command such as G65 G66 G67 or other G codes M code call macro program Any blocks except for macro program statements are NC statements Note 8 Any blocks except for macro program states are NC statements Note 9 Note 10 The system can use the substitution character which is easily understood to replace the operator gt lt can be edit in PC instead of on MDI keyboard and are uploaded into the system When macro statement needs a line number the line number must be compiled in the front the statement Note 11 In MDI mode the system cannot execute the skip statement otherwise it alarms Example IF 2 1 GOTO example IF 2 GT 10 GOTO 10 N er The condition is satisfied The condition is not satisfied i N10 G01 X100 0 Z100 0 2 IF lt Logical expression gt THEN lt expression gt example EQ 3 THEN 4 0 When 2 value is same that of 3 4 value is O 3 WHILE Logical expression gt DOn ENDn example 135 U im O ta um 9 3 3 e I g O Q Q 3 3 Q CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE While lt cond
7. 2 Modal call of macro program G66 G67 Command format G66 P L argumentlist G67 Command function set the modal message of the specified macro program L times for calling P send the argument to the called macro program Command explanation G66 modal macro program call needs one line to be specified G67 call macro program call mode P specify many called macro programs L times for calling the macro program It is default to 1 its range is 1 9999 Argument list data sending to macro program is referred to the explanations of G65 U A O Q Q 3 Q Note 1 Cannot call many macro programs in G66 block but can call G66 again Note 2 G66 is specified before P_ L_ and argument and the use methods of P L the argument are the same those of G65 Note 3 Can t call macro program in the block without movement commands but with the auxiliary function Note 4 The local variable argument is specified only in G66 block and the system does not set it again when each modal call is executed Note 5 Cannot specify the macro call command in MDI mode Note 6 When the reset is executed by setting the parameter whether the common variables of the local variables from 1 to 33 and from 100 to 149 are cleared to the Null value Note 7 The system clears the call state of all user macro programs and subprograms and DO state and returns to the main program Note 8 In executing the macro program
8. ER A E SEARCH CPLC STATE Note 1 The servo parameter is displayed only when the system servo communication function is valid and all servo axes are connected Note 2 The operations about the file management are valid only when the U disk is inserted 202 Chapter III Windows 520 TING SET TOOL SETG SEARCH MEASURE INPUT C INPUT CLEAR ECHC CETTINGY SYSTEM C TIME CONFIEM TIME iu ECONFIRM DATEI ETHENET II EA CROJ _ SEARCH O D um Q E O 203 GSE C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual wes MEG EALARM MESSAGE 4LAEM HISTORY CCLEAR ALARM CNC DIAGNOSE CLOCK SCREEN SERVO DIAGNOSE x Es EOscILLOGR APH SETTING CH1 cH MONITORE ESTARTY CH1 ZOOM IN CH1 ZOOM OUT EDIAGNOSEY TO II uoljei0doO CTIME ZOOM IN TIME ZOOM OUT EGSKLink TI SERVO CONFIG SWITCH LIST CFG FILE LIST EDELETE FILE Note The servo diagnosis is displayed only when the system servo communication function is valid and all servo axes are connected EOPERATIONT PROGEAMINGA SEARCH 4LARM I SEARCH PARAMETER CSEARCH 204 Chapter III Windows 3 1 Position Display Window The initial display is the position window after the system is turned on Fig 3 1 is the position window display diagram without loaded pr
9. Note 1 Xp Yp Zp are separately X or its parallel axis Y or its parallel axis Z or its parallel axis The followings are the same as those Note 2 IP expresses the combination of X Y Z used in programming I U im O e um 9 3 3 e C GSE CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE Example A le Q c 3 Q Fig 1 8 G32 W 27 F3 BC thread interpolation G1 X50 Z 30 F100 G1 X80 Z 50 DE linear interpolation G3 X100 W 10 R10 EF arc interpolation M30 1 4 Coordinate Value and Dimension 1 4 1 Absolute programming and incremental programming The system has two methods to command the too traverse absolute value and incremental value command In the absolute programming use the coordinate value programming of the end point in the incremental programming use the traverse distance programming In the system using the absolute programming or incremental programming is depended on the word of the command as follows Table 1 4 a Absolute value command Incremental value command Bmoverent command B Wwe The system can select the incremental programming or the absolute programming mode or the incremental absolute compound programming the absolute command and the incremental command can be in the same block as follow X100 0 W100 0 When the absolute command and the incremental command of one axis are in the same block the following command value is valid
10. TRYOUT timed out System functions are Please contact the dealer restricted T User parameter file does not exist or data is damaged 910 Initial parameter failure Default parameters become effective 911 Initial CNC configuration CNC config file does not exist or data is damaged failure Default configuration becomes effective Initial tool offset data Tool offset file does not exist or data is damaged Initial failure data becomes effective 913 PE Tool life file does nol exist or data is damaged Initial data becomes effective Initial pitch error compensation data failure Initial PLC programe Read file failure in registering program or compile failure failure RS CNC Initialization failure Poweronagain on Poweronagain Please check 1 Whether the communication baud rate is consistent between CNC and servo Cnc para Nos 9010 9011 amp corresponding servo para 2 Whether the communication servo id is consistent between CNC and servo Cnc para Nos 9020 9030 amp corresponding servo para 3 Whether the communication cable is connected well grounding is abnormal and the terminal resistance is installed Please power on again Pitch error compensation file does not exist or data is damaged Initial data becomes effective gt D 5 Q x GSK CAN initialization failure 374 Appendix 1 Alarm List Keyboard on MDI panel or operator s panel
11. press Level Level Pe F1 to select the windows and the ladder program of the corresponding block are displayed to search the commands the parameters the network and so on SEARCH 2 Press to enter the search window shown in Fig 3 24 O Oo am 9 O 5 AUTO ms PLC gt MONITOR gt STDPLC ENU LD2 gt windowl Levell net ki E EER E EE R0 0 R0 0 E R0 0 i network2 RO 2 logic 0 R0 2 R0 2 R0 2 I 88 s networks ESP alarm K10 7 1 0 external ESP input signal X0 5 high low level alarm R2 0 1 0 without with ESP alarm 40 5 K10 7 68 4 Sie CS 40 5 K10 7 R2 0 EH fes etwork4 overtravel processing 256 R0 0 9 43 7 ADDR ad EL EE i His s Fig 3 24 ADDR SRH INSTALT MET WORK 3 Separately press ee BA a 3H to search the corresponding parameters commands and network in the blocks corresponding to the windows and the cursor positions to the 225 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR corresponding to the corresponding positions FIRST LAST 4 Press E E to position the HOME and the END of the blocks of the corresponding blocks 5 reall and the system returns the previous menu 4 Return B In the figure press and the system returns to the previous menu 3 3
12. Distance between starting point of Xp axis to center of arc with sign its range referred to the following table Distance between starting point of Yp axis to center of arc with sign its range referred to the following table Distance between starting point of Z axis to center of arc with sign its 0 wareno neona ae s OS Arc radius with d it is the radius s when machining range referred to EN AM F Feedrate along arc range is the same that of G01 I Address Incremental system Metric input mm Inch input inch I J K R ISB system 99999 999 99999 999 9999 9999 9999 9999 ISC system 9999 9999 9999 9999 999 99999 999 99999 J K have sign symbols according their directions they are positive when their directions are the same those of Xp Yp Zp otherwise they are negative 5 A O Q y Q 3 3 Q End point x y End point z x End point y z Z Circle center Circle center Circle center Fig 2 5 Command path arc direction X axis G02 f io X axis 7 e E NE Z axis SESSA N Fig 2 6 Arc interpolation 36 Chapter If G Commands Execution process taking G02 as an example A Start point of arc B End point of arc C Center point C Program Diameter programming G02 X50 0 Z30 0 R25 0 F30 or G02 U20 0 W 20 0 R25 0 F30 or G02 X50 0 Z30 0 135 0 F30 K 0 or G02 U20 0 W 20 0 135 0 F30 K 0 D O
13. G01 linear interpolation G02 G03 arc interpolation G04 dwell G40 G41 G42 tool nose radius compensation G65 G66 G67 user macro program command G98 G99 feed rev feed minute The system alarms when other G commands are executed in the polar coordinate interpolation mode Note 6 F feedrate is the tangent speed with the polar coordinate interpolation level rectangular coordinate system in the polar coordinate interpolation mode Note 7 The arc interpolation commanding the arc radius address is determined by the linear axis of the interpolation level in the polar coordinate interpolation level as follows Use and J when the linear axis is X or its parallel and the turn axis uses J Use J and K when the linear axis is X or its parallel and the turn axis uses J Use K and I when the linear axis is Z or its parallel and the turn axis uses I Note 8 Must set a workpiece coordinate system before using G12 1 the center of the turn axis is the origin of the coordinate system The coordinate system must not be changed in G12 1 mode Note 9 Cannot start or cancel the polar coordinate interpolation mode command G12 1 or G13 1 in G40 otherwise the system alarms Note 10 When the tool traverses near to the workpiece center in the polar coordinate interpolation mode C weight of feedrate changes which exceeds max C cutting speed to cause the system alarms Note 11 The program command uses the rectangular coordinate command in
14. K13 1 If the chuck function is valid check the chuck clamping state 1 when the spindle is started 1 Yes 0 No GSE K13 2 Tailstock control function 1 valid 0 invalid K13 4 Spindle gear stage is stored when power off 1 Yes 0 No K13 5 Spindle automatic gear change in position signal active level 0 1 low level 0 high level K13 6 Check spindle automatic gear change in position signal 1 Yes 0 No K13 7 Spindle automatic gear change function 1 valid 0 invalid 0 K14 0 Check chuck clamping unclamping signal 1 Yes 0 No K14 2 Chuck mode Chuck mode 1 inner chuck 0 outer chuck inner chuck 0 outer chuck K14 4 Low pressure alarm signal level EM E K14 5 Low pressure alarm function Lowpressure alarm function 1 valid O invalid valid 0 invalid K14 6 Protection door input signal alarm level EM D Kar Protection door alarm function T vaid O iwal 0 07 K15 0 Starting up operation mode MD1 LO K15 1 Starting up operation mode MD2 EE K152 2 Starting up operation mode MD4 up operation mode MD4 c 4 NEHME S s o NN up operation mode 1 MD2 MD2 MD4 0 the mode when power off the last time 0 K156 6 Servo spindle 8 point orientation function 1 valid 0 invalid 2 3 2 Parameter DT PLC initial Minimum Maximum Fon DTOO00 1000 60000 ERE gear ees time 1 Spindle gear change time 1 ms Broor m9 9 S99
15. NDI CUR NEXT Fig 3 13 O g a E 3 3 System Window e zi 3 SYSTEM Press to access the system window It mainly includes windows of parameter screw pitch compensation system message file management and ladder diagram etc Check the content in each window through the corresponding soft keys and the structure of the soft key is shown as below Pitch errar system i Fil pe ele _ see section See section i section d d 2 a a 4 The operation system interface of system file of pitch information Management error and compensati loperation on setting lewe l and modifying pru ee System Servo Version Honitorine sey er parameters informat ion FLU data ie Sears catalog See see section sectian a 6 3 3 B 1 The The interface Interface of PLO data See section nee section 3 5 2 3 86 5 The The Interface Interface JEE section 3 3 1 1 The ges section d 3 1 Z The of 1 0 of program status catalog Interface of system parameters Interface of version information interface of zervo parameters of ladder monitoring Fig 3 14 214 Chapter Il Windows 3 3 1 System parameter setting and rewriting window PARAMETER On the system window press to access parameter setting window which is shown in Fig 3 15 MIDI ns SiolEM PARAMETER CNL PARAMETER W 23 BPs 11526 4 38 OWN H H H H H H H H HJJH AMEN H H H H H H H l MT NM H H H H H H H H M
16. O ta um 9 3 3 e A Starting point End point A B C roughing path Cutting feed d gt Rapid traverse Sarat Tiel Finishing path Fig 2 44 Coordinate offset direction with finishing allowance Au Aw define the coordinates offset and its direction of finishing and their sign symbols are as follows Fig 2 45 BC for finishing path B C for roughing path and A is the starting point 75 I U A O Q y Q 3 3 Q CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE X Auw0 Aw gt 0 X Auw0 Aw 0 Au lt 0 Aw lt 0 Au lt 0 Aw gt 0 Example Fig 2 46 Starting point 176 10 Program O0005 G00 X176 Z10 M03 S500 Change No 2 tool and execute its compensation spindle rotation with 500 rev min G72 W2 0 RO 5 F300 Tool infeed 2mm tool retraction 2mm G72 P10 Q20 U0 2 WO 1 Roughing a d X roughing allowance 0 2mm and Z 0 1mm N10 G00 Z 55 S800 Rapid traverse 76 Chapter If G Commands G01 X160 F120 Infeed to a point X80 W20 Machining a b W15 Machining b c Blocks for finishing path N20 X40 W20 Machining c d G70 P050 Q090 M30 Finishing a d 2 15 3 Closed Cutting Cycle G73 Command functions G73 is divided into three parts D Blocks for defining the travels of tool infeed and tool retraction the cutting speed the spindle speed and
17. The program pauses after pressing the FEED HOLD key or the external cycle start signal is switched off and it continuously runs from current position after pressing the CYCLE START key or the external cycle start signal is switched on e When Single Block is ON the program pauses after every block is executed completely and then it continuously runs from the next block after the CYCLE START key is pressed or the external cycle start signal is switched on e Block with in the front of it is not executed when the block skipping switch is ON The system skips to the target block to run after executing G65 Please see Section Three G Commands about execution sequence of G70 73 27 i U O e 9 3 3 e C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE Call corresponding subprograms or macro program to run when executing M98 or M9000 M9999 the system returns to main program to call the next block when executing M99 if M99 specifies a target block number the system returns to it to run after the subprograms or macro programs run completely The system returns to the first block to run and the current program is executed repetitively when M99 is executed in a main program 1 6 2 Execution sequence of word There are many words G X Z F R M S T and so on and most of M S T is transmitted to PLC by NC explaining and others are directly executed by NC M98 M99 M9000 M9999 S word for specifying
18. W caw NY Heesen sessi wes wes 74 Chapter If G Commands p 8C system 1 99999 1 99999 Execution process Fig 2 44 QD X rapidly traverses to A from A point X travel is Au and Z travel is Aw 2 X moves from m Ais Ad tool infeed ns block is for tool infeed at rapid traverse speed with GO is for tool infeed at G72feedrate F in G1 and its direction of tool infeed is that of AB point 3 X executes the cutting feeds to the roughing path and its direction is the same that of X coordinate BC point 4 X Z execute the tool retraction e 45 straight line at feedrate the directions of tool retraction is opposite to that of tool infeed 5 X rapidly retracts at rapid traverse speed to the position which is the same that of Z coordinate After Z tool infeed Ad e again is executed the end point of traversing tool is still on the middle point of straight line between A and B the tool does not reach or exceed B and after Z executes the tool infeed Ad e again 3 is executed after the tool infeed Ad e is executed again the end point of tool traversing reaches B point or exceeds the straight line between A B point and Z executes the tool infeed to B point and then the next step is executed 7 Cutting feed from B to C point along the roughing path Rapidly traverse to A from C point and the program jumps to the next clock following nf block after G71 cycle is completed I U im
19. eon HB SYSTEM DATA FILE LES MACRO MCO cS PARAM PAR Haff ice zh cn zi Lis 2052 fficeb4 zh cn H Out look zh cn LEY TLIF TLL Las PowerPoint zh en I 3 TOFF CHP 3 Proof ing zh cn Em WOFF WMP Hg Proof en 2 NGC PROGRAM Los Proof zh cn 3 PLC PROGRAM G ProFlus Wl LE 3TLDFLC ENU LOZ Hi Publ i sher zh cn L 3 STDPLC LDZ Hi Rosebud zh cn 4 SERVO CONFIG FILE H Updates HE 188 183 sca La Word zh cn LE 188 184 seg cay NCPRUlG LE 188 185 seg LE 188 183 sca I 3 188 584 sca I 3 188 184 sca Pm 1H3 scg SE iHd 1H5 scg SE iHi 1H4 scg LE Hi 5HA seg LPS 181 185 sca E LES 181 583 seg I E 181 184 sca LEY 181 584 scg e 1A _1H5 scg E E q 23 B9 a PARAM HEBR oT al EM MEMORY T PLE zl TEH MPUT QUT PUT H INFO DEVIC E EISI Fig 3 20 The window is divided into left and right columns The left column displays the system files and the part program file directories when the system is with the flash disk the right column displays the file directory in the flash disk which is shown as the following figure Then input or output the system files the files in the system can be output to the flash disk or the file in the flash disk can be input into the system a TCH 1 Press LIST and the file directory of flash disk in right column and the cursor can switch between the system file directory in left column 2 When the cursor is on the file
20. represents the axis doesn t connect with the servo subunit 1 5 represent the analog spindle slave number corresponding to the axis 362 Appendix 1 Alarm List Appendix 1 Alarm List 1 4 Program Alarms P S Alarms Emergency stop alarm ESP l l Recover ESP signal input to clear alarm input open circuit Part prog open failure Reset to clear alarm or power on again Single block exceeds 256 Characters excessive in single block modify the Data exceeds permissive Input data exceeds permissive range or the specified Address not found With number or symbol other than address at the beginning of a block Modify the program No data follows address No data follows address or expression format following 005 address checks error without brackets Modify the 001 002 003 04 0 program Illegal use of negative sign oign was input after an address with which it can t be used or two or more was input Modify the program Illegal use of decimal point Decimal point was input after an address with which 007 it can t be use or two or more was input Modify the program program Incorrect G code Specify improper G code or that with functions not eee ponte node pega Address repetition error Specify the same address twice or more in a block or 010 specify two or more G codes in same group in a block Refer to para 3403 6 AD2 Modify the program Command can t r
21. 3 level 2 level 3 level 2 level 3 level 2 level 3 level Program witch O O O zZ Z Z Z Z O Z Z Z Z Z O zZ O O zZ Param eter switch Chapter 4 3 3 Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter 4 2 2 Chapter 4 2 2 N to to to to to to to NO OO Q C2 C2 C2 OO C2 401 Gr M1 Bx F GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Param Display Password Program Function Operation eter window level witch switch Program CNC ON OFF setting Parameter CNC ON OFF setting Chapter Automatic sequence No ON OFF CNC setting Metric CNC Input unit setting EB i Note 1 in Operation indicates that the two operations are successive indicates that the two operations are executed at the same time DATA DATA DATA INPUT INPUT INPUT Example Parameter value press firstly and input the parameter value and then DATA INPUT i press again Q cance N press them simultaneously Note2 The blanks in Operation Mode Display Window Password Level Program Switch and Parameter Switch column indicate that the corresponding switches are not related to their items correspondingly 402
22. 9999 9999 inch CISC system CISC system ISB system ISB system 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch CISC system CISC system 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 999 99999 999 99999 inch ISB system ISB system CISC system CISC system 9999 9999 9999 9999 deg ISB system ISB system 99999 999 99999 999 mm 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch Feedrate per rev U m O e um 9 3 3 e value linear delay time 1 Y absolute coordinate value linear axis 1 999 99999 999 99999inch Z absolute coordinate value linear axis 1 A absolute coordinate value linear axis 1 B absolute coordinate value linear axis 1 C absolute coordinate value rotary axis 1 X relative coordinate value finishing allowance in G71 G72 G73 X tool retraction ISC system 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm CISC system 999 99999 999 99999 inch distance and specified delay time 1 in G73 1 GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual G99 Relative commands for machining thread Relative command of axis G04 Relative command of axis Relative command of axis Relative command of axis Relative command of axis Relative command of axis Relative command of axis G71 G7 2 673 G04 Chapter I Programming Fundamentals Cut depth in ISB system ISB system G71 G71 modify parameter 0 001 99999 999 mm 0 0001 9999 9999 inch MANNE CI
23. G1 X30 F100 G1 X37 F300 G1 X40 W1 5 GO X42 W30 G1 X40 G1 X37 W1 5 G1 X10 GO X17 Z 1 G1 X16 G1 X14 ZO F200 GO X150 Z50 T0404 S100 GO X42 Z 54 G92 X39 W 34 F3 X38 X36 4 X36 GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual Change into the 1 tool Close to the work piece Cutting depth is 1mm the tool retracts for 1mm X axis leaves for 0 5mm 0 5mm surplus in Z axis Close to the work piece face Turning 16 outer circle Turning face Turning 39 98 outer circle Turning face Turning 40 outer circle Turning convexo arc Turning concave arc Turning 120 outer circle Taper turning angle Turning 130 outer circle Return to the tool change point after roughing Change into 2 tool execute 2 tool offset Finishing cycle Return to the tool change point after roughing Change into 3 tool execute 3 tool offset Close to the work piece Grooving 30 Return Chamfering Leave the grooving tool width Chamfering Grooving 010 Chamfering Return to the tool change point Change into 4 tool set the spindle speed as 200 r min Close to the work piece Threading cycle Feed 1mm and cut the 2 time Feed 0 6mm and cut the 3 time Feed 0 4mm and cut the 4 time Chapter X Processing Examples NO 3 4 0 GO X150 Z50 Return to the tool change point N0350 T0100 Change into 1 tool N0360 M5 The spindle is OFF N0370 M9 The cooling is OFF N0380 M13 Release the chuck N0390 M30 End
24. GRAPH GRAPHICAL EMULATION m ABSOLUTE X 23 523 PROG Gl X8 234 FSMH Z 56 438 RELAT VE U 23 623 y 9b 438 MACHINE X 23 523 5i 56 438 plane Z amp A scale 1 880 T 0000 11 00 68 pus Vins EMULATE ZOOM IN ZOOM uU RECOVER Fig 3 49 In the figure at the bottom of the simulation graph screen it displays the coordinate level of the present simulation graph and the scaling of the simulation graph On the simulation graph window only the graph simulation message of XZ level is displayed II O Oo mm 9 r O 5 GSR C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Then the graph can be zoomed in and out and the path can be cleared and em gt press Q V Or to move the graph up down right or left Note The name for each axis is set by parameter 1020 and the name can be set in different letters 3 Help Windows HELP Press to access help window shown in Fig 3 50 It mainly includes the help of operation programming alarm and parameter windows and check the content on the windows through pressing the corresponding soft keys AUTO AUN LINEAR CUTTING HELP OPERATION OPERAT ON EI POIIER ON FF EI FUNCT ION DISPL2 EMANUAL OPERATIC ction as follows DIT OPERATION ud SETTING It is adopted GSKLink servo unit and it can be achieved se EI AUTOMATIC OPER rvo parameter read write and servo unit real time monitor GSK988T sy
25. Set the time required to send strobe signal MF SF TF BF after the M S T B codes are sent 16 32767ms 3011 MAWMAcceptable width MAW of M T S function completion signa FIN Parameter Type Word type Default Setting 16 Set the minimum signal width of the valid M T S and B function completion signal FIN 16 II 32767ms Note O oO D Time is set by 8ms if the setting value is not the multiple of 8 it should be carried into the A O multiple of 8 3017 Output time of reset signal RST Value Range 0 255 Default Setting 32 Set the dwell time when the resetting signal RST is output RST signal output time resetting time the parameter value X 16ms 3030 Allowable number of digits for M code MCB Value Range 2 8 Default Setting 2 Set the allowable number of digits for M code 2 8 Value Range 1 5 Default Setting 4 Set the allowable number of digits for S code 1 5 Maximum 5 digits in S code are allowed 3032 Allowable number of digits for T code TCB Value Range 2 8 Default Setting 4 Set the allowable number of digits for T code 2 8 331 II O Oo 9 O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE 11 10 Parameters Related to Display and Editing 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 O E a Ee NEN NEN Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 4 BGD In background
26. U im O e um 9 3 3 e GSE CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual 2 Executing it without actual interference 1 Concave groove less than compensation value Tool nose center path Programmed path Fig 4 54 Executing interference 1 Directions of block B and tool nose radius compensation path are opposite without interference the tools stops and the system alarms 2 Concave channel less than compensation value Tool nose center path A Programmed path Fig 4 55 Executing interference 2 Directions of block B and tool nose radius compensation path are opposite without interference the tools stops and No 25 7 alarms 3 Automatic interference vector clear The system has the automatic interference vector clear function For example when the neighbor three blocks N10 N20 N30 execute the tool radius compensation the section between N10 and N20 creates the vector V1 V2 V3 and V4 and the section between N20 and N30 creates V5 V6 V7 V8 The system executes the interference check to the last vectors in the above two group of vector i e V4 and V5 V4 and V5 are ignored when there is the interference the system checks V3 and V6 and they are ignored when there is the interference the system does V2 and V7 and they are ignored when there is the interference When the system executes the interference check to the last vectors V1 and V8 and there is the interference they cannot
27. am 9 O 5 II O Oo mm 9 ct O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR AUTO reser RELATIVE FHa DATA T Hous UJ 8g 9398 mim p mim min BA mm min LU A1 IUD 5 M2008 rev min a A PAG NAME ORBI MODAL po GN c97 GE Gg GAA G25 G22 G H Go G54 Glad Gila G54 MH SEE Ua WL Fig 3 7 Qv 2 Press Or to select the coordinate axis to be set which makes the axis to be input INPUT 3 Input the relative coordinate axis to be set press to complete setting SE at t p 4 Firstly press and then press or to select the other coordinate axes to set the relative coordinate value 3 1 6 Switching between the mode and the comprehensive message WOOL MC INFO and to switch between the mode and the In position window press comprehensive message the mode window is shown as below 210 Chapter III Windows ME INFO FED OVAL 150 HDL F 4 i Gd G90 Gel k4 G45 bez Gol GEF 54 RAF OVAL IHE PART CHT 11 SPL OYRI SHE RUN TIME Hi Hz TH J06 F 158 CUT TIME 8 08 88 N i 15 dB 3b 1 49 13 MODAL SET REL CLEAR NG INFO SET REL CLEAR PART CNT PART CNT Fig 3 8 Glo Gills Gb4 3 1 7 Clearing workpiece count CLEAR In the position window press PART CNT to clear the currently machining workpiece count and the mode display window is shown in Fig 3 9 NC INFO FED OVAL 1564 HOL F x i
28. de m G70 P80 Q120 a e blocks for finishing path M30 End of block G71 supports continuous grooving machining Direction of the shape in the 2 axis of the level X axis in ZX level is not necessary to monotonous rise or fall and there may be up to 10 groovings which is shown below D O Q Q 3 3 Q Fig 2 39 But external contour along Z must mononously rise or fall and the following contour cannot be machined Monontone change is not observed along the Z axis Fig 2 40 The first tool must be vertical the machining can be executed when the shape along Z changes mononously which is shown below Fig 2 41 The tool retraction should be executed after turning and the retraction amount is specified by R e or No 5133 which is shown below 71 GSE CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual e set by a parameter Execution process sketch v O e 9 3 3 e 4 ul Fig 2 43 Note 1 For grooving X U Z W must be specified and WO is done when Z does not move Note 2 For grooving the finishinig allowance is specified to X direction is invalid for Z direction Note 3 For grooving the tool retraction amount is left to make the tool approach the workpiece Label 25 26 with G1 speed after the current grooving is done to execute the next grooving When the retraction amount is 0 or the left distance is less than retraction amou
29. enc cw Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 0 CNI Interference check for tool nose radius compensation is 0 Performed 1 Not performed 1 CNC During interference check of tool nose radius compensation when the direction of movement after application of offset differs from the programed direction by between 90 and 270 degrees 0 An alarm is issued 1 No alarm is issued 3 CNV Interference check and vector erasure of tool nose radius compensation are 0 Performed 1 Not performed 4 MCR If G41 G42 tool nose radius compensation is specified in MDI mode an alarm is 0 Not raised 1 Raised Note In MDI mode the tool nose radius isn t compensated even it is set by the parameter II O Oo 9 O 5 5 CNF Interference check for tool nose radius compensation when machining the inner side of full circle 0 An alarm is issued 1 No alarm is issued 6 CNS As a step is smaller than the tool radius compensation interference check of tool nose radius compensation 0 An alarm is issed 1 No alarm is issued Limit value that ignore the vector when the tool moves on the outside of the corner during tool nose radius compensation CLV Modification authority Equipment management authority Value Range 0 16383 Metric input 0 001 0 0001 mm Inch input 0 0001 0 00001 Default Setting 0 Set the limit value that ignores the slight move
30. gt TRACKVIEW gt ZX PLANE ABSOLUTE X 24 743 PRAG GI X8 Z38 Foe Fi 57 906 RELAT YE U 24 743 L 57 985 MACHINE x 24 743 Fi 57 985 plane X scale 2 BAB T 0000 E Ecc E EN i 14 53 37 ae m EMULATE ZOOM IN ZOOM a CLEAR RECOVER Fig 8 2 At the bottom of the path screen in the figure it displays the coordinate level of the current path and the magnification ratio of the path graph On the top of the figure it displays the running mode and the state of the current system On the right of the screen it displays the current abosolute coordinate value the relative coordinate value and the mode command The path graph can be operated as below ZOOM IN FUOM QUT 1 Press Or the path graph can be zoomed out or in and the previous ones can be cleared CLEAR 2 Press to clear the screen path RECO ER 3 Press and the path graph can be restored as the original normal position and the previous ones can be cleared 293 II O Oo um 9 r O 5 II O D um w e O GSR C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual ft Ya 4 Repetitively press l i or to move the path graph up down left or right Note 1 The name for each axis can be set by parameter 1020 and the name can be set as different letters and then at the bottom of the path window name of each coordinate level and that of the path coordinat
31. 12 Chapter I Programming Fundamentals The axis word can exist repetitively in the same block and the later value is valid but when No 3403 Bit 6 AD2 is set 1 the alarm occurs U W in other G command has bee specified to others For example in G73 the above conditions 1 4 2 Diameter programming and radius programming Because the workpiece section is the circle in CNC turning controlled program X dimension can use two kind of method diameter programming command and radius programming command 1 The user can select the radius programming or diameter programming which is set by state parameter No 1006 Bit 3 DIAX 2 Parameters related to diameter radius programming State parameter No 1006 BIT3 DIAx O radius programming 1 diameter programming State parameter No 5004 Bit1 ORC O offset value is expressed with diameter 1 offset value is expressed with radius Pay more attention to the conditions in the following table when X uses diameter programming Table 1 4 b related addresses and data to the diameter or radius programming programming programming X coordinate polar Diameter X coordinate value G50 sets X coordinate Diameter Radius value D mm rs ri value G71 G72 G73 Related amount in G73 addresses to Clearance in G71 G72 diameter radius Radius value programming G75 value Clearance to end point in Radius value G74 value Taper in G90 G92 G94 Radius value G76 radius in G02 G03 thr
32. 231 commanded by PLC and controlled by CNC Modify the program or check the CNC PLC Cannot change PLC control Select an axis which is in commanding by PLC control No solution at NRC A point of intersection can t determined for tool nose ES vtusconsenon Mody me eg Not allowed to start amp cancel Start or cancel tool nose radius compensation in Can t change level in NRC The offset level is switched in tool nose radius 232 251 252 53 2 compensation Modify the program Interference in circular block The arc start point or end point coincides with arc 254 center Overcut will occur in tool nose radius compensation Modify the program Interference in G90 or G94 Overcut will occur in tool nose radius compensation in Interference in arc Overcut is possible to occur in tool nose radius Inconsistent of direction of Inconsistent of direction of tool path in NRC and on tool path in NRC and on drawing if exceeds range between 90 and 270 255 56 2 aut drawing degree possibly result in part overcut Modify the program G41 or G42 not allowed in G41 or G42 was specified in MDI mode tool nose 258 MDI mode radius compensation referring to para 5008 4 MCR Modify the program Inner whole circle cutting In inner whole circle cutting overcut possibly occur referring to para 5008 5 CNF Modify the program Undercut in machining step undercut in machining step being less than tool radius being le
33. 253 II O Oo 9 O 5 II O Oo mm 9 et O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR Chapter V Editing and Managing a Program On the program window the program can be created selected rewritten copied and deleted also imported and exported To prevent the programs are rewritten and deleted by accident the program switches are set in GSK988T Before rewriting the program the program switches must be on About the setting of program switches refer to chapter 3 4 2 1 Note Create a file NCPROG in the U disk take the program into the file At the moment the operations in the U disk cataloge are consistent with those of the local catalog in the program page Refer to the operations of local catalog when using the U disk catalog 4 14 Searching Creating Executing and Opening a Program 4 1 4 Searching a program LOCAL ROGRAM 1 Press an to enter PROGRAM window shown in Fig 4 1 EDIT reser PROGRAM gt LOCAL DIRECTORY prog acounts 2 size byte 14 887 485 free byte 21 097 472 name comment s size byte modified time 08826 Omnes 14 887 384 2818 18 84 14 51 18 11 85 15 MDI EE F NEW LOAD OPEN gt Fig 4 1 SERAGH 2 Press pM enter the search window in PROGRAM window INPUT SRA PRG MANE 3 Input the program name which is searched in For example input OK 0005 press and the curso
34. 396 3 4 GSK988T H Appearance DIMENSION ccceecceecceeceeeeeeeceeeceeeaeeeeseteeeteeneeeseeteeeneenaes 397 3 5 Appearance Dimension of GSK988T H Operation panel essssss 397 Abbendix 4 Operallon BISist acaeoeccbaedibi ccm aca a ao bi vieta aca con as AAO 399 XII SK CGSN CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual XIV Chapter 1 Programming Fundamentals I U im O e zm 9 3 3 e PROGRAMMING GSE C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual I U O Q m Q 3 3 Q Chapter Programming Fundamentals Chapter Programming Fundamentals 1 1 GSK988T Introduction GSK988T is exclusive to the slant bed CNC turning machine and turning center with the horizontal and the vertical structures It uses 400MHz high performance process to control 5 feed axes including Cs axis and 2 spindles communicates with the servo unit through GSK CAN serial bus and its matched servo motor uses the high resolution absolute encoder to realize 0 1um position precision which can meet the requirements of high precision turning and milling compound machining It has the network interface to support the remote monitor and file transmission and to meet the network teaching and workshop management GSK988T is the best choice for the slant bed CNC turning and turning center I U O e um 9 3 3 e 6686 4 un nain 188 sa nin HL F
35. Absolute programming or Ke oa i G01 U20 0 W 26 0 Incremental programming or 3 J G01 X40 0 W 26 0 Compound programming or E A G01 U20 0 Z20 0 Compound programming A Start point B End point Fig 2 4 Linear interpolation example Note 1 The tool traverses to the specified position along the linear at the speed specified by F Before the new value is specified each program is not needed to specify Note 2 The actual cutting feedrate is the product between the feedrate override and F command value Note 3 The actual cutting feedrate is limited by max cutting feedrate MFR of No 1422 Note 4 G04 supports the synchronous interpolation of linear axis and rotary axis The command speed includes the speed of rotary axis When there is only the combination speed of linear axis the display value of actual speed does not include the actual speed of rotary axis 2 4 Arc Interpolation G02 G03 Command function The tool traverses along an arc on the specified level Command format G 02 G17 Xp Yp _ R G 03 I eist ex 3 R F COP eT qae ue c S G 02 R G19 Yp Zp F G 03 me ME NE DL Command explanations WE Arc interpolation CW G03 Arc interpolation CCW Xp Movement of X or an axis parallel to it set by No 1022 EN ND Movement of Y or an axis parallel to it set by No 1022 EN Movement of Z or an axis parallel to it set by No 1022 35 C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE
36. Axes without commanding the channel are executed exchanging 5 6 NCI In axis control by the PLC a position check at the time of deceleration is 5 0 Performed 1 Performed 7 NDI When PLC control axis selects the diameter programming under PLC axis control 0 The radius programming specifies the movement distance and the feedrate 1 The diameter programming specifies the movement distance and the feedrate 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 p p p p p Default Setting 0000 0000 1 CDI For PLC axis control when diameter programing is specified for a PLC controlled axis 0 The amount of travel is specified with a radius 1 The amount of travel is specified with a diameter 8010 Selection of the DI DO group for each axis controlled by PLC EPSA Parameter Type Word type Default Setting 0 Value Range 0 4 Each DI DO group controlled by each PLC axis which is shown as the following list NUMERICAL REMARK VALUE 200 The axis is not controlled by PLC 359 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE a DI DO in group A is used EE a DI DO in group B is used DI DO in group C is used DI DO in group D is used Upper limit rate of feed per revolution during PLC axis control EPMF Parameter Type Word type Default Setting 6 Value Range VALID VALUE RANGE IS B IS C Metric machine 6 15000 6 12000 0 1inch min 6 6000 6 4800 idegimin 6 15000 6 12000 Set the upper l
37. Before the cylindrical interpolation the level for cylindrical interpolation must be specified firstly otherwise the alarm occurs the alarm does when G17 G19 is specified to select the level when the cylindrical interpolation is being executed G17 G19 must be specified alone with the rotary axis in the same block otherwise the alarm occurs Note 2 Even if the axis unspecified by the parameter commands the movement value in the cylindrical interpolation mode it does not execute the cylindrical interpolation Note 3 The specified feedrate is the speed of the unfolded cylindrical surface in the cylindrical interpolation mode Note 4 One rotary axis and another linear axis can execute the circular interpolation in the cylindrical interpolation mode But the arc radius can be specified by only R instead of J and K The usage of the radius R is the same that of the circular interpolation The unit of the rotary axis is mm or inch instead of degree For example when the circular interpolation is executed between Z and C axis No 1022 is set to 1 X axis for C axis at the 40 Chapter If G Commands moment the circular interpolation command is G1i8Z C G02 6037 C R For C axis when No 1022 is set to 2 the arc command is G19C Z7 G02 603727 C R Note 5 Any tool radius compensation mode being executed must be cleared before the system enters the cylindrical interpolation mode Start and end the tool offset in t
38. Cannot modify it MONITOR After the oscillograph Value is set is pressed to enter the oscillograph monitor Chapter III Windows MDI ns MESSAGE OSCILLOGRAPH gt MONITOR CHI X ACTUAL POS CH2 X ACTUAL POS l5 Gum 1 Te smwem n 1209 8 18 42 32 Al START CHI CHI CH mE ZOOM IN ZOOM OUT ZOOM IN ZOOM OUT Fig 3 43 In the oscillograph window press START soft key to sample the servo Value When the sampling Value is 0 the waveform is drawn from the center of the left edge to the right edge in the oscillograph which path stands O separate position of monitor Value the positive value of the monitor Value is distributed in the upper of O separate position the negative value is under the 0 separate position Such is the same as the display of the real oscillograph When the sampling is being executed the soft key STOP is pressed to end the sampling For the memory oscillograph STOP is pressed to automatically save the sampling Value of the last 1500 pulses Graph introduction CH1 Channel I wave form CH2 Channel II wave form xc T5 cus Value unit Ts ee TES EE E Chock the historical waveform Value in the oscillograph in memory mode and the sampling time of waveform Value Note 1 When the sampling cycle is 40m the longest time limit of the historical Value recorded by the system is about 1 min If it exceeds the time limit
39. F is the previous modal value in G98 Note 6 When the initial mode is G98 99 and G99 G98 is alone executed after power on the system runs at the speed set by No 1411 2 19 Drilling Boring Fixed Cycle Command Many blocks completes one machining in the course of drilling To simplify programming GSK988T uses one drilling cycle G commands to complete a series of drilling machining C tool compensation vector in the course of drilling boring will temporarily cancel automatically recovers after the command is completed Execution process The drilling fixed cycle is composed of the following 6 operations Operation 1 X Z and C axis requirement in some occasion positions to the hole positon of initial level Operation 2 rapidly traverse to point R Operation 3 drilling cutting feed or interval feed Operation 4 pause at the hole bottom Operation 5 retract tool to the level where point R is 106 Chapter If G Commands Operation 6 rapidly traverse to initial level Operation sequence Tool p Rapid traverse Operation 1 Cutting feed Hole position Starting point C mec E Q Q Initial level I I didi Operation 6 Point R level I Operation 2 g O Q Q 3 3 Q lt Operation 5 Operation 3 Hole bottom level Operation 4 eo Pause at hole bottom Fig 2 68 e Drilling fixed cycle G commands included in Group 10 G Drilling
40. In Auto mode the program returns to the block which is placed in the front when the specified block number behind M99 is repetitive in the program Note 4 In Auto mode the system ignores the line and returns to the beginning of the file to perform the execution when the main program ends in M99 and specifies the line number following P 3 1 8 The Following M commands for standard ladder some functions modified 142 by K parameters M3 spindle rotation CW M4 spindle rotation CCW M5 spindle stop M8 cooling ON M9 spindle OFF M10 tailstock forward M11 tailstock retreat M12 chuck clamping M13 chuck releasing M32 lubricating ON M33 lubricating OFF M41 M44 specify gear change when the automatic gear change is performed M51 M58 the spindle rotates to the one of set eight positions when the spindle eight point orientation function is valid Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation 3 1 9 M Commands defined by standard PLC ladder 1 MOO M01 MO2 M30 M98 M99 is separately specified in one block When it with other M command are specified the system ignores the other M command and the above M command is executed when the above seven M commands are in the same block the first commanded M command is valid 2 When M05 M11 M13 M33 M9 and G commands are in the same block there are two execution methods a The motion commands and M miscellaneous function commands are executed simultaneously b The mi
41. In MPG mode the machine moves continuously through rotating MPG on the operational panel 267 II O Oo um 9 ai O 5 II O Oo D um 9 O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR e 8 5 d And press e Y 9x Gan ec z to select the movement axis When MPG rotates one graduation the minimum distance of the tool traverse is the minimum input increment When MPG rotates one graduation the tool traverse distance can be magnified 10 times or one of two overrides is set by parameters 7113 and 7114 MPG feeding steps 1 Press MPE to access MPG mode WS tt 4 9 lt 2 Press OY 9x X G4 ec G7 to select the axis which is moved by one machine e amp e Dx x0 x00 I11000 3 Press WO Wes W50 W10 to select the override of the machine movement When MPG rotates for one graduation the minimum distance traversed by the machine is the product of the Tux00 Tux1000 minimum input increment multiplying the current override The override set by V 90 W100 can pe rewritten by parameters 7113 and 7114 4 Rotating MPG machine moves along the selection axis MPG rotates for 360 and the amount of the machine movement is that of 100 graduations MPG feeding direction is set by MPG rotation direction Normally MPG CW feeds positively CCW negatively The above is just one example refer to the manual provided by the machine manufacturer during actual operation Note 1
42. Or to complete the input 5 Calculating the offset value The offset value or the wearing value the original offset value or the original wearing value the input numerical value 7 1 4 C input method ol 1 On the setting tool offset window press maos to access the tool offset management window 2 Press E Or E to select the window and press it Or V to select the tool offset number to be rewritten and press Or m to select the axial tool offset Value or the wearing value to be rewritten G INPUT 4 Press to access C input window which is shown as below 285 II O Oo um 9 et O 5 O D um 9 ct O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR DNG ns ABSOLUTE i 154 HE H 1H BAH SETTING TOOL OFFSET Wwe x D 2 HAJ H B PAA B PAA A PAA RELAT WE 154 HAE I 16 BAH H MACHINE B i 15H HE 1H HAH H MEL Rd 3 5 2 BE B nn a na 4 T BOBO ETSE dx39 3 pq 4d 4 d 1d 1j Fig 7 5 C INPUT 5 Input the coordinate axis name to be measured in press OK for in position measuring 6 Then calculate the offset value Press C input button to input the axial number If the cursor is on the tool offset box the tool wearing value remains unchanged write in the tool offset value the relative coordinate value the tool wearing value If the cursor is on the tool wearing
43. Q Q 3 3 Q Fig 2 7 G02 arc interpolation Note 1 One or all of Xp Yp Zp can be omitted When one of them is omitted it means the coordinate values of the starting point and the end point of the axis is consistent when all are omitted it means the two points are in the same position Note 2 When I 0 J 0 K 0 they can be omitted when I J K and R are 0 the system executes the linear movement based on No 3403 Bit5 CIR or alarms Note 3 When l 0 J 0o0orK 0 and the command is executed the tool linearly traverses to the end fent When and J J and K and K are input with R only R is valid I J K are invalid Note 5 When the starting point and the end point are the same one I K are the center value G02 G03 path is a full circle When R is the arc radius it means the circle is 0 degree Note 6 When R is the arc radius it is more than or less than 180 and it is more than 180 arc when R is negative it is less than or equal to 180 when R is positive Note 7 The alarm occurs when the radius difference between the starting point and the end point of arc exceeds the set value except for 0 of No 3410 When the difference does not exceed the setting value or the set value is 0 the tool firstly executes the arc interpolation along the radius value between the arc and the center and traverse linearly to the end point in using R programming R should be equal to or more than the half between the
44. Rapid override FO 25 50 100 real timing tuning Cutting feedrate 0 01 mm min 60000 mm min or 0 01 inch min 4000 inch min G98 feed per minute 0 01 mm rev 500 mm r or 0 01 inch rev 9 99 inch rev G99 feed per revolution Feedrate override 0 15096 16 level real time tuning Interpolation mode linear arc thread polar interpolation and rigid tapping Thread function Thread type constant pitch straight thread taper thread end thread variable pitch straight thread taper thread end thread Thread head 1 99 heads Thread pitch 0 01mm 500mm metric thread or 0 01inch 9 99inch Cinch thread Thread run out thread lenght angle speed can be set Acceleration deceleration function Cutting feed linear exponential Rapid traverse linear Thread cutting linear exponential Initial speed terminal speed and time of acceleration deceleration are set by the parameter Spindle function 2 channel OV 10V analog voltage output 2 channel spindle encode feedback double spindle control Spindle speed spindle speed specified by S or PLC signal its range Orom 20000rpm Spindle override 50 120 8 level real time tuning Spindle constant surface control Rigid tapping Tool function Tool length compensation tool offset 99 groups Tool wear compensation 99 groups of tool wear compensation data Tool nose radius compensation C type Toolsetting mode fixed point toolsetting trial cutting toolsetting re
45. Stored stroke check 3 is checked Coordinate value of stored stroke check 1 in the positive 1320 direction on each axis PC1 NC1 tCoordinate value of stored stroke check 1 in the negative 1321 direction on each axis NC1 Modification authority Equipment management authority Parameter Type Word axis Default Setting No 1320 is 99 999 999 No 1321 is 99 999 999 Value Range 99 999 999 99 999 999 Respectively set the coordinate values of boundaries in positive and negative directions in the mechanical coordinate system in each axis stroke detection 1 in memory type Set the outside of boundary as the restricted area to tools II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 Note 1 The axes specified by diameter are set by diameter value 2 When parameter No 1320 lt parameter No 1321 and the limit is infinite it can not detect the stroke 1 in memory type The stroke limit switching signal in memory type is invalid If the absolute command is specified the coordinate value may overflow the normal movement can not be executed 3 If parameter LMS No 1300 2 is 1 and the stroke limit switching signal in memory type EXLM is also 1 the restricted area is invalid set by the parameter Parameter No 1326 and No 1327 set the restricted area Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the positive direction 1322 on each axis PC2 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the negative direc
46. When G20 G21 switches the current input mode the system must set the beginning of the program and specify in an alone block otherwise the system alarms Note 3 The tool compensation value must input the incremental unit and set it again The tool compensation value can automatically change and cannot be set again when NO 5006 Bit0 is 1 Note 4 It modifies NO 0000 Bit2 INI when the system executes G20 G21 the displayed mode also changes when NO 0000 Bit 2 INI is changed 2 9 Stored Travel Check G22 G23 Command function Create the forbidden area of stored travel limit check 2 and limit the tool traverse range in one area Command format G22 stored travel 2 check is turned on G23 stored travel 2 check is turned off Command explanation G22 stored travel check is turned on G23 stored travel check is turned off Positive coordinates of the stored travel area is set by No 1322 Negative coordinates of the stored travel area is set by No 1323 Limit area figure taking examples of X Y Z limit area are as follows X Y Z are positive coordinates I J K are negative 45 GSE C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual X Y Z I J K Fig 2 12 Note 1 The initial mode of G22 G23 can be set by No 3402 Bit 7 G23 when the system is turned on again Note 2 G22 stored travel check is limited to the stored travel limit check 2 and the detailed is referred to OPERATION Note 3 The data is set by the dista
47. X tool retraction is 0 when P AiD is omitted P Ai 0 99999999 unit 0 0001inch a ak ee Command execution process as Fig 2 50 D The system executes the axial Z cutting feed Ak from the starting point An of axial cutting cycle when Z coordinate of cutting end point is less than that of starting point the system executes Z negative feed otherwise positive feed 2 The system executes the axial Z rapid tool retraction e and its direction is opposite to the feed direction of D 3 The system executes Z cutting feed Ak e again the end point of cutting feed is still in it between starting point A of axial cutting cycle and end point B of axial tool infeed the system executes Z cutting feed Ak e again and then executes 2 after it executes Z cutting feed Ak e again the end point of cutting feed is on B or is not between A and B the system executes Z cutting feed to B and then executes 4 4 Radial X rapid tool retraction Ad radius value to C when X coordinate of B 84 Chapter If G Commands cutting end point is less than that of A starting point the system executes X positive tool retraction otherwise X negative tool retraction Axial Z axial rapid retract tool to Dn No n axial cutting cycle is completed If the current axial cutting cycle is not the last one execute 9 if it is the previous one before the last axial cutting cycle execute 7 Radial X axial rapid tool infeed
48. absolute coordinate of Y end point or one which is parallel to Y V different value of Y absolute coordinate Z Zabsolute coordinates of end point Zp absolute coordinate of Z end point or one which is parallel to Z different value of absolute coordinates between starting point and end point C absolute coordinate of end point different value of C absolute coordinate between end point and starting point A absolute coordinate of end point B absolute coordinate of end point Cutting feedrate y nU ros itis the combination of axes to execute the data provided by G command the later specified address is valid when the absolute address and relative address of one axis are defined and are in the same block to be edit The range for each axis in corresponding parameter is as follows 2 2 Rapid Traverse Positioning G00 Command function In the absolute command the tool rapidly traverses to the position specified by the workpiece coordinate system in the incremental command the tool rapidly traverses to the position which offsets the specified value of the current position Command format GOOIP _ Command explanation IP it is the end point coordinate value of the tool traversing for the absolute command it is the tool traversing distance for the incremental command 33 I U im O ta um 9 3 3 e I U A O Q m Q 3 Q GSE CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User
49. and its direction is opposite to that of tool retraction When the end point of tool infeed is still on it between A and A starting point of last axial cutting cycle after the system executes X tool infeed Ad Ai radius value i e Dn A and then the system executes D start the next axial cutting cycle after the system executes the tool infeed d Ai the end point reaches A or is not between D and A X rapidly traverse to A and executes to start the first axial cutting cycle X rapidly traverse to return to A and G74 is completed I D O Q Q 3 3 Q X axis Z 2 W 2 B Bf e gt gt gt Af H A Ai cU 7 Df Cf Y Bn lt A A gt gt gt i lt o An l AMET eee as He Se E Poss Ses 2 552265222 Dn Ai Cn B2 A l a i X2 e SS o A2 U 2 j X i D2 o W l A Y B1 Ak e v BN e e e 3 Ad tl d AA Akte Ak i AN Aa ee OE E aa a aa en nA C4 D1 Z axis Fig 2 50 G74 path Example Fig 2 51 85 CSR CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE 4X gt gt y Z a O Q 0 3 S Fig 2 51 Program O0007 GO X40 Z5 M3 S500 Start spindle and position to starting point of machining G74 RO 5 Machining cycle G74 X20 Z 20 P3000 Q5000 F50 Z tool
50. feed Hole position Initial level CPD Pause Rapid traverse Starting gt C point specified by Q 4 Rapidly retract to the level where point R is C A 5 Rapid feed to the position which is d from the previous machining level NO 5115 specifies the dry running amount d of deep hole drilling cycle The cutting feed the distance q d is executed q d Repeat the above Step 34 until the tool reaches aginary workpiece the level where the hole bottom is Pause is executed in the time specified by P d 9 Return rapidly to the level where point R is Return rapidly to the initial level D Drilling cycle ends Point R level Infeed and retraction cycle to hole bottom Pause at hole bottom Dihi bottom level Fig 2 70 e Standard drilling cycle Q value is not specified Command format G83 X U C H Z W R P F K M or G87 Z IW C H X U R P F K M Command explanation the command definition is referred to the previous description Standard drilling cycle Operation sequence CP Pause Rapid traverse Execution process 1 The tool rapidly positions to the hole from starting point the hole is determined by the hole position data at the initial level Rapidly position to point R The cutting feed is executed to the hole bottom Pause is executed in the time specified by P 2 8 Z X feed 4 Rapidly retract to the level where point R 8
51. input Inch inch input S G96 ISB ISC 0 20000 m min 0 2000 feet min S G97 ISB ISC 0 20000 r min 0 20000 r min When the machine tool cuts it the workpiece rotates based on the axes of spindle as the center line the cutting point of tool cutting workpiece is a circle motion around the axes of spindle and the instantaneous speed in the circle tangent direction is called the cutting surface for short surface speed There are different surface speed for the different workpiece and tool with different material When the spindle speed controlled by the analog voltage is valid the constant surface control is valid The spindle speed is changed along with the absolute value of X absolute coordinate of programming path in the constant speed control If the absolute value of X absolute coordinate increases the spindle speed reduces and vice versa which make the cutting surface speed as S command value The constant speed control to cut the workpiece makes sure all smooth finish on 103 U A O Q y Q 3 3 Q CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE the surface of workpiece with diameter changing Surface speed spindle speedx X x 1 1000 m min Spindle speed r min X absolute value of X absolute coordinate value diameter value mm TI 3 14 3000 2400 1800 1200 600m min PPM MN Nets m d 200 p HH m 80 200 320 440 520 doo Unit mm diameter Fig 2 66
52. is as follows Table 4 4 Sign symbol of compensation value Lefi compensation Right compensation Left compensation The compensation direction can be changed in compensation mode in special cutting it cannot be changed at starting block and its following one There is no inside and outside cutting when the system changes the compensation direction The following compensation value is supposed to be positive 1 linear linear 2 linear circular Tool nose center path CAD d C Tool nose center path Programmed path Fig 4 38 Linear linear Fig 4 39 Linear circular changing compensation direction changing compensation direction 3 circular linear 4 circular circular 42 Tool nose center path G49 Tool nose center path o D DIS f gt C Programmed path Fig 4 40 circular linear changing Fig 4 41 circular circular changing compensation direction compensation direction 166 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation When the system executes G41 and G42 to change the offset direction between block A and B a vector perpendicular to block B is created from its starting point i Linear Linear Programmed path Tool nose center path S U im O e um 9 3 3 e Programmed path Tool nose center path Fig 4 42 Linear linear no intersection changing compensation direction ii Linear circular Tool nose center path Programmed path Fi
53. is specified in tool nose radius compensation 0 Comoensation is cancelled in movement to the intermidiate position 1 Comoensation is not cancelled in movement to the intermidiate position but cancelled in movement to the reference postion 6 LVC Offset value of tool offset 0 except in MDI mode Tool offset value is 0 Not cleared but held by reset 1 Cleared by reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 E Mee HL d M H 4 9Rer 1 Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 1 ORC Tool offset value 0 Set by the diameter specification Can be set in only the axis under diameter programming 1 Set by the radius specification 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Lo Eoo do do A LPeEL j Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 2 PRC iDirect input of tool offset value 0 Not use a PRC signal 1 Use a PRC signal 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 o To 1 t 1 eee a Modification authority Equipment management authority Way of Validating After power on Default Setting 0000 0000 0 OIM When the unit is switched between the inch and metric systems automatic tool offset value conversation is 0 Not performed 1 Performed 1 TGC When a T code is specified in G50 G04 or G10 0 No alarm occurs 1 Alarm occurs 345 II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Ns cNrF McR cwv
54. of its parallel axis 4 1 5 Compensation direction Specify its direction according to relative position between tool nose and workpiece when executing tool nose radius compensation as Fig 4 12 and Fig 4 13 157 GSE CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual X ex Tool I G41 Tool is left to workpiece from its movement direction G42 Tool is right to workpiece from its movement direction U im O e um 9 3 3 e Fig 4 12 Compensation direction of rear coordinate system 158 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation TX Tool G41 Tool is right to Workpiece from its movement direction G42 Tool is left to workpiece from its movement direction Workpiece U im O e um 9 3 3 e Fig 4 13 Compensation direction of front coordinate system 4 1 6 Cautions Note 1 In initial state when the system is in the tool nose radius compensation cancel mode and the offset compensation number is not 0 in G41 or G42 the system starts creating the tool nose radius compensation offset mode when the offset compensation number is 0 G modal is the G40 state Note 2 In creating or cancelling tool compensation the workpiece machining must not be executed otherwise it causes the overcut or undercut The system takes the created first movement and the last movement command before being cancelled as the cutting command in normally machi
55. ssseeessseeeneenem emere 254 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 Chapter 5 1 0 2 5 3 5 4 Chapter 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 Contents Searching Creating Executing and Opening a Program eseeeeeeeeeee 254 411 Searching a prFoQgFalri sois iukechetete So keen a aeara So ebbe bnt date 254 2E ulaer meree fciptte E oom 254 A Nao Executing a Pogra ac ste heise Drs odas baec aba ode acea Brescia a 255 42 14 Opening a DIOGESNT s odeesi imi desto ineo fee bi Due Picea dic cie ceti dee ten Cotto Doer benef 256 Renaming Outputting Deleting and Arraying Programs Saving a Program as 257 4 2 1 Renaming a DIO QR AI sc o teo esito Eee aae a e a a Ea EEA a aTa 257 42 2 Saving a pr gram AS erene A E Iv MM ED E MM M PUE 258 AZ Doleo a prograNeres an EE E E 259 424 O pu tting a progra Mi T OO ERE E 259 4 2 9 Arraying programs sassoni o mE 260 diting and Rewrting a Programi asistente a E A 260 ASt Editing d Drogi aMesmononenn oen Deu Eaa afr 260 a SZ REVIING a Drogi aN cecair m 261 49 9 Shore Ub Key orena a E a MEIN MEM LI DUE 262 BOCK COIT ibo ox deatur Ac MU DM M IM LEE LUE dE MN C eee mee LED Ur ME I ONE 263 Generating a Block Number seesseessesssesssseseeeenene nnne nnne nna rsen nass assess 263 Background Editing a Program sssssssssssssssssseeeee nennen nnne nnne nnn nnns 263 VM Man sl ODSralolssnite tot eredi veas Udate de due cuia OE CE EDD S
56. the group the tool change signal is output immediately When the number of times is specified the last tool life has reached in the group the CNC resets by M02 or M30 or the tool life counting is commanded and M command is activated the tool change signal is output immediately When LFI No 6804 6 is set to 1 the invalid signal LFCIV can switch the life counting to be valid or invalid When the invalid signal LFCIV of tool life counting is set to 1 and LFCIF in the invalid tool life counting becomes 1 the life counting is valid When the invalid signal LFCIV of tool life counting is set to O and LFCIF in the invalid tool life 150 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation counting becomes 0 the life counting is valid Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation 4 1 Application I 4 1 1 Overview Part program is compiled generally for one point of tool according to a workpiece contour The point is generally regarded as the tool nose A point in an imaginary state there is no imaginary tool nose point in fact and the tool nose radius can be omitted when using the imaginary tool nose point to program or as the center point of tool nose arc as Fig 4 1 Its nose of turning tool is not the imaginary point but one arc owing to the processing and other requirement in the practical machining There is an error between the actual cutting point and the desired cutting point which will cause the over or under cutting affecting the part pr
57. then PakAN As the following Fig 9 5 because the previous selection is X aixs the exported file name is changed into X Ok is pressed i e X axis parameter file is backuped to the U disk MDI reset SYSTEM gt PARAMETER gt SERVO PARAMETER X AXIS No data No data No data 000 E o l o o 0 003 0 004 0 005 0 006 0 007 0 008 0 009 0 o0 o Oti 0 012 0 03 0 014 0 015 0 016 o 017 0 018 0 org 0 020 0 021 o 022 o 023 0 024 0 025 0 026 0 027 o 028 0 09 0 030 0 031 0 032 0 o 035 0l Local name Spr Export name X Spr 10 33 04 beers pense eS Ee Sees Fig 9 5 4 Select other axes repeat the above operations i e the parameter files of other axes are backuped to the U disk 298 Chapter IX U Disk Use 5 After the Step 3 is done the file SERVOPARAM is created in the U disk the previous backuped parameter files are saved in the file as Fig 9 6 S SERVOPARAN THe dB SEW wea IAM BEG ae Qm O B Orr xe Gu Hitik 0 E G SERVOPARAM Ba CJ METLE A RT RRS bead HEHA XfHRUEPEXEAS EL a SS A KB KB RHEE wer aE G O sees D ims g mon FLL 3 SHS 834 FP J EMER Fig 9 6 9 2 2 2 Importing servo parameters 1 Ensure that the file SERVOPARAM has been created in the U disk and the backuped servo parameters
58. 0000 SPECIFY BY 0000 0000 0000 oono HERUM LIFE TOTAL 0 LIFE LEFT 0 10 30 rl Ee green E IEEE CM Fig 3 35 2 Setting tool status In MDI mode move the cursor the tool number press TOOL STATUS SETTING to set the current tool to the skip or cancel skip status as Fig 3 36 23 C GSK CNC GSR GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual MDI reset EN i SETTING gt TOOL SETTING gt TOOLLIFE 0 0O O O LIFE INFO GROUP 01 TOOL NO 0000 LIFE USED 0 SYMBLE x USED ft JUMP 6 IN LIFE GROUP 01 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 2 LIFE LEFT 0 BUD 0002 emos DOT 0000 0000 ooo0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 GROUP 02 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 8 LIFE LEFT 0 0003 0001 0000 0000 100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 GROUP 03 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 0 LIFE LEFT 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ooo ooo 0000 0000 0000 0000 GROUP 04 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 0 LIFE LEFT 0 n 10 14 00 GRP SET DEL GRP TOOL SET DEL TOOL SEARCH Fig 3 36 3 Modifying the tool number In MDI mode move the cursor to the tool number directly input the tool number to modify simultaneously clear the tool life of current tool as Fig 3 37 MDI reset
59. 1 thread cutting depth 1 99999999 1 99999999 x least command G76 3 in G76 thread command unit unit roughing Initial angle 3 of 1 0 99999999 0 99999999 x least command G32 G34 G circle in thread cutting command unit unit 92 53 default to 0 default to 0 times assignment multi thread Relative starting point ISB system ISB system G02 G03 bod CISC system CISC system Relative starting point ISB system CISB system of arc center is in Y 99999 999 99999 999 mm 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch vector 4 CISC system CISC system 1 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 999 99999 999 99999 inch Movement in short axis ISB system ISB system G32 G34 G idm CISC system CISC system Relative starting point ISB system CISB system G02 G03 of arc center is in Z 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch pong ISC system ISC system C1 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 999 99999 999 99999 inch G02 G03 Chapter I Programming Fundamentals Length in long axis ISB system ISB system executed ISC system ISC system C2 0 9999 9999 mm 0 999 99999 inch G32 G34 G 92 Conditional judgement THEN Execution after IF conditional judgment is completed successfully GOTO GO Non conditional skip Cycle judgment DO Start to execute cycle END EN Return to WHILE EQ Equato Judgement logic is used to brackets following IF WHILE lt gt Not equal oe oe than g
60. 1 6 reference position 1 3 5 Machine coordinate system Machine tool coordinate system is a benchmark one used for CNC counting coordinates and a fixed one on the machine tool Machine tool zero is a fixed point which position is specified by zero switch or zero return switch on the machine tool Usually the zero return switch is installed on max stroke in axis positive direction After the system is turned on the reference position return is executed to set machine coordinate system The machine coordinate system is not keeping until the system is turned off Note For the machine with the incremental encoder must execute the reference position return every time to set the machine coordinate system after power off for the machine with the multi coil absolute encoder need not execute the reference position return every time after power off Chapter I Programming Fundamentals 1 3 6 Workpice coordinate system The workpiece coordinate system is a rectangular coordinate system based on the part drawing also called floating coordinate system The workpiece coordinate system is set by the system in advance can be changed by moving its coordinate origin point The established workpiece is valid till it is replaced by a new one The system has preset 6 workpice coordinate systems G54 G59 1 3 7 Local coordinate system When the system compiling programs in the workpiece coordinate system sub coordinate system of workpiece coordinate syste
61. 2 1 0 LL p p p l o Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 0 MPD When a subprogram is executed the main program number is 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed 3216 Increment in sequence numbers inserted automatically INC Modification authority Equipment management authority Value Range 0 9999 Default Setting 10 When the serial number parameter SEQ NO 0000 5 is 1 is auto inserted it is the increment value of the serial number in each block II O Oo 9 O 5 11 11 Parameters Related to Programming 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3401 Lo NK DP Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0001 0 DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal point 0 The least input increment is assumed 1 The unit of mm inch second is assumed 334 Chapter XI Parameters 2 NCK The same sequence number is specified twice or more in a program 0 An alarm is issued 1 Not alarm 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3402 G23 CLR FPM G01 Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0001 0000 0 G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared 0 GOO mode 1 G01 mode 4 FPM When the power is turned on 0 Feed per revolution mode 1 Feed per minute mode 6 CLR Reset button on the MDI panel external reset signal and emergency stop s
62. 2 1 0 E NEM ee MEN S E Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 0 7 0 Disabled JOG feed is performed 1 Enabled RFO When cutting feed rate override is 0 during rapid traverse 0 The machine tool doesn t stop moving 1 The machine tool stop moving TDR Dry run during threading or tapping 0 Enabled 1 Disabled RDR Dry run for rapid traverse 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LI lu L JOV JOG override 0 Enabled 1 Disabled fixed as 10096 II 7 O Oo D um 9 oO 5 MIF Cutting feedrates at speed per minute is specified by F commands in unit of 0 1mm min or 0 01inch min 1 0 001mm min or 0 00001inch min RTV During thread cutting cycle the override of the tool run out is 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ee E Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 1 2 DLF After a reference positon is set manual reference position return performed at O Rapid traverse rate 1 Manual rapid traverse rate 1 Move to the reference position F8A Valid data range for an F command in feed per minute mode O Ranged specified with para MIF No 1403 0 1 Range refering to User Manual SETTING UNITS UNIT IS B Metric input 0 001 60000 0 001 24000 321 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual Inch input 0 00001 2400 0 00001 960 800 a Dry run rate DRR
63. 26 EO runi amt t R R S 2f 16 1 SEQUENCE of program TUN auis oe es Pep o vrl pe e rk vi an a ra e E eve CO ca D veers 2f TOZ Execuuon seduetice O WON s mies aatia vese ipa tad dite orb atia ae fee porta em ipm ds 28 Chapter ll XS ominablds scusseiesbatebonttur bibisti eo dud Se becas ase POE bL Dui seb pd ida Praetor Lube 29 2 SUE ctas E iot uut TUN NL eS ee ea 29 2 1 1 G comimand classilGallOli s deiecit Ey ooa pode de Fina Eee atero tes i Ute nee 29 2 1 2 Omitting Word ITpUl ssessedtaivediticeno nima danas sand Dried ntedue ses bar uuu ni due Qeon uiae ew wc d cite 31 2 1 29 Teelated deHlhillolis xis coe I HE ase bea du re bos ER Ld 33 2 2 Rapid Traverse Positioning GOO eeessessssssssssseeeeee enne 33 2 9 Lifjear Interpolatio ri G0 diced eer en cedo ek n vi d Greve ca ett OE YIN Es ex Cn tllo a er Ec i cats 34 Za Arc Interpolation 02 09 o niv ii c viaa a Exo vaut EE a ce via SR E ea T e dab tede elt a a 35 UR IMBE IECIT 38 2 6 Cylindrical Interpolation 7 1 lseesseessessssessseseeenenen nennen nnne nnn nnn 39 2 Polar Coordinate Interpolation G12 1 G13 1 oo ccc cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeges 43 2 9 Metric ineh Switch 20 32 1 3 2 os eal aa etree yh eal ear isie eee Cara ete 45 29 Stored Travel Check G22 323 2 oen emer EE es ese ee este 45 2 10 SKID Ititerpolatiol 9 zusssetexunagstii eva E pierIS vr iia Mom Mu
64. 5 R CAd must be omitted in blind hole cutting and so there is no distance of tool retraction when the tool cuts to axial end point Relevant definitions Starting point Starting position of axial tool infeed for each axial cutting cycle defining with Z coordinate of A is the same that of starting point A the different value of X coordinate between A and A is Ai The starting point A4 of the first axial cutting cycle is the same as the starting point A and the X coordinate of starting point A of the last axial cutting cycle is the same that of cutting end point End point of Starting position of axial tool infeed for each axial cutting cycle defining with axial tool Ba n 1 2 3 Z coordinate of B is the same that of cutting end point X coordinate infeed of B is the same that of An and the end point B of the last axial tool infeed is the same that of cutting end point End point of End position of radius tool infeed travel of tool infeed is Ad after each axial cutting radius tool cycle reaches the end point of axial tool infeed defining with C n 1 2 3 retraction coordinate of C is the same that of cutting end point and the different value of X 83 CSR CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE coordinate between C and An is Ad End point of End position of axial tool retraction from the end point of radius tool retraction axial cutting defining with D n 1 2 3 Z coordinate of D is the
65. 5135 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 in X axis direction G73XE 5136 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 in Z axis direction G73ZE Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0 Value Range 99 999 999 99 999 999 Set the run out value of G73 combined canned cycle along with X and Z axes direction 5137 Division count in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 G73DC Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 1 Value Range 1 99 999 999 348 Chapter XI Parameters Set the partition times of G73 combined canned cycle 5139 Return in multiple repetitive canned cycle G74 G75 G74G75R Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0 Value Range 0 99 999 999 Set the reversal value of G74 and G75 combined canned cycle Metric input 0 001 0 0001 mm Inch input 0 0001 0 00001 inch 5140 Minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 G76MID Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0 Value Range 0 99 999 999 Set the minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 II Metric input 0 001 0 0001 Inch input 0 0001 0 00001 Finishing allowance of G76 combined canned cycle G76FA Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 500 Value Range 1 99 999 999 Set the finishing al
66. 60000 mm min 0 01 2400 inch min ISC system 1 24000 mm min 0 01 960 inch min F G99 ISB system 0 01 500mm r 0 01 9 99inch r ISC system 0 01 500mm r 0 01 9 99 inch r Reduction formula of feed between per rev and per min Fm F xS Fm feed per min mm min F feed per rev mm r S spindle speed r min F value is reserved after the system executes F command Note 1 G98 G99 are the modal G commands in the same group and only one is valid G98 is the initial state G command and the system defaults the modal can be set by No 3402 Bit4 FPM when the system turns on Note 2 In G99 modal there is the uneven cutting feed rate when the spindle speed is lower than 1 r min there is the follow error in the actual cutting feed rate when there is the swing in the spindle speed To gain the high machining quality it is recommended that the selected spindle speed should be not lower than min speed of spindle servo or converter Note 3 No 1422 set the upper of the cutting feedrate When the actual cutting feedrate the value is multiplied by the override exceeds the specified upper limit it is clamped to the upper limit value Note 4 No 1403 BitO MIF can set the cutting speed unit per minute and the detailed is referred to the parameter explanation Note 5 When G99 instead of F command in G98 mode is commanded F is the previous modal value in G99 In a similar way when G98 instead of F command in G99 mode is commanded
67. 8 Ban 4 T Gagnon i a 15 35 28 TOOL CNC MACRO SERACH MEASURE INPUT C INPUT CLEAR SSMN SETTING Fig 7 1 2 On the window press or to select the window and press or to select the tool offset number to be rewritten and press or to select the axial offset Value the wearing Value or T value of the assumed tool nose direction to be rewritten which is shown as X axis offset of 001 tool offset in the above figure About the relative relation of the assumed tool nose refer to the tool nose radius compensation in the 4 chapter in programming introduction 3 Directly rewrite the tool offset Value the wearing Value or the relative assumed tool nose INPUT direction number T through the numerical keys or the backspace key or press to make the selected tool offset value be input such as X axis offset of 001 tool offset shown as the following figure and then rewrite the tool offset Value the wearing Value or the corresponding assumed tool nose direction number T through pressing the numerical keys or the backspace key 282 Chapter VI Tool Offset and Setting Tools AUTO mr SETTING gt TOOL OFFSET ABSOLUTE r x 13 125 No type A R T 4 7 38 438 ofset GEA A 0AA 8 088 Bal wear B Bn B Bn B Bn ofset B AAA B Bn A pna F D wear B AAA B Dan B AAA pies ms 903 ofset A nnn 8 nnn 8 a
68. 9 99999 999 mm 0 9999 9999 inch Gro and on Peron CISC system CISC system after cutting Tor end 099 9999 nin 0 999 99999 inch point 2 Finishing amount 2 ISB system ISB system G76 in G76 0 0001 9999 9999 inch CISC system CISC system 0 0001 9999 9999 mm 0 00001 999 99999 inch reference position to 2 Commands for macro 1 9999 1 9999 G65 G66 M E IEEE 2 subprogram and times is 1 subprogram call times 19 CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE Line number 0 99999 0 99999 G70 G71 G assignment in G70 72 673 G71 G72 G73 X cycle movement 3 0 99999999 x least 0 99999999 x least command G74 G75 Thread cutting Including 3 parameters Including 3 parameters G76 parameter in G76 Thread finishing times 1 Thread finishing times 1 99 u 99 Thread run out length 00 99 O Thread run out length 00 0 1 pitch R 99 0 1 pitch Angle between two teeth z Angle between two teeth 0 99 3 0 99 um Thread tooth height 1 99999999 x least 1 99999999 x least command G76 3 in G76 command unit unit Line number 0 99999 0 99999 G70 G71 G assignment in G70 712 673 G71 G72 G73 Tool infeed amount 3 0 99999999 x 0 99999999 x least command G74 G75 in Z brokenly infeed in command unit unit G74 G75 Min cutting amount 0 99999999 0 99999999 x least command G76 Q 3 in G76 thread command unit unit roughing
69. AZR to use the deceleration block to execute the reference position return But when the reference position setting function without the block No 1002 Bit1 DLZ is set to 1 or NO 1005 Bit 1 DLZx is set to 1 it is unrelated to AZR setting the system alarms when the system executes G28 before the reference position is created Note 2 Each axis separately moves at the rapid traverse speed from the starting point through the middle point to the reference position i e G00 mode Note 3 G28 or G30 in the tool radius compensation mode automatically cancels the tool radius compensation and automatically recovers it in the next movement command Note 4 Generally G28 is specified in an alone line when the system specifies simultaneously the same parameter address word of G00 or G01 IP is specified to G28 parameter G00 or G01 only change the modal value of the corresponding G groups and does not execute the motion 2 12 2 2 3 4 reference position return G30 Command function move at the rapidly traverse speed to the middle point specified IP_ and then to the 2 3 and 4 reference position Command format G30 P2 IP return to the 2 reference position G30 P3 IP_ return to the 3 reference position G30 P4 IP J return to the 4 reference position Command explanation G30 is non modal IP it is the middle point coordinates is specified by the absolute value and incremental value Omit one or all command address for each axis
70. CLR NO 3402 6 Feedrate per rev Null Current value mo ome eoo ee Pitch Null Current Current value Move ES Delay ime w p NS X GSE X absolute coordinate Current L value value value Y absolute coordinate Current Current value value value Z absolute coordinate Current Yes Current value pee an J C absolute coordinate Current Current value Se pu pe p X relative coordinate La value value U allowance in Null Null ae Cutting depth in G71 Parameter Parameter Parameter ES m DEB 0m value Z relative coordinate udi value ERERE U O e um 9 3 3 e 1 allowance Null mem Cutting depth in G72 Parameter Parameter Parameter value value value Current value Polar coordinate interpolation Taper G90 G92 G94 Current value and thread taper is retraction in G71 Parameter Parameter n me value value Ve times Parameter Parameter Parameter value value value E in G74 G75 Parameter Parameter Parameter value value Clearance to end No Null point in G74 G75 24 Chapter I Programming Fundamentals Parameter value Finishing cutting Parameter Parameter amount in G76 value EN T NENNEN G30 returning to No n Null No Null reference position Macro program Null Alarm No Null number subprogram subprogram call times Line assignment in Null Alarm No Null E X cycle movement in Null No Null EC Thread cutting in G76
71. Default Setting 0000 0000 3 DPA In the graphic display interface the current position displays 0 Display the actual position including the tool compensation and offset 1 Display the programming position excluding the tool compensation and offset 11 21 Parameters Related to Run Hour and Parts Count Display 77 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 6700 o o Lol 1 PRT PCM Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 0 PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts 0 MO2 or M30 or M code specified by para No 6710 1 Only M code specified by para No 6710 1 PRT Upon reset signal PRTSF F62 7 which indicates that a required number of parts has been reached 0 Turned off 1 Not turned off number of machined parts MPC Value Range 0 9999 Default Setting 0 The machine program executes M codes set by the parameter total quantity of the processing parts and quantity of the processing parts plus 1 respectively Note When the setting value is 0 it is invalid M00 can t count the parts And it can t be set as 98 and 99 neither 6713 Number of required parts RPM Value Range 0 9 999 Default Setting 0 355 II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSR When the quantity of the processing parts equals to that of the parts required being processed the signal PRTSF F62
72. HHBBBB1A 239 98 Cut the end face HHBHBBHT11 1 33 Cut the 39 98 outer circle ggaBH12 A486 Cut the end face uggaBdi13 W 3H Cut the P46 outer circle G3 466 W286 R26 Cut the convex arc Fig 6 5 3 Press to select DNC mode 276 Chapter VI Auto Operation DNC e ABSOLUTE A 3 1 82 f n PAG DATA a E mmm itn 1AF mm min A rev min JAJ Z 4 08 PAG NAME DNC MC INFO FED OVAL HAP OVA SPL CVA JOG F 1564 CUT TIME Bel Be BE 1504 F 4l PART CNT 11141288 HUM TIME HB BB He Br HR 14 25 41 REL MAC ALL MODAL St SREE Di Fig 6 6 4 Press m the program automatically starts and the cycle start indicator is on After automatic running ends the cycle start indicator is off D N C HUN RAPID TRAVERSE ABSOLUTE PAG DATA T 4101 A 31 827 F 41 mm min 1000 mim min 5385 5n s aa mm a00 rev min PRG NAME DNC MC INFO E FED OVAL 150 HDL F x 5 Stop durin Press AAP OVAL Te PAAT CNT 1114129 GM x13f 7 NAO GU X16 Gl 7 79 1533 98 J G F 5H GUT TIME AES Ep Bp 14 25 41 peapa ic epe ij Fig 6 7 SP OVAL SHE RUM TIME BB BH HH running responds as below a When the machine is running the feeding decelerates till stopping the feed hold indicator is on while the cycle start indicator is off The machine 211 II O Oo um 9 et O
73. In G96 the spindle speed is changed along with the absolute value of programming path X absolute coordinate value in the course of cutting feed interpolation but it is not changed in G00 because there is no actual cutting and is counted based on the surface speed of end point in the program block In G96 Z coordinates axis of workpiece system must consist with the axes of spindle rotary axis of workpiece otherwise there is different between the actual surface speed and the defined one When the constant surface speed is valid G50 S_ can limit max spindle speed r min The actual spindle speed is the limit value of max speed when the spindle speed counted by the surface speed and X coordinate value is more than the max spindle speed set by G50 S After the system powers on max spindle speed limit value is not defined and its function is invalid Max spindle speed limit value defined by G50 S is reserved before it is defined again and its function is valid in G96 Max spindle speed defined by G50 S is invalid in G97 but its limit value is reserved Note 1 G96 G97 are modal in the same group and one of them is valid in the same time G97 is initial word and is valid after the system is turned on Note 2 In G96 S value commanded is reserved in G97 there is no new S is commanded and the S value in the last G96 state is recovered to the current valid surface speed after the system returns to G96 state the system outputs the least su
74. In JOG mode JHD MPG is valid In JOG mode whether MPG can be used which is set by parameter JHD the 0 bit of 7100 when parameter JHD the 0 bit of 7100 is set as 1 MPG feeding and increment feeding are both valid The corresponding relation is shown as the following list JHD 1 JOG mode JOG mode MPG mode WGRwmp 0 3 WeSRedng x Increment feeding DERE x O O Valid x Invalid Note 2 The commands of MPG exceed the rapid traverse speed HPT The parameter HPT the 4th bit of 7100 is stipulated as below Setting to 0 When the feedrate is limited by the rapid traverse speed the impulse value exceeding the rapid traverse speed is invalid The amount of machine movement doesn t comply with MPG graduation Setting to 1 The feedrate is limited by the rapid traverse speed and the impulse value exceeding the rapid traverse speed is valid but it is accumulated in CNC Although MPG isn t rotated the machine can t stop After MPG stops the machine still moves due to the effect of CNC pulse The allowable value of the memory capacity is set by parameter 7117 then the part exceeding the memory capacity is ignored Note 3 Axial movement direction and MPG rotation direction Parameter HNGx the 0 bit of 7102 switches into MPG direction which the tool traverses along the axis and it corresponds to MPG rotation direction 268 Chapter V Manual Operation Note 4 Quantity of MPG The maximum 2 manual pul
75. In auto tool compensation function G36 G37 within asserted the area specified by parameter Measurement 051 position reach signal XAE or EAE is not turned on This is due to a setting or operator error Offset number not found in Auto tool compensation G36 G37 was specified 0 gar TA OAS tr te peat os T code not allowed in G37 T code and auto tool a G36 G37 was os fees n G37 specified in the same block Modify the program Illegal axis command in G37 In auto tool compensation function G36 G37 an 054 invalid axis is specified or the command is incremental Modify the program G37 function is disabled Auto tool compensation function is disabled G36 055 G37 with reference to PARA 6240 7 IGA Modify the program G31 not allowed in G99 G31 SKIP cutting is commanded in the per revolution not REG in tool In d nose radius compensation mode specify skip 059 sus compereten moge cung conan Mos Me pega Illegal P command in G10 In setting an offset amount by G10 the offset number CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE No Message Coe BEEN XPQ 3 5 3 3 is excessive or not specified Modify the program Illegal offset value G10 In setting an offset amount by G10 the offset value 062 specified by P is excessive or not specified Modify the program Format error in G10 or L50 Any of _ the following occurs at the programmable parameter
76. Manual Command path B C Point C is the middle point from point A to point B by rapid traverse Fig 2 1 rapid traverse positioning Execution process Program Diameter programming G00 X40 0 Z56 0 Absolute programming or G00 U60 0 W 36 0 Incremental programming or G00 X40 0 W 36 0 Compound programming or G00 U60 0 Z56 0 Compound programming Fig 2 2 positioning example Note 1 The rapid traverse speed G00 is set in No 1420 and is not related to the commanded feedrate F value in the block Note 2 Whether the initial mode of Group 01 when power on is G00 or G01 is determined by No 3402 Bit0 G01 2 3 Linear Interpolation G01 Command function the tool executes the linear traverse Command format G01 IP F itcan be omitted to G1 Command explanation IP it is the end point coordinate value of tool traversing for the absolute command it is the tool traversing distance for the incremental command F itis the feedrate of the tool and its ranges is shown below Feedmode Metric mm input Inch inch input G98 ISB system 1 60000 mm min 0 01 2400 inch min ISCsystem 1 24000 mm min 0 01 960 inch min G99 ISB system 0 01 500mm r 0 01 9 99inch r ISC system 0 01 500mm r 0 01 9 99 inch r 34 Chapter If G Commands Command path B A Fig 2 3 linear interpolation Execution process JU O XA Co 46 0 Programming Diameter programming t 20 0 G01 X40 0 Z20 0 F500
77. PLC address CN61 1 SAGT Protection door detection signal cwiz 331 Reed es 3 0G msg CN61 4 X0 3 DEC1 The 1 axis deceleration signal CN61 5 X0 4 DITW Tailstock control signal CN61 6 X0 5 ESP Emergency stop input signal address CN61 7 PRES Pressure detection signal EB Tool position signal 5 tool post pre indexing signal CN61 8 X0 7 T05 CN ms Yantai AK31 Sensor E Liuxin Tool Post nan v lt Tool position signal 6 tool post pre indexing signal CN61 9 X1 0 T06 enero xo To Yantai AK31 Sensor F Liuxin Tool Post Tool iti ignal 7 h ignal CN61 10 X14 TO7 ool position signa s post overheat signa Yantai AK31 CN61 11 Tool position signal 8 EE 381 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE DBPin Pin PLC address address Function defined by standard PLC address d CN61 12 DEC3 The 3 axis deceleration signal CN61 14 M411 The 1 gear stage in position r 1 CN61 15 O M42 The The 2 gear stage in position The 2 gear stage in position stage in position CN61 16 BN position signal 1 T1 Yantai AK31 Sensor A Liuxin Tool Post Tool position signal 2 T2 Yantai AK31 CN61 29 Sensor B Liuxin Tool Post Sensor A Liuxin Tool Post mr E CN61 30 ool position signa is Yantai AK31 Sensor C Liuxin Tool Post CN61 31 X22 T04 Es position signa d Yantai AK31 Sensor D Liuxin Tool Post nd vi l l Fixed CN61 32
78. Parameter Parameter Yes Parameter ee o vane fe Thread tooth height me IM i E I Line assignment T G70 G71 G72 G73 Hulwiweiboid Z broken tool infeed Null amount in G74 G75 Least cutting amount Parameter Parameter Parameter in G76 roughing value alue value 1 thread cutting Null Alarm Null depth in G76 thread roughing 1 circle start angle in thread cutting Check offset i spindle fluctuation parameter check cannot be modified mE i No un value corresponding to starting point X calculation direction Null Null NO Null in cancelling radius compensation Y vector of circle No Current value center corresponding to Y calculation direction Null Null No Null in cancelling radius compensation Z vector of circle 0 Current value 25 CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual to starting point Pitch increment in Null Yes Current value variable pitch thread cutting GSE X travel lower limit Null am mo eem value Z calculation direction Null uu HN in cancelling radius compensation 1 5 4 Block number Format N AAAAA AAAAA is 5 digit integer 00001 99999 and its leading zero can be omitted 1 Can or not input a block number in one block must input block number in target block in which program skips when many block number are input in one block only the last block number is valid 2 Block number can be placed any position of block but it is sugg
79. Press RESET to cancel alarm or power on again failure Memory failure which needs repair or power on again 920 Too many alarm and info The number of alarm exceeds 14 or number of info exceeds 20 Press RESET to cancel alarm and power on again or refer to manufacturer for repair EB Undefined alarm No Missing alarm content for alarm No Format error in alarm Part of data in alarm content and operation info was content incorrect 950 Pulse error FPGA FPGA received pulse does not coincide with that received from system system has sent Data abort Please contact us 1 8 Communication prompt on the operation panel Communication between the panel and the system is mistaken Please check the connection between them Edit keyboard input is mistaken Please restart 4201 Edit keyboard error ees ye the system 1 9 GSK CAN Communication Prompts GSK CAN slave GSK CAN extended configuration function unusable method error Communication on the panel error Unused at present JEUNE The IO unit control function in GSK CAN l Unused at present HA is unusable communication Extended slave is missing in The extended axis function GSK CAN is unusable Unused at present communication Please check whether the communication interface is During GSK CAN communication if communication loose the power supply is error continuously occurs in all error grounded properly or the slaves this prompt
80. Q CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE gt Between arc interpolation and linear interpolation gt Between arc interpolation and arc interpolation Command format C_ chamfering R_ corning R Command explanation one chamfering block or corning R block is inserted when the above format is specified at the end of the specified linear interpolation G01 or arc interpolation G02 G02 block Note The system can continuously specify more than two chamfering blocks and corning R blocks Incremental Metric input mm Inch input inch system C ISB system 99999 999 99999 999 mm 99999 999 99999 999 inch ISC system 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch ISB system 99999 999 99999 999 mm 99999 999 9999 9999 inch ISC system 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 9999 9999 999 99999 inch Chamfering The numerical value following C specifies the distance from chamfering starting point to end point of the imaginary cornering intersection which is defined to the imaginary existing cornering when the chamfering is not executed LU N10 G01 U50 C10 N20 W 50 M30 ot Block of inserted chamfering Imaginary cornering point Fig 2 79 Corning R The numerical value following R specifies corning R radius N10 G01 U50 R15 N20 W 50 M30 Arc center of corner R Non one T Ra E Block of inserted chamfering R Fig 2 80 124 Chapter If G Commands Note 1 Even
81. Q Initial level Point R level Hole position Starting point l l IS Return rapidly to the initial level Drilling cycle ends Imaginary workpiece Pause at hole bottom ole bottom level Fig 2 71 110 Chapter If G Commands Program example Suppose the current system is ISB the minimum input unit is 0 001mm and RTR is set to 1 98 feed mode per minute M51 activate C indexing suppose M51 is for activating C indexing _ M3 1500 tool starts rotation GO X50 CO Z 4 X and C axis position to the starting point 3 G83 X100 Z 50 R4 Q5000 P3000 Starting point is X50 CO hole position is S F200 X100 CO E point R is X100 Z 4 hole position is X100 z Z 50 the cutting amount every time is 5mm pause time is 3s the block is for deep hole drilling according to Q value and RTR C120 position to C120 to drilling the 2 point C240 position to C240 to drilling the 3 point G80 M05 the fixed cycle is cancelled the tool stops rotation M50 C axis indexing closes suppose M50 is for closing C axis indexing M30 end of program 2 19 2 End Boring CycleG85 Side Boring Cycle G89 The cycle is used for executing boring operation Command format G85 X U _ C H Z W R P F K M_ or G89Z W C H XU R P F K M Command definition It is the hole position data and is valid only in the specified block ZW or x X U _ It specifies the coordinate value of hole bottom by using absolut
82. R level to the hole bottom by using incremental value and it is valid in the specified block It is the distance from the initial level to point R and is specified by I U O Q Q 3 3 Q radius value with direction Its unit and range is shown below Hole bottom pause time Unit of ISB system is 1ms and ISC is 0 1ms Cutting amount every time is specified by radius value Its unit and range are shown below When Q value is specified G84 G88 selects the high speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle or deep hole rigid tapping cycle by PCP No 500 5 Q value is not specified or Q value is 0 the standard rigid tapping cycle is selected LN F Cutting feed speed Execution times of program it is used when it is needed M command for clamping C axis itis used when it is needed Metric input mm Inch input inch system Tapping feed axis specifies X or Z axis according to G84 G88 G84 specifies Z to be the tapping axis and G88 specifies X The spindle is selected according to relevant G signals it is related to PLC programs Cutting feedrate F i e feedrate of tapping axis and spindle speed S confirm the thread lead Thread lead formula in per minute mode cutting feedrate F spindle speed S Thread lead formula in per rotation mode cutting feedrate F In rigid tapping mode three machining modes standard rigid tapping cycle high speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle and deep hole rigid tapping c
83. Rapid traverse Cutting feed A Starting point end point B Cutting starting point C Cutting end point Fig 2 28 61 CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE X axis I UJ 7 a bo Fig 2 29 5 A O Q y Q 3 3 Q Cutting path Relative position between cutting end point and starting point with U W R and tool path of U W R with different sign symbols are as Fig 2 28 1 U gt 0 W lt 0 R gt 0 2 U lt 0 W lt 0 R lt 0O 3 U gt 0 W gt 0 R lt 0 R s U 2 4 U lt 0 W gt 0 R gt 0 R lt U 2 Fig 2 30 62 Chapter If G Commands Example Fig 2 29 rod 0125x110 D C P120 I p60 SSS OEE Sa SS Sa SSeS Z axis v A O ta 9 3 3 e Program Program O0002 M3 S300 GO X130 Z3 G90 X120 Z 110 F200 AD cut 120 X110 Z 30 X100 X90 X80 AB 6 times cutting cycle 60 increment of 10mm X70 X60 GO X120 Z 30 G90 X120 Z 44 R 7 5 F150 Z 56 R 15 Z 68 R 22 5 BC 4 times taper cutting Z 80 R 30 M30 2 14 2 Radial cutting cycle G94 Command function From starting point the cutting cycle of cylindrical surface or taper surface is completed by radial feeding X and axial Z or X and Z cutting Command format G94 X U Z W F_ face cutting G94 X U __Z W __ R_ F _ taper face cutting Command specifications G94 is modal X_ Z Coordinate of cutting end point C point in the figure bel
84. T F G CODE HMACRO GSK988T is a new product developed for tilt CNC lathe and tur ning center adopts microprocessor of 4 MHz high performance an d can control 5 feeding axes including C axis 2 analog spindle s real time communication through GSKLink series bus bar and ser vo unit the related servo motor is equipped with encoder of abos olute type in high definition reaches the position precision of Alum level and satisfies the combined processing requirements of turning and milling in high precision GSK988T is equipped wit h internet interface supports remote monitor and files transmitt ing and satisfies the requirements of internet education and wor page 1 3 11 82 23 PROGRAM NG Air NN NN RN o Fig 3 51 zl Command formula GAI IP F it can be omitted as Gl Command function The tool traverses to the commanded positio n along the straight line at the feed rate specified by F and ch ange mode value of G code in group Hl to GBl Command remark GHI is mode G command IP When absolute value commands it is the coordinate value of the finishing point position increment value commands it is the tool traverse distance The span of each axis command value is same as GHB The basic axis commands can t share the same block with its parallel axis commands otherwise it alarms page 4 11 83 89 OPERATIO N PROGRAM NG EIL NN RN Fig 3 52
85. Turning CNC System User Manual GSE Parameter 1222 Each axis origin offset value of work piece coordinate system 2 G55 Parameter 1223 Each axis origin offset value of work piece coordinate system 3 G56 Parameter 1224 Each axis origin offset value of work piece coordinate system 4 G57 Parameter 1225 Each axis origin offset value of work piece coordinate system 5 G58 Parameter 1226 Each axis origin offset value of work piece coordinate system 6 G59 3 4 2 3 Setting system time window SETTING TIME Press to access setting window in CNC setting window press to access setting system time window which is shown as below AUTO ms SETTING CNG TIME SETTING 2A g 3 84 13 38 4B LIMIT DATE 2010 01 01 88 88 BIB DISABLED TIME DATE Fig 3 42 CHANGE On the time setting page press to switch among the date month year and time boxes in cycle CHANGE Setting month press to switch into the month box and it changes into green press CHANGE Q V l lt and 5 to change the month press to switch into the other box and the month setting completes CHANGE Setting year press to switch into the year box and it changes into green 4 1 I O gt CHANGE press and to change the year press to switch into the other box and the year setting completes CHANGE ir Setting time press to switch into the time box and it changes into green press l CONF FM V im Or E to select th
86. Turning CNC System User Manual Press NC onthe machine panel access DNC mode after PC is ready press cycle start key and start the program for DNC processing About the detailed method refer to the introduction of DNC communication software 1 Communication software GSKComm selects and opens the machine program 00000 NcProg File Edit View Tool Help D cm ll 888858881 BBHT DHC example gadgBBag2 GH x158 256 Position to the safety height for tool change HHBBHRAS H12 Clamp the chuck ddHBBBBBh H3 SSHH Start the spindle with speed 866 HHHBHBH5 Me Turn on the cooling dggdduBHBB6 THTHT Change for the Ho 1 tool dggBBHBHz BH xs136 22 Approach the part gaBHBHB GH x16 Approach to the end Face of the part ga BBBdOo G1 2 23 Cut the 16 outer circle ddggBBHdT1H 5439 98 Cut the end face ddBBHBT11 W 33 Cut the 139 98 outer circle pHi X4 Cut the end face dggBHBi13 Wea Cut the P46 outer circle G3 480 U 2H8 R28 Cut the convex arc II Fig 6 4 O Oo um 9 ct O 5 File Edit View Ce a i Ctrl EN 9 gagga 00 gggagBBgH GU r Setup p the safety height for tool change agaggndd3 MIL vcunp vesc Luck dBBBBBBA HS SSHHB Start the spindle with speed 800 BgmnmBBaBai5 H8 Turn on the cooling ugBHBHH6 TUTHT Change For the Ho 1 tool dgBBBBBH GA A136 22 Approach the part ggaBBHS GH X16 Approach to the end face of the part HdaHBBHBO G1 2 23 Cut the 16 outer circle
87. actual operation 5 2 Manual Feed In Manual mode press the feeding axes and direction selection switches on the machine panel the machine moves along the selected axis Each axis manually continuous feedrate is set by parameter 1423 and each axis manual continuous feedrate can be adjusted through manual continuous feedrate override dial AAAA Feedrate dial Uv Press RAPID ang the machine moves at the rapid traverse speed set by 1424 parameter no matter where is JOG feedrate override dial and the function is called the manual rapid traverse 265 II O Oo D um 9 O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE During the manual operation many axes can move at the same time JOG feed steps e 1 Press MANUAL and it is one of mode selection switches Eun Ae lt a Vv gt o s RAPID 2 Press feeding axis and v B the machine moves along the corresponding axis in the corresponding direction When the switch is pressed the machine moves at the feedrate set by parameter 1423 once the switch is released the machine stops feeding 3 Manual continuous feedrate can be adjusted through the manual continuous feedrate override dial Uv 4 f the feeding axis the direction selection switch and RAPID are pressed meanwhile the e JUX1 ILX10 TL1X100 TL1X1000 machine moves at the rapid traverse speed and WFO W25 W50 W100 can be selected and va
88. address R and whether there are X U and P CAD words or not in blocks can distinguish them 86 Chapter If G Commands 3 The tool can stop in Auto mode and traverse in Manual mode when G75 is executed but the tool must return to the position before executing in Manual mode when G75 is executed again otherwise the following path will be wrong 4 When the system is executing the single block the program pauses after the system has executed end point of current path 5 RCAd must be omitted in grooving and so there is no travel of tool retraction when the tool cuts to radial cutting end point Relevant definitions Starting point of radial cutting cycle End point of radial tool infeed End point of axial tool retraction End point of radial cutting cycle Cutting end point Z absolute coordinate value of cutting end point B unit mm Different value of Z absolute coordinate between cutting end point B and starting point P Ai indi R Ad It is the travel of axial Z tool retraction after cutting to end point of radial 87 Starting position of axial tool infeed for each radial cutting cycle defined by A n 1 2 3 X coordinate of A is the same that of starting point A the different value of X coordinate between A and A44 is Ak The starting point A4 of the first radial cutting cycle is the same as the starting point A and Z starting point A of the last axial cutting cycle is
89. allowance R d out Finishing allowance R d is less than least increment in of range in G76 G76 Modify the program Machining start position is between thread beginning taper thread cutting in G76 point and end point in G76 Modify the program by P in G76 program Thread height is less than Thread height is less than Finishing allowance or Finishing allowance or minimum cutting depth in G76 Modify the program m cutting depth in Number followed address Q Depth of cut in 1st cut Q was out of range or not is out of range in G76 specified Modify the program Illegal S code command in In rigid tapping an S value is out of range or not rigid tapping specified Modify the program Modify the program G98 amp G99 modal Modify the program Program miss at rigid Position for rigid M code and S command is incorrect in EM 5 rigid tapping Modify the program Illegal axis operation in rigid In rigid tapping an axis movement is specified between 184 tapping the rigid M code block and G84 block Modify the 168 program The spindle of rigid taping is The spindle of rigid taping is not selected or the 185 not selected specified axis cannot be used to tapping Modify the program tapping in non G18 level Modify the program Modify the program Unusable data specified in Specify other M code or S code between rigid tapping 369 CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual a tapping
90. are saved to the file as Fig 9 6 2 Insert the U disk and confirm the system has read the U disk 3 In the servo parameter management page select the axis which parameters will be imported gt mc For X axis press then M fi and E box pops up to select the correct parameter file like X aixs in Fig 9 7 press and the parameters in the U disk are imported to the system modification time 2D11 12 2b 10 32 58 Fig 9 7 4 After the importing is succeeded the valid parameter is selected as Fig 9 8 press EFF PAR then press FARA to use the imported parameter a dialoge box pops up as Fig 9 8 CANCEL press to complete the operation or press to cancel it 299 II O Oo um 9 O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR IMPORT FARAN Use imported param CANCEL Cancel operation GAVE SERVO PARAMETERS The parameters saved last time will be automatically covered whether ta continue saving data to non volatile storage area liL d LOL Fig 9 9 5 Repeat the previous operations i e the parameter files of other axes can be imported to the system II Note 1 After servo parameters of all axes are imported the machine must be turned on again to use Note 2 Exporting and importing can be done in MDI mode with the authority more than Level 3 O Oo um 9 ct O 5 300 Chapter X Processing Examples Chapter X Processi
91. axis cannot be specified in G84 G88 blocks in the mode G84X CZR PFK M295 X C G80 3 G84 G88 is used for rigid tapping BitO of No 5200 is set to 1 in the mode G84 G88 is used for only the rigid tapping mode instead of the common tapping mode G84X C ZR PFKM X C G80 M29 the parameter sets other M command to specify it is for rigid tapping the system alarms when S is specified between M29 and G84 G88 blocks or the axis movement command is specified the system alarms when M39 is specified repetitively in tapping cycle M29 cannot be specified repetitively M29 Sxxxx commands rigid tapping mode The corresponding switch is done after PLC receives M29 and the spindle stops rotation The spindle output is equivalent to SO output in M29 113 I D O Q Q 3 3 Q CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual 2 20 2 End Rigid Tapping Cycle G84 Side Rigid Tapping Cycle G88 Command function When the spindle is controlled in rigid mode it is taken as the servo motor the rigid tapping cycle is executed Command format G84 X U _C H Z W R Q P F K M or G88 Z W _ C H X U RQ P F KM Command explanation X CoZ C It is the hole position data and is valid only in the specified block the hole position data can specify other valid axes except for X Z C Ji Z W _ or X U It specifies the coordinate value of hole bottom by using absolute coordinate or specifies the distance from
92. be ignored the tool stops movement and the system alarms Based on the above process the system executes the interference check and has checked the vector which is not interfered the followings are not check and the tool runs according to the path of the first group vector which does not create the interference When the last group of vector creates the vector they cannot be ignored the tool stops movement and No 25 alarms 170 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation Executed tool nose Tool nose center path center path o o I l l U im O e um 9 3 3 e Programmed path N20 Fig 4 56 interference vector clear Note 1 NO 5008 Bit 0 CND can set whether the interference check is executed in tool nose radius compensation mode Note 2 NO 5008 Bit 1 CNC can set whether the system alarms when the difference 90 270 between the movement direction and offset direction Note 3 NO 5008 Bit 3 CNV can set whether the system executes the interference check and the vector clear 4 2 6 Commands for canceling compensation vector temporarily In compensation mode when the system specifies G28 G30 G50 G52 G32 G34 the fixed cycle multi cycle drilling cycle command the compensation vector is cancelled temporarily and is automatically resumed after executing the commands At the moment the compensation is cancelled temporarily and the tool directly moves from i
93. can stop the automatic run and manual traverse but return to the position before manual traversing when G71 is executed again otherwise the following path will be wrong 8 When the system is executing the feed hold or single block the program pauses after the system has executed end point of current path 9 Ad Au are specified by the same U and different with or without being specified P Q commands 10 G71 cannot be executed in MDI otherwise the system alarms Relevant definitions Finishing As Fig 2 34 Part 3 of G71 ns nf block defines the finishing path and the starting point of finishing path starting point of ns block is the same these of starting point and end point of G71 called A point the first block of finishing path ns block is used to X rapid traversing or tool infeed and the end point of finishing path is called to B point the end point of finishing path end point of nf block is called to C point The finishing path is A 5B C 67 CSR CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE Roughing The finishing path is the one after offsetting the finishing allowance Au Aw and is the path contour formed by executing G71 A B C point of finishing path after offset corresponds separately to A B C point of roughing path and the final continuous cutting path of G71 is B C point It is each travel radius value of X tool infeed in roughing without sign symbols and the direction of tool inf
94. coordinate system uses G55 G59 to switch to other workpiece coordinate system when the system resets No 1201 Bit 7 WZR determines whether the system returns to G54 workpiece coordinate system when No 3402 Bit 6 CLR is set to 1 the modal returns to G54 2 13 4 Local coordinate system setting G52 To be convenient to programming the sub coordinate system to set the workpiece coordinate system is called the local coordinate system Command format G52 IP__ set the local coordinate system G52 IPO cancel the local coordinate system IPO means the absolute value for each axis adds one zero 57 GSE CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Command function commanding G52 in the program can set the local coordinate system in the workpiece coordinate system G54 G59 The origin of the local coordinate system can set in the position specified by IP in the workpiece coordinate system The corresponding relationship is as Fig 2 26 Local coordinate system Workpiece coordinate system v a O e 9 3 3 e Fig 2 26 Command explanation G52 is non modal IP when IP is absolute command the system specifies the absolute coordinate value of origin of local coordinate system in the workpiece coordinate system when IP is the incremental command the system specifies the relative coordinate value of the origin of the local coordinate system related to the one of the workpiece coordinate system Once
95. cutting cycle G94 radial cutting cycle G92 thread cutting fixed cycle command is described in Thread Function 2 14 1 Axial cutting cycle G90 Command function From starting point the cutting cycle of cylindrical surface or taper 60 Chapter If G Commands surface is completed by radial feeding X and axial Z or X and Z cutting Command format G90 X U Z WD _ F_ Coylinder cutting G90 X UD _ Z W R F taper cutting Command specifications G90 is modal Coordinates of longitudinal cutting C point in the figure below Movement to end point C point in the figure below of longitudinal cutting Cutingfeedrate J feedrate a aes VENE I Taper radius value with direction range referred to the table below I v A O ta 9 3 3 e Incremental system metric mm input Inch inch input ISB system 99999 999 99999 999mm 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch ISC system 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 999 99999 999 99999 inch Cycle process D X rapidly traverses from starting point to cutting starting point 2 Cutting feed linear interpolation from the cutting starting point to cutting end point 3 X executes the tool retraction at feedrate opposite direction to the above mentioned and return to the position which the absolute coordinates and the starting point are the same 4 Z rapidly traverses to return to the starting point and the cycle is completed nionem
96. cycle the system does not execute the tool nose radius compensation and cancel it temporarily and executes it in the next blocks of G00 G01 G70 CNC automatically recovers the compensation mode G71 G76 G92 G84 G88 G50 program block Fig 4 60 Cancel compensation vector temporarily in cycle pause Q G32 G34 thread cutting The system does not execute the tool nose radius compensation and temporarily cancels the tool nose radius compensation in G32 G34 and it automatically recovers the compensation mode in GOO G01 172 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation I N5 G32 G34 block Programmed path Fig 4 61 cancelling compensation vector in G32 G34 pause G90 G94 Compensation method of tool nose radius compensation in G90 or G94 A Each cycle path and tool nose center path are parallel to program path B Offset directions are the same in G41 and G42 as the following figure and the system determines the tool compensation direction according to the UW direction of starting point and end point and executes the tool compensation according to the direction in the cycle process C In having creating C tool compensation state the system firstly cancels C tool compensation state in G90 G94 and executes the infeed tool to the intersection point of the tool nose center based on the tool nose center parallel programmed path and at last to the positioning point The system creates C tool compensation again in the nex
97. deep hole drilling cycle The tool rapidly positions to the hole from EAE S D TE starting point the hole is determined by the hole position data at the initial level mapia averse 2 Rapidly position to point R 3 Cutting feed executes the cutting amount q specified by Q 4 Rapid tool retraction executes retraction Sn O ous lic amount d specified by No 5114 Repeat the above Step 3 until the tool reaches the level where the hole bottom is 6 Pause is executed in the time specified by P v Return rapidly to the level where point R is Return rapidly to the initial level 9 Drilling cycle ends 7 AZ X feed i Hole position Point R Point R level O e 9 3 3 e 8 Imaginary workpiece Infeed and retraction cycle to hole bottom T Pause at hole didi Ds bottom level Fig 2 69 Deep hold drilling cycle Q value is specified and RTR NO 5101 2 1 Command format and definition are referred to the previous description 109 I 5 A O Q y Q 3 3 Q C GSK CNC GSE Execution process 1 The tool rapidly positions to the hole from starting point the hole is determined by the hole position data at the initial level 2 Rapidly position to point R 3 Cutting feed executes the cutting amount q GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Deep hole drillina cvcle Operation sequence Tool Z X
98. digit corresponds to the No n axis of the system at the same time the movement in G31 block ends No 6200 Bit 19SK0 sets the invalid input state of the skip signal and when it is set to O the input signal 1 is valid Operation When the skip signal becomes 1 CNC executes as follows When the block is executing G31 CNC stores the current absolute coordinates for each axis CNC stops G31 to execute the next block the skip signal detects its state instead of its RISING EDGE So when the skip signal is 1 it meets the skip conditions Note1 When the skip signal is input the feedrate override the dry run and automatic acceleration deceleration are invalid in the course of movement by the skip function which is to improve the tool positioning precision Note 2 The skip signal is valid the system immediately stops the feed axis without acceleration deceleration execution and G31 feedrate should be as low as possible to get the precise stop position 2 11 Automatic Tool Offset G36 G37 Command function When the command is executed to make the tool move to the measured position the CNC automatically measures the difference between the current actual coordinates and the command coordinates to be the tool offset value The function is used to the automatic toolsetting Command format G36X G37Z Explanations X absolute coordinate only used to G36 Z absolute coordinate only used to G37 Non modal G command 00
99. editing a program currently selected in the frontground 0 Can t be selected 1 Can be selected 7 6 5 4 3 o po S Way of Validating After power on Default Setting 0000 1000 3 CHI Select display language 0 English 1 Chinese Set the selected language to display 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DAL DRC DRE men Default Setting 1100 0000 0 MCN Machine position 0 Displayed according to the unit of output 0 Displayed according to the unit of input There isn t any connection with the metric system or the inch system the metric machine displays as the metric units the inch machine displays as the inch units 1 Displayed according to the unit of input When it is input in the metric system display in the metric system when it is input in the inch system display in the inch system 4 DRL Relative position 0 The actual position displayed takes into acount tool offset 1 The programed position displayed does not take into acount tool offset Note In T serial the movement coordinate system compensates the tool appearance parameter LGT NO 5002 4 is 0 display the programming position which ignores the tool compensation the parameter is set as 1 However the programming position without the tool appearance compensation value can not display 5 DRC Relative position O The actual position displayed takes into acount tool nose radius compensation 1 The programed position displayed does not ta
100. ee ee ee E 2 BEEN NERIENSEE MIN ee eee NENNEN ERE CENM M ds NEL SENE EUN EUN es NE x a ee ee Tr on a ae ee ee i ee ee ee ee NS NE MEME EBN NENNEN UN ME EFE NE NS a E NEM eee ee t oO OO NO 4 C2 338 Chapter XI Parameters 11 13 Parameters Related to the Spindle Control 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 o ee ee o lo l1N j Modification authority Equipment Default Setting 0000 0000 1 NRF The first move command G00 after the spindle is switched to Cs axis performs 0O Positioning after returning to the reference postion 1 Normal positioning 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 sme T 1 ces 1 4 EVS When the spindle control function is used S codes and SF are spindle analog output or spindle serial output 0 Not output for an S command 1 Output for an S command II 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3706 Lo ee ee Pet Default Setting 0000 0000 0 1 PG2 and PG1 Gear ratio between the spindle and the position encoder Gear ratio spindle speed position encoder speed Gear ratio O Oo D um 9 oO 5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3707 Oo do S S lo tL PR P Default Setting 0000 0000 0 1 P22andP21 Gear ratio between the spindle and the second position encoder Gear ratio spindle speed position encoder speed Gear ratio 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mo SAT SAR 339 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE Modification authority Equip
101. fixed point Fig 4 65 G70 radius compensation mode 4 2 Particulars e Inside chamfer machining less than tool nose radius At the moment the tool inside offset causes an excessive cutting The tool stops and the system alarms P S41 when starting the previous block or chamfer moving But the tool stops the end point of previous block when Single is ON 174 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation Display alarm and stop working a Tool nose center path I Programmed path U im O e um 9 3 3 e overcutting T S Fig 4 66 inner corner machining less than tool nose radius e Machining concave less than tool nose diameter There is an excessive cutting when the tool nose center path is opposite to program path caused by tool nose radius compensation At the moment the tool stops and the system alarms No 257 when starting the previous block or chamfer moving Display alarm and stop working Tool nose center Mar K N N Fig 4 67 machining a grooving less than tool nose radius Programmed path Overcutting e Machining a inner sidestep less than 90 When the system machines a inner sidestep less than or equal to 90 and the machining path length is less than the tool nose radius there will be the too much undercut and No 260 alarms At the moment No 5008 Bit6 CNS sets whether the system alarms in the condition 175 GSE CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CN
102. group Cancel the tool nose radius compensation before using it Only use the absolute programming Define the workpiece coordinate system before using the command Specify the tool number and tool compensation number before using the command Measure position arrival signal XAE X3 6 corresponding to G36 ZAE X3 7 corresponding to G37 Function When the position measured by the program command is different from that where the tool actually reaches i e at the time the measured position arrival signal becomes 1 the difference of the coordinates is added to the current tool compensation value to update the compensation value When G36X or G37Z is executed the tool firstly rapidly traverses to the position measured by the command and decelerates and temporarily stop the position before the measured position and then reaches to the measured position at the speed set by No 6241 or No 6242 When the measured position arrival signal corresponding to G command becomes the state set by No 624070 and the tool is in the measured position range xe the system updates the offset compensation value and ends the block When the measured position arrival signal does not become 1 and after the tool reaches the measured position distance e the 48 Chapter If G Commands CNC alarms ends the block and does not update the offset compensation value Feedrate Assumable measured position R
103. is copied to the local directory For example For copying O0001 program in the U disk to the local direction the user firstly uses PROGRAM is gt OUTPUT the cursor to select the program in the U disk and presses presses and so the program is copied to the local directory The program in the local directory is copied to the U disk as long as the previous steps are executed in the local directory window AUTO RESET PROGRAM gt USB DIRECTORY prog acounts 3 name comment s size byte modified time 0826 241 1 8 86 11 29 58 06111 OBITI 241 1 8 86 11 38 34 i 14 58 83 B Een USB HDI eren zx NEW LOAD OPEN gt Fig 9 2 296 9 2 Backup Value Chapter IX U Disk Use GSK988T system can backup the system files and parameters to U disc to recover them later 9 2 1 System file backup Backup parameters tool offset pitch compensation tool life macro variable and other Value by the U disk which is convenient to recover when the mistaken operations cause the mistaken Value The operation steps are as follows 1 Insert the U disk and the system confirms it has read the disk SYSTEM 2 Press display window as shown in Fig 9 2 AUTO reser to enter the system window press MEMORY DEVICE to enter the file management SYSTEM gt MEMORY DEVICE E OBST Er U SYSTEM DATA FILE HE SERVOPARAM I 3 PARAM PAR wom I 3 TOFF CMP EH Backup LPS TLIF T
104. is displayed end resistance is installed then turn on the power 5004 GSK CAN slave Modify the parameter for This prompt is displayed when two ID number slave number and re power slave numbers of servos are set the 375 SSK CNC GSE Message i conflicted All GSK CAN slaves connections failure 5005 5006 5010 5011 5020 5030 376 n th axis GSK CAN slave connection failure n th axis servo model and software version read failure n th axis servo configuration failure n th servo parameter read failure gt D 5 Q x The parameter in the n th axis current servo parameter file is inconsistent with the read one GSK988T Turning CNC system on cut off the GSK CAN before parameter modification at the server side connection Check the setting of parameter No 9000 No 9012 and check whether the communication interface is loose the power supply is grounded properly or the end resistance is installed then turn ON the power again Check whether the communication interface is loose or the power supply is grounded properly Check whether the communication interface is loose or the power supply is grounded properly then turn ON the power again Please update relevant servo configuration file and turn ON the power again Please check whether the communication interface is loose or the power supply is grounded Please select a valid servo parameter
105. is opposite with to partition Square root Zi SQRT AZ Execute square root operation ind Rounding i ROUND ij Execute rounding operation In macro program execute the rounding of one digit of No in NC statement execute the rounding of the next mE digit of the least increment FUP i FUP 4j Floating UP integer uM In puls quantity Zi is more than or equal to j in the negative Zi is less than or equal to j FIX i FIX j Floating FIX integer In puls quantity Zi is less than or equal to j in the negative i is more than or equal to j Natural i LN i Execute natural logarithm eim __ Theat ame ten His 260 oles tan 280 Exponential i EXP i Execute j exponent Mme o avave camaro morman oo OR i j OR k Execute the binary logic operation of input data i j XOR k j k cannot be less than zero Execute arc cosine j value is from 1 to 1 I Function range 0 180 Execute tangent operation v O e 9 3 3 e AND i j AND k When there are the decimal points in j k the decimal parts are rounded BCD to BIN i BIN ij Converse the decimal data into the binary The system alarms for the data which cannot the converse BIN to BCD i BCD j Converse the binary into the decimal Command explanation 1 operation sequence Operator and function 5 y 3 SIN Ee ASIN AS peleas CO ACOS AC TAN TA ATAN AT SQRT SQ
106. is referred to G32 The system can machine one thread with many tool infeed in G92 but cannot do continuous two thread and end face thread Definition of thread pitch in G92 is the same that of G32 and a pitch is defined that it is a moving distance of long axis X in radius when the spindle rotates one revolution Pitch of taper thread is defined that it is a moving distance of long axis X in radius When absolute value of Z coordinate difference between B point and C point is more than that of X in 95 C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE radius Z is long axis and reversely X is the long axis Rapid traverse Thread cutting X 2 Z axis Thread run out width A starting point End point B starting point of cutting C End point of cutting v a O e 9 3 3 e Fig 2 60 Straight thread gt Rapid traverse Thread cutting Z axis A starting point End point B starting point of cutting C End point of cutting Fig 2 61 Taper thread Cycle process straight thread as Fig 2 60 and taper thread as Fig 2 61 1 X traverses from starting point to cutting starting point 2 Thread interpolates linear interpolation from the cutting starting point to cutting end point 3 X retracts the tool at the cutting feedrate opposite direction to the above mentioned and return to the position
107. is shown as below AUTO Fun LINEAR CUTTING MACHINE PRG DATA T uuas X 104 4350 F 54 mm min KAR mmf min 5 A 2008 rev min EO O O A By 41 605uu CORBA NC INFO FED OVAL 16 HIL F Al RAF OVAL 180 PART CNT B SF OVAL 50 AUN TIME HB Bb 3H Bg JOG F TE GUT TIME FB BE ES 15 31 51 Fig 3 5 3 1 4 Comprehensive coordinate ALL In position window press to switch into the comprehensive coordinate window Then the comprehensive coordinate value is displayed on the top corner of the window including the absolute relative and machine coordinates and the surplus movement value The window is shown as below 208 Chapter III Windows AUTO AUN LINEAR CUTTING i 4 0226 mim U 116 2617 mm i 116 2617 mm i 4 2444 mm 4l HBHH mm I 4 BSAA mm AT HbHH mm HMRI mm PRG WAME OAKA IAE FED OVAL 150 HDL F A AAP OVAL 1B PART CNT 1 SPI OVAL SH RUN TIME BB Hz 13 JOG F 150 CUT TIME BB A Hg 15 30 11 Fig 3 6 3 1 5 Setting the relative coordinate Sell Hal In position window press to set the relative coordinate and the window is shown as below Then the relative coordinate value of each coordinate axis can be set The steps are as following Sell lel 1 During resetting press to change the relative coordinate axis into the input state the relative coordinate value U is shown as below 209 II O Oo
108. is shown in Fig 3 46 Graph Track Graph setting display simulating See section mee section 3 7 3 The mee section machining 3 7 3 The graph track simulating O Oo am 9 O 5 display graph display Fig 3 46 3 6 1 Setting graph parameter GRAPHSET On the graph window press to access the setting graph window and it is shown as below 249 II O Oo mm 9 et O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR AUTO RUN GRAPH gt SETTING TRACKY EW EMULAT ON WORKPIECE ORIGIN D TOOL POST FRONT HAZ AXIS Z HR AXIS z VET AXIS PET AXIS JN E SCALE o 1 SOLE EE AXIS SHiFTinm LENGTHUnm 88 amp AXIS SHIFTOmm DIAMETER mm 88 Z AXIS SHIFT mm 8B BBp AAM X AXIS SHIFTCmm A B T aeaaa 18 55 11 Fig 3 47 On the window the path and the simulation A can be set Firstly set the horizontal and vertical axes of the graph and set the offset of the coordinate axis and the magnification of the graph if the simulation graph is required set the simulation horizontal and vertical axes the length and the diameter of the processing work piece and the magnification of the simulation graph In the right column it displays the current absolute position coordinate and the relative coordinate position value and the tool number used in the currently running program at the same time y Press Or to swit
109. it The value of the alarm number being 3006 adds 3200 the prompt number range is 3201 to 3500 When 3006 value is less than 1 the alarm number is 3201 when 3006 value is more than 300 the alarm number is 3500 For example 3006 3 wait for run When the system executes the block it stops and displays one prompt and the prompt number is 3206 The prompt message is WAITING FOR RUN The format of the prompt message is the same that of description in the macro program alarm 5 Machine workpiece quantity The required workpiece quantity and machined workpiece quantity are read and written required workpiece quantity and machined workpiece quantity 3901 Machined workpiece quantity completed quantity 3902 Required workpiece quantity target quantity When 3901 value is changed the workpiece quantity displayed in POSITION window also changes 129 C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE When 3902 value is changed No 6713 value also changes 6 Modal message The previous modal message which is being processed can be read Variable number Function 4001 G00 G01 G02 G03 G32 G34 G90 G92 G94 No 1 group 4002 G96 G97 No 2 group I y wo CNS group E CO Nodgroup 3 E 4006 G20 G21 No 6group El 4007 G40 G41 G42 No 7group 4008 G25 G26 No 8group 4009 G22 G23 No No 9group mmo o ug jefa NO MUT 4016 G17 G18 G19 No 16group 4022 22g 4109 F comma
110. minimum value of the screw pitch error compensation interval is 2mm But according to the setting override when the absolute value of the compensation point value exceeds 100 the interval of the compensation point is magnified by the override which is calculated by the following formula Override Max compensation amount absolute value 128 round up the digits after the decimal point Screw pitch compensation minimum interval Value which is obtained from the above maximum feedrate X override Note The unit of the screw pitch compensation value is same as that of the detection The detection unit is relative with parameter No 1820 command magnify ratio CMR and the 337 GSE C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual minimum movement unit about the relation between the setting units and the minimum movement units refer to the introduction of parameter No 1820 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3628 NPF5 NPF4 NPF3 NPF2 NPF1 Default Setting 0000 0111 40 244 NPF1 NPF5 The setting of pulse frequency for pitch error compensation in BCD code Setting frequency setting value 1 Kpps NPF5 NPF4 NPF3 NPF2 NPF1 Setting IE Kpps 359 134 3 SS eS ee Ee a Lo gc pde ner ee ee ee Ld _ L9 eS T EN EMNGENM EM ee eee ee 3 EE NND RENE ee QNEM 3 Ld ee ee eee re ee a NES NEN 7 ee a NMMAM a ee ee ee eee ee eh EMEN NEN MEN NU i NENNEN NEM ENENMES GENE E E E 19 ee E
111. ns block in GO cutting feedrate specified by G73 in ns block in G1 Bo Co Cutting feed Co Az3 rapid traverse No n times roughing A B C An Bn ns Rapid traverse speed in ns block in GO cutting feedrate specified by G73 in ns block in G1 Bn C Cutting feed Cr An 1 Rapid traverse Last roughing Ag Byg Cg Ag Bg Rapid traverse speed in ns block in GO cutting feedrate specified by G73 in ns block in G1 Ba gt Ca Cutting feed Cy A Rapid traverse to starting point pm d psc cu EGO E DOCK EM CM ASA A2 p j i AitAu 2 oni LEE IAS DITE N EEIE I oe os AO Ses oe teas A4 Au 2 ae udeupunguitu A5 UM ate ale inns A6 v CD NO s T A C3 es ae CA EU C5 MN Heyn Finishing path C6 KX 5 du X T d odi ouo esee Rapid traverse C LZ lt i Cutting feed nc MT l SEE i A Starting point End point E An Bn Cn roughing path I Pid BI PTE E ii B x P a oe ae y d I B4 Bo cele Y p B Fig 2 47 G73 run path Coordinate offset direction with finishing allowance Ai Ak define the coordinates offset and its direction of roughing Au Aw define the coordinates offset and cut in direction in finishing Ai Ak Au Aw can consist of many groups Generally the sign symbols of Ai and Au are consistent the sign symbols of Ak and Aw are consistent there are four kinds of combination as Fig 3 48 A for start up tool point B C for workpi
112. offset i fe n e LZ interface of See section macro 3 4 1 1 variable The Interface of tool offset O Oo u 9 2r O 5 See section 341 2 The Interface of tool lite _ _ System Coordinate Time P setting setting setting setting Jb Jb dU db See section oee section mee section a 21 a 427 3 4 2 3 The The The Interface of Interface of Interface of See section 34234 The Interface of system coordinate time setting IP setting setting setting Fig 3 32 3 4 1 Tool offset setting 3 4 1 1 Tool offset setting Press MILIE to access the tool compensation window shown in Fig 3 33 229 II O Oo mm 9 et O 5 C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual AUTO RESET SETTING gt TOOL OFFSET SS HW BEE H ABE Jel as 3n 438 ae CHE MACHO SERACH MEASURE INPUT G INPUT CLEAR SETT Nip SETTING Fig 3 31 In the window the user can search and set the too offset value and the wear value for each axis corresponding to each tool offset number and the concrete setting methods are referred to Chapter 6 6 In the right side column of the tool offset setting the system simultaneously displays the current absolute coordinate values the relative coordinate values and the tool number of the current program running Note 1 The displayed axes in the window are set by the parameter No 1010 and No 8130 the rotary axis is not displayed t
113. offset window and the cursor moves to No 004 offset X135 Z0 are input and the input steps are the same those of the above 8 15 The toolsetting is completed and the tool traverses to the safe position 16 Press B to automatically machine the workpiece in Auto mode 17 Modify the tool wear value to the tolerance range of the workpiece dimension when the measured workpiece dimension is different from the actual 309 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSR Chapter XI Parameters This chapter mainly introduces CNC state and Value parameters through setting different parameters to realize the different requirements of function The parameter Value mainly includes the following six types Data type Range im mmu 100E Mix DlAx ROSx ROTx 2 Bit axis 7H B A B A i B A 9 bit O or 1 3 Bit spindle V 9 V ENEPENENENENEEEEELLLGLGFGZG LLLULUUUIRA R I 6XLALL UAGO6Se OO OVA different E a H 5 Word axis LN according to 29 different 6 Word CHT parameters spindle II parameters 1 Bit 2 Bitaxis iai 99 999 999 99 999 999 4 Word axis axis For the word axis parameter 3 and 4 the exact Value range is determined by specified parameters Each parameter should include the following information Modification authority System authority 1 level Machine authority 2 level Equipment management authority 3 level Operation
114. omitting some axis means the axis does not return to the reference position omitting all means the middle point is the tool starting point in the current workpiece coordinate system and the tool does not return to the reference position and keeps stopping Command execution process as Fig 2 18 1 Rapidly position from the current position to the middle position of the command axis AB 2 Rapidly position from the middle point to the reference position BR Note 1 Reference position position is set in NO 1241 NO 1243 Note 2 After the system is turned on it executes the reference position return once before executing G30 do not execute the reference position return firstly before executing G30 after the system with the absolute encoder is turned on Note 3 When P is omitted the system executes it as P2 and returns to the 2 reference position Note 4 The middle point will move to the new workpiece coordinate system when the workpiece 5 D O Q Q 3 3 Q GSE CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual coordinate system is changed Note 5 Each axis separately moves at the rapid traverse speed from the starting point through the middle point to the reference position i e G00 mode 2 13 Related Function of Coordinate System The tool position is expressed with the coordinate value of the coordinate system the coordinate value is specified by the programmed axis GSK988T system has three
115. on the outside of the corner during tool nose radius compensation 0 16383 5013 Maximum value of tool wear compensation MTW Modification authority Equipment management authority 346 Chapter XI Parameters Default Setting 10 Value Range SETTING UNITS IS B IS C UNITS Metric input 0 0001 Inch input 0 0001 0 00001 Metricinput t etric Metricinput 0 9 999 999 0 99 999 999 Inch input The parameter sets Set the maximum allowable tool wear compensation value When the set absolute value of the tool wearing compensation value exceeds the maximum value it alarms Input from MDI alarm too many digits Exceed range XXXX XXXX input range is in the bracket Input through G10 alarm The offset value input by G10 is out of the specified range II 11 15 Parameters Related to the Canned Cycle The setting unit of canned cycle parameter is shown as follows Metric input 0 001 0 0001 Inch input 0 0001 0 00001 11 15 1 Parameter of the Drilling Canned Cycle 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 D 4 1T 4 Lh E O Oo D um 9 oO 5 Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 1 MRC A target figure other than monotonically increasing or monotonically decreasing in G71 and G72 or that on Z axis in G73 0 No alarm is issued 1 An alarm is issued 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LOL p e 1 Modification authority
116. or G73 in the sequence numbers specified by P and Q cannot exceed 100 Note 5 The blocks in the serial numbers specified by P and Q in G71 G72 or G73 cannot specify the following command 1 non modal G command except for G04 in group 00 2 all G commands except for G00 G01 G02 G03 in group 01 3 G20 and G21 4 M98 and M99 Note 6 The skip function should not be executed in the blocks of their serial number specified by P and Q when the skip function is used in the blocks of their serial numbers specified by P and Q Note 7 The tool nose radius compensation is invalid Note 8 No 5104 Bit2 FCK sets whether G71 G72 G73 executes the outer check When it is set to1 the check is executed The system alarms when the positioning point is in the cutting range Note 9 No 5102 Bit MRC set whether the system alarm when the finishing cycle in G71 G72 is in non monotonous and it alarms when Bit1 is set to 1 2 16 Threading Cutting GSK988T CNC system can machine many kinds of thread cutting including metric inch single multi threads thread with variable lead and tapping cycle Length and angle of thread run out can be changed multiple cycle thread is machined by single sided to protect tool and improve smooth finish of its surface Thread cutting includes continuous thread cutting G32 thread cutting with variable lead G34 Z thread cutting G33 Thread cutting cycle G92 Multiple thread cutting cycle G76 The machine used to th
117. or rotation axis ROS Linear axis Metric inch conversion All coordinate values are of the linear axis type The stored pitch error compensation is of the linear axis type II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 Rotary axis type A No metric inch conversion The machine coordinate value displays in 0 360 cycle The stored pitch error compensation is of the rotary axis type Automatically return to the reference position at the direction of the reference position return G28 and G30 the traverse amount can not exceed one turn ooo Invalid setting Rotary axis type B No metric inch conversion The machine coordinate value the relative coordinate value and the absolute coordinate value are in the linear axis which can t display in cycle of 0 360 The stored pitch error compensation is of the linear axis type The cycle function and the indexing function of the rotation axis can not be used at the same time 3 DIAx Either a diameter or radius is set to be used for specifying the amount of travel on each axis 0 Radius 1 Diameter 5 ZMIx The direction of reference postion return 0 Positive 1 Negative 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RR RAB ROA 313 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE Way of Validating After power on Parameter Type Bit axis Default Setting 0000 0000 0 ROAx The roll over function of a rotation axis is 0 Invalid 1 Valid Note ROAx is just valid for the rotary ax
118. other vectors based on the next two blocks the offset can be executed from PC and the tool path is as follows Vc2 Fig 4 74 insert tool offset of block in MDI mode When PA PB PC is programmed with absolute command the single block run stops and the tool is moved in MDI after the block from PA to PB is executed The vector VB1 VB2 are transferred to VB1 and VB2 VC1 VC2 of PB SPC and PC FPD are calculated again But the system can correctly execute the compensation following PC because the vector VB2 has not calculated again 179 GSE CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual I U im O e um 9 3 3 e 180 Chapter Overview Il OPERATION O Ke D Q c O GSE CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual II O Oo um 9 O 5 182 Chapter Overview Chapter Overview 1 1 Operation Overview GSK988T has operation modes including EDIT AUTO MDI REFERENCE POSITION RETURN MPG STEP MANUAL DNC and so on e Editing a program The above mentioned operation is completed by the program edit function The edit program is saved to the memory of the system and the program can be modified and altered see Chapter V Automatic run The automatic run is to operate the machine based on the compiled program Once the program is compiled to the CNC memory it runs according to the program command This operation is called the auto
119. parameter Ma bz41 Y Parameter No 6251 NO 62523 E Parameter No 6254 NO 6255 Fig 7 10 Note 1 Refer GSK988T Programming User Manual about G36 G37 Note 2 Refer to the user manual supplied by the machine manufacturer about the automatic toolsetting device Note 3 No 6241 set X feedrate when automatic tool compensation No 6251 set Y value of X axis when automatic tool compensation No 6254 set value of X axis when automatic tool compensation No 6242 set feedrate of Z axis when automatic tool compensation No 6252 set y value of Y axis when automatic tool compensation No 6255 set value of Z axis when automatic tool compensation 29 II O Oo um 9 O 5 II O Oo D um 9 O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR Chapter VI Setting and Display Graphs 8 1 Setting the Graph Parameter Before display the path the relative message of the path display or the graphic simulation must be set The graph message mainly sets the offset value of each coordinate axis the length and the diameter of the processing work piece the magnification ratio of the graph path and that of the graph simulation The detailed steps are as below GRAPH 1 Press to access the graph window GRAPHSET 2 On the graph window press to access the setting graph parameter window and itis shown as below DNC mx GRAPH gt SETTING ls 1 150 00 TRACKY IEI EMULAT
120. press or to open or close the file INPUT 3 Press or V and move to the document to be operated press the document the selected document is ticked such as the part programs O0098 O0003 and 00777 in the system file directory which is shown as above When the cursor is on the file then press to select INPUT to select all documents in the file INPUT 4 Then after select the files in the system press to output all the selected files to the 222 Chapter III Windows INPUT flash disk After selecting the files in the flash disk press to input all the selected files in the flash disk to the system file directory 3 3 9 Ladder diagram Because there are too many windows about the ladder diagram it is introduced independently about the ladder diagram windows refer to chapter 3 6 SYSTEM PLE Press and then press to enter the current PLC display window and to real time search PLC conditions the ladder window mainly includes the version message monitoring PLC Value PLC state and other sub window which content are searched by pressing the corresponding soft keys shown in Fig 3 21 AUTO RESET SYSTEM gt PLC gt VERSION INFORMATION PROGRAM NAME ISTDPLC LD2 PLC STATE RUN DESIGNER p MBs PLC MODEL IPLC NI PLC VERSION 9887 1 68686685 CRC32 CSEBCBA CUR SCAN PERIOD 8 CREATED DATE 2818 83 83 19 08 0A MAX SCAN PERIOD B MODIFIED DATE 281 8 83 83 19 00 88 MIN SCAN PERIOD 9 COM
121. same that of starting point X coordinate of D is the same that of C the different value of X coordinate between it and A is Ad Cutting end Itis defined by X U Z WD __ and is the end point B of last axial tool infeed point R e It is the travel of tool retraction after each axial Z tool infeed without sign symbols as the following table The command value is reserved after executing R e and the value of NO 5139 is rewritten The value of NO 5139 is regarded as the travel of tool I retraction when R e is not input X X absolute coordinate value of cutting end point B unit mm U Different value of X absolute coordinate between cutting end point B and starting point JV VIT 3 eT oy Pe mm Z Z absolute coordinate value of cutting end point B unit mm n m W Different value of Z absolute coordinate between cutting end point B and starting P AD Travel of radial X cutting for each axial cutting cycle without sign symbols and the indi value range is referred to the following table Q CA Travel of Z discontinuous tool infeed without sign symbols in axial Z cutting and the value range is referred to the following table Ai Ad Travel radius value of radial X tool retraction after cutting to end point of axial cutting The value range is referred to the following table The radial X tool retraction is 0 when R_ Ad is omitted and the system defaults the axial cutting end point The radial
122. sins ur cars 2s DT0002 3000 1 60000 Low pressure alarm detection time ms DT0003 5000 100 5000 Tool change for one tool position time upper limit ms DT0004 15000 1000 60000 Tool change for maximum tool positions time upper limit ms DT0005 5000 M code execution duration ms xipueddy DTO006 EM o 5000 S code execution duration ms DT0007 4000 Delay time of the tool post from forward rotation stop to reverse rotation output ms EM B di Alarm time when the TCP signal is not received ms in Bd ld Tool post reverse rotation lock time Tool post reverse rotation lock time ms alisei EK Delay time acci MO5 and spindle braking output ms 390 Appendix 2 Standard Ladder Function Allocation DT0011 80 0 60000 Spindle braking output time ms DT0013 60000 Lubricating start time 0 60000ms 0 no limit DIOS o o 60000 Automatic lubricating interval time is DTOT o o 80000 Automat lubricating output irme me DT0019 60000 Chuck function execution duration when in position signal is not checked ms DT0021 1000 100 60000 Spindle stop chuck operation enable DT0022 500 100 1000 Alarm indicator flickering period DT0023 500 100 1000 Spindle override indicator flickering period DT0025 400 100 2000 Spindle override knob debounce time ms valid when the machine tool panel ne DT0032 10000 60000 Liuxin 8 Position Hydraulic Tool Change AO oU amon o DT0034 10000 60000
123. spindle speed r min m min is directly executed by NC NC firstly executes G and then M commands when G codes and MOO M01 M02 and M30 are in the same block NC firstly executes G and then M commands without transmitting M signal to PLC when G codes and M98 M99 M9000 M99998 are in the same block When G codes and M S T executed by PLC are in the same block PLC defines M S T and G to be executed simultaneously or execute M S T after G codes Please see User Manual of machine manufacturer for execution sequence of commands Execution sequence of G M except for the above M codes S T defined by GSK988T PLC in the same block is determined by PLC which is divided into two methods a Movement codes and M miscellaneous code are executed simultaneously b Execute miscellaneous codes after executing movement codes Refer to the machine manufacture s user manual for the concrete execution method The second method is executed when there is M9 M99 M13 M33 or M5 for our GSK ladder Note When G28 or G30 and M01 are in the same block the pause after zero return is done When there is a single block stop command without M01 the single block stop is executed at the middle point and zero return completion position When G28 or G30 and M01 are in the same block and the single block stop is valid the pause is executed after zero return 28 Chapter If G Commands Chapter Il G Commands 2 1 Summary G command consists of co
124. starting point and the end point when the end point is not in the arc defined by R the user can set whether the system alarms according to No 3403 Bit4 RER It is suggested that the user should use R programming Note 8 In G02 G03 mode the system alarms when the other axes exceeding the current level are commanded in G02 G03 Note 9 The feedrate along the arc is related to not only F value and the override but also the machining precision ISB ISC and the machining radius For example when the arc radius is smaller the machining cannot be executed at the set feedrate to get the machining precision Note 10 The actual cutting feedrate is limited to max cutting feedrate MFR of No 1422 37 CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE G02 G03 compound programming example I U A O Q y Q 3 3 Q Fig 2 8 Arc programming Program O0001 N001 GO X40 Z5 Rapidly traverse NO002 MO3 S200 Start the spindle NOO3 G01 XO ZO F900 Approach the workpiece N005 G03 U24 W 24 R15 Cut arc R15 NOO6 G02 X26 Z 31 R5 Cut arc R5 N007 G01 Z 40 Cut d526 NOO8 X40 Z5 Return to starting point N009 M30 End of program 2 5 Dwell G04 Command function execute the next block after dwelling the defined time Command format G04 P or G04 X__ or G04 U_ or G04 Command specification G04 is non modal The dwell time is defined by the word P_ X orU X U value can specify the decimal
125. statement when the feed pause is valid the machine stops after the macro statement is executed and the machine also stops when the system resets or alarms Application example 1 G65 example Program 00001 N001 GO X40 0 Z5 0 Macro program O9000 NO01 4 3 2 de NO02 IF 4 GT 40 GOTO 9 NO06 G65 P9000 L3 B20 0 C10 0 en nO NO06 G01 X100 0 Z100 0 N009 M30 a NO09 M99 2 G66 G67 example Program O0001 NOO1 GO X40 0 Z5 0 Macro program O9000 Gi NOO1 GOO X 2 N002 G01 X 3 1 call NO06 G66 P9000 L3 B20 0 C10 0 G00 X100 0 Z100 0 2 NO09 M99 gt G67 NU TE MEUM EE LL CES NOO9 M30 call return 138 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation Chapter III MSTF Commands 3 1 M Miscellaneous Function M command consists of command address M and its following 1 2 or 4 bit digits used for controlling the flow of executed program or outputting M commands to PLC M 0000 e Command value leading zero can be omitted Command address There is one valid M code in one block There are most specified 3 M codes in one block set by NO 3404 Bit 7 M3B The corresponding relationship between M codes and their functions are determined by the machine manufacturer CNC sends M code signal and one strobe signal to PLC in executing M codes Except for M98 M198 M99 all M codes are executed in PLC The following M codes have special meanings 3 1 1 End of program M02 Command format M02 or
126. the equipment Note 3 After releasing the emergence stop alarm return to the reference position again to ensure the precision of the coordinate position 2 5 3 Feed hold During the machine running press D to stop the running temporarily Pay attention to that during the thread cutting or the cycle command running even press the button the running can t stop immediately 2 5 4 Cutting off power supply During the machine running in the dangerous situation or emergency the machine power supply can be cut immediately to avoid the accidence But pay attention to that the coordinate displayed by CNC can t comply with its actual position after cutting off power supply so it requires returning to the reference position again 199 II O Oo um 9 oO 5 II O Oo m 9 r O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE Chapter III Windows Based on the windows this chapter introduces the relation among the switching windows input and soft keys and the detailed operation method There are eight function keys including position program and setting etc on MDI panel in GSK988T system each function key is relative to one main window and each main window also includes many windows and the soft keys Note 1 1 softkey 2 LOCAL switch the windows by the function key POSITION 3 soft key in blue font continuous menu key the first right soft key key for r
127. the feed axis works normally according to the diagnosis message Note The system only displays diagnosis messages of used servo axes does not display those of unused servo axes gt Pulse encode diagnosis messages diagnosis number 30 33 They include the rotary direction of two channel pulse encode Z signal state A B phase signal states and the current count pulse value and they can judge whether the encode works normally gt MPG diagnosis messages diagnosis number 40 43 They include the rotary direction of two channel MPG A B phase signal states and the current count pulse value and they can judge whether the encoder works normally gt Spindle s diagnosis messages diagnosis number 50 52 They include the alarm signal the tapping signal enabling signal ready signal and others of two channel spindle gt Diagnosis messages of machine panel diagnosis number 60 62 They include the accumulated error quantity the currently continuous error quantity and the reset quantity of machine panel and they can judge whether the machine panel works normally gt Diagnosis message of edit keyboard diagnosis number 63 65 They include the accumulated error times of edit keyboard continuous error times of machine panel and reset times of machine panel and they can judge whether the current machine panel works normally 3 5 3 2 Servo diagnosis window LOCK DIAGNOSIS SCREEN On the system window press to acces
128. the intersection point is within 1 the movement of corning R block is 0 When two circular interpolation operations are executed and the angle difference of their circular tangent is within 1 the movement of corning R block is 0 Note 6 When the chamfering or corning R block is specified in a single block the operation runs until it reaches the end point of new chamfering corning R block the machine stops in feed hold mode at the end point Note 7 The following G commands cannot be used with the chamfering corning R command in the same block as well as the blocks of chamfering corning R of the defined continuous graph G commands in Group 00 except for G04 Note 8 When C or R is commanded in the thread cutting block the alarm occurs cannot command the chamfering or corning R in the current block Note 9 The last is valid when the many C and R are specified in the same block 125 O e 9 3 3 e C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE 2 22 Macro Command GSK988T provides the macro command which is similar to the high language and can realize the variable assignment and subtract operation logic decision and conditional jump by user macro command contributed to compiling part program for special workpiece reduce the fussy counting and simplify the user program I 2 22 1 Variable 1 variable use The variable can specify the address value in
129. the tool function when roughing 2 Blocks for defining the block interval finishing allowance 3 Blocks for some continuous finishing path counting the roughing path without being executed actually when executing G73 According to the finishing allowance the travel of tool retraction and the cutting times the system automatically counts the travel of roughing offset the travel of each tool infeed and the path of roughing the path of each cutting is the offset travel of finishing path the cutting path approaches gradually the finishing one and last cutting path is the finishing one according to the finishing allowance The starting point and end point of G73 are the same one and G73 is applied to roughing for the formed rod G73 is non modal and its path is as Fig 2 40 Command forma G73U Ai W Ak R d F S T 1 G73P ns Q nf U Au W Aw 2 N CAS too ch i Ss a e eo o gt e o ee ee ee 9 T 3 Command specifications 1 ns nf blocks in programming must be followed G73 blocks If they are in the front of G73 blocks the system automatically searches and executes ns nf blocks and then executes the next program following nf block after they are executed which causes the system executes ns nf blocks repetitively ns nf blocks are used for counting the roughing path and the blocks are not executed when G73 is executed F S T commands of ns nf blocks are invalid when G71 is executed at the m
130. through the following formula Override Allowable speed of the rotary axis the speed vector of the rotary axis X 100 If the revolving speed after timing the override still exceeds the allowable speed the feedrate is limited in the allowable maximum cutting feedrate auto speed limit function Note When the parameter value is set as 0 it is taken as 90 II O Oo m 9 O 5 To limit the auto speed override and the auto speed the parameter AFC NO 5450 1 is set as 1 11 18 Parameters Related to the User Macro Program 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SBM Leer Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 0 G67 If G67 is specified while G66 is not set 0 An alarm is issued 1 The specification G67 is ignored 5 SBM Custom macro statement O Not stop the single block 352 Chapter XI Parameters 1 Stops the single block 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 v ecv Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0100 0000 6 CCV Custom macro s common variables Nos 100 199 O Cleared to vacant by reset 1 Not cleared by reset Note In MDI mode the macro public variables are not cleared after reset 7 CLV Custom macro s local variables Nos 1 13 0 Cleared to vacant by reset 1 Not cleared by reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 1 LL m Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting
131. to 1 the modal is changed to the one which is at the power on but G22 and G23 in Group 09 and G20 and G21 in Group 06 remain unchanged Note 3 G commands in Group 00 are non modal Note 4 G commands in Group 00 and ones in Group 01 are specified in the same block G commands in Group 00 are valid G commands in Group 01 only change their modal Note 5 Commands in Group 06 09 21 and ones in other groups cannot be in the same block commands in Group 12 and G65 are specified only in a separate block Note 6 When No 3403 Bit6 AD2 is set to 0 many G commands in the different groups can be specified in the same block and the G command specified at last is valid when it is set to 11 the alarm occurs Note 7 When compiling a G command in one block needs a word and the compiled cannot use the word the word is ignored for example G00 X Z R R_is ignored when the ignored word format is not correct the alarm occurs For example G00 X Z R2 3 15 Note 8 When compiling No 1020 does not have the axis word including the absolute address or incremental address the alarm occurs 2 1 2 Omitting word input To simplify the programming their command values are reserved after executing words in Table 2 2 If the words are contained in the previous blocks they cannot be input when the words are used with the same values and definitions in the following blocks 3l v A O ta 9 3 3 e CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC Syst
132. to the end point coordinates of the specified block and their words in the block are not input the system takes the absolute coordinates of the current X Y Z A B or C as the coordinates of the end point Example 1 run after the first power on I Hurwiweiboid 00003 G98 F500 G01 X100 Z100 G98 feed minute 500mm min G92 X50 W 20 F2 thread cutting F must be input when it is the pitch G99 G01 U10 F0 01 G99 feed minute F is input again G00 X80 Z50 M30 Example 2 00001 GO X100 Z100 rapidly traverse to X100 Z100 the modal GO is valid 32 Chapter If G Commands X20 Z30 rapidly traverse to X20 Z30 the modal GO can be omitted G1 X50 250 F300 linear interpolation to X50 Z50 300mm min the modal G1 is valid X100 linear interpolation to X100 Z50 300mm min When Z coordinate is not input the current coordinate value Z50 is used F300 is kept G01 can be omitted when it is modal GO XO Z0 rapidly traverse to XO ZO the modal GO is valid M30 2 1 3 Related definitions Definitions of word are as follows except for the especial explanations Starting point position before the current block runs End point position after the current block ends X X absolute coordinates of end point Xp absolute coordinate of X end point or one which is parallel to X U different value of X absolute coordinate between starting point and end point Y Y absolute coordinate of end point Yp
133. types during each axis thread cutting cycle 1627 FL rate of exponential acceleration deceleration in thread cutting cycle FLT for each axis Modification authority Equipment management authority Parameter Type Word axis Value Range VALUE VALID VAUDRANGE DEFAULT SETTING UNITS II Set lower limit speed FL speed of acceleration and deceleration in exponential type during each axis thread cutting cycle O Oo 9 O 5 11 8 Parameters Related to Servo and Backlash Compensation 2 7 6 5 4 3 1 0 BPEC BDE IRBE y a Default Setting 1000 0000 4 RBK Backlash compensation applied separately for cutting feed and rapid traverse O Not performed 1 Performed 6 BD8 Frequency of backlash compensation pulses output involved 0 Set frequency 1 1 8 of set frequency 7 BDEC Backlash compensation pulses O output in fixed pulse frequency 1 output based on acceleration deceleration 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 O fe POD ABP Way of Validating After power on Parameter Type Bit axis Default Setting 0000 0000 326 Chapter XI Parameters 0 ABP Pulse drive mode select 0 Pulse direction mode 1 AB phases pulse mode 2 POD Pulse output direction select for each axis 0 Not reverse 1 Reverse 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 APEX APZX APRX Way of Validating After power on Parameter Type Bit axis Default Setting 0000 0000 0 APRx Directi
134. xiii oe eei SD e gel a e u te oid pa hang cue E texas 280 GAA Focarate QVOITICO titius eet vetus hase a ie reas rut a vet fato 280 6 4 5 Rapid traverse override essesesssssssssssessssese nennen nnne nnne nnns 281 WI Tool Offse t and Setting T90lS 2 ck eee E oe e s IRE eI ets eso cue 282 Setting the Tool Offset and the Wearing Values eeseeeseeeeeeneenennee 282 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE LAs UDWECEINDUDIMEINOG osrin xen dista esca pua Mp MU I RCM TI M MU 202 1 2 Measuring Modgunn odes ptg totapbun usada a Eesti Enbeenan uetus a bt qe Cacus 283 re VMOU MVOC T E T Sm 204 FAB G Input melhotd dus doi baee etta ester iaa iato nante aav btt bae aot a Facta fh Rd Pb 285 7 1 5 Clearing the offset value or the wearing value seseseeeeeeeeeeene 286 72 Fed Pont TOOL SEUNG sette Uno dodo ie M ab tos ost sac tomi tas Deae cca LO sates 287 Tso TN Hr TOOlS CHANG oaa beoe n S hosktae toute etc oteduac tc acco aes nos tana PEE uS iE 287 TA POStOnN RECO ecesuat ante eoi mI eI OPUS Su a MM MEI SLM MM UL M UM DE 290 o Automauc Tool GColrbernsallO s ener vont vested vu ciun vera eeu eov DR ag is caeci p pe ei Ue 290 Chapter WI Setting and Display Graphs ssessssesssenenmmm emere 292 8 1 Setting the Graph Parameter cccccccccsecceeeeceeeseeeeeeeseeeseuessaeeseesneeseeseeeseuessaeeseeees 292 9 2 Path Graph Displa
135. 0 are PLC after 2000 it is prompt message Note 4 After the parameter is rewritten which becomes valid after power on the alarm can be cleared after power on again Note 5 The detailed alarm message and PLC alarm are referred to Appendix Alarm Message List and Appendix Il PLC Alarm 3 5 2 Alarm record check window MESSAGE ALARM Press to access the message window and then press HISIUHT to access the record window The latest alarm message is recorded on the window including the alarm date time number Joe and content And check the alarm message through pressing i and The window is shown as below MDI e ALAM I 1 ALARM 400 MESSAGE gt ALARM HISTORY ain No content alarm time alan 8 Emergency stop alarm ESP input open circuit 201 6 10 26 09 13 27 ALAN 500 Axis Z Return to reference position 261 8 16 28 89 13 56 QAM 594 Axis X Servo alarm 2010 10 28 08 15 31 SNINFO 5136 Axis X 3 phase main power supply power off 2010 10 20 89 15 31 uar 604 Axis X Servo alarm 2010 10 20 89 18 25 INFO 5136 Axis X 3 phase main power supply power off 241 8 18 28 89 18 25 ALAM 604 Axis X Servo alarm 2010 10 20 09 21 18 A inFO 5136 Axis X 3 phase main power supply power off 2018 18 28 89 21 18 Qua 604 Axis X Servo alarm 2818 18 28 09 29 54 A INFO 5136 Axis X 3 phase main power supply power off 2818 18 28 03 28 54 ALAM 64 Axis X Servo alarm 2010 10 26 09 38 53 E ALAM 64 Axis X
136. 0000 0000 0 NAT Specification of the results of custom macro function ATAN amp ASIN O The result is 0 360 amp 270 90 1 The result is 180 180 amp 90 90 1 MFZ If the angle of a custom macro operation command SIN COS or TAN is 1 0X 108 or below the result is O Handled as underflow 1 Normalized to 0 11 19 Parameters Related to Skip Function 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 esej 1 KO Default Setting 0000 0000 SKO Specify whether the skip signal is made valid O Skip signal is valid when the signal is set to 1 1 Skip signal is valid when the signal is set to O SKF Dry run and override for G31 skip command 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ee oo Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 6 MDC The value of the automatic tool compensation is 0 Added to current tool offset 1 Subtracted from current tool offset 353 II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 6A j f o j E0 Way of Validating After power on Default Setting 0000 0000 0 AEQ Measurement position arrival is assumed when the automatic tool compensation signal X3 6 and XAE2 X3 7 is 0 1 1 0 7 IGA Automatic tool compensation is 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool compensation used ith signal XAE1 Feedrate during measurement of automatic
137. 0001deg 0 0001deg Inch input 0 00001inch diameter 0 000005inch 0 00001inch radius 0 00001inch 0 0001deg 0 0001deg Whether the least input increment is mm or inch is determined by the machine based on the parameter INM 1001 0 The least input increment can be switched between the inch and the mm input which is controlled by G codes G20 or G21 or the set parameter i U O e 9 3 3 e GSE C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual 1 3 3 Max travel Max travel least command increment X 99999999 Table 1 3 d max travel IS C IS B Metric machine system 99999 999mm HUENNNNNF Inch machine system 9999 9999inch WENN IS C Metric machine system 9999 9999mm Se ieuna Inch machine system 999 99999inch NENNEN MH Note 1 The unit is diameter value in diameter programming is radius value in radius programming in the above table Note 2 The input command cannot exceed max travel command Note 3 The actual travel decides the machine tool 1 3 4 Reference position Reference position is a fixed point on the machine tool The tool can move to the position by executing the reference position return function Generally the reference position is used to tool change and setting coordinate system GSK988T Turning CNC System can set 4 reference positions by parameters as follows 2nd reference point 3 d reference point reference point Machine zero X dference point Fig
138. 05 HJ Zx DLZx ZAN Xu A A A A A p A x BBBB SEQ INI 18 18 41 43 34 JESHE IEZSECRREMI Fig 3 16 INPUT Press the numerical key to rewrite the value of 8 bits in binary system and press to confirm the setting is completed if the value is less than 8 bits zeroing in upper bit Moreover set bit parameter based on the bits O Oo mm 9 O 5 1 In parameter setting window press E l Q Or V to select the parameter to be set 2 Press Or to select the parameter bit to be rewritten INPUT 3 Repeatedly press the parameter bit is switched between 0 and 1 and the value of the parameter bit is rewritten 4 Press RR Q Or V The numerical parameter setting method is similar to that of the bit parameter OK lo input the sequence number of the selected parameter and then EM and the cursor positions to the parameter to select the other parameters to be set selects the required parameter to modify or press 1 Using SEARCH INPUT 2 Press to make the selected parameter to be modified INPUT 3 Input the set value and press to confirm the setting 4 Using EJ l af V selects other parameters to be set 216 Chapter III Windows Note 1 After rewrite the system parameter some parameter can become valid immediately some parameter becomes valid after the system powers on again refer to 988T parameter introduction Note 2 Only i
139. 06 dao 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 GROUP 02 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 8 LIFELEFT 0 0003 000 oo 0000 100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 GROUP 03 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 0 LIFELEFT 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ENEG t OOE TNA ENAR s BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 0 LIFELEFT 0 10 15 49 Hue Emp qo og qe gp gp Fig 3 38 6 Searching the tool Press SEARCH button input the tool number to search the tool as Fig 3 39 MDI ss SETTING TOOL SETTING gt TOOL LIFE LIFE INFO GROUP 01 TOOL NO 0000 LIFE USED 0 SYMBLE USED H JUMP IN LIFE GROUP 01 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 2 LIFE WERT 0 A 0001 40002 0008 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 GROUP 02 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 8 LIFE LEFT 0 0003 0001 0000 0000 100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 GROUP 03 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL O LIFE LEFT 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 0 PIPE LER 0 B 10 16 19 eS es Se ee ae ee See Fig 3 39 Note 1 The quantity of tool group is determined by No 6813 and No6800 0 When No 6813 value is less than 8 the default is 128 groups Note 2 The tool group which life and counting method have been set cannot bese
140. 1 G50 XO Z0 set the coordinate zero G01 X100 Z100 rapidly traverse to the position X100 Z100 GO XO ZO M30 212 Chapter VI Auto Operation The 4 line is skipped when m is press to run the program 6 1 5 G31 skip When G31 is edit before a block and the external skip signal X 3 5 is input during the course of G31 being executed G31 running is interrupted to execute the next block The function is used to the dynamic measure such as milling machine and the toolsetting measure of the workpiece dimension Taking example of the 4 line of the following program O0002 G31 Z200 F100 When the block is executed and the external skip signal X3 5 is input the block is interrupted and the next block is executed G01 X100 Z300 M30 Note The detailed use of G31 is referred to PROGRAMMING II 6 1 6 Stop auto running The memorizer running can be stopped through the following methods Command stopping or press the relative keys which are on the machine operation panel to stop O Oo um 9 oO 5 Command stopping MOO M01 M02 and M30 After executing the block with MOO or M01 the selecting stop button on the panel is on running automatically stops the mode function and the state all are saved Press m the program continues to execute When read in M02 or M30 command at the end of the main program the program running ends and resets The operations of different machines are not same about t
141. 1 OL Stage Tool No 10 50 55 i qaa EE Fig 3 44 ENABLET In the page er see it for the user with more than 2 level authority can be pressed i e the machine soft panel can be used The characters lablelled on the machine soft panel corresponds to the characters on the system keyboard and the machine can be operated according to the II O Oo mm 9 et O 5 can switch to other page with other function keys corresponding character Pressing Pressing can select the spindle strobe spindle override and feedrate override which can be regulated by pressing i l Note 1 K12 7 1 i e the operation panel is MPUO2B the spindle override regulation on the machine soft panel is valid and the external spindle override knob is invalid Note 2 K12 7 0 i e the operation panel is MPUO2A the spindle override is controlled by numerical key or symbol key on the machine soft panel there are two pages on the machine soft panel and they are converted by pressing Page Up Down Note 3 When the displayed feedrate override is opposite to the actual K10 0 is modified to get the correct Note 4 When the feedrate override on the machine soft panel is valid the external feed knob is invalid Note 5 CYCLE START key on te machine soft panel CYCLE START key on the machine panel and the external CYCLE START key are valid simultaneously 3 4 3 Macro variable window MACRO On the setting window press to access the
142. 1 is regarded as the travel of tool infeed when W Ad is not input It is each travel of Z tool infeed in roughing without sign symbols and the direction of tool retraction is opposite to that of tool infeed after R e is executed e value e is reserved and the system modifies No 5133 value The value of system parameter NO 5133 is regarded as the travel of tool retraction when R e is not input Block number of the first block of finishing path ns Au X finishing allowance in roughing X coordinate offset of roughing path compared to finishing path i e the different value of X absolute coordinate between A and A diameter value with sign symbols Aw Z finishing allowance in roughing its value 9999 999 9999 999 Z coordinate un offset of roughing path compared to finishing path i e the different value of X absolute coordinates between A and A with sign symbols Cutting feedrate S Spindle speed T Tool number tool offset number M S T F They can be specified in the first G72 or the second ones or program ns nf M S T F functions of M S T F blocks are invalid in G72 and they are valid in G70 finishing blocks Incremental system Metric mm input Inch inch input W Ad ISB system 0 001 99999 999 0 0001 9999 9999 ISC system 0 0001 9999 9999 0 00001 999 99999 R e ISB system 0 99999 999 0 9999 9999 ISC system 0 9999 9999 0 999 99999 U Au ISB system 99999 999 99999 999 9999 9999 9999 9999
143. 128 Chapter If G Commands The alarm message only displays 26 characters 13 Chinese characters and the system only displays the first 26 characters when there are more than it The value of the alarm number being 3000 adds 3000 the alarm range is 3000 to 3200 When 3000 value is less than O the alarm number is 3000 when 3000 value is more than 200 the alarm number is 3200 _ Example 3000 6 the tool has not found When the system executes the block it stops and alarms and the alarm number is 3006 The alarm message is TOOL NOT FOUND The system maybe alarm in advance because of the buffer exists The alarm message can use the small brackets For example 3000 6 TOOL NOT FOUND When the small brackets and the semicolon are in the block the latter specified message is valid such as 3000 6 TOOL NOT FOUND TOOL NOT FOUND the displayed message is TOOL NOT FOUND e VI VIT 3 eTo y P 4 Stop message The program execution is interrupted and the system displays one message i e the single stops after the system executes the block and the system displays only one prompt The variable is only be written instead of being read 3006 When the system executes the assignment statement of 3000 1 it stops the run and displays only one prompt message The alarm message only displays 26 characters 13 Chinese characters and the system only displays the first 26 characters when there are more than
144. 128 288 7 24 885 R85 U 3l 552 X147 224 Z 42 5 R85 y 69 254 GA X175 H9 MACHI NE X GB X175 758 7 69 254 1120 208 2724 88 m5 1 T aao 11 12 27 LOAD SAVE CANCEL RECOVER LOCATE COPY ad TE DEL BLK ll Fig 4 4 Then the current program can be edited and rewritten but when the program is being executed it must be edited in the editing mode Note When No 3404 6 is 0 the program must has the end code M02 M30 M99 otherwise the system prompts the mistakes when LHECK program runs II is pressed to check the program and the alarm occurs when a 4 2 Renaming Outputting Deleting and Arraying Programs Saving a Program as O um 9 O 5 In program window press gt to switch the window including renaming deleting outputting programs and saving a program as which is shown in Fig 4 5 EDIT reser PROGRAM gt LOCAL DIRECTORY prog acounts 3 size byte 14 887 499 free byte 21 096 448 name comments size byte modified time 08826 OBBm25 14 887 384 2918 18 84 14 51 18 08111 08111 14 2016 10 66 11 89 18 11 18 58 HDI nisl zx NEW LOAD OPEN gt Fig 4 5 i 4 2 1 Renaming a program V In PROGRAM window press to move the cursor to select a program press 257 II O Oo mm 9 et O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR SAVE AS to rename the selected the pro
145. 2 Bit 3 RLC the local coordinate system is cancelled in reset when the parameter is set to 1 Note 6 Whether the local coordinate system in manual reference position return is cancelled is determined by No 1201Bit 2 ZCL the local coordinate system is cancelled in manual 58 Chapter If G Commands reference position return when the parameter is set to 1 2 13 5 Level selection command G17 G19 Command function The level selection command is used to the arc interpolation and the tool nose radius compensation selection level Once the system has selected the level it can execute the arc interpolation and tool nose radius compensation on the level Command format G17 selects XpYp level G18 selects ZpXp level G19 selects YpZp level Command explanation G17 G18 G19 are modal G commands Xp X or its parallel axis Yp Y or its parallel axis Zp Z or its parallel axis Note 1 Xp Yp Zp are determined by the axis addresses of G17 G18 G19 in the block when the axis addresses are omitted the system defaults the omitted are the addresses of the basic axis the level keeps when the system does not command G17 G18 G19 blocks Note 2 The parameter sets each axis to have three basic axes X Y Z or the parallel axis Note 3 The level remains unchanged in the G17 G18 G19 not be specified Note 4 When the system is turned on its initialization is defaulted to G18 state i e ZX level Note 5 When the system repetitivel
146. 3 Fig 4 14 Set the correct imaginary tool nose Potes for executing the toolsetting in offset cancel mode Set the tool nose radius R and imaginary tool nose direction in TOOL OFFSET amp WEAR window as following Table 4 3 Program GOO X100 Z50 M3 T0101 S600 Position start spindle tool change and execute tool compensation G42 G00 X0 Z3 Set tool nose radius compensation 160 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation G01 ZO F300 Start cutting X16 Z 14 F200 G02 X28 W 6 R6 G01 W 7 X32 Z 35 G40 G00 X90 Z40 Cancel tool nose radius compensation G00 X100 Z50 T0100 M30 I 4 2 Tool Nose Radius Compensation Offset Path 4 2 1 Inner and outer side U im O e S 9 3 3 e Inside is defined that an angle at intersection of two motion blocks is more than or equal to 180 Outside is 0 180 Workpiece side I Inner ee Programmed path ie f rl a 180 ey Programmed path Outer Workpiece side 0 x a lt 180 lt gt Fig 4 15 4 2 2 Tool traversing when starting tool 3 steps to execute tool nose radius compensation tool compensation creation tool compensation execution and tool compensation canceling Tool traverse is called tool compensation creation starting tool from offset canceling to G41 or G42 execution Note Meanings of S L C in the following figures are as follows S Stop point of single block L linear C c
147. 499 99 mm pitch metric thread 0 01 inch pitch 9 98 inch pitch Cinch thread An alarm occurs when R value exceeds the above range and the pitch exceeds the permissive range because of R increment decrement or the pitch is I negative D A O Q y Q 3 3 Q Starting point Fig 2 58 Caution itis the same as that of G32 Example First pitch of starting point 4mm increment 0 2mm per rev of spindle X Fig 2 59 Variable pitch thread machining Value 61 4mm 2 4mm total cutting depth 1mm total cutting cycle 2 times 1 tool infeed 0 7mm Program 00010 st G00 X60 Z4 M03 S500 G00 U 10 Tool infeed 50 GOO U 0 7 Tool infeed G34 W 78 F4 J5 K2 RO 2 Variable pitch thread cutting Tool retraction cd Z returns to initial point i Tool infeed again 450 OAN Tool infeed 94 Chapter If G Commands GOO U 1 0 Variable pitch thread cutting G34 W 78 F4 J5 K2 RO 2 Tool retraction G00 U10 Z returns to initial point Z4 M30 I 2 16 3 Thread cutting cycle G92 Command function Tool infeeds in radial X direction and cuts in axial Z or X Z direction from starting point of cutting to realize straight thread taper thread cutting cycle with constant thread pitch Thread run out in G92 at the fixed distance from end point of thread cutting Z executes thread interpolation and X retracts with exponential or linear acceleration and X retracts at rapidly traverse s
148. 5 II O Oo um 9 ct O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR b When the pause the tool stops running is being executed the running stops c When functions of M S and T are executed running stops after completing the functions of M S and T When feed hold indication is on press m on the machine operation panel the machine runs again 6 Running end F F Press an on MDI panel or DNC program executes M30 command reset after running ends DNC ABSOLUTE A 154 BBB PRG DATA T zi 4 mm min 1 8n mmf min S A rev min ete gu 1u una PRG NAME DNC MG NF FED OVAL 156 HDL F 4 AAP OWA THE PART CNT 11141298 SPI OVAL S6 AUN TIME BH BB Hh Jug F 184 CUT TIME Be Ba BH ZH ECHTE a Fig 6 8 Note In DNC program the program calling and jumping commands can t be executed 6 4 Auto Running Control 6 4 1 Machine and miscellaneous function lock Use the machine lock and execute the machine program but the machine remains still only the tool position changing situation displays All axes are locked and the movement of all axes is stopped Moreover the locking miscellaneous function can lock the commands of M S and T Same as the machine lock it s for checking the programs Chapter VI Auto Operation 6 4 1 1 Machine lock Execute the machine program but the machine remains still only the tool position changing situ
149. 5 2 Searching and setting PLC Value PLC DATA In the ladder window cress to enter PLC Value state display window including K D DT DC parameter setting shown in Fig 3 25 AUTO reser SYSTEM gt PLC gt PLC DATA gt K fe Bl es 3 2 PF kai 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 a 1 e a a a a a O K 8 0 a i DU ao 5 a a 8 e A i 8 D Kagos a B B t KumG a A i A 0 i i i ct KBBg i A i i i A i i O kaaas 8 ao 8 8 8 i 8 8 5 Kmwg A a i i a i i KOIA A i A A A i oai 8 8 i i a KGG08 working memory BIT 9 52 58 SS e eS eS AA Fig 3 25 1 K parameter setting 1 In PLC Value state display window press to enter K parameter setting display window 2 Press th l V l l to select the required modifying ADOR SAH E parameter state bit or press A to input the selected K variable press and the cursor positions to the parameter INPUT 3 Press repetitively to switch the state bit O and 1 and to modify the state of K parameter state bit 4 Press if l V EM to move the cursor and the modification is completed E Press input the required K parameter address to position the cursor to the K parameter address 226 Chapter III Windows 2 D parameter setting 1 In PLC Value state display window press EN to enter D pa
150. 5 mm Z 8 2488 mm PRG NAME 05555 NC INFO FED OYRI 28 HDL F Xl RAP OYRI FB PART CNT 3 SPI OYRI 545 AUN TIME 00 04 29 GAJ X24 6 Z 1 88 R75 5 Fl aaa AGI x28 H8 FBBHA JOG 24 CUT TIME 00 00 11 16 16 48 MODAL PART NT II Fig 1 6 gt Displaying alarm When the failure occurs in the course of run the corresponding mistaken commands and the alarm message are displayed in the window shown in Fig 1 7 The detailed explanations related to the alarm message are referred to Appendix O D um 9 ct O 5 AUTO RESET ALAMCI ZT ALARM 1 MESSAGE gt ALARM MESSAGE alm Mo content 18 23 32 ALARM ALARM DIAGNOS OSCILLO GSKLink MESSAGE HISTORY GRAPH Fig 1 7 gt Displaying machined workpiece count and operation time Display the machined workpiece count run time and cutting time in the current position display window shown in Fig 1 8 out time 186 Chapter Overview AUTO reser ABSOLUTE A ga A jo PR 05555 GAS X24 6 Z 1 88 R75 5 F1 Bae Gl X28 8 FSBBB T 0000 E e mm min JAAA mm min S a 5AA rev min g NC INFO FED OYRI 24 HD F x RAP OYRI F PART CNT 16 part cnt SPI OYRI 585 AUN TIME 88 84 58 run time JOG 24 CUT TIME 00 00 41 out time 15 41 17 F REL MAC ALL MODAL SET REL CLEAR PART CNT Fig 1 8 1 4 System 1 4 1 System panel GSK988T system panel a
151. 7 of the enough quantity of the required parts outputs to PLC However if the quantity is O it is regarded as infinitely great not output to PRTSF 11 22 Parameters Related to MPG Feed 7 2 6 5 4 3 1 0 o 1 ee Default Setting 0000 0000 0 JHD Manual handle feed in JOG feed mode and incremental feed in the manual handle feed 0 Invalid 1 Valid MPG MODE JOG MODE MPG MODE JOG feeding ox o MPG feeding o f 9 f o increment feeding Lx a 4 HPF When a Manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is issued 0 The rate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate and the handle pulses corresponding to the excess are ignored 1 the exceeded be not ignored II O Oo 9 O 5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 L qd o 4 pd 1 HN x Parameter Type Bit axis Default Setting 0000 0000 0 HNGx Axis movement direction for rotation direction of manual pulse generator 0 Same in direction 1 Reverse in direction 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Modification authority J System Default setting J 0000 0000 2 HNT The manual handle feed incremental feed magnification is 0 Multiplied by 1 1 Multiplied by 10 Value Range 0 2 Default Setting 1 Set the number of manual pulse generators 7113 Manual handle feed magnification M MFM 356 Chapter Xl Parameters Value Range 1 127 Default Setting 100 Set the magnification when manual handle feed movement selection
152. 88T Turning CNC System User Manual Note 1 Only when the operation authority is above level 3 can the copying and pasting be executed Note 2 When the output file is too big and the copy time is too logn the system displays the processing and the user can switch the page and does operations in the other pages 4 2 5 Arraying programs E SORT BY SORT BY SORT BY In program window press and the user can view MWE 53 TIME which can make the programs to be displayed orderly SORT BY SORT BY SORT Ev i Press MWE X SF TINE repetitively and the sort order of programs in all types can be switched between the positive sequence and the inverted order 4 3 Editing and Rewriting a Program 4 3 1 Editing a program Creating a program based on Chapter 4 1 2 which is shown in Fig 4 8 EDIT RESET PROG gt LOCAL DIRECTORY gt PRG OBI11 selected ABSOLUTE B111 08111 X 31 552 Z A ABA n So RELAT YE D U 31 552 t y 8 AAA er MACHINE X 31 552 7 B Ban uS 11 35 25 LOAD SAVE CANCEL ED LOCATE COPY aj PASTE DEL BLK gt Fig 4 8 Edit a program based on the commands of GSK988T Programming User Manual e Soft key introduction in edit window LOAD the current program is edited pressing it can make the program in the executable state at the moment the window skips to the position window and t
153. 9 3 3 e I U im O e um 9 3 3 e C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE When MOO are other G command are in the same block the system executes the command in the block then MOO and last stops running 3 1 4 Optional stop M01 Command format M01 or M1 Command function after the block containing M01 is executed the system stops the automatic run and the single block stopping signal lights MO1 is valid when the OPTIONAL STOP on the machine operation panel is pressed 3 1 5 Subprogram call M98 Command format M98 Poooonunuuu NEN Called subprogram number Call times Command function In Auto mode after other commands in the current block are executed in M98 CNC calls subprograms specified by P When the subprogram is called one time oooo can be omitted in inputting the number ocooonuun behind P at the same time the leading zero of the called subprogram number can be omitted and the system does not alarms Example M98 P12 it expresses to call the subprogram O0012 one time the leading zero cannot be omitted when the subprogram call times are more than one The called subprogram name in M98 must be the program in the system and be less than 9999 and the subprogram name must be input The specified call times in M98 is 1 9999 The called subprogram format in M98 is the following The last end of the subprogram must be M99 instead of M30 its program compiling format is the
154. ABS AB ROUND RO FIX FI FUP FOE LN EXP 132 Chapter If G Commands EX BIN BI BCD BC AND AN iiaa by OR XOR AO c 2 EXP function input value cannot be more than 80 otherwise the system alarm 5 5 3 character in lt expression gt in the right of assignment or in the bracket is I taken as the division operator instead of optional block skip code 4 The bracket can use 5 level including the used bracket in the function and the system alarms when it exceeds 5 level 5 The angle units of the triangle function SIN COS ASIN ACOS TAN and ATAN are degrees for example 90 30 is 90 5 degree 6 i ASIN j value range When NO 6004 No O digit NAT is set to 0 90 270 When NO 6004 No O digit NAT is set to 1 90 90 When j exceeds between 1 and 1 the system alarms and j can be a constant 7 i ACOS j range 0 180 When j exceeds between 1 and 1 the system alarms and j can be a constant 8 In i ATAN k ATAN j and k are the weight length of two right angle sides as follows When NO 6004 No 0 digit NAT is set to 0 0 360 Example when 1 ATAN 1 1 is specified 1 225 When NO 6004 No O digit NAT is set to 1 180 180 Example when 1 ATAN 1 1 is specified 1 135 4j K can be the constant In division or TAN 90 the division is specified to 0 P S alarms The function ROU
155. AD31 Series Tool Post allowable D 00 OS eis nappa ore DT0035 1000 4000 AK31 Series Tool Post lock proximity switch signal detection time upper limit EN 2 3 3 Parameter DC DC PLC initial Minimum Maximum DCO0000 50 200 The output voltage value of inverter during cen ee wd DCO0001 5 50 The output voltage value of inverter during CU OS 5 sendemsorstcgerctene 001V 2 3 4 Parameter D Internal controlled axis number corresponding to X axis manual movement key the key is invalid when it is set to 0 391 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE Internal controlled axis number corresponding to Y axis manual movement key the key is invalid when it is set to 0 Internal controlled axis number corresponding to Z axis manual movement key the key is invalid when it is set to 0 Internal controlled axis number corresponding to the 4th axis manual movement key the key is invalid when it is set to 0 Internal controlled axis number corresponding to C axis manual movement key the key is invalid when it is set to 0 2 4 PLC Address A Alarms the Followings are Referred to V2 03b Standard PLC Alarm Address A Instruction Address No Mesage A0000 0 1000 Tool change time is too long A0000 1 1001 TIMSISEO ds is over The current tool position is inconsistent with the expected one A0000 2 1002 Tool Tool change uncompleted uncompleted A0000 3 1003 The tailstock
156. ALI Lo A is disabled M10 M11 command cannot be executed A0000 4 4004 BEUSEIS from the tailstock is not allowed during spindle rotation A0000 5 1005 eda enabling function is closed Spindle cannot be gt D 5 Q x A0000 6 1006 EO cuo door is not closed Machining or spindle start is forbidden A0001 0 1008 The chuck cannot be released during spindle rotation A0001 1 4009 The chuck is not clamping tightly spindle cannot be started A0001 2 1010 Chuck clamping signal is not found during spindle rotation A0001 3 1011 The chuck is unclamped Spindle start is forbidden A0001 4 1012 he chuck function is disabled Command M12 M13 cannot be executed A0001 5 1013 Tool post locked signal is not found at the end of tool change 392 Appendix 2 Standard Ladder Function Allocation A0001 6 1014 M code undefined A0001 7 1015 Undefined alarm A0002 0 1016 MO3 M04 specification error A0002 1 1017 Automate gear changing is forbidden during spindle rotation A0002 2 1018 DO setting error DO should be less than or equal to 8 and greater than 0 A0002 3 1019 Undefined alarm 0000000000000 alarm A0002 4 1020 doi EE gear changing is disabled Bena re parameter Cycle start is not allowed at feeding hold position A0003 0 1024 The specified tool number is larger than the maximum number of tools DO Specified M code invalid Spindle orientation time is too long A0003 3 1027 Chuck clamp release in posit
157. AZ DL Z H H H H H H H H a HFH FEE a H H H H H H l H n i HJ x DL Zx RN O D o HAHH x S5EQ s INI le IB 13 14 PARAM PITERROR SYSTEM MEMORY ALLE CNC SERY MFO DEY CE PARAM PARAM Fig 3 15 3 3 1 1 System parameter window CNE PARAMETER On the system window press and Ahn to access the system parameter setting window The window displays the detailed message of the user parameter set and rewrite the system parameter in the window back up the parameter set currently and initialize the parameter default by the system or the parameter of user backup In MDI mode when the parameter switch is on and the operation authority is above level 3 the parameter can be set Press l 0 Or V to select the parameter to be SEARCH rewritten or press to input the parameter sequence number to be selected press JK b and the cursor positions in the parameter like parameter 0000 which is shown as C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR INPUT above press the parameter can be rewritten parameter 0000 is shown as the following figure MDI reser SYSTEM gt PARAMETER gt CHC PARAMETER BABA SEQ INI E BEBE 0123 BPS 115288 6138 OWN A A A H A A A H A938 AMEN i i i i i i d 1661 NM B B ul B B B a B 1002 AZR DLZ M A ie A H A A E 1004 RPR ISC A A A H A A 10
158. BDBO 8 gsaaaaaaa 8 mBBOBBBDBD 8 GBB1188B80 9 QBO80BBDBO 9 mBOBBBDBO 9 GBBOBBBEDBO 9 mBOBBBBDBO 18 BBBBBDED 18 BBBBBDED 18 BBBBBBDBD 1 BB881811 BBBBBDED 11 BBBBBBDED 11 BBBBBBDBD 11 BBBBBDBO 12 BBBBBDED 12 BBBBBBDED 12 BBBBBBDEO 12 BB881811 13 BBBBBBDEO 13 BBBBBDED 13 BBBBBBDBO 13 BBBBBDBO 14 BBBBBBDED 14 BBBBBBDED 14 BBBBBBDBD 14 BBBBBBDBD 15 BBBBBDBDO zi 15 BBBBBODO zi 15 PAPAAAAA zi 15 PAPAAAAA zi xBann BITB uu i 18 17 24 X v F G RA K SEARCH Fig 3 29 Mio olf ole In the window ores 6 and the system displays the state message of X Y F G at the moment press to switch X Y F G press t V to view X Y F G There is the annotation of each parameter below the window when the parameter is viewed CHANGE Press to view the detailed annotation of each bit of each parameter 228 Chapter III Windows Press to position the cursor to search the parameter position The search can be done in the whole window and the parameter name and the parameter name must be input correctly A Press AL the window display returns to the previous menu 3 4 Setting Window SETTING Press to access the setting window It mainly includes windows of the tool offset and CNC setting and macro variable etc The content can be checked through the corresponding soft keys The structure of the soft key layers is shown as below Macro variable Tool offset CNC setting setting II Toa Too See section
159. C System User Manual Tool nose center path stop I Programmed path undercutting Fig 4 68 machining an inner sidestep less than 90 U im O e um 9 3 3 e e Corner motion When two or more than movement vector in the end point of one block create the tool moves to another vector from the vector linear which is called the corner motion When the single block is valid the tool stops in the last vector When two vectors coincide the system does not execute the corner motion and the second vector will be ignored When the two axis increments of the movement vector in the compensation level are less than the setting values of No 5010 CLV the second vector is ignored but it is not ignored when the interpolation block is the arc Tool nose center path Less than or equal to setting lt i value of the parameter f e e Ignore the vector Programmed path Actual path Fig 4 69 corner motion e Changing compensation value a The system executes the tool change in the compensation cancel mode the compensation value is changed When the compensation value is changed in the compensation mode No 5001 Bit4 EVR can set whether the compensation value change is valid from the nest T command or the next buffer block 176 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation Tool nose center path Change Use the new compensation Programmed path compensation value When the nex
160. D Four kind of combincation of U W correspond to 4 kind of machining path Note 7 When the set first thread cutting depth is more than the total cutting depth one roughing is executed and its cutting depth is equal to the total cutting depth of roughing Note 8 When the least cutting amount or finishing allowance is more than thread tooth height in the course of thread roughing an alarm occurs Note 9 When the run out length is more than the machining thread length of long axis an alarm occurs Note 10 The system automatically checks the spindle speed before machining an alarm occurs when the spindle speed is not commanded The spindle speed cannot be checked in the course of machining Note 11 The run out format is the same that of G32 when there is J K Example Fig 2 65 thread M68x6 X axis Cutting fig in Z axis Fig 2 65 Program 00013 G50 X100 Z50 M3 S300 Set workpiece coordinate system start spindle and specify spindle speed G00 X80 Z10 Rapid traverse to starting point of machining G76 P020560 Q150 RO 1 Finishing 2 times chamfering width 0 5mm tool angle 60 min cutting depth 0 15 finishing allowance 0 1 102 Chapter If G Commands G76 X60 64 Z 62 P3680 Q1800 F6 Tooth height 3 68 the first cutting depth 1 8 G00 X100 Z50 Return to starting point of program M30 End of program 2 17 Constant Surface Speed Control G96 Constant Rotational Speed Control G97 Command fu
161. Default Setting 0000 0000 2 ZCL Local coordinate system when the manual reference return was performed is 0 Not cancel 1 Cancel 7 WZR Upon power on the workpiece coordinate system memorized is 0 Not return to that specified by G54 1 Returned to that specified by G54 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Eq eae Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 0 EWD The shift direction of the workpiece coordinate system is II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 II O Oo m 9 oO 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE 0 The direction specified by the external workpiece zero point offset value 1 In the opposite direction to that specified by the external workpiece zero point offset value 1 EWS Shift value of the workpiece coordinate system and external workpiece zero point offset value are 0 stored in the separate memory area 1 stored in the same memory area the work piece coordinate system movement amount is same as the external work piece zero point offset amount 2 G50 If G50 command for setting a coordinate system is specified 0 G50 is executed and no alarm is issued 1 G50 is not executed and an alarm is issued 3 RLC Local coordinate system O is not cancelled by reset 1 is cancelled by reset Extern workpiece zero point offset value EWO Modification authority Equipment management authority Value Range 9999 9999 9999 9999 Parame
162. Deleting the configuration file affects the system run please do not delete it at will 248 Chapter III Windows AUTO RN LINEAR CUTTING MESSAGE gt GSKLink gt CONFIG FILES LIST cfg file name driverTvpe size byte modified time 188 184 DAT2838C 34 978 2917 18 25 03 18 82 1a 584 DAT2838C 11 828 29 7 18 25 83 18 02 181 183 DAT2B858C 34 975 2917 18 25 03 18 82 1a 184 DAT285B8C 34 969 2917 18 25 83 18 802 181 583 DAT2B858C 11 818 2917 18 25 03 18 82 a 584 DAT285B8C 11 834 2917 18 25 83 14 82 182 183 DAT2875C 34 075 2917 18 25 03 18 02 192 184 DAT2875C 34 958 2817 18 25 83 18 82 182 583 DAT2875C 11 828 2917 18 25 03 18 82 1 2_584 DAT2875C 11 828 2017 10 25 93 18 02 183 183 DAT21 BBC 34 875 2917 18 25 03 18 82 183 184 DAT21 BAC 34 969 2017 10 25 83 18 82 enn 281 DAPB3C 24 812 201 7 18 25 03 18 82 enn 282 DAPASC 24 128 2017 10 25 83 18 02 241 281 DAY 3H25C 24 8017 2917 18 25 03 18 02 en 282 DAY3 25C 24 115 241 7 18 25 83 18 82 18 53 34 DELETE E esit Je ee ee e EH Fig 3 45 Note The detailed operation about GSK CAN is referred to GSK988T Installation and Debugging User Manual II 3 6 Graph Window GRAPH Press to access the graph windows and it mainly includes the windows of the graph setting the path display and the simulation graph etc and check the content of each window through pressing the corresponding soft keys The structure of the software layers
163. Drilling Operation Tool Function command axis operation at bottom retraction G83 Z Interval feed Pause Rapid End drilling cycle cutting feed traverse G87 X Interval feed Pause Rapid Side drilling cycle cutting feed traverse G85 Cutting feed Pause Cutting feed End boring cycle G89 Cutting feed Pause Cutting feed Side boring cycle G80 Cancel drilling fixed cycle Positioning axis and drilling axis G confirms the drilling axis and the positioning axis is the others except for the drilling axis Drilling axis Positioning axis Note C axis can be omitted Fixed cycle is cancelled G80 or G commands included in Group 01 can cancel the fixed cycle 2 19 1 End drilling cycle G83 side drilling cycle G87 Command format G83 X U C H ZW R PQ F K M or G87Z W C H XU R PQ F K M Command definition X CoZ C It is hole position data and valid in the specified block Z W or X U The absolute value specifies the coordinates of hole bottom 107 I JV VIT 3 eT oy Pa C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE or the incremental value specifies the distance from R level to the hole bottom which is value in the specified block It is the distance from the initial level to point R is specified by radius value with direction Its unit and range are shown in the following table It is pause time at the bottom ISB system unit is 1ms ISC system unit is 0 1ms It i
164. END The numerical value n following DO and END is used to specify the execute range label of the specified program n value is 1 2 3 The system alarms when n is not 1 2 3 134 Chapter If G Commands IF WHILE logical operation character rules are as follows Operator substitute character definition EQ NE GT GE LT LE Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 lt gt E gt gt s 2 lt lt When the system transfers to the block with the serial number n and specifies the another exceeding the serial number range between 1 and 99999 P S alarms and the expression can specifies the serial number The conditional expression must include the operator which is inserted in the middle of two variables or the variable and the constant and is closed by the bracket The expression can be replaced by the variable The number following DO and the one following END specify the execution range label of the specified program and the label value is 1 2 3 The system alarms when n is not 1 2 3 The label 1 3 in the repetition DO END can be used many times but P S alarms when there is the cross repetition superposition in DO range When the system specifies DO instead of WHILE statement it creates the limitless repetition between DO and END In using EQ NE logical operation expression Null and zero have the different result Null is taken as the zero in
165. EW LOAD OPEN gt Fig 3 11 iii Note Others related to the program window and its window are referred to the Chapter VI II 3 2 2 MDI program PROGRAMI HDI Press to enter the program window press to display MDI program input box G F S mode and the executed M command In MDI working mode the most 10 lines of the NC program can be input in MDI input box shown in Fig 3 12 MDI reser O Oo am 9 O 5 PROGRAM gt MDI ABSOLUTE GOB U 2 I 50 F100 M38 X 95 5000 Z 41 6500 RELATIVE U 9 939 I 41 65008 MACHINE MODAL G GAI G97 G98 G21 GA G5 G2 Gen x 9 9998 G67 G54 GIB GlI3 G64 Z 41 8588 S rev min F amp mm min M na T 0003 16 09 31 LOCAL HS CUR NEXT DEL BLK CLEAR Fig 3 12 In MDI working mode the system can display the soft key and Press to delete the NC command where the cursor is Press and all NC commands in MDI input box are cleared 213 GSR C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual 3 2 3 Item times MA Ag CUR NEXT Press to enter the program window press to display the current block being executed and the NC command of the next block SNOWN in Fig 3 13 MD x PROGRAM gt CURRENT NEXT BLOCK ABSOLUTE current next x 85 568168 41 588 RELAT YE U 9 9398 y 41 588 MACHINE x 9 9398 Z 4 8588 T 0003 16 12 12 il LOCAL
166. Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 2 FCK The machining profile in multiple repetitive cycle G71 G72 G73 is 0 Not checked 1 Checked C axis clamp M code in drilling canned cycle CMD Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0 347 II O Oo 9 O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE Value Range 0 99 Set M code which can lock C axis in the canned cycle of drilling holes 11 15 2 Parameters Related to the Thread Cutting Cycle 5130 Chamfering distance in the thread cutting cycles G76 G92 THD Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0 Value Range 0 99x 0 1 screw pitch The parameter sets the beveling value of G76 and G92 thread cutting cycle 11 15 3 Parameters Related to the Combined Canned Cycle 5132 Depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 G72 THC Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 1000 Value Range 0 99 999 999 Set the M nasum value of G71 and G72 combined canned cycle ADEN 0 001 0 0001 metric system E 0 0001 0 00001 ich inch system 5133 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 G72 MCE Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0 Value Range 0 99 999 999 Set the run out value of G71 and G72 combined canned cycle
167. F3 X38 X36 4 X36 GO X150 Z50 T0100 M5 M9 M13 M30 Chapter X Processing Examples Chamfering Return to the tool change point Change into 4 tool set the spindle speed as 200 r min Close to the work piece Threading cycle Feed 1mm and cut the 2 time Feed 0 6mm and cut the 3 time Feed 0 4mm and cut the 4 time Return to the tool change point Change into 1 tool The spindle is off The cooling is off Release the chuck End of a program 1 The tool traverses to the safe position in MDI mode the system executes T0100 and cancels the tool offset on the program window 2 The tool traverses and cuts along the work piece face as shown in Fig 10 6 3 When Z axis remains still the tool is released along X axis and the spindle rotation stops the MEASURE system is switched to the tool offset window the cursor moves to No 001 offset is pressed and the system enters the measure input window ZO in the input window OK is input and Bd is pressed and so Z offset value has been input 4 The tool traverses and cuts along the outer circle of the work piece as shown in Fig 10 7 307 II O Oo um 9 r O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSR Fig 10 7 5 When X axis remains still the tool is released along Z axis and the spindle rotation stops and the outer dimension of the workpiece is measured the measured value is 135mm the system i
168. F5 he setting of pulse frequency for backlash compensation in BCD code Setting frequency setting value 1 Kpps EN ERN NES NEUE SN NE ee ee 4 gt j E u j il SSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual NI N NO Oo Oo gt n 2071 Backlash acceleration effective duration BAT Parameter Type Word axis Value Range 0 100 ms Default Setting 40 Set backlash acceleration effective duration II O Oo m 9 Oo 5 11 9 Parameters Related to Input Output 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Ed ee a ee 3 a Default Setting 1000 0000 7 ESP ESP alarm signal X0 5 O Alarm when the signal is O 1 Alarm when the signal is 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 L1 POR Jp 3 Default Setting 0010 0000 5 OTH Theovertravel limit signal is 0 Checked 1 Not checked 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 D LL a Default Setting 0000 0000 0 GDC As the deceleration signal of the reference position return 0 Use X signal 1 Use G196 X signal is invalid 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 330 Chapter XI Parameters L4 EMI Jn oq E a Parameter Type Bit axis Default Setting 0010 0000 5 DECx Deceleration signal of the reference position return 0 decelerate when the signal is 0 1 decelerate when the signal is 1 3010 Time lag in strobe signal MF TF SF MFT Value Range 16 ms 32767 ms Default Setting 16
169. FED OVAL 150 HDL F XI RAP OVA 10A PART CNT 11 RAP OVA 10A PART CNT A 2 SPI OVRI 5A RUN TIME A0 07 19 SPI ORI SEX RUN TIME 88 87 19 is D JOG F 158 CUT TIME a a8 Jog F 158 CUT TIME BB 88 88 o 15 48 36 15 52 A o MODAL SET REL CLEAR MODAL SET REL CLEAR PART CNT PART CNT Fig 3 9 3 1 8 Clearing run time CLEAR In the position window press RUNTIME to clear the currently machining workpiece count and the mode display window is shown in Fig 3 10 MC INFO FED OVAL 1564 HOL F x i FED OVAL 150 HDL F XI RAP OVRI IBEX PART CNT 11 RAP OVRI 1AA PART CNT n SPI OVRI S AUN TIME BB 87 18 SPI OVAL 58x PUN TIME BB 87 18 JOG F 158 CUT TIME 68 88 88 JOG F 158 CUT TIME aa ae 15 48 36 15 52 Ba MODAL SET REL CLEAR MODAL SET REL CLEAR PART CNT PART CNT Fig 3 10 211 II O Oo mm 9 r O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR 3 2 Program Window PROGRAMI Press to enter the program window including the local directory MDI program item times display and also the U disk directory is displayed when the U disk is inserted 3 2 1 Local directory and U disk directory Local directory LOCAL Press EE to load open copy paste create save as delete rename search and other operations for the programs in the local directory The local directory in the program is shown in Fig 3 10 AUTO RESET PROGRAM gt LOCAL DIRECTORY prog
170. Function of the machine panel each key defined by GSK988T standard PLC program refer to the following list State indication The indicator e for each axis d RUM p ZO a reference Running indicator position return A ALM incidi NIS Self defined indicator indicator GEAR TOOL NO Gear tool number indicator Press key definition Mode during valid Keys function 19 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Mod duri lid Keys Function 7 e nng en function The program and MDI command Auto mode MDI mode Feed hold key running pause and DNC mode The program and MDI command Auto mode MDI mode Cycle start key running start and DNC mode Auto mode MDI mode edit mode reference Feedrate position return mode Adjusting the feedrat override knob in tein tenes MPG mode single step mode manual mode and DNC mode e h S OVERRIDE Auto mode MDI mode edit mode reference II e Adiusting the spindle speed onl H009 Spindle Jusung p P i position return mode override keys obse a MPG mode single ste S OVERRIDE y value control mode is valid g p mode manual mode and DNC mode e h 5 OVERRIDE O D um 9 O 5 Auto mode MDI mode Edit mode Reference Adjust the feedrate position return mode MPG mode Step mode DNC mode Feedrate override knob Reference position return Manua
171. GSR When feed hold indicator is on press B on the machine panel the machine runs again 2 Stop the memorizer running Press on MDI panel auto running ends and resets Note The program runs from the line which the cursor is before D is pressed check whether the cursor is on the block to run 6 1 3 Running from any block e Q PROGRAM 1 In the above figure 2 press AUTO to access the auto mode press to access the program window press or to select the program content window press or n the cursor moves toward the block to run or on the program window shown as the above is g OPEN S figure 1 press or to select the program to run press to access the o SOOS w mv program editing window and then press or the cursor moves toward the block to run LOAD and then press It returns to the position window 2 If the mode defaults G M T and F commands in the block which the cursor is and the mode doesn t comply with that of the block the next step can be operated only after the corresponding mode function is executed Li S E 3 Press 419 to access the auto mode and press to start the program the program begins executing from the selected block 6 1 4 Skip When a block is followed by the P js pressed to start the skip mode and the skip switch indicator lights ma pressed and the block is skipped and is not executed Taking example of the 4 line of the following program O000
172. ION WORKPIECE ORIGIN TP LEFT TOOL POST FRONT HAZ AALS f HAZ AALS i VET AALS x VET AALS y SCALE 2 cLALE Z AXIS SHIFTEmm Aaaa LENGTHUimm 154 HH X AXIS SHIFTCmm AAAA DIAMETERUmm 1H Hi Z AXIS SHIFT mm K AXIS SHIFT nn 0 000 T aaaa 14 52 Hb Fig 8 1 RELAT IYE 58 HAH 1H Hl 3 Press or to select the item to be set such as the cross axis shown as below INPUT 4 Press and the selected item can be input such as the cross axis shown as below 292 Chapter VIl Setting and display graphs Chapter INPUT 5 Press Q Or V to select the item to be set and press to confirm the rewriting is completed 6 Repeat the above operation to set the other parameter Note 1 The setting on the window is only for the path display and the display on the graph simulation window Note 2 The path display and the graph simulation are executed based on the machine coordinate When the path and the graph are not displayed please modify the coordinate axis offset Note 3 The horizontal axis must be Z axis or the aixs which is parallel with Z 8 2 Path Graph Display and Operation Through the graph path display real time check the path which the tool traverses GRAPH 1 Press to access the graph window TRACK 2 On the graph window press OPER to access the path window display the program path which is being executed and it is shown as below AUTO RN LINEAR CUTTING GRAPH
173. Il Setting and display graphs Chapter HELGUVER 2 Press and the simulation graph can be restored as the original size and position and the previous simulation graph message can be cleared f Vv a D m 3 Respectively press Or and the simulation graph can move up down left or right Note The name for each axis is set by parameter 1020 and each axis name can be set as the different letters and then at the bottom of the path window the coordinate level and the path coordinate names can change correspondingly II O Oo um 9 r O 5 295 II O D um 9 ct O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR Chapter IX U disk Use 9 1 Sending a Program Create a file in the U disk root catalog and the file is saved as NCPROG The program required to send is copied to the file File F Edit E ViewiY Favorite A Tool I Help H t O ea O F JO Search Document 111 Add T G HCPROG b Goto i p a ooo00e ponas W cr B cx i ox pn d KB m 1 KB T KB 00003 m CHC EM i Fig 9 1 After the above operations are executed the U disk is inserted into the USB interface When occurs in the bottom right corner it means the U disk is connected at the moment USE pressed is pressed to enter the U disk file directory As shown in Fig 9 2 press T V to select the required program to copy press Le the selected program in the U disk
174. LL Lies UninstallFiles LPS VOFF WMP Hes Sysfiles L MACRO MCO HB Regist ry c3 PLC PROGRAM Lies Files I 3 STDPLC LD2 Drivers L 3 STDPLC ENU LD2 Lies vIAS3G UniChrome Pro IGP O NC PROGRAM Lea lA Standard PCI to ISA Bric E HA 08111 CNC Lies lA Standard Host Bridge I 3 AAAI CNC Lies VI CPU to AGP2 AGP3 Cont t LPS 08826 CNC Li Realtek AC 97 Audio for VIA e SERVO CONFIG FILE C le LPS 188 183 scg HB AutoStart LP 188 184 scg L Act ivex LA 100_504 scg 111 I 3 181 183 scg Microsoft Office 2H LP 181 184 scg HB Access zh cn m 181 583 scg Admin B 14 58 47 i PARAM pied SYSTEM MEMORY PLG SWITCH OUTPUT E INFO DEY CE CURSOR Fig 9 3 3 There are five sub files of the system file in the window PARAM PAR parameter TOFF CMP tool offset TLIF TLL tool life WOFF WMP pitch compensation MACRO MCO macro variable INPUT Move up down to the file to backup press to select the file When the cursor selects INPUT the file at the moment is pressed to select all files in the folder as shown in Fig 9 3 OUTPUT 4 is pressed after the file is selected and when Select Output Path is popped OK is pressed to copy the file after the selection has been done Pull out the U disk after the file copy has been completed 4 TCH CURSOR 5 When the backup is needed to recover the U disk is inserted is pressed to INPUT switch the cursor the U disk the cursor
175. M E servo id was Modify para No 9020 set for control axis Parameters back up Check the memory or power on again failure Parameters recover Check whether parameters are being written in or failure power on and retry Duplicated were set Servo comm same ois none Cs axis and spindle Modify para No 3704 No 8133 No 9020 No 9030 xipueddy comm id inconsistent between Modify para No 3704 No 8133 No 9020 No 9030 the Cs axis and spindle Servo comm id the same between different Modify para No 9030 spindle turn off the A parameter which requires the power off was input turn off power Number of CNC controllable axes exceeds the total number Check para No 1010 and 8130 372 Appendix 1 Alarm List Duplicated axis d XIS Modify para No 1022 attribution were set Duplicated trol No were set 455 Attribution of rotary axis Para No 1006 and No 1022 conflict and axis attribution of rotary axis cannot be 0 Modify para No 1006 or No 1022 1 3 Pulse Encoder Alarms Message Contents Return to reference 500 Manual reference return required position Absolute pulse encoder Absolute pulse encoder communication error Data 501 alarm communication transmission error Reasons include pulse encoder error failure cable or servo interface module failure Absolute pulse encoder overtime error Data transmission error Reasons include pulse encoder error cable or servo in
176. M code block and G84 block Modify the program Unallowed M code in rigid In rigid tapping rigid tapping M code can t be in the tapping same block with M code for Cs axis clamping in canned cycle for drilling Modify the program Servo spindle increment in positioning cmd was cmd in rigid tapping specified in rigid tapping Modify the program C axis commanded in The program specified a movement along the Cs axis spindle mode when the signal CON G277 7 is OFF Correct the program or consult PLC program to find the reason the signal is not turned on Spindle speed reached Spindle speed reached signal SAR was not detected signal not detected enabled when cutting Modify the program or check the PLC EE command in A function which can t be used in custom macro EN error in macro There is an error in other format than Formula program Modify the program Illegal variable number in AVAG not defined as a vanao number is designated 3 7 call Modify the program 205 The nesting of bracket The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper exceeds the upper limit limit quintuple Modify the program Illegal argument The SQRT argument is negative or BIN argument is negative or other values other 0 9 are present on each line of BIN argument Modify the program Quadruple macro modal call A total of four macro call and macro modal calls are nested Modify the program Macro control command Macro control command was speci
177. M2 Command function In Auto mode after other commands of current block are executed the automatic run stops and the cursor stops a block in M02 and does not return to the start of program The cursor must return to the start of program when the program is executed again Except for the above mentioned function executed by NC M02 function is also defined by PLC ladder diagram as follows current output of CNC is reserved after MO2 is executed 3 1 2 End of program run M30 Command format M30 Command function In Auto mode after other commands of current block are executed in M30 the automatic run stops the amount of workpiece is added 1 the tool nose radius compensation is cancelled and the cursor returns to the start of program whether the cursor return to the start of program or not is defined by parameters Besides the above mentioned function executed by NC M30 function is also defined by PLC ladder diagram as follows the system closes M03 M04 or M08 signal output and outputs MO5 signal after M30 is executed 3 1 3 Program stop M00 Command format MOO or MO Command function the system stops the automatic run after MOO block is executed which is same that of the single block pausing to save the previous modal message i e which is equal to the program pause function Press the CYCLE START key on the operation panel to execute the follow block and the CNC continuously automatically runs 139 I U im O e um
178. MENTS GSKSBST Hi Ete ES C 9 33 07 PARAM PITERROR SYSTEM MEMORY PLC VERSION MONITOR PLC DATA gt INFO DEVICE Fig 3 21 The top in the window displays the current run mode and the state displays the ladder version message the ladder program of the current run its run state and others 3 3 5 1 Ladder monitoring display SYSTEM Press and then press the ladder soft key to enter the ladder window and press MONI TOR to enter the run monitor display window of the current PLC shown in Fig 3 22 223 II O Oo 9 2r O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR AUTO reser PLC gt MONITOR gt STDPLC ENU LD2 gt window Level etwork l network3 ESP alarm K10 7 1 0 external ESP input signal K0 5 high low level alarm R2 0 1 0 without with ESP alarm 0 5 K10 7 a iat xX0 5 K10 7 R2 0 EH m ips rtravel processing 256 RO 0 P30 l m l V 9 35 38 window2 window3 window4 SELECT SEARCH Level2 Pi Pl Fig 3 22 The user can search the ON OFF of the current contact the coil in the monitor window the current value of the timer and the count The displayed bottom color is blue when the contact and the coil are 0 5 ON and it is opposite to the window color when they are OFF For example EE means the 25 2 contact X0 5 ON means the coil Y25 2 OFF II 1 Search the window program In monitor window the system can monit
179. N N0030 G1 X50 Z0 F600 Approaching B point with 600mm min 15 I U im O e um 9 3 3 e CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE N0040 W 30 F200 Cutting from B point to C point N0050 X80 W 20 F150 Cutting from C point to D point NO060 GO X100 Z50 Rapidly retracting to A point N0070 T0100 Canceling the tool offset N0080 M5 S0 Stopping the spindle NO090 M9 Cooling OFF N0100 M13 Releasing workpiece N0110 M30 End of program spindle stopping and Cooling OFF The tool leaves the path of A B C D A after the above mentioned programs are executed A program consists of a sequence of blocks beginning with OXXXX program name and ending with 96 a block begins with block number omitted and ends with or See the general structure of program as Fig 1 10 U O e 9 3 3 e Program annotation Program name lo0008 CNC PROGRAM 20051020 N0010 G50 X0 Z0 Word Block skip character FIN0020 G1 X100 Z100 F200 or N0030 G2 U100 W50 R50 N0050 X100 Z100 Block number N0060 T0101 N0070 G1 X50 Z30 N0080 GO XO Z0 Character for end of block N0090 M30 Character for end of block m fo Program Fig 1 10 Structure of a program 1 5 4 Program name Format o AAAA Program number 0000 9999 the leading zero can be omitted Address O AAAA is number of a program name its range is 4 digit integer 0000 99989 the system a
180. NC Command format T aa oo Do Tool offset number the leading zero cannot be omitted Target tool number the leading zero cannot be omitted Command function The automatic tool post rotates to the target tool number and the tool offset of tool offset number commanded is executed The tool offset number can be the same as the tool number and also cannot be the same as it namely one tool can corresponds to many tool offset numbers After executing tool offset and then Too00 the system reversely offset the current tool offset and the system its operation mode from the executed tool length compensation into the non compensation which course is called the canceling tool offset called canceling tool compensation When the system is switched on the tool offset number and the tool offset number displayed by T command is the state before the system is switched off the tool offset number is in the cancelling state i e 00 state No 3032 sets T code digit and No 5002 Bit O LD1 sets the digit of tool offset number Toolsetting is executed to gain the position offset data before machining called tool offset and the system automatically executes the tool offset after executing T command when programs are running Only edit programs for each tool according to part drawing instead of relative position of each tool in the machine coordinate system If there is error caused by the wearing of tool directly 144 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compe
181. NC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE M28 suppose M28 is for the spindle cancelling rigid tapping mode M30 End of program 2 20 3 End Common Tapping Cycle G84 Side Common Tapping Cycle G88 When G84 G88 executes the common tapping the miscellaneous function controls the spindle start stop MO3 spindle CW MO4 spindle CCW and MO5 spindle stop the CNC checks the spindle rotation based to the spindle encode and the tapping axis rotates along with the spindle When the machine cannot use the rigid tapping function the common tapping mode provides an economical tapping method The spindle must use the flexible chuck or the tool uses the variable screw tap in the common tapping mode Command function when the spindle rotates one rotation Z axis moves one pitch which keeps consistent with the pitch of screw tap and forms one helical grooving in inner of the workpiece to complete the thread machining of inner hole one time Pay more attention to the difference between it and the spindle rigid tapping Command format G84 X U C H Z W R PF KM G88Z W C H X U R PF KM Command explanation Or X C orZ O ltis the hole position data and is valid only in the specified block the hole position data can specify other valid axes except for X Z C Z W or X U It specifies the coordinate value of hole bottom by using absolute coordinate or specifies the distance from R level to the hole bottom by using increment
182. ND is used to NC command or macro statement which rounds the data with the decimal point It is used to NC statement which rounds according to the least setting unit when it is used to the macro statement which rounds No 1 digit decimal point In executing 2 ROUND 3 when 321 2345 the variable 2 value is 1 In ISB increment metric input 2 1 2345 3 2 5456 G00 X322 the tool moves to 1 235mm GOO X 3 the tool moves to 2 546mm 10 For FUP FIX when the absolute value of the integer after execution is more than that of the original it is FUP when it is less than that it is FIX When 2 1 2 3 1 2 In executing 4 FUP 2 2 0 is assigned to 4 In executing 4 FIX 2 1 0 is assigned to 4 In executing 4 FUP 3 2 0 is assigned to 4 In executing 4 FUP 3 1 0 is assigned to 4 11 Logic operation OR XOR AND firstly are conversed the decimal into the binary D O Q Q 3 3 Q 9 WY and are executed in the binary by one digit to one digit Range 0 99999999 when it has the decimal point it is ignored Example 133 I U A O Q y Q 3 3 Q CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE 101 10 the binary is 00001010 102 12 the binary is 00001100 103 101 OR 102 Cor the operation result is 00001110 The window display result of macro variable is 101 10 000000 102 12 000000 103 14 000000 12 The function BIN converses the decimal into the bin
183. O Oo 9 O 5 6 7 FR1 FR2 the feedrate unit of feed per rotation in PLC axis control 0 0001mm rev 0 000001inch rev m 0 001mm rev 0 00001inch rev Se l ae 0 01mm rev 0 0001inch rev 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 p p p p p g Way of Validating After power on Default Setting 0000 0000 0 PIM If PLC control axis is linear axis the control commands are 0 Affected by inch system metric system 1 Not affected by inch system metric system 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 no wer pst _ aM Chapter XI Parameters Default Setting 0000 0000 0 CMV According to the commands sent by CNC PLC sends the axis control command after moving along the axis and before receiving the command signal of the miscellaneous function 0 P S No 130 alarms 1 The axis is processed as one PLC axis and is executed the set movement 1 NMT When PLC is processing one control command of some axis and CNC sends another command to command the axis PLC control axis is still 0 P S No 133 alarms 1 Not alarm 2 JFM Feedrate units of continuous feeding 06h of PLC control axis INCREMENT METRIC INPUT INCH INPUT ROTARY SYSTEM AXIS mm min 0 0 01inch min 1deg min IS B E X2 2 2 E M M LS Sms 0 001inch min 0 1deg min 0 200inch min 20deg min 5 2DSL When selecting the axes controlled by PLC is forbidden if the axes are tried Em n to exchange is 0 Failed and P S No 139 alarms S 1
184. O X136 Z2 Close to the work piece N0050 G71 U0 5 R0 5 F200 Cutting depth is 1mm the tool retracts for 1mm N0055 G71 P0060 Q0150 U0 25 W0 5 X axis leaves for 0 5mm 0 5mm surplus in Z axis N0060 GO X16 Close to the work piece face N0070 G1 Z 23 Turning 16 outer circle N0080 X39 98 Turning face N0090 W 33 Turning 39 98 outer circle N0100 X40 Turning face Le N0105 W 30 Turning 40 outer circle S N0110 G3 X80 W 20 R20 Turning convexo arc o N0120 G2 X120 W 20 R20 Turning concave arc N0130 G1 W 20 Turning 120 outer circle N0140 G1 X130 W 5 Taper turning angle N0150 G1 W 25 Turning 130 outer circle N0160 GO X150 Z185 Return to the tool change point after roughing N0170 T0202 Change into 2 tool execute 2 tool offset NO1 8 G70 P0060 Q0150 Finishing cycle NO19 GO X150 Z185 Return to the tool change point after roughing N0200 T0303 Change into 3 tool execute 3 tool offset N0210 GO Z 56 X42 Close to the work piece N0220 G1 X30 F100 Grooving 30 N0230 G1 X37 F300 Return N0240 G1 X40 W1 5 Chamfering N0250 GO X42 W30 Leave the grooving tool width N0260 G1 X40 N0262 G1 X37 W1 5 Chamfering N0264 G1 X10 Grooving 10 N0266 GO X17 Z 1 N0268 G1 X16 306 N0270 N0280 NO NO MO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Wo U U N U U N WW NR W Ww O C0 NY WB A o u N ae O O o O O N O O O 4 Toolsetting and run G1 X14 ZO F200 GO X150 Z50 T0404 S100 GO X42 Z 54 G92 X39 W 34
185. P value cannot have the decimal otherwise the system alarms Time of P X orU is shown below Unit DWT 1 0 001s DWT 0 0 001s 0 0001s Note DWT is the setting value of No 1015 Bit 7 DWT 38 Chapter If G Commands Value range of P X orU is shown below Note 1 The system exactly stop a block when P X U are not input or P X U specify negative values Note 2 X U can command the negative value The absolute value is taken as dwell time in G04 but the address P cannot command the negative value Note 3 P time unit is set by No 1015 Bit 7 DWT Note 4 P X U are in the same block P is valid X U are in the same block the later specified command is valid Note 5 The dwell can be executed after the current delay time is completed in executing the feed hold in G04 Note 6 When G04 and subprogram M98 M99 P__ are in the same block the number following P is the time value of G04 dwell and is also the message of M98 M99 i e subprogram skip message error Note 7 G04 and the interpolation command in Group 1 such as G00 G01 are in the same block G04 is valid GO G01 only change the modal value of G commands in Group 1 Note 8 When No 3403 Bit 6 AD2 is 0 G04 and G commands in Group 00 are in the same block and the later specified command is valid 2 6 Cylindrical Interpolation 7 1 Command function the cylindrical interpolation is defined that the movement amount of rotary axis specified by an
186. R d G76X U ZW _ RG Pk Q Ad F JK 97 C GSE CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE Command explanations Starting point Position before block runs and behind blocks run defined by A point end point End point of End point of thread cutting defined by X U _ Z W __ The tool will not thread reach the point in cutting if there is the thread run out path Its absolute coordinates is the same that of A point and the different value of X absolute coordinates between C and D is i thread taper with radius value The tool cannot reach C point in cutting when the defined angle of thread is not 0 I v A O e 9 3 3 e radius value without signs of X absolute coordinate between B and intersection of reversal extension line for each thread cutting path and straight line BC The cutting depth for each roughing is JD xAd n is the current roughing cycle times Ad is the thread cutting depth of first roughing End point of It is the end position of radial X tool retraction after the thread cutting tool retraction in each thread roughing finishing cycle is completed is defined by E point a Z replacement D X replacement a thread angle Thread cut in Actual start thread cutting point in each thread roughing cycle and finishing cycle It is defined by n is the cutting cycle times B is the first thread roughing cut in point B4is the last thread roughing cut in point Be is
187. ROUP 04 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL Eire Meir e 10 14 00 GRP SET DEL GRP TOOL SET DEL um SEARCH Fig 3 34 II Tool explanation column the first line display the message of the tool where the cursor is The second displays the definition of tool message color The user can visually definitions of tool frame with different color O Oo am 9 O 5 Tool group message column the first line displays the current tool group message including current tool group counting method of tool group reset value of the tool group used life of the selected tool in the tool group Tool message column display the tool message in the tool group 1 Modifying tool group data In MDI mode press GROUP SETTING to pop up a dialog box select the counting method time or times of the tool group and set the life value of the tool group as Fig 3 35 MDI reset SETTING gt TOOL SETTING gt TOOL LIFE LIFE INFO GROUP 01 TOOL NO 0000 LIFE USED Q0 SYMBLE USED JUMP IN LIFE GROUP 01 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 0 LIFE LEFT 0 r BB 0002 LI pan pane Bano oa ooa oaoa oaoa BoA ooa ooa oaoa aaa omo GROUP 02 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 8 LIFE LEFT 0 0003 oooi 0000 0000 100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 GROUP 03 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 0 LIFE LEFT 0 0000 0000 0000
188. RU EM FEM Eo RUE err R mum rNE 46 2 11 Automatic Tool Offset G36 G37 ibo EC HE elu oet bete ebbe rie sete bte dena 48 2 12 Iseterence Posil hn FUNCHON stis vene dee a Nase Radial Aube ii baal 50 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE 2 12 1 Reference position return G28 esnie nennen nnne nnns 50 2 12 2 2 4 3 4 reference position return G30 cccceccecccescescecceseeccessesecteeseceseereeseees 51 2 13 Related Function of Coordinate System ccc ccccccccceecceeeececeseeeceeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeesaues 52 2 13 1 Selecting machine coordinate system position G53 ueseeuusssss o3 2 13 2 Workpiece coordinate system setting G50 2 00 cece ceccceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaees 54 2 13 3 Workpiece coordinate system selection command G54 G59 55 2 13 4 Local coordinate system setting G52 esseesssssessseeneeeenennennee 57 2 13 5 Level selection command G17 G19 essesssesssseseseenne nennen nnns 59 2 13 6 Exact stop mode G61 cutting mode G64 ssssseeseseeeenne 59 2 14 Fixed Gycle CoOmlralfidis saco beoe ta der de tio pou eer vea oceans icq bum Ped uc ti ua dA des drtuu et lua a 60 2 141 Axial cutting cycle 90 iot i e ERE et e eps in teque it Oise qud 60 2 14 2 Radial Cuming CY CIS 394 aan oie th et ge e edd ds 63 2 15 Multiple Cycle Command S sre oe eaae n dere ta t pea te ea bte red e R
189. SC system ISC system 2 0 0001 9999 9999 mm 0 00001 999 99999 inch Y relative coordinate ISB system ISB system Relative value linear axis 99999 999 99999 999 mm 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch command of un CISC system ISC system ans 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 999 99999 999 99999 inch Z relative coordinate ISB system ISB system Relative value Z finishing 99999 999 99999 999 mm 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch command of allowance in G71 axis G71 G72 G73 Z tool ISC system ISC system G72 G73 retraction distance 1 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 999 99999 999 99999 inch in G73 1 Cut depth 2 in G72 ISB system ISB system 2 0 001 99999 999 mm 0 0001 9999 9999 inch CISC system U im O e um 9 3 3 e 0 0001 9999 9999 mm 0 00001 999 99999 inch Arc radius ISB system ISB system G02 G03 CISC system ISC system Taper and thread taper ISB system ISB system G90 G92 G 1 in G90 G92 G94 99999 999 99999 999 mm 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch 94 676 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 999 99999 999 99999 inch Tool retraction 2 in ISB system ISB system G71 G72 G71 G72 0 99999 999 mm 0 9999 9999 inch C2 CISC system ISC system 0 9999 9999 mm 0 999 99999 inch Thread increment in 0 01 500 000 mm 0 01 9 99inch G34 variable pitch cutting 0 01 500 000 mm 0 01 9 99inch Tool retract movement ISB system CISB system G74 G75 after cutting in G74
190. Servo alarm 2010 10 20 09 31 17 I INFO 5136 Axis X 3 phase main power supply power off 2818 18 28 89 31 18 i Gad Axis X Servo alarm 2018 18 28 09 31 44 Quia 604 Axis X Servo alarm 2818 18 28 09 32 18 9 43 25 ALARM DI AGNOS CLEAR MESSAGE a ALARM Fig 3 48 CLEAR Clear the alarm record On the record window press ALARM to clear all records of alarms and remind message and the window is blank after clearing Note Whether clear the alarm record which is set by parameter 3110 2 241 II O Oo am 9 O 5 II O Oo 9 et O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR 3 5 3 Diagnosis window MESSAGE DIAGNOSIS T Press to access the message window press to access the diagnosis window The window is shown as below REF reser MESSAGE DIAGNOSTICS CNC DIAGNOSTICS AEB AST 0 M G 7 T T B B T T B Eng y 7 F 4 5 B T f T T T T T T PAAZ M 5 T 7 3 T B B B T T T B pags U T FOB f T B T A A A A A HAAA CHG BACKSPACE DEL SHIFT CANCEL INPUT T T T T T T T T AAAS POS PAG cys SET HSG GRA HELP T B T T T T T T Bag RST 0 N G 7 8 8 BIT RESET 5 18 37 lj ALARM ALaEM TETTE oscILLO CNC SERVO LOCK a MESSAGE HISTORY GRAPH DIAGNOS DIAGNOS SCREEN Fig 3 49 3 5 3 1 System diagnosis window CNE Firstly access CNC diagnosis window press UIAGNOS to access the system diagnosis window In CNC system di
191. Set the speed when the rapid movement override for each axis is O Maximum cutting feedrate MFR for all axes Parameter Type Word type Value Range VALUE VALID RANGE DEFAULT ETTIN NIT P eens iini IS B IS C SETTING Set the maximum cutting feedrate for all axes 1423 Feedrate in manual continuous feed JFR for each axis Modification authority Equipment management authority Parameter Type Word axis Value Range VALID VALIDRANGE DEFAULT 632767 1000 Set the feedrate for each axis during continually manual feeding JOG feeding the actual feedrate is limited by parameter NO 1422 the maximum cutting feedrate of all axes anual rapid traverse rate MRR for eahc axis Modification authority Equipment management authority Parameter Type Word axis Value Range VALID RANGE DEFAULT SETTING UNITS VALUE UNIT SETTING l 0 30 60000 D T inch T degimir Set rate of manual rapid traverse when the traverse override is 100 Set the maximum speed of MPG feeding Note If it is set as 0 use the setting value of parameter 1420 FL rate of the reference position return for each axis FLR Modification authority Equipment management authority Parameter Type Word axis 323 II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE Value Range _VALIDRANGE RANGE DEFAULT SETTING UNI
192. T PART CHT 14 FUN TINE 03 00 00 ia CUT TINE 8 08 08 28 10 sep meL GLEN E ea eu 23 P a JR fa ane C N G Y a Ee OGAAME SYSTEM SETTING x l zle a spepeme K J E rF T myst aps pepe m 0 Ez H v e l u w tee fof Peeper o 9 o Fig 1 1 GSK988T appearance Technical characteristics 5 feed axes including Cs axis 3 axis link 2 analog spindles to realize the turning milling compound machining Command unit 1um and 0 1um max speed 60m min max speed 24m min in 0 1um Optional to GSK CAN servo unit to read write the servo parameter and monitor servo unit Extended I O unit and GSK CAN axis through serial bus Nested many PLC programs on line editing real time monitoring PLC ladder Part programs edited on the background Network interface remote monitoring and file transmission USB interface U disc file operation system allocation and software upgrading 8 4 inch truecolor LCD two dimensional motion path and solid graph display U O e 9 3 3 e C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE Technical specifications Controllable axes Max controllable axes 5 including Cs axis Max link axes 3 PLC controllable axes 5 Feed axis function Least command unit 0 001mm 0 0001mm Least command range 99999999 x least command unit Rapid traverse speed max 60m min in 0 001mm command unit max 24m min in 0 0001mm command unit
193. T eo EDR 199 25 4 CUOIO DOWER SUDDIV tisse qued ts itu it te rote v Og NONG 199 Ic VIDI WStsontts aca cat eee ae ates i pro tete rea tetuer Ee ea A udo 200 Position Display VV INGQOW uan ulicstend ateduintedce cocos a Dust lisent ots 00 Paadaintcdites edo dein taapiednteneans 205 39 1 1 Absolute coorairate WINGOW a Sax nos oet Petite nud tu use aci t sme uiae ues 206 3 1 2 Relative coordinate display obiisse eoe te ora be rises buried eo ue arto ai 207 3 1 3 Machine coordinate display ccccccccecceecceeeceeeeeeceeeceeeseeeseeseeeseeeseesaeeseeeseeeaees 208 3 1 4 Comprehensive coordinate ersan ia a a a e ATA 208 3 1 5 Setting the relative coordinate ec cccccceeccceeeceeeseeeeceeeseeseseeseeeseeeseeeeseeesaeees 209 3 1 6 Switching between the mode and the comprehensive message 210 3 1 7 Clearing workpiece count essesssesssessseenneennee enne nnne nna nns 211 21e Cleaning Tum Mme TR mp ES 211 Program VVINGOW E e a Eaa E aR i 212 3 2 1 Local directory and U disk directory eeeeeseseeeeeeeeeererrenenn 212 92 A 1 08 M8 8 610 aMi E T a quiz ui ires nn cata 213 OSEE E S E LN EET 214 sse e 214 3 3 1 System parameter setting and rewriting window eseeeeeeeeeeene 215 3 3 2 Screw pitch compensation setting and rewriting window 218 3 3 3 System
194. TS VALUE UNITS VAUIDRANGE IS B IS C SETTING Metric machine 1 mm min 6 15000 200 Inch machine 0 1 inch min Rotary axis 1 deg min Set FL rate after deceleration when the reference position turn is performed for each axis 11 7 Parameters Related to Control of Acceleration and Deceleration 7 2 6 5 4 3 j S RRTO Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 4 RTO Block overlap in rapid traverse 0 Blocks are not ovelapped in rapid traverse 1 Blocks are ovelapped in rapid traverse 1 0 MEN a II 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 C ee Te Modification authority Equipment management authority O m 9 Oo 5 Parameter Type Bit axis Default Setting 0000 0000 0 CTLx Acceleration deceleration in cutting feed including dry run include feeding during dry run O Exponential acceleration deceleration is applied 1 Linear acceleration deceleration after interpolation is applied 4 JGLx The type of acceleration deceleration in threading is 0 O Exponential acceleration deceleration 1 1 Linear acceleration deceleration Time constant T used for linear acceleration deceleration TT1 for each axis Modification authority Equipment management authority Parameter Type Word axis Value Range 0 4000 ms Default Setting 100 Specify a time constant used for linear acceleration deceleration in rapid
195. The system defaults i O straight thread when i is not input P k It is the depth of thread tooth and is also the total cutting depth of thread radius value without sign symbols and the system alarms when P k is not input Q Ad It is the first depth of thread cutting radius value without sign symbols The system alarms when Ad is not input Pitch is defined to moving distance radius value in X direction of long axis when the spindle rotates one rev Z is long when absolute value of coordinate difference between C point and D point in Z direction is more than that of X direction radius value be equal to absolute value of i and Vice versa When the thread run out is executed the movement range in the short axis direction is the same that of G32 must not be less than O without direction 99 I e VI VIT 3 eTo y P Sk CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual the system automatically confirms the run out direction according to the initial pont of the program is modal and its value is specified by radius When the thread run out is executed the range in the long axis direction is the same that of G32 is modal without direction and the value is specified by radius Address Incremental Metric mm input Inch inch input system aD T ans I U A O Q y Q 3 3 Q Cutting feed NE Rapid traverse A Starting point End point B Reference point
196. When PLC controls the spindle speed the parameter is invalid and the spindle speed isn t limited by the maximum speed 3803 Quantity of the 2 spindle encoder pulses CNT2 Way of Validating After power on Default Setting 1024 Value range 100 9999 The parameter sets the quantity of the 2 spindle encoder pulses 342 Chapter XI Parameters 3811 Spindle maximum speed of the 2 spindle gear 1 M2G1 3812 Spindle maximum speed of the 2 spindle gear 2 M2G2 Default Setting 6000 Value Range 0 32767r min The parameter sets the maximum speed of each gear in the 29 spindle 3830 Gain regulation data of the 2 4 spindle speed analog output AGS2 Modification authority J Machine Value range 700 1250 Data unit 0 196 Default setting 1000 Setting method 1 Set the standard setting value 1000 27 Command the spindle speed when the spindle speed analog outputs max Em n 10V is 3 Measure the output voltage 4 Setthe following value based on No 3830 zi 10 V x setting value e x1000 measured voltage V 5 After a parameter is set the spindle speed is commanded when the spindle speed analog output is the max voltage and the output voltage should be 10V 3831 Compensation value of the 2 spindle speed analog outputting offset voltage CSS2 Modification authority J Machine Value range 1024 1024 Default setting J 0 Set the compens
197. X2 3 DEC2 The2 axis deceleration signal address th l l Fixed CN61 33 X2 4 DEC4 The 4 deceleration signal address th l Fixed CN61 34 DECS The 5 deceleration signal address CN61 35 Tool post lock signal Tool post proximity switch signal Yantai AK31 CN61 36 COIN Spindle orientation completed signal MEM CN61 37 LMI1 The 1 axis side overtravel signal Ss CN61 38 LMI2 The 2 axis side overtravel signal CN61 39 LM3 The The 3 axis side overtravel signal axis side overtravel signal CN61 40 WQPJ Chuck in position signal NE DE ILI LL chuck AA and inner chuck unclamping huck i CN64 44 X34 NQPJ Chuck in position signal inner EMEN clamping and outer chuck unclamping Fi CN61 42 X3 5 SKIP G31 skip signal ds address eT Fixed CN61 43 X3 6 G36 G36 skip signal address Fixed CN61 44 G37 skip signal CN61 17 17 X4 X40 LMI The 1 axis direction overtravel signal MEN M 18 E The 2 axis direction overtravel signal 4 CN61 19 LMI3 The 3 axis direction overtravel signal MEN CN61 20 LMI4 The 4 axis direction overtravel signal MEN CN61 25 LMI4 The 4 axis direction overtravel signal NEN CN61 26 LMI5 The 5 axis direction overtravel signal i CN61 27 LMI5 The 5 axis direction overtravel signal 4 382 gt D 5 Q x Appendix 2 Standard Ladder Function Allocation PLC address Function defined by standard PLC address Remark CN61 21 OV CN61 24 CNe22 v
198. a new workpiece coordinate system where the current tool position is consistent with the specified coordinates When G50 specifies the relative value the value adding the previous tool position coordinate value creates a new coordinate system but the tool position does not change but the coordinate system executes the offset as Fig 2 23 56 Chapter If G Commands G54 Workpiece coordinate system Tool position Tool position is 80 95 in G54 X Z moves mS the vector A to be X Z after executing G50 X40 Z40 95 99 New workpiece coordinate system 40 80 Previous workpiece coordinate system Fig 2 24 D O Q Q 3 3 Q Note 4 The coordinate offset value created by G50 adds to the one of all workpiece zero to make ensure that all workpiece coordinate systems offset the same value as Fig 3 21 G54 workpiece coordinate system A G55 workpiece coordinate system X Z New workpiece coordinate system X Z Previous workpiece coordinate system A G50 Offset value B Zero offset value of workpiece in G54 C Zero offset value of workpiece in G55 Fig 2 25 Note 5 The workpiece zero offset value of G54 G59 workpiece coordinate system can be set in the parameters and input in the coordinate setting window Note 6 When the system is turned on it defaults G54 as the current workpiece coordinate system after the system executes the reference position return it creates the
199. able 1 5 3 When DPI is set to 0 and word omits its decimal its value range is 99999999 99999999 data unit is the least command unit in Table 1 5 3 2 Command value calculation method specified by U W R K is the same that of 1 they meet the value range described in 1 and limit value range according to preparatory function 3 Position specified value commanded by P Qis 0 99999999 data unit is the least command unit in Table 1 5 3 value range is limit by specific preparatory function 2 Word value and state will change when the system runs the following table separately explains each word omit and state when the system is ON resets Table 1 5 4 word state Initial value Keep in the Value after i Default f Related Character Function when next block pressing reset value explanation power on key Program name Value Current Yes Yes None reserved by value last power on Preparatory function Initial mode in Modal NO parameter each group value C CLR NO 3402 6 Miscellaneous Current No function Current value Specified by function MOO M01 value reserved PLC set by M02 M30 M98 M99 parameter Analog spindle Current Yes Current value e aen oo e O TN Tool offset Value Current Yes Current value T reserved by value last power on 23 I U im O e a 9 3 3 e CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Feedrate per minute Parameter Current parameter value value C
200. according to the used screw tap is specified before G84 G88 is commanded and the CNC confirms the M command of spindle CCW according to the previous spindle rotation direction of G84 G88 when the direction is not specified the spindle rotation M03 CW is defaulted in G84 G88 common tapping cycle Common tapping cycle iE Tool A Pause variable screw tap _ Rapid traverse Spindle stop Z XO feed u Hole position Initial level Starting md nnm Don wl i point i Operation 2 Operation 6 Spindle stop Spindle rotation Point R pe as Point R level Operatoin 3 Operation 5 Tapping feed retraction Imaginary workpiece Hole bottom level e CP Spindle rotation Spindle stop reverse Operatoin 4 Pause at hole Fig 2 77 Execution process DThe tool rapidly positions to the hole from starting point the hole is determined by the hole position data at the initial level 2 Rapidly position to point R 3M command outputs to make the spindle rotate for example M command does not output when the spindle rotation is commanded before tapping cycle 121 GSE C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual 4 The tapping axis moves the hole bottom level at the cutting feedrate specified by F along with the spindle rotation Cwhen the tool is about to reach the hole bottom position specified by the programmed the spindle stops M05 output and the spindle starts to decelerate the tapping
201. acounts 5 size byte 2 029 free byte 34 621 440 name comment s size byte modified time 08888 OBES 395 2818 88 18 15 21 24 02454 O2H84 115 24 8 88 13 28 15 5H 02885 02865 1 253 2810 88 21 15 05 58 02511 02511 135 2818 88 13 11 28 84 MEINE CECI CE Fig 3 10 The run mode and the state of the system are displayed in the top state message display area of the window the program count the occupied capacity of all programs and the left capacity of the current system are displayed in the below In the list the program list and each program size and the recently modified Value are displayed in the current system The program in the blue is the one selected by the current cursor as the program O0005 shown in the above mentioned figure The program in the red with the note L is currently loaded to the position display window and can be executed such as the program O0000 shown in Fig 3 10 e U disk directory When the system USB window has the U disk and simultaneously displays one U disk USE directory soft key as Fig 3 11 press and the window displays CNC program directory in NCPROG file in the U disk The input output and other operations to the files in the U disk can be executed 212 Chapter III Windows AUTO RESET PROGRAM gt USB DIRECTORY prog acounts 2 name comments size byte modified time L On8g B 00078 14 2418 18 89 16 87 28 15 08 07 MDI poen gend N
202. ad run out length of the long axis is more than the thread machining length of the long axis Note 11 The system alarms when the thread run out length of the short axis is more than the thread machining length of the short axis Note 12 The system automatically checks the spindle speed and an alarm occurs when the spindle speed _ is not specified The spindle speed cannot be checked during the machining 3 Q o Example 3 2 Q Z axis Fig 2 62 Program 00012 M3 S300 GO X150 Z50 T0101 Thread tool GO X65 Z5 Rapid traverse G92 X58 7 Z 28 F3 J3 K1 Machine thread with 4 times cutting the first tool infeed 1 3mm X57 7 The second tool infeed 1mm X5f The third tool infeed 0 7mm X56 9 The fourth tool infeed 0 1mm M30 2 16 4 Multiple thread cutting cycle G76 Command function Machining thread with specified depth of thread total cutting depth is completed by multiple roughing and finishing if the defined angle of thread is not 0 thread run in path of roughing is from its top to bottom and angle of neighboring thread teeth is the defined angle of thread G76 can be used for machining the straight and taper thread with thread run out path which is contributed to thread cutting with single tool edge to reduce the wear of tool and to improve the precision of machining thread But G76 cannot be used for machining the face thread machining path is as Fig 2 55 Command format G76 P m r a Q Admin
203. aded into the block area in the position window and it can be executed the current window switches into the position window which is shown in Fig 6 2 AUTO RESET j ABSOLUTE PRG DATA X 31 552 aa j mm min 1 8n mm min 5 A reu min fp Z B BBB NC INFO OOH OBB 5 0000000000000 G98 MB FED OVRI 158 HDL F x1 RAP OYRI 1HH5 PART CNT 11141298 SPI OVAL SB RUM TIME HB BB HE J0G F 150 CUT TIME HB BB Hb Fig 6 2 Note Only during resetting the files can be uploaded 6 1 2 Program running Q 1 Press 479 to select the auto mode 2 Press m to start the program and the program auto runs and the cycle starting indicator is on while running ends the indicator is off When the last block specifies M99 it can return to the beginning of the program to run the program in cycle after running ends 3 To stop during running or cancel the memorizer running there are following methods 1 Stop the memorizer running Press B on the machine operation panel and its indicator is on while the cycle start indicator is off The machine responds as below a When the machine is moving feed running decelerates till stopping b When pause stopping is being executed the running stops c When M S and T functions are executed the running stops after completing M S and T functions II O Oo um 9 et O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual
204. ae In this user manual we have tried to describe the matters concerning the operation of this CNC system to the greatest extent However it is impossible to give particular descriptions for all unnecessary or unallowable operations due to length limitation and products application conditions Therefore the items not presented herein should be regarded as impossible or unallowable ae Copyright is reserved to GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd It is illegal for any organization or individual to publish or reprint this manual GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd reserves the right to ascertain their legal liability CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR Preface Your Excellency We are honored by your purchase of this GSK 988T Turning CNC System made by GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd This book is User Manual Programming and Operation To ensure safe and effective running please read this manual carefully before installation and operation Warning LM sien may occur by improper connection and operation This system can only be operated by authorized and qualified personnel Special caution The power supply fixed on in the cabinet is exclusively used for the CNC system made by GSK It cant be applied to other purposes or else it may cause serious danger Contents Cautions m Delivery and storage Packing box over 6 layers in pile is unallowed Never climb the packing box stand on it or place heavy ob
205. agnosis window there is message of keypad and state diagnosis and miscellaneous function parameter etc Press E E it V l e and gt to check the content To prevent the corresponding function is operated during checking some keys such as the direction and the window keys therefore lock the current screen through LOCK pressing SUREEN On CNC diagnosis window there are two lines to display the detailed content of the diagnosis numbers at the bottom and the first line displays the diagnosis number the second displays the meaning of some bit of the diagnosis number which the cursor is The system diagnosis window includes the diagnosis message and its corresponding diagnosis number below gt Press key diagnosis messages on the system keyboard diagnosis number 0 7 242 Chapter III Windows The system can diagnose all keys on the system keyboard and each key has two states of press down and jump they can judge whether the press key is damaged gt Feed axis diagnosis messages diagnosis number 10 13 The diagnosis number 10 13 is the diagnosis message of the servo axis 1 5 the diagnosis message of each servo axis includes input output status of servo drive unit connected with the feed axis pulse quantity from feed axis to FPGA pulse quantity from FPGA to servo drive unit and the accumulated errors of feed axis s pulse difference value between FPGA receiving s quantity and sending s quantity and the system judges whether
206. al reference position return or auto reference position return through G28 each limit becomes valid After connecting the power supply if the reference position is in the limited area it alarms immediately Display the alarm time It alarms immediately before or after the tool enters the forbidden area which is set by the 7 bit of 1300 of parameter BFA Overtravel alarm release When the tool can t traverse in the forbidden area switch into the manual mode and the tool traverses out of the forbidden area in the opposite direction for example overtravel is in the positive direction it traverses negatively negative positively press the resetting key the alarm is cleared If the setting is wrong after rewriting and setting the tool returns to the reference position Note During setting the forbidden area if two points are set as same the area is as below 1 When the forbidden area is travel check 1 in memory type all the areas are taken as the forbidden one 2 When the forbidden area is travel check 2 or 3 in memory type all the areas are taken as the movable area 3 1300 721 and an alarm occurs the machine coordinates are beyond the prohibited area at the memoent pressing RESET key can cancel alarm 4 1300 7 1 and an alarm occurs the machine coordinates are in the prohibited area at the memoent pressing RESET key can cancel alarm When the stored travel limit 1 check is set and set values of coordinates in the positi
207. al value and it is valid in the specified block It is the distance from the initial level to point R and is specified by radius value with direction Its unit and range is shown below Incremental Metric input mm inch input inch system ISB system 99999 999 99999 999mm 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch ISC system 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 999 99999 999 99999 inch Tapping feed axis specifies X or Z axis according to G84 G88 G84 specifies Z to be the tapping axis and G88 specifies X The spindle is selected according to relevant G signals it is related to PLC programs Cutting feedrate F i e feedrate of tapping axis and spindle speed S confirm the thread 120 Chapter If G Commands lead Thread lead formula in per minute mode cutting feedrate F spindle speed S Thread lead formula in per rotation mode cutting feedrate F Note The spindle speed S is defined to be S modal value memorized by the CNC before the common tapping I The thread lead is counted by the specified F value The spindle override is affected by N0O 3708 6 in common tapping In G84 G88 rigid tapping cycle Q command and PCP determine three kind of rigid tapping mode standard rigid tapping cycle high speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle and deep hole rigid tapping cycle There is only one mode in G84 G88 common tapping cycle which is shown below U im O e um 9 3 3 e The spindle rotating the operator confirms the CW CCW
208. all times Command function in Auto mode when M198 is executed and the other commands in the current block has been performed the CNC calls the subprogram in the external input output device usually it is U disk specified by P 3 1 7 Return from Subprogram M99 Command format M99 Pooooo Executed block after returning to the main program is 0000 9999 and its leading zero can be omitted Command function After other commands of current block in the subprogram are executed the system returns to the main program and continues to execute next block specified by P and calls a block following M98 of current subprogram when P is not input The current program is executed repeatedly when M99 is defined to end of program namely the current program is executed without calling other programs Example Execution path of calling subprogram with P in M99 as Fig 3 3 Execution path of calling subprogram without P in M99 as Fig 3 4 141 I U im O e um 9 3 3 e SK CGSN CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual N1100 M99 P0070 O 0001 O 1006 G50 X100 Z100 G1 X50 Z50 lt 2 ee U30 W 15 F250 G1 U200 Z200 F200 Y M99 M98 P21006 GO X100 Z100 M5 SO T0100 M30 Main program Subprogram Fig 3 4 Note 1 M99 does not need to be specified in the alone block Example G00 X100 Z100 M99 Note 2 The system alarms when M99 has commanded the block number which does not exist Note 3
209. ameters Related to the User Macro Program ccccccseceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeeees 352 XII Contents 11 19 Parameters Related to Skip FUNCION nascann a ea 353 11 20 Parameters Related to Graphic Display ccccccccsecceceseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeensees 355 11 21 Parameters Related to Run Hour and Parts Count Display 355 11 22 Parameters Related to MPG FOC ist ciu extare EE RE Exe a ER Geol CR xir ed c Fe e vc 356 11 23 Parameters Related to PLC Axis Control eeseseeeerm 357 11 24 Parameters Related to Basic Function cccccccscceeceeeeeceeeeeteeeeeceeeeeseeseeeneneeenenenees 360 11 25 Parameters Related to GSK CAN Communication Function 361 Appendix T Alarm LSU usano iden otbaccen e Pn inte ono E e AEE dion b Entacd cs etes ded 363 1 1 Program Alarms P S AlAniMS cca eonddus cuta aeeai RE Er veo iv rubei d ede tuis 363 tA i am ERU RE 3 2 to Pulse Encoder AISFt s suasit teo oeeo est Esci ond ea beta ier a Leticuebed steed Debut 3 3 Tu VSS EVO PAIN S eea aE cleaner elapse andere LE tue edet tees Ie det ct MICA E 373 o GI NANNY SO UI UR 373 oye 1816 207 21 f d cane een ner mudo editas do aiat ln veda mati spes fend Mns dep DUE D eee 374 ET SVSIBImpAdI ils concutit a Maruti ma NEU eI SIRE LE SEE 374 1 8 Communication prompt on the operation panel cccceccceeeesee
210. ams and machine workpiece Check part dimension and modify part programs and compensations The machining ends and the workpiece is formed Fig 1 2 1 3 Programming Fundamentals 1 3 1 Coordinates definition The following figure is the sketch of CNC turning C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual d aaenaene noan mcm i U O e 9 3 3 e Fig 1 GSK988T uses a rectangular coordinate NUR da tba of X Z axis X axis is perpendicular with axes of spindle and Z axis is parallel with axes of spindle negative directions of them approach to the workpiece and positive ones are away from it Parameter NO 1020 can set and modify program names for each axis and their responding relationship is as follows Table 1 3 a C a ee QUEM Y 1 8 1 8A 1 9 c There is a front tool post and a rear tool post of NC turning machine according to their relative position between the tool post and the spindle Fig 1 5 is a coordinate system of the front tool post and Fig 1 6 is a rear toolpost one It shows exactly the opposite of X axes but the same of Z axes from figures In the manual it will introduce programming application with the front tool post coordinate system in the following figures and examples WA T WA Z P n A p 2 1 Fig 1 4 Front tool post coordinate system Fig 1 5 Rear tool post coordinate system Chapter I Programming Fundamentals 1 3 2 In
211. an CE ende miam Imaainarv workpiece return rapidly to the initial level The standard tapping cycle ends Operation 4 ius at hole ottom Fig 2 73 High speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle Q value is specified Cit is not zero and PCP NO 520055 0 Before the tool enters the hole bottom the intermittent tapping is executed and the chip removal is done with the specified tool retraction amount which are done repetitive until the tool reaches the hole bottom then the tool retracts and the machining ends Command format G84 X U _C H Z W RQ PFKM or G88Z W C H X U RQ PF KM 115 I v S O ta 2 o 3 3 e C GSK CNC v GSK988T Turning Execution process The tool positions the hole position from Starting point i e the point on the initial level is confirmed by the hole position Rapidly position to point R The spindle starts rotation The tapping axis feeds at the cutting speed F with the cutting amount q the spindle stops after the feed ends 5 The spindle rotates reversely and the tapping axis executes the tool retraction amount d set by No 5213 the spindle stops after tool retraction ends Repeat the above 330 till the tool reaches The hole bottom level the spindle stops Pause is executed in the time specified by P The spindle rotates reversely and the tapping axis returns to point R level at the specified speed Rapidly return to the initial level St
212. and In tool radius compensation process when there are 3 or 3 blocks without movement command the tool nose center reaches the end point of the last block and is vertical with programmed path position of the last at the moment which causes the overcut and the programmer should pay more attention it General non movement command 1 M038300 only have M S T F O N codes 2 100 3 non NC statement when 600025 SBM is set to 1 177 I U im O e um 9 3 3 e CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE 3 G04 X10 pause 4 G00 only have G code and do not specify the position command 5 G01 UO the infeed distance is 0 6 G01X100 only specify the absolute value which is same with that of the last block 7 G01Y10 only specify the axis in non tool compensation level 8 M98M99 statement for calling subprogram and subprogram return the block has no axis increment command 9 G66G67 statement for calling macro program and cancelling macro program call modal 10 Null block In non movement block when there is a command to cancel the radius compensation the system does not cancel the vector and execute the command in the vertical vector It cancels the radius compensation vector when the system cancels the radius compensation in G28 G30 G53 it executes the command in the vertical vector in G50 G52 G32 G34 fixed cycle multi cycle drilling cycle and other commands When there are 3 or more tha
213. andard rigid tapping cycle ends Operation sequence DOY Starting point Spindle rotation q Spindle stop Ae OQ OO Infeed retract to hole bottom Spind Fig 2 74 O gt Q Q Initial level CNC System User Manual High speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle CP Pause 4 Rapid traverse Z X feed Hole position Spindle stop Point R L Ss Point R level 9 Spindle 9 rotation mel Imaginary workpiece v SS Spindle rotation reverse Spindle rotation reverse Hole bottom Pause at hole P 5 level bottom le stop Deep hole rigid tapping cycle Q value is specified Cit is not zero and RTR NO 5200 5 z 1 The cycle executes the deep hole rigid tapping operation Command format G84 X U C H Z W R G88Z W C H X U R 116 QPFKM QPFKM OF Chapter If G Commands Execution process Deep hole rigid tapping cycle D The tool rapidly positions to the hole from Operation sequence CP Pause starting point the hole is determined by the hole position data at the initial level Rapid traverse 2 Rapidly position to point R P 3 The spindle starts rotation J 4 The tapping axis feeds at the cutting speed E DE 7 F with the cutting amount q specified by Q he O gt Q 9 did the spindle stops after the feed ends sala cundis is 5 The spindle rotates reversely and the Spindle 1 Point v a spindle stops rotation after th
214. ange X G00 Z X G01 X GOO is valid in the range Example 2 G04 is non modal O0002 GO X50 Z5 Rapid traverse to X50 Z5 G04 X4 Delay 4s G04 X5 Delay 5s again G04 is non modal and must be input again M30 Table 2 1 G command list Classification Positioning rapid traverse Modal No i 9 I ES A O Q Q 3 3 Q CSR CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE G01 Linear interpolation G02 Circular interpolation CW G03 Circular interpolation CCW G04 Cylindrical interpolation Non modal Programmable data input Programmable data input cancel G112 Polar coordinate interpolation mode Modal G N G107 I soo NGE G13 1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel XpYp level selection ZpXp level selection Modal om level selection h input mm input E travel check ON 8 aac ee travel check OFF e Return to RII o Return to reference position m Return to Lc M 9 4 reference position iE Constant pitch thread cutting tch thread cuttin ing Variable Variable pitch thread cutting thread cutting a e Tool radius compensation cancel v O e 9 3 3 e G113 Modal Cutter Cutter compensationleft left Modal Cutter compensation right ee setting or max spindle speed ee x Local coordinate Local coordinate system setting setting E io NN coordina
215. apid traverse speed Rapid traverse CCP Measured speed Starting point Measured position arrival signal Fig 2 16 G36 G37 automatic tool offset command use From the initial position to the measured position specified by Xa or Za in G36 or G37 the tool rapidly traverses to A zone and stops at T point Xa yx or Za yz and then traverses to B C and D at the feedrate set by No 6241 or No 6242 The system alarms when the tool traverses in B zone and the measured point arrival signal of the end point is set to The system alarms when the tool stops at V point Parameter No 6241 No 6242 No 6254 No 6255 are set by the radius value Scheduled measured position MZ a Starting point Xa Xs Za Zs Fr Rapid traverse speed AES Fp Feedrate set by No 6241 y Parameter No 6251 No 6252 e Parameter No 6254 No 6255 Fig 2 17 Example G50 X760 Z1100 create the workpiece coordinate system T0101 define No 1 tool and execute its tool compensation G36 X200 traverse to X toolsetting point X toolsetting point coordinate 200 T0101 execute X tool compensation again G00 X204 retract a little G37 Z800 traverse to Z toolsetting point Z toolsetting point coordinate 800 T0101 execute Z tool compensation again and the toolsetting is completed 49 I D O Q Q 3 3 Q C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE M30 Too No T1 50 300 mA Programmi
216. area set by two groups signals are switched through the stroke limit in memory type and the set restricted area is selected e 1 Restricted area I Parameter No 1320 or No 1321 O 2 Restricted area Il Parameter No 1326 or No 1327 E e 5 RL3 Stored stroke check 3 release signal RLSOT3 is e 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 LZR After power on before manual reference position return whether detect the stroke 1 in the memory type 0 Detect 1 Not detect Note There isn t any connection with the setting when the absolute position encoder is being using the power is on and the reference position is set After power on the stroke is directly detected in memory type 7 BFA Checking of stored stroke check 1 during the time from power on to the manual reference postion return O The stored stroke 1 is checked 1 The stored stroke 1 is not checked Note The tool stops before or after the maximum distance F 7500 mm far away from the boundary F Feedrate during reaching the boundary Unit mm min 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Op p p Modification authority Equipment management Parameter Type Bit axis Default Setting 0000 0000 318 Chapter XI Parameters 0 OT2X Whether stored stroke check 2 is checked for each axis 0 Stored stroke check 2 is not checked 1 Stored stroke check 2 is checked 1 OT3X Whether stored stroke check 3 is checked for each axis 0 Stored stroke check 3 is not checked 1
217. ary displayed in 8421 format BCD The system cannot display and alarms when some digit in BCD code after conversion exceeds 9 The function BCD converses the BCD code displayed in 8421 format into the decimal Example 1 101 55 The binary 00110111 102 BIN 101 Macro variable window display 102 37 000000 Example 2 101 37 BCD 37 corresponds to the binary 00110111 102 BCD 101 Macro variable window display 102 55 000000 2 Transfer and repetition commands The transfer and the repetition commands can change the control flow and there are three kind of transfer and repetition operation the unconditional transfer GOTO the conditional transfer IF GOTO IF THEN and WHILE DO repetition Command format GOTO n Command function Skip to the line number n without condition Command format IF Logical expression THEN expression Command function When the logical expression is valid the system executes one following THEN otherwise it executes the next block Command format IF Logical expression GOTOn Command function When the logical expression is valid the system skips the block with the line number n to execute otherwise it executes the next block Command format WHILE lt Logical expression gt DOn m ON MON HON HON HON Command function When the logical expression is valid the system executes the block between Do and END otherwise its execute the block following
218. asured position which is taken as the tool compensation amount When the tool has compensated it traverses to the measure position The coordinate differences between the measure point and the commanded are summed to the current compensation amount which is set Note When the automatic tool compensation function is used IGA NO 614077 is set to 0 Automatic measure command X axis G36 Z axis G37 Measured position arrival signal XAE X3 6 corresponds to G36 ZAE X3 7 corresponds to G37 G36 G37 automatic tool offset use In Fig 7 10 one of G36 G37 is commanded to the block and the tool firstly traverses to the 290 Chapter VI Tool Offset and Setting Tools commanded measure position at the rapid traverse mode And the tool decelerates to stop at the position which is Y from the measured position and then traverses to the measure position at the measure speed set by No 6241 6243 And then after the tool approaches the distance and when the measure position arrival signal corresponding to the command is 1 in the course of the overtravel distance e the above compensation amount is updated and traverse command of the block ends When the measure position arrival signal has not become 1 from the measure position to the overtravel distance e The predicted test point Fp S X5 75 Junping aff IX a X5 Za Z5s UiXa Za FR Rapid traverse FP The feed speed set by the
219. at bue 66 2 15 1 AXal Roughing Cycle 97 1 ecce otto e t lta eel o ree a tes vtaboitus 66 2 15 2 Radial Roughing Cycle G72 sssssssssesssessseeseee esee nnn nnn nnns nn nnns 72 2 19 9 Closed Cutting Gyele G3 sos evita nce De Foe oie ee ee a quu 77 sre iapekeue com M 82 2 15 5 Axial Grooving Multiple Cycle G74 00 cccccccecceececeeeceeeseeeeseeeseeeeseesaeeeseeesanes 83 2 15 6 Radial Grooving Multiple Cycle G75 cccccccccccc sees eeceeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeaeeeseeesaaes 86 2 15 7 Notes for multi cycle machining cece cece ecece cece eeceeeeceeeteeeeseeeseeeseeesaueeseeeseaes 89 Zl areae CUMING st is tt RE 90 2 16 1 Thread Cutting with Constant Lead G32 ssesseessesseeeenrennee 90 2 16 2 Thread cutting with variable lead G34 eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeernne 93 2 16 3 Thread cutting cycle G92 sesesssesssesseesseee nennen nnne nennen nnne nnne nnne nns 95 2 16 4 Multiple thread cutting cycle G 6 cece cccceeceeeeeceeecaeecaeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeesaees 97 2 17 Constant Surface Speed Control G96 Constant Rotational Speed Control G97 103 2 18 Feedrate per Minute G98 Feedrate per Rev G99 ccccceeceeece ees eeseeeesereeeees 105 2 19 Drilling Boring Fixed Cycle Command ccccccceccceecese cece eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeetseeeseees 106 2 19 1 End
220. atically The incremental value of sequence number is set in parameter 11 2 Parameters Related to Interfaces of Input and Output 0123 Serial port baud rate BPS Modification authority Equipment management Value Range 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Defualt Setting 115200 77 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0138 pF OWN j Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 6 OWN Overwrite confirmation displayed when nc data amp prog is input amp output 0 Displayed 1 Not displayed 11 3 Parameters Related to Axis Control Setting Unit 77 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 311 II O D um 9 oO 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual ws ee ee 1M Way of Validating After power on Default Setting 0000 0000 0 INM Least command unit on linear axis 0 Metric system metric machine 1 Inch system inch machine 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 o ee S OAR Dz Default Setting 0000 0000 1 DLZ Function setting the reference positon without dog 0 Disabled 1 Enabled for all axes Note When DLZ is 0 parameter 1005741 DLZx can set valid invalid for each axis 3 AZR G28 command without reference positon set causes 0 Reference postion return with deleration dogs 1 P S alarm Note The function of reference point return without dog when parameter 1002 1 DLZ is 1 or parameter 1005 1 DLZx is 1 is not related to
221. ation displays and then the machine is locked to check the program When the machine is locked the movement of all axes is stopped oo Press ck onthe operation panel the machine is still but each axis position on the monitor is changing About the machine lock refer to the manual provided by the machine manufacturer Note1 Position relation between the work piece coordinate system and the mechanical coordinate system may be different before or after automatically use the machine lock Then the coordinate sets the commands or execute the manual reference position return to set the work piece coordinate system Note 2 When the machine is locked and G28 or G30 command is sent the command can be received rather than move to the reference position and the reference position return indicator is off 6 4 1 2 Miscellaneous lock Locking the miscellaneous function can lock the commands of M S and T Same as the machine lock it s for checking the program mst Press M IU9 on the machine operation panel when M S and T codes are invalid they can t be executed About the miscellaneous function lock refer to the manual provided by the machine manufacturer Note 1 When the machine is locked M S and T commands can still be executed Note 2 Even the miscellaneous function is locked commands of M00 M01 M02 M30 M98 and M99 subprogram calling function can be executed 6 4 2 Dryrun ap Press Y on the operation panel th
222. ation is to display override II mode dictate information O Oo am 9 O 5 and the system enters the window and the position window includes the absolute coordinate the relative coordinate the machine coordinate and other sub page shown in Fig 3 2 the corresponding soft key can search all displayed content in each window Absolute coordinat Relative Machine coordinate See section 3 1 d The See section 3 1 1 The absolute coordinate display See section a ds 2 The relative coordinate display machine coordinate display Fig 3 2 coordinate coordinate ntegrated See section 3 1 4 The Integrated coordinate display 205 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual 3 1 14 Absolute coordinate window ABS On the position window press to switch into the absolute coordinate window During auto mode and resetting the window is shown as below On the top left corner display the coordinate value of X and Z axes as the absolute position of the current work piece coordinate system which the tool is AUTO RN LINEAR CUTTING ABSOLLITE PAG DATA X a24ag 995 adt mms min ARE mmf min Z 41 0500 8 9 m O O HW II PAG NAME OB NC INFO x FED OVRI 18 HDL F Y uoi ei ado RAF OVAL THHZ PARIT CNT b SP OVAL 56 RUN TIME BB a gl JOG F ie CUT TIME BB BB H3 15 19 23 re feos eeu Es n The syst
223. ation value of the 2nd spindle speed analog outputting offset voltage Setting method D Set the standard setting value 0 2 Command the theory spindle speed when the analog output voltage is OV 3 Measure the output voltage 4 Set the following value based on 8191x offset voltage V 12 5 5 After a parameter is set the theory spindle speed is commanded when the analog output voltage is OV And the voltage should be OV setting value 343 C GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSK C GSR 3900 Servo axis number to execute the interpolation with Cs contour controlled axis CSA1 3910 Servo axis number to execute the interpolation with Cs contour controlled axis CSA2 3920 Servo axis number to execute the interpolation with Cs contour controlled axis CSA3 Modification authority J Machine Value range 0 controllable axes Default setting J 0 The above 3 parameters set the servo axis numbers to execute the interpolation with Cs contour controlled axis Note It is set to 0 when there is no servo axis to execute the interpolation with Cs contour controlled axis II 11 14 Parameters Related to the Tool Compensation 2 7 6 5 4 3 1 0 jEvo J EVRJ NENNEN Modification authority Equipment management authority Default setting 0000 0000 4 EVR When in tool radius compensation mode the compensation amount is changed 0 A block specifyin
224. authority 4 level Limited authority 5 level Parameter type bit bit axis bit spindle word word axis word spindle uoljei9do Way of Validating Become valid immediately or after power on Value Range In interval by enumerating or special judgement Default Setting 8 digits in binary system or 32 digit integral value Note 1 The Data Range of bit type parameters is 0 or 1 Note 2 When Validate method is not stated the parameter will become valid immediately Note 3 When Parameter Type is not stated the parameter is of bit type or word type 1 Bit axis type 7 6 2 5 4 3 1 0 Ld 1 1 4 PAPER Modification authority System authority Way of Validating After power on 310 Chapter XI Parameters Default Setting 0000 0000 0 ABCx The introduction of the parameter bit axis type is 0 Allowed 1 Forbidden 2 Word axis type Modification authority Equipment management authority Way of Validating After power on Value Range 0 999 Explanation information of parameter in word axis type 11 1 Parameters Related to System Setting 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ee J9gN Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 2 INI Input unit 0 Metric system 1 Inch system 5 SEQ whether insert the sequence number automatically 0 No 1 Yes Note In EDIT or MDI mode sequence number can be inserted autom
225. aved B Press start stop soft key A MOMANGALY stops after ee i pamgimeeh Memory Press start stop soft Automatically stop LEN save 3 Sampling period The sampling period of GSK CAN communication function is within 245 II O Oo 9 2r O 5 II O Oo mm 9 r O 5 C GSK CNC GSR GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual 60ms and cannot be modified manually 4 The other related Value is set and the setting items and the setting content are shown below Item ONITOR A TS MONITOR DATA UNI TC pul se ar i d window shown in Fig 3 43 246 SAMPLE PERIOD ms Explanation Select the axis from which the Value monitored by the current waveform is Select the servo Value monitored by the current waveform and the options include 1 Command position 2 Feedback position 3 Command speed 4 Feedback speed 5 Servo temperature 6 Servo current Set the wave unit displayed on the vertical axis Taking example of the command position Setting the unit to be 5000 means that the height of each cell in the oscillograph background has 5000 pulses Set the sampling time limit of trigger oscillograph Setting step INPUT Press to open the option box press UP or DOWN on the INPUT MDI panel press So the option setting is completed As above mentioned After the digit is directly input INPUT is pressed and so the modification is completed
226. avel limit 3 f Stored travel limit 2 prohibited area for outer fp Stored travel limit 1 Forbidden area for tool Fig 2 3 197 II O Oo um 9 oO 5 II O D m 9 O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE When the tool exceeds the travel limit in memory type it alarms and the tool decelerates and stops When the tool enters the forbidden area and alarms the tool can traverse in the opposite direction Travel limit check 1 in memory type The board is set by parameter 1320 and 1321 or 1326 and 1327 the outside of the range is set as the forbidden area The machine manufacturer normally sets the area as the maximum stroke Travel limit check 2 G22 G23 in memory type It is set by parameter 1322 and 1323 or commands During programming G22 forbids the tool enters the forbidden area G23 allows the tool enters the forbidden area In the program G22 and G23 should be specified independently which are independent blocks about the details refer to the introduction of G commands Travel limit check 3 in memory type The internal board of the area set by parameters 1324 and 1325 as the forbidden area Overlap of the forbidden area Each forbidden area can be overlapped refer to the following figure but the outside of the machine travel isn t limited 7 Fig 2 4 Zi The valid time of the forbidden area After connecting the power supply and manu
227. axis holds feed until the spindle exactly stops rotation 5 Pause is executed in the time specified by P 6 The spindle s rotation M command CW outputs the spindle rotation direction is reverse to the tool infeed The tapping axis returns to point R level at the speed specified by F 8 The spindle stops MO5 output and rotation 9 Return rapidly to the initial level U O Q y Q 3 3 Q Common tapping cycle ends Note 1 The command is for the flexible tapping and the tapping axis rotates along with the spindle rotation After the spindle stop signal M05 at the hole bottom is valid the spindle stops rotation in some deceleration time at the moment Z feeds along with the spindle rotation until the spindle exactly stops The hole bottom position is deeper or lower than the actual programmed position and the concrete error length is determined by the spindle speed and spindle brake device in the course of tapping So before tapping in G84 G88 the operator moves the slider to the safety position and the system executes G84 G88 without cutting the workpiece it is not dry run The operator actually observes the coordinate difference between the position where the spindle stops at the hole bottom and G84 G88 starting point and then modifies the program to reserve the enough hole depth before G84 G88 is executed Note 2 Before the tapping cycle is executed the spindle s rotation direction i e command th
228. axis in the machine coordinate system RF3 1243 Coordinate value of 4th Reference Position on each axis in the machine coordinate system RF4 Modification authority Equipment management authority II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 Way of Validating 1240 valid after power on 1241 1243 valid immediately Parameter Type Word axis Value Range 99 999 999 99 999 999 Set the coordinate values from the 1 to the 4 reference positions in the mechanical coordinate system Machine in metric system 0 001 0 0001 Amount of a shift per one rotation axis PRA Modification authority Equipment management authority Way of Validating After power on Parameter Type Word axis Value Range 1000 9 999 999 Set the movement amount of each turn in rotary axis 11 5 Parameters Related to the Stroke Detection Setting unit of stroke parameter Nos 1320 1327 is shown in the following table 0 0001 0 00001 inch 317 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bra wR R ms Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 0 OUT Either the inside or outside of the stored stroke check 2 is set as an inhibition area specified by NO 1322 NO 1323 O Inside 1 Outside 2 LMS The EXLM signal for switching stored stroke check O Disabled 1 Enabled Note Stroke detection 1 in memory type possesses the parameter of the restricted
229. box the tool offset value remains unchanged write in the tool wearing value the relative coordinate value the tool offset value 7 1 5 Clearing the offset value or the wearing value On the tool offset management window press Or to select the window and press it Or V to select the tool offset number to be rewritten and press or gt to CLEAR select the tool offset Value the wearing value or the tool number to be cleared press to clear the selected tool offset value the wearing value or the assumed tool nose direction number relative to the axis 286 Chapter VI Tool Offset and Setting Tools 7 2 Fixed Point Tool Setting Fixed point tool setting is to set the tool offset Value through C input mode The steps are as below Z axis Z axis X axis X axis Y Fig 7 6 Fig 7 7 1 Firstly confirm the tool compensation value in X or Z direction is 0 if not the tool compensation values of all tool numbers must be cleared 2 The tool offset number is 00 such as T0100 and T0300 3 Select any tool normally the first tool during processing is taken as the datum tool 4 The nose of the datum tool positions in some point tool setting point which is shown as figure A 5 In MDI mode G50 X__ Z command on the program window sets the work piece coordinate system 6 The value of relative coordinate U W is cleared 7 The tool traverses to the safe position and the other tool is selected and
230. bsolute coordinate compound programming Macro command statement macro command program Program call macro program call with parameters 12 level subprogram nesting Grammar check executing the rapid grammar check for the program do not run the program after it has been edit Communication function RS232 interface part program and parameter transmission DNC machining upgrading PLC program and system software U disc USB U disc file operation U disc file directly machining upgrading PLC program and system software U disc LAN remote monitoring network DNC machining file transmission remotely upgrading PLC program system software Safety function Emergency stop Hardware travel limit Many storage travel checks Data backup and recover 1 2 CNC system of machine tools and CNC machine tools CNC machine tool is an electro mechanical integrated product composed of Numerical Control Systems of Machine Tools machines electric control components hydraulic components pneumatic components lubricating cooling and other subsystems components and CNC systems of machine tools are control cores of CNC machine tools CNC systems of machine tools are made up of computerized numerical control CNC servo stepper motor drive devices servo or stepper motor I U im O e um 9 3 3 e i U O e 9 3 3 e C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE etc Operational principles o
231. by the corresponding keys on the MDI panel Note The oscillograph can normally display only when the system servo communication function is valid and the servo slave allocation is correct II 3 5 5 GSK CAN window O Oo mm 9 r O 5 MESSAGE GoKLink 1 Press to enter the message window press to enter GSK CAN window The user can find the all servo drive unit types connected to the current system software version the serial number of the drive unit the serial number of all motors and so on shown in Fig 3 44 MDI reser NESSAGE gt GSKLink gt SERVO CONFIGURATION sID axis driverType Version dr iverSerialNum motorSerialNum 3 Z DAT2075C V1 03 EO5S RBOOO13E 090624100D0032580H 5 s DaPosc V2 01 EO6S Df00030 109060300342 No index l opt ional motor type 7 E 4 BASJT H ZACCAAI EN s B SJT H 2AC AASI 3 B BOSJT NA24E AdI 4 7 B SJT M Z4E AASI Ez s B SJT M 3ZC AAI 7 g BASJT M IZC AASI BE a B SJT M SZE A4I 8 uo BBSJT MBS2E A4SI IESITRECMD gil a 118SJT ME2GE A4SI EN z 1 18SJT MBAED A4I z 9 47 38 ALARM ALARM Diacnos osciLLo ESTEE semo CFG FILE is fait GRAPH CONFIG LIST Fig 3 44 CFG FILE 2 Press LIST in GSK CAN window to switch to the configuration file directory The files are the ones of the drive unit shown in Fig 3 45
232. ca usu Doe e EU Lu ie om A A D leans 10 1 3 6 Workpice coordinate SVSIGTII eiat a te eh a eu hk vede etu bu a dae te Feu 11 1 3 7 Local coordinate SVSIem Lies cadet etes ambe o stt genes sau cani uenI boe d Lexnda 11 19 9 Iliterboladon FUP GON a Dux tevin las aa exei pus DOT e uda orit v Io Sod estem 11 1 4 Coordinate Value and DIMENSION ccccccceccceececececeeeceeeecaeeceeeesaeeseeeseuessueeseeesneeseeeaes 12 1 4 1 Absolute programming and incremental programming eeseeeessssee 12 1 4 2 Diameter programming and radius programming ccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeaeees 13 14 9 Decmial programpmiligas eso o oot c a b out sct tarea id oC dacetas 14 1 4 4 Conversion between the metric and the inch eeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeee 14 1 4 5 Linear axis and rotary axis sssesssessessseseeeeeen nennen nnne nnn nnne nnne rna nns 15 1 5 otr ctare of an NG PFOGEGITI ia oet on ain eto te o e aer bi qm vate din cups eu MA ites heceteanadeears 15 1555 SETOOFLORULE EU GI t35co 51 62 46 act hss booster eee ee aaa tentes eer icio tomado 16 12972 OCI TO FMA chats asta tase tacen aa thine nme dtr fiato utate da a E N TUUS 16 cero M RUE TUNER 17 1 5 4 BIOCK DUIHDOE i codices tans anew egecueaametenseusy cota Ae sa vul Ep IMs petu CuLs tones n crc uM o UpM AS DEOR LED 26 15 5 Main progran and SuUDDFOGLFOTTI secu no Datus v deo aN Oe eee au ku La Rame ste reise
233. ceeds 10 thousand lines Note 3 Besides manually saving programs the system can automatically save them in the course of edit every 30 seconds is pressed to check the program and the alarm occurs when the 4 3 2 Rewriting a program 1 Open a program based on Chapter 4 1 4 261 II O D um 9 O 5 CGSN CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual 2 Press 5 f V g D gt LOCATE to move the cursor the required character to rewrite also using and SEARCH can find the required block and character to rewrite 3 Press the address digital key on the edit keyboard to input the program code to rewrite to move the cursor to the required line to rewrite press BACK SPACE 4 Press to delete the previous before the character where the cursor is DELETE 5 Press to delete the one following the character where the cursor is SAVE 6 ME save the currently rewritten program 4 3 3 Shortcut key The system has some shortcut keys to conveniently edit and rewrite programs in the course of editing programs m is v Debugging the cursor D o CHANGE T zi Simultaneously press and to move the cursor the file header 5 CHANGE J Simultaneously press and to move the cursor the end of file CHANGE e Simultaneously press and to move the cursor the line home CHANGE gt Simultaneously press and to move the cursor the line end Y Selecting a program SHIFT 4 J lt Pre
234. ch between items in MDI mode press the numerical and INPUT backspace keys to rewrite the graph parameter and input the rewritten value and press to confirm the setting is completed About the details refer to chapter 8 1 3 6 2 Processing graph path TRACK On the graph window press VIEW to access the path window and it is shown as the following graph 1 250 Chapter III Windows AUTO AUN CIRCULAR CUTTING GRAPH gt TRACKVIEW gt ZX PLANE ABSOLUTE m PRaG G2 X188 758 Alaa E 31 318 RELATIVE U 21 543 y 31 198 MACHINE X 28 472 7 31 198 plane ZX scale 2 AAR T gag 18 58 41 sse EMULATE ZOOM IN ZOOM a CLEAR RECOVER Fig 3 48 In the figure at the bottom of the path Sion it displays the coordinate level of the present path and the scaling of the path graph In the right column meanwhile it displays the current absolute position coordinate and the relative coordinate position value and the tool number used in the currently running program Then the graph can be zoomed in and out and the path can be cleared and II ne press l f or to move the graph up down right or left O Oo am 9 pm oO 5 Note The name for each axis is set by parameter 1020 and the names are set in the different letters 3 6 3 Simulation graph EMULATE On the graph window press to access the simulation graph window and it is shown as Fig 2 AUTO PUN LINEAR CUTTING
235. cleared 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 na l CCU I T Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 7 AHC Action taken when an alarm is generated or when an operator message is entered 0 The display shifts to the alarm message screen 1 The display doesn t shift to the alarm message screen 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IL T T T o me Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 0 IPC When the function key is pressed whose screen is being displayed O The screen is changed 1 The screen is not changed 333 II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Il e Il 1 f T Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 5 CPD When a NC program is deleted a confirmation message and soft key are O Not output 1 Output 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MCL MER pp Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 6 MER When the last block of a program has been executed in the MDI mode the executed block is O Not deleted 1 Deleted Note Even MER is 0 when end code is read in and executed the program is also deleted is auto inserted at the end of the program 7 MCL Whether a prepared program in MDI mode is cleared by reset 0 Not deleted 1 Deleted 7 6 5 4 3
236. common tapping mode M29 it can set other M command according to parameter or directly use G command to 112 Chapter If G Commands specify rigid mode without M command specifies the common tapping cycle and rigid tapping cycle when programming When the rigid tapping is executed the machine must have the corresponding conditions i e the spindle uses the position control and is applied to Cs axis otherwise the system does not support the function The function is applied to the machine with high configuration End tapping cycle G84 side tapping cycle G88 drilling fixed cycle G83 G87 and boring cycle G85 G89 are in the same Group 10 G80 or one command included in Group 01 can cancel the tapping fixed cycle The system executes the normal operation after the drilling fixed cycle is cancelled Clear point R and hole bottom point X or Z data and other tapping data P K F is also cleared Vector of C tool compensation during the course of tapping is temporarily cancelled but automatically recovers after the command is executed 2 20 1 Tapping Mode Tapping cycle is divided into common mode and rigid tapping mode and the follow method can specify the rigid tapping mode when NO 5200 0 0 and M29 is not specified the system executes the common tapping mode 1 Specify M29 S before G84 G88 blocks M29 S GS4AX C ZR PF KM X C G80 2 Itis specified in the same block in G84 G88 tapping blocks M command for clamping C
237. corner a 90 1 linear linear 2 circular linear Programmed path IL G42 Tool nose center path S L Tool nose center path Fig 449 Linear iinear cutting outside Fig 4 50 Linear linear cutting outside and canceling offset and canceling offset 168 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation d Tool traversing outside along corner a 1 linear linear I U im e To um c G40 5 To Fig 4 51 Linear linear a lt 1 cutting outside and canceling offset 4 2 5 Tool interference check Interference is defined that the tool cuts workpiece excessively and it can find out excessive cutting in advance the interference check is executed even if the excessive cutting is not created but the system cannot find out all tool interferences 1 Fundamental conditions 1 The tool path direction is different that of program path angle is 90 270 2 In machining arc there is great difference the two angles a gt 180 the one is between the starting point and the end point of the tool center path and the other is between the starting point and the end point of the programmed path or the system cuts the inner of the arc a gt 180 and the tool cannot pass the entrance No 256 alarms Example linear machining N Tool nose center path S Programmed path Programmed path Directions of two paths 180 Fig 4 53 Machining interference 2 169 I
238. crement system Increment system includes least input increment input and least command increment output Least input increment is the least unit of programming movement distance Least command increment is the least unit of tool movement on the machine tool Their unit mm inch or degree Increment systems are separately IS B and IS C Bit 1 of NO 1004 decides to select IS B or IS C Bit 1 ISC setting of No 1001 is applied to all axes For example increment system of all axes is set to IS C when the parameter selects IS C I Table 1 3 b increment system IS B DJ Least input increment Least command increment Metric machine mm input 0 001mm diameter 0 0005mm 0 001mm radius 0 001mm 0 001deg 0 001deg Inch input 0 0001inch diameter 0 0005inch 0 0001inch radius 0 001inch 0 001deg 0 001deg Inch machine mm input 0 001mm diameter 0 00005mm 0 001mm radius 0 0001mm 0 001deg 0 001deg Inch input 0 0001inch diameter 0 00005inch 0 0001inch radius 0 0001inch 0 001deg 0 001deg U im O e um 9 3 3 e Table 1 3 c increment system IS C re Least input increment Least command increment Metric machine mm input 0 0001mm diameter 0 00005mm 0 0001mm radius 0 0001mm 0 0001deg 0 0001deg Inch input 0 00001inch diameter 0 00005inch 0 00001inch radius 0 0001inch 0 0001deg 0 0001deg Inch machine mm input 0 0001mm diameter 0 000005mm 0 0001mm radius 0 00001mm 0
239. ction thread Command format G32X U Z IW F J K Q 90 Chapter If G Commands Command specifications G32 is modal End point coordinate value It can be specified by the absolute command value or incremental command value The system specifies the different IP value to execute the straight thread cutting end face thread cutting and taper thread cutting Metric pitch is moving distance of long axis when the spindle rotates one turn and its value range is referred to the following table After F is executed it is valid until F with specified pitch is executed again The pitch F value precision is the last two digit of the decimal Travel in the short axis in thread run out with positive negative sign symbols and the value range is referred to the following table the value is specified by the radius Initial angle between spindle rotation one turn and starting point of thread cutting The value range without the decimal is referred to the following table Q is non modal parameter must be defined every time it is 0 when it is not specified the system specifies Q different value can cut multi thread Q rules 1 Its initial angle is 0 if Q is not specified 2 For continuous thread cutting Q specified by its following thread cutting block except for the first block is invalid namely Q is omitted even if it is specified 3 In ISB mode Q unit is 0 001 ISC mode Q unit is 0 0001 Example in ISB mode Q180000 is input in p
240. d GS2 are changed inputting programs of tool life data resets the tool life Note 2 The same tool number appears in any time in programs of tool life data Note 3 T command is consisted of the tool selection number and the tool offset number Note 4 No 5002 Bit 0 must be set to 0 when the tool life management function is used 3 3 2 2 Tool Life Timing Counting When the tool life counting method in the input program of tool life data is not specified LTM No 6800 2 value is set to confirm the time or times to specify the tool life 147 U im O e um 9 3 3 e I U im O e um 9 3 3 e CGSN CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual SK 1 Specify tool life in used time Specifty the unit of tool life according to FGL 6805 1 0 1m 1 0 1s When the tool group command Too 9 9 is specified the tool which life does not reach is selected and the tool life management of the selected tool is done time interval is set by FCO No 6805 0 0 the interval is 1 for 1s 0 1s interval control is changed by override The time of single block stop feed hold rapid traverse pause machine lock and interlock is not counted into the current used tool life The tool life is up to 4300 minutes the set most life is 4300m or 2580000 01s according to 6805 1 2 Specify tool life according to used times When the tool group command Too 9 9 is specified the tool which life does not reach and 1
241. d in bracket and sprit right to value statement in Expression are taken as division operation character instead of skip character 1 5 3 Word 1 Format address number There must not be space between address and number Presently the system permissively input addresses G M S T F X Y Z U V W P Q I J K R L A B C H N O and will add other Command number range following address is referred to the following table Table 1 5 1 word table codes 9 Fresemnane 0 988 7 99 oN Line label 1 99999 1 99999 G Preparatory function I7 U im O e um 9 3 3 e C GSK GSE CNC M Miscellaneous function 0 9999 0 9999 X speed G96 G96 0 20000 m min 0 2000 feet min G97 G97 0 20000 r min 0 20000 r min p Tool offset 0000 9999 0000 9999 Feedrate per minute ISB system ISB system CISC system CISC system ISB system ISB system F 0 01 500mm r 0 01 9 99inch r CISC system CISC system 0 01 500mm r 0 01 9 99 inch r 0 01 500 mm 0 01 9 99inch X absolute coordinate ISB system ISB system 99999 999 99999 999mm 9999 9999 9999 9999inch axis CISC system 9999 9999 9999 9999mm ISB system ISB system 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch CISC system CISC system ISB system ISB system 99999 999 99999 999 mm 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch ISC system CISC system ISB system ISB system 9999 9999
242. d run out value when K is omitted Note 4 There is no thread run out when J 0 or J 0 K 0 Note 5 The thread run out value J K when J 0 K 0 Note 6 There is no thread run out when J 0 or K 0 Note 7 If the current block is for thread and the next block is the same the system does not test the spindle encoder signal per rev at starting the next block to execute the direct thread cutting which function is called as continuous thread machining Note 8 After the feed hold is executed the system displays Pause and the thread cutting continuously 92 Chapter If G Commands executes not to stop until the current block is executed completely if the continuous thread cutting is executed the program run pauses after thread cutting blocks are executed completely Note 9 In Single block the program stops run after the current block is executed The program stops run after all blocks for thread cutting are executed Note 10 The thread cutting decelerates to stop when the system resets emergently stop or its driver alarms Note 11 The system alarms when the thread run out length is more than the thread machined length of the long axis Note 12 In G32 the basic axis command cannot be in the same block with its parallel axis command otherwise the system alarms Note 13 When machining the thread in the metric tool machine in the unit of tooth inch using the expression calculated value programs F command For example when t
243. determined automatically according to the letters used Argument specification No No No Addresses G L N O and P cannot be used in arguments Addresses that need not be specified can be omitted and local variables corresponding to an omitted address are set to null Addresses do not need to be specified alphabetically They conform to word address format 136 Chapter If G Commands Example B A D K Correct BAD KJ Incorrect Argument specification Il uses A B and C once each and uses J and K up to ten times Argument specification Il is used to pass values such as three dimensional coordinates as arguments Argument specification Il doe mnm x m 8 K WM ia u m e m Ce 9 09 X9 8 amp 6 29 3 6 f9 K 9 9 s f HW 9 EE NM ONEUN AENNES UK S UNE M NE NN NEE MUN ANE Note 1 G65 must be specified before any argument Note 2 After G65 specify at address P and L when P or L is repeated and No 3403 Bit6 AD2 is set 0 the specification later takes precedence otherwise the system alarms Note 3 Subscripts of I J K in the argument specification Il for indicating the order of argument specification are not written in the actual program Note 4 The CNC internally identifies argument specification and argument specification Il If a mixture of argument specification and argument specification Il is specified the type of argum
244. ding skip character block number command space end character of block 4 The system automatically ignores the content with small bracket C Explanations of program annotation Note The annotation of program home as the total annotation of a program is displayed in the program catalog window the created program automatically creates the small brackets if they are deleted the system has no them and they can be replaced by 3 Parameters related block number 1 whether the system automatically creates block number or not User can set whether the system automatically creates block number or not in editing program by setting Bit 5 SEQ of NO 0000 2 Use can set the interval value in automatically creating block number by setting NO 3216 Note Sprit explanations 1 When the sprit is used to skip character it is generally placed the beginning of block otherwise and the messages from the sprit to EOB code are ignored For example U10 G00 04 when the skip function is started the system executes U10 G00 G00 U10 when it stops the system executes U10 G0004 G04 U10 2 For cycle command buffer when a block reads from memory to buffer memory whether the skip function is valid or not has been executed After a block reads into buffer memory i e the system changes skip switch state but does not influence the block which has read into the buffer memory 3 Sprit close
245. dopts 8 4 L CD and its appearance is shown in Fig 1 9 187 II O O D Q O GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Smell ESEE c 4311717 AUTO Fest 64 4084 Communication interface page layout view 35 4008 PRG MANE 05555 SEUES Bens 52500 WHI GNI d RUM TINE 08 04 53 AIT TIME 68 00 41 16 41 17 ccc ja ie au a Som ey Function Em n Keys of Ke address m Key numerical ALAA RAPH NET x z F 4 s FEE 1 K J D GEME 7 Cursor Keys n ulw Do Pon er e 0 o Editor keys Fig 1 9 1 4 2 System key definitions Keys Name introduction of the function Reset key CNC reset feeding and output stop etc Keys of address Input the address number and symbol press shift numerical key and take the above address or symbol and Otherwise take the address below symbol 188 Chapter Overview Keys Introduction of the function Switch among keys of double addresses double e symbols address symbol and numerical address SHIFT Shift key firstly press shift key and its indicator is on and then press address key input the address above or select one block with the cursor keys Input the Value of parameter and compensation INPUT Input key value etc and switch the line during editing the program mange Switch between the message and the display with CHANGE e function of Tab key and f
246. drilling cycle G83 side drilling Cycle G87 seeseseesseesse 107 2 19 2 End Boring CycleG85 Side Boring Cycle G89 eeeeeeeeeeseeeeese 111 2 19 3 Cancelling Drilling Boring G80 ec eneit EEEa 112 2 19 4 Notes for Drilling Boring CyCle ccc ccccceccececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeseeetseeeeneeaes 112 2 20 Tapn Cycle Comma css cater serene a tunled st ees inure aaa 112 220 1 TOPNO MOIE vaxtitritin i badtbi a d Pa qd bro mist eu qeu iau aaa pi aunt eee 113 2 20 2 End Rigid Tapping Cycle G84 Side Rigid Tapping Cycle G88 114 2 20 3 End Common Tapping Cycle G84 Side Common Tapping Cycle G88 120 221 Automatic Ghamftering FUMGHOMN suu oem uite eb s wave Mo psu bota EP Ton 123 2 22 Macro Command ssie died abdita Stat ema romeo penult cs dcl iu ani eot unt Raf dnce 126 222 Wallableis tet sede a e ates folluai attis dela tug ete obit More duda uad doute 126 2 22 2 SVSICIM valables eenia ape n o Ext Rue aetate uu uud is dxboei tees aside dese 127 222 3 peration anid JUMP COMIMANG usto codi e Swine o EP e cl em deti edm tud aedes 131 2 22 4 Macro program statement and NC statement eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 136 2 225 Macro pr gram call ssania tee erc e pe eae nona centeno Ra eaput ER uc peret 136 Chapter 1IL MSTE Command Soannen xr nac vcn on Pi chc icd se eS nce o dub t e vai Cota Noo Or ee aes 139 3 1 MiscMiSCellane
247. drive unit input inhabitation is OFF abnormal overflow value exceeds 2 The voltage of the control power is less than 377 CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE power 15V m LN 5m Umed 000000000 55 Ummd 77 00 5n16 ioioroverhest The heat value of the motor exceeds the setting value I 2t detection Ewr Ummd 0 00000000000 58 Umed 5n19 Unused EEPROM error EEPROM error Ph ing the three ph AC t Phase lose alarm dien ose during the three phase curren Coder zeroing alarm The encoder cannot perform normal regulation C t li it uud pide Sen A D chip or current sensor error 5898 Uis a 5n2 Unused 5n28 Software upgrade prompt The alarm is issued when the system software is alarm upgrading The parameter is out of the controllable range ead Une 0 Full high level full low level exists in UVW Power charging fault Charging circuit is damaged 5n34 Pulse electronic gear ratio The parameter of pulse electronic gear ratio is is excessive incorrect 5n35 No external connected There is no external connected brake pipe or the brake pipe pipe is faulty 5n36 cesses newer OF Pee ieee power OFF or three phase power detection circuit is faulty 5n37 The docte of the radiator is too low 5n38 The temperate 9l the radiator is too high 5n39 POSQUUIS encoder single ring read alarm 5n40 Absolute encoder multi ring read alar
248. e 379 GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system The parameters are not re adjusted or stored after upgrading The parameter value detected after power on is out of the range User Manual The connection between servo and CNC is faulty e e 0 Th t volt than 304V DC b 5n33 Charging alarm fault Dr NRU VONAGE dores SQ FERE AC us voltage 430V TEP OH TEM higher than 90 or TEP OL TEP Abnormal thermistor status lower than 30 the thermistor is short circuited or cut off gt D 5 Q x 380 Appendix 2 Standard Ladder Function Allocation Appendix 2 Standard Ladder Function Allocation 2 1 X Y Addresses Definition Caution The general I O signal except those signals marked for fixed addresses in GSK988T CNC system is defined by the embedded PLC ladder diagram program When this CNC system is installed the exact I O functions are determined by the machine tool builder Please refer to the manual from machine tool builder for details Pay attention that in this chapter the functions of general I O signal i e X Y addresses are just described for GSK988T standard PLC program General I O Interface on Machine Tool T s T A PUES M C ese 698 33 202 ates t t GO o 7 0 CO eT peo e t s 298 ava ese org ce ave ete e Sarr 6958 laa e 9 7 a Fig B 1 CN61 male input Fig B 2 CN62 female output DB Pin PLC address Function defined by standard
249. e coordinate or specifies the distance from R level to the hole bottom by using incremental value and it is valid in the specified block It is the distance from the initial level to point R and is specified by radius value with direction Its unit and range is shown below Hole bottom pause time Unit of ISB system is 1ms and ISC is 0 1ms Execution times of program Cit is used when it is needed M command for clamping C axis Cit is used when it is needed Cutting feed speed 111 I v S O ta 2 o 3 3 e C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Relevant command explanation is referred to those of G83 87 Execution process Boring cycle 1 The tool rapidly positions to the hole i i i CP Pause from starting point the hole is determined by Operation sequence the hole position data at the initial level Y 2 Rapidly position to point R Tool Rapid traverse 3 The cutting feed is executed to the hole Z X feed bottom at the speed specified by F j Hole position 4 Pause is executed in the time specified Starting CQ O Q Initial level by P point Rapidly retract to the level where point R is i No 5149 is used for setting the override of boring retraction When it is set to 0 the double speed of F value is default to execute tool retraction 6 Return rapidly to the initial level Drilling cycle ends Point R level Imaginary workpiece Pause at hole botto
250. e 100 key rdar Yao Smdeoemdemcememdemr vmi Mywuipesswekeymdeor Ymz TesekWymdoo Yms babnfeywder Yma Pmiedondwrksywdkao oo Yms Tool post forward rotation key ndeator Tool offset key indicator Ya Tool postreverse rotation key indicator Yao Doneo vaen O Yaa igiron ight output wave 2 Ym2 Digiton ight output value 4 Digitron right output value 8 i Ya Doneo OO vas Dion e oupu viue2 Ya8 Dgron e omu wed Digitron left output value 8 I vo WPGmodeindcator SS Y221 _ mdiator of space key on the ight of DNC V22 MANUAL mode indicator Y3 Momoidcor Ya DNOmoeideMo Ys AuTO modeindicator Ye REF modeindiostor OOOO Yay EDfmejidcor YAi0 Rapid raverse overde 100 ndear Yet Zakvdreionidedor Ya32 Rapid waverse override 60 indicator Rapid traverse override 25 indicator LH 387 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual wma vessdmdowndwo YES Rapid averse overide FO ndoo vas Xesdmdonndwo O o o Yr syen aem ANjreo EM Y24 1 Chuck Chuck key indicator indicator Indicator i space key on the right of es Y24 2 spindle CCW i YH3 Swwesaisopfeymdo Yma Spina stop keyincicatr ooo vas Spindle weyinaeator vas Swdep
251. e are valid and the rapid traverse override can apply to them 1 G00 rapid traverse 2 Rapid traverse during the fixed cycle 3 Manual rapid traverse 4 Rapid traverse during the manual reference position return 5 Rapid traverse during G28 and G30 281 II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR Chapter VI Tool Offset and Setting Tools To simplify the programming the actual position of the tool isn t taken into consideration during programming and GSK988T provides the methods of in position tool setting and trial cutting etc and get the tool offset Value through setting tools 7 1 Setting the Tool Offset and the Wearing Values 7 1 1 Direct input method da 1 On the setting window press toms to access the tool offset management window which is shown as below AUTO RESET SETTING gt TOOL OFFSET ABSOLUTE x 13 125 No type x Z A TS ME 38 439 0n a wear 0 aaa 0 aan 0 aan app Ofset A Ban A Baa 0 000 oo RELATIVE E a Hkm P ug pag set 08 208 38 439 wear 0 Ban 0 aan A a0 ofset 8 a 8 Bg 8 ang aad a wear 0 AAA 0 aaa 0 aan a fS 8 000 8 000 X M Mut eee wear 0 aan 0 aaa 0 aaa Z 38 439 ofset A Baa 0 aan A Ban 086 a wear 0 Dan 0 aan 0 AAA gp ofset a gaa a ooa Baaj vear 8 028 0 ABA
252. e change correspondingly Note 2 The system has only fron rear tool post without left right tool post and the horizontal axis is set to only Z axis 8 3 Simulation graph display and operation Through the graph simulation real time check the complete cutting process of the part GRAPH 1 Press to access the graph window EMULATE 2 On the graph window press to access the simulation graph window and it is shown as below AUTO re GRAPH gt GRAPHICAL EMULATION ABSOLUTE 3 X 13 125 PR G E 38 439 RELAT YE MACHINE 13 125 38 439 mr gt plane ZX scale 1 ABA E 0000 14 55 34 spen Win EMULATE ZOOM IN ZOOM x RECOVER Fig 8 3 On the top of the figure it displays the running mode and the state of the current system on the right of the screen it displays the message of the current absolute coordinate value the relative coordinate value and the current tool number etc In the figure it only displays the simulation graph message of XZ coordinate level at the bottom of the graph simulation screen it displays the coordinate level which the current simulation graph is and the magnification ratio of the simulation graph During the graph simulation process the simulation graph can be operated as below ZOOM IN ZOON the simulation graph can be zoomed in or out and the 1 Press previous simulation graph message can be cleared Or 294 Chapter V
253. e eccceeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeesueeceeeseueeseeeaeeesaeesaees 151 2 ME x 10 2 9 TL c EI 151 AtA OVON OWN ARP Rr ee een 151 4 1 2 Imaginary tool nose direction ccceecceecceeeceeceeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeseeeeeeseeeseesaeeseeseeegees 152 4 1 3 Compensation value Setting cccecccccccseccececeeeceeeseeeeceeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeneeees 155 4 1 4 G40 G41 G42 command function eee c cece cee ce ce eeceeeeeeeeseeesee essa eeseeessueeseeesanes 156 4 1 5 Compensation direction rreran a EEE AE A E 157 ARO CUON aa a ER RI Les deut A ee eee eS 159 4f APPIICIUO ram Pea a t aM AL MEME M LM a A DN 160 4 2 Tool Nose Radius Compensation Offset Path cccccccceccssecseeteeseeesseeeseteeeeeeneeeaeees 161 74 2 1 doner and outer Side assevtecceasepo tios rase Obr ea pu ree tama Nerd lm t ao gi un CUR e 161 4 2 2 Tool traversing when starting tool eseesseeeeseeneee 161 42 3 TOO traversing In Offset mode s e e bot ie e La esos 163 4 2 4 Tool traversing in Offset Canceling mode eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenne 168 4 2 5 Tool interference CHECK cccccceeccseccceecseeeceeeeceeeceeecseeeceeseeesueesaeeseeesseesseeeseeees 169 4 2 6 Commands for canceling compensation vector temporarily 171 420 cod gt 41610 Fo cho ons uu duds RP Ran UA MEUM CM MNA E 174 E OI EOIN AT 181 chapter MES V DH N ener dain dead Gaga ee
254. e machine moves at the speed set by the parameter without considering the feedrate specified in the program which can check the machine movement which the work piece unloads from the working table Steps of dry running ap During automatically running press Y on the machine operation panel the machine moves at the feedrate set by the parameter and the rapid traverse switch can change the feedrate About the details of dry running refer to the manual provided by the machine manufacturer According to the rapid traverse switch and the parameter the dry running speed change is shown as below Rapid traverse button Program commands Rapid traverse Rapid traverse speed Dry running speed JVmax Rapid traverse speed Dry running speed JV JVmax The maximum graduation value of the feedrate override 279 II O Oo um 9 oO 5 II O Oo D um 9 O 5 G ESSI CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual JV The graduation value of the feedrate override Note 1 The maximum cutting feedrate is set by parameter 1422 Note 2 The rapid traverse speed is set by parameter 1420 Note 3 The dry running speed is set by parameter 1410 Note 4 The dry run speed is set by No 1410 Note 5 The dry run cannot be switched in Auto mode but can be switched in pause state Note 6 The dry run followed single block stop or pause is switched in G83 G85 but the actual cutting speed remains uncha
255. e previous When the system specifies CI J CI K or J K the vector defined by it can replace the current position increment to execute the count Command format G40 Goo G41 X Z_ T_ G01 G42 In machining workpiece the tool offset cannot easily compensate the precise workpiece because of the tool nose circle degree but the tool nose radius compensation function can automatically compensate the error G40Xp Yo Zp IL J K 156 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation N1 G42 mode tool nose center moves to A point N2G40Xp Zp K toolnose center moves to B point B X Z G4 I K I eh NET PET E Tool nose radius center path G42 Fig 4 11 G40 execution process Command explanation e VI VIV 3 eT oy Pe Table 4 2 G40 Cancel the tool nose radius compensation Tool nose radius left compensation is specified by G41 in rear tool post coordinate system and tool nose radius right compensation is specified by G41 in front tool post coordinate system Tool nose radius right compensation is specified by G42 in rear tool post coordinate system and tool nose radius left compensation is See Fig 4 11 specified by G42 in front tool post coordinate system Xp X and its parallel axis Yp Y and its parallel axis Zp Z and its parallel axis NEUEM X and the cancel vector radius value of its parallel axis Y and the cancel vector radius value of its parallel axis Z and the cancel vector radius value
256. e setting value 2xCMR Gear ratio output by each axis CMR DMR Detection unit minimum movement unit CMR The relations between the setting units and the minimum movement units IS B IS C II O m 9 O 5 i Least command Least command Least input increment l Least input increment increment increment 0 001mm Diameter 0 0005mm 0 0001mm Diameter 0 00005mm 0 001mm Radius 0 001mm 0 0001mm Radius 0 0001mm 0 0001 inch Diameter 0 0005mm 0 00001 inch Diameter 0 00005mm 0 0001 inch Radius 0 001mm 0 00001 inch Radius 0 0001mm yndu N 5 O 5 SUIUDEW IJN 0 001mm Diameter 0 00005 inch 0 0001mm Diameter 0 000005 inch 0 001mm Radius 0 0001 inch 0 0001mm Radius 0 00001 inch 0 0001 inch Diameter 0 00005 inch 0 00001 inch Diameter 0 000005 inch 0 0001 inch Radius 0 0001 inch 0 00001 inch Radius 0 00001 inch 0 0001d 0 0001d 0 001deg 0 001deg v XE N euiuoeui YOU youl EU O m Q gt lt Backlash compensation value BCV for each axis Parameter Type Word axis Value Range 9999 9999 Detection unit Default Setting 0 Set the backlash compensation value for each axis After connecting power supply it compensates the backlash at the first time when the machine 328 Chapter XI Parameters moves in the direction opposite with that of the reference position return Detection units are related wi
257. e spindle rotation CW or CCW before the common tapping can be specified according to the screw tap s rotation direction the system starts to tap after the tool reaches point R at the moment the CNC does not output spindle rotation M command automatically counts the spindle rotation M command in CCW direction after the tool reach the hole bottom G84 G88 is executed in the next block and the tool has reached point R the CNC again outputs the spindle rotation M command at the moment the spindle s rotation direction is consistent with that of the previous specified The CNC defaults to be spindle rotation CW M03 when the spindle rotation is not specified After the fixed cycle is cancelled the spindle stops rotation Restart the spindle when the machining is needed continuously Note 3 The traverse speed of tapping axis is determined by the spindle speed and pitch instead of the cutting feedrate override the spindle override is affected by N0 3708 6 Note 4 When the single block runs or the system executes the feed hold the system displays Pause but the tapping cycle does not stop until the tapping is completed and the tool returns to the starting 122 Chapter If G Commands point Note 5 The tapping cut decelerates to stop when the system resets emergently stops or the drive unit alarms The spindle is in the course of stopping rotation but Z has stopped feed which maybe damage the workpiece and screw tap So do no
258. e system s servo communication function is valid each servo system is connected correctly and the allocation of the servo slave number is correct 3 5 4 Oscillograph window MESSAGE Press to enter the message window and press to enter the oscillograph window Before the oscillograph is used the user must set the monitored servo Value the oscillograph monitor type the wave zoom unit and the triggered sampling time The oscillograph setting window is shown in Fig 3 42 AUTO ms MESSAGE gt OSCILLOGRAPH gt SETTING CHI ABSOLUTE X B 8185 HONITOR AXIS Y Z a MONITOR DAT ACTUAL POS RELATIVE MONITOR MODE TRI GER U 0 0106 UNIT pul se ar id Banana BABA y B BBR SAMPLE PERIOD ms BB SAMPLE TIME ms 85949 pube X B 8186 Z B BAB 7 54 48 ALARM ALARM DIAGNOS MESMINEB GSKLink SETTING MONITOR MESSAGE HISTORY GRAPH Fig 3 42 The detailed explanation of the setting content is shown below 1 CH1 CH2 select the communication to be set 2 Monitor mode set the oscillograph to be the trigger or the memory The trigger it the sampling mode is that the above setting sampling realizes the arrival time stop sampling mode The memory the sampling mode is that the sampling is stopped after the system has checked the servo alarm The difference of the two monitor modes are shown below Attribute Sampling start mode Sample end mode Waveform Type s
259. e tapping axis gt C e ARA o executes the tool retraction to point R level T G 6 The spindle starts rotation the tappind axis 3 executes infeed at the previous machine E level D and the retraction amount d of Pindle stop deep tapping is specified by No 5213 The cutting feed of tapping is q d 7 Imaginary Spindle workpiece Repeat the above OOO till the tool q rotation reaches the hole bottom level the spindle reverse stops 9 Pause is executed in the time specified by R The spindle rotates reversely and the tapping axis returns to point R level at the specified speed D Rapidly return to the inltial level Infeed retract X eee t l to hole bottom 2 Deep hole rigid tapping cycle ends Spindle stop Hole bottom Pause at hole level bottom Fig 2 75 Note 1 In the rigid tapping cycle the speed of tool retraction and the one of the tool cutting to the previous machining level are specified by feedrate F for tapping axis the feedrate is the specified F in the command which can distinguish F98 G99 for the spindle the feedrate is the specified spindle speed and extraction override The extraction override is fixed to 100 when the parameter DOV No 520024 whether the tool retraction is valid in the rigid tapping is set to O When DOV No 5200 4 is set to 1 it is divided into the following conditions 1 The extraction override is set by No 5211 it is the override value i
260. e time press TIME to complete the time setting 236 Chapter III Windows ENABLE Stop serial number input when the system sets the stop function in the limited time TRYOUT is pressed to input the releasing code to release the stop run 3 4 2 4 Setting system IP window SETTING ETHENET Press to access the setting window on CNC setting window press to access system IP setting window which is shown as below AUTO reser SETTING gt CNC ETHERNET SETTING ABSOLUTE X B Ban IP ADDR E fies 8 7 7 B Ban RELATIVE SUBNET MASK 25 255 ef a sen DEF GATEWAY 192 168 11 254 d ES O HACHI NE 5 HAC ADDA ARGH BARRE X A AaB ct O 18 56 38 TOOL MATES iicr SYSTEM COORD TIME ETHENET SETTING SITE Fig 3 43 4 y 1 Press and to switch among IP address subnet mast or default gateway column 2 Press and to switch between each address box input the address to be set 3 4 2 5 Machine soft panel To conveniently operate the system without the machine operation panel for the user GSK988T SETTING system provides the machine soft panel Press to enter the setting interface in CNC setting VIRIUAL page press PANEL the machine soft panel as Fig 3 44 297 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR MDI Reset SETTING gt CNC gt VIRTUAL MACHINE PANEL DISABLED 1S 76 n0 coe aALN RUHLI e SLI 9
261. e variable 100 199 is initialized to be null 4500 999 is saved and is not lost Behind 1000 System The system variable is used to read all types of data when variable CNC runs 3 Variable range 500 999 Share variable The input range of the local variable and common variable is 99999999 99999999 which integer part and decimal part are up to 8 digit number The system alarms when the assignment exceeds the valid range The system alarms when the assignment value exceeds its range The middle result in the macro variable count can be more than the valid input digital Note 1 The variable cannot be referred to address O and N The system cannot use 0 200 N 220 to execute the programming Note 2 When the variable exceeds the max command value defined by the address it cannot be used for example 230 120 M 230 exceeds the max command value Note 3 The system cannot identify 0 and 0 4 0 X 4 is taken as X 0 Note 4 When the variable is used to the address data the other except for the valid digit is rounded Note 5 The number followed by the address can use Formular to replace The system takes Word address lt Formular gt or word address lt Formular gt as a program and take Formular value or its negative value as the command value of the address Note 6 The decimal point which defines the variable in a program can be omitted For example 7212123 is defined the actual value o
262. e wearing Value to be rewritten MEASURE Y gt 6 Press to access the measuring window input and measuring value p in 0K and then press Z axis tool offset value or its wearing value is set in the corresponding offset number 7 The tool cuts along surface B 8 When X axis remains still the tool retracts along Z axis and the spindle stops revolving 6 LL 9 Measure diameter a MEASURE X 10 Press to access the measuring window input and the measuring value Rs a in After pressing X axis tool offset value or its wearing value is set in the corresponding offset number 11 The tool traverses to the safe position for changing into the other one 288 Chapter VI Tool Offset and Setting Tools Face B1 Face AT Fig 9 12 The tool cuts along face A1 as Fig 7 9 13 When Z axis remains still the tool retracts along X axis and the spindle stops rotation measure the distance p from face A1 to the origin of the work piece coordinate system bn 14 On the setting window press os to access the tool offset management window and press SERCH to select the corresponding tool offset number and press or to select the ft 9 window and press Or to select the tool offset or the wearing value to be rewritten MEASURE Y 7 15 Press to access the measuring window input and measuring value Rs After pressing Z axis tool offset value or its wearing value D in is se
263. ead finishing amount in G76 X amount of circle center Radius value to G32 634 G92 Pitch long Radius value axis is X in G76 X feedrate display Radius rev radius min Others X or U value of Display Diameter Radius value position value window Note Besides the above mentioned addresses and data related to the diameter programming or the radius programming other related to word and data related to X numerical value are expressed with radius value 13 I U im O e um 9 3 3 e i U O e 9 3 3 e GSE C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual 1 4 3 Decimal programming Value can be input by decimal programming Distance time and speed can be input by decimal programming The following addresses can use decimal point X Y Z A B CU V W H I J K R and F and other addresses cannot use decimal programming There are two types of decimal point usage which is decided by No 3401 BitO DPI When NO 3401 Bit O DPI is set to 1 value without decimal point is with mm inch When NO 3401 BitO DPl is set to 0 input value is specified by least input increment Parameter setting Least command unit ROTx 0 Rotary axis is ISC 0 ISC system 0 001deg Rotary axis not related to ISC 1 ISB system 0 0001deg parameter INI ISC 0 ISC system 0 001mm Linear axis ISC 1 ISB system 0 0001mm ISC 0 ISC system 0 0001inch ISC 1 ISB system 0 00001inch Example whe
264. ear axis 0 mm input metric machine 1 inch input Cinch machine 1 4 5 Linear axis and rotary axis NO 1006 BitO ROTx can set each axis to linear axis or rotary axis NO 1006 Bit 1 ROSx can be used to select the rotary type for each axis Absolute coordinate value is displayed circularly with the movement per rev set by NO 1260 when the cycle function is executed which can prevent the rotary axis from overflowing The cycle function is valid when NO 1008 Bit O ROAx is set to 1 For absolute value command the coordinate values is the corresponding angle cycle value of per rev set by NO 1260 after the machine moves When NO 1008 Bit 1 RABx is set to O the machine rotates according to the shortest distance to the target point For incremental command the machine moves according to the angle defined by the command 1 5 Structure of an NC Program User needs to compile part programs called program according to command formats of CNC system CNC system executes programs to control the machine tool movement the spindle starting stopping the cooling and the lubricant ON OFF to complete the machine of workpiece Program example S z C m PE pop eee eee PR E 30 50 a P aui 50 X Fig 1 9 O0001 Program name N0005 GO X100 Z50 Rapidly positioning to A point N0010 M12 Clamping workpiece N0015 T0101 Changing No 1 tool and executing its offset N0020 M3 S600 Starting the spindle with 600 r min N0025 M8 Cooling O
265. ece contour B C for roughing contour and B C for finishing path 80 Chapter If G Commands Ai lt 0 Ak gt 0 AuX0 Aw gt 0 Ai gt 0 Ak gt 0 Au 0 Aw gt 0 A _ v X le e e 3 e CY Z Fig 2 48 Example Fig 2 49 Starting point 200 10 ae Z axis AJ VAN SN V Vy A A VAJ AC XJ Y Cv MEM X opo CY 7X Y s Ae ny Xo Xe 4 m S D EE Voy LARA Va oM og Moo ys Y VoM Xp MX E MON a XN ON Mao Y Vd LN Va Y V Va Va Vy Fig 2 49 Program O0006 G99 G00 X200 Z10 M03 S500 Specify feedrate per rev and position starting point and start spindle G73 U1 0 W1 0 R3 X tool retraction with 2mm Z 1mm 81 CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE G73 P14 Q19 U0 5 W0 3 F0 3 X roughing with 0 5 allowance and Z 0 mm N14 G00 X80 W 40 G01 W 20 F0 15 S600 X120 W 10 W 20 Blocks for finishing G02 X160 W 20 R20 N19 G01 X180 W 10 G70 P14 Q19 M30 Finishing I 2 15 4 Finishing Cycle G70 U A O Q y Q 3 3 Q Command function The tool executes the finishing of workpiece from starting point along with the finishing path defined by ns nf blocks After executing G71 G72 or G73 to roughing execute G70 to finishing and single cutting of finishing allowance is completed The tool returns to starting point and execute the next block following G70 block after G70 cycle is completed Comma
266. ecision So a tool nose radius compensation is needed in machining to improve the part precision U im O e um 9 3 3 e A ea Fig 4 1 Tool B tool compensation is defined that a workpiece contour path is offset one tool nose radius which cause there is excessive cutting at an intersection of two programs because of executing motion path of next after completing the previous block To avoid the above mentioned ones the system uses C tool compensation method namely tool nose radius compensation The system will read the next block instead of executing it immediately after reading a block in C tool compensation method and count corresponding motion path according to intersection of blocks Contour can be compensated precisely because reading two blocks are pretreated as Fig 4 2 workpiece 4 Tool nose center path with C compensation c Tool nose center path without C compensation Tool path with imaginary too nose and C compensation Tool nose Qv Error Tool path with imaginary tool nose and without C compensation Fig 4 2 151 GSE CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual 4 1 2 Imaginary tool nose direction Suppose that it is generally difficult to set the tool nose radius center on the initial position as Fig 4 3 suppose that it is easily set the tool nose on it as Fig 4 4 The tool nose radius can be omitted in programming Fig 4 5 and Fig 4 6 correspond separately to
267. ecute start the next radial cutting cycle if the end point of tool infeed is not on it between D and A after Z tool infeed Ad Ak rapidly traverse to A and execute D to start the first radial cutting cycle Z rapidly moves to point A G75 execution is completed Example Fig 2 53 80 Fig 2 53 G75 cutting Program O0008 G00 X150 Z50 M3 S500 Start spindle with 500 rev min GO X125 Z 20 Position to starting point of machining G75 RO 5 F150 Machining cycle G75 X40 Z 50 P6000 Q3000 X tool infeed 6mm every time tool retraction 0 5mm rapid returning to starting point X125 after infeeding to end point X40 Z tool infeed 3mm and cycle the above mentioned steps to continuously run programs GO X150 Z50 Return to starting point of machining M30 End of program 2 15 7 Notes for multi cycle machining Note 1 When the multi cycle blocks are executed they should be the specified address P Q X ZU W R of each block Note 2 The block specified by P in G71 G72 G73 should be G00G01 When there is no command the system alarms 89 I D O Q Q 3 3 Q I v A O e 9 3 3 e GSE CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Note 3 In MDI and DNC mode G70 G71 G72 or G73 can not be specified otherwise the system alarms But in MDI and DNC mode G74 G75 or G76 can be specified Note 4 The block quantity of G70 G71 G72
268. ed to Ag point The X total cutting travel radius value is equal to Ai in roughing and X cutting direction is opposite to the sign symbol of Ai Ai O0 cut in X negative direction in roughing It is reserved after Ai command value is executed and the system rewrites No 5135 value NO 5135 value is regarded as the travel of X tool retraction of roughing when U Aji is not input Travel of Z tool retraction in roughing is the following table radius value with sign symbols Ak is equal to X coordinate offset value radius value of A1point compared to Ag point The Z total cutting travel radius value is equal to Ak in 78 Chapter If G Commands roughing and Z cutting direction is opposite to the sign symbol of Ak Ak gt 0 cut in Z negative direction in roughing It is reserved after Ak command value is executed and the system rewrites No 5136 value NO 5136 value is regarded as the travel of X tool retraction of roughing when W Ak is not input It is the cutting times and its range is referred to the following table R5 means the closed cutting cycle is completed by 5 times cutting R d is reserved after it is I executed and the system rewrites NO 5137 The value of system parameter NO 5137 is regarded as the cutting times when R d is not input e VI VIT 3 eToy Pe it is the offset of the last X positive roughing path compared to finishing path The system defaults Au 0 when U Au is not input i e there is no X fin
269. ede i Pee Eo Dg a 264 Manual Reference Position Return seesseessessesssseeeeee enean 264 Mix 265 Jsfeifsipai inidiu leno m 266 MPG F Sedin NET E ERR 267 V AVEO Dedi secun dedos etur amisit Lam Lc EO e EL E MEE LEAD CE 270 PATO ES IAIN gre DRE REOR RD 270 6 1 1 Selecting the running program esseeseseseseeeeennnnnnnnenne nennen nnns 2 0 G1 2 i FOO lab UN MANNG aa 5 fice crates aug too tr a bun ce ieee 2 1 61 5 Iuhhning from any DIOCK sue eiae gian a ahem bea nea ek 272 M Md c 272 GARE CHE doe tant oe as en aan Gg aie au aotea tad see eG ats wae eis eens 273 0 1 6 Stop auto TUhniligis uie ec ead eret uel ou eco ha e ei dut eut bu devi uet Va re dd eoe Lud 273 ATED ESEIDHOI Ies aac cte tate adse tuacet ee ciat se gana cene taco ebet ute i e endo utate etoile adie te tere 214 6 2 1 Editing and running the program in MDI mode aanaannnnannennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnenennnnnnnnnne 214 0 22 RUNNING TOM any DIOCK ariarian a E ut ooi dle betehtatas 275 6 2 0 SOO pe VID LT MIAG sesh oen Donat ect Ba goal uites eds od Etpe Rino cafe eost so Posi mene ed 275 DNE RONNA cerae ss Metter teen Eh ee Oe ren na Moe OE At net oe rem E ene ee 275 ALO RUNING CONTOlnisia DT 278 6 4 1 Machine and miscellaneous function IOCK cc ccc cceccceeceeeeeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeans 278 FZ DN UA NR NE E 2 9 64 3 Single Block rurhing
270. eed is defined by move direction of ns block The command value Ad is I reserved after executing U Ad and the value of NO 5132 is rewritten The value of system parameter NO 5132 is regarded as the travel of tool infeed when U Ad is not input It is travelCradius value of X tool retraction in roughing radius value without sign symbols and the direction of tool retraction is opposite to that of tool infeed the command value e is reserved and the value of system parameter NO 5133 is rewritten after R e is executed The value of system parameter NO 5133 is regarded as the travel of tool retraction when JV VIT 3 eT oy Pe R Ce is not input Block number of the first block of finishing path Block number of the last block of finishing path X finishing allowance range is as the following table diameter with sign symbols X coordinate offset of roughing path compared to finishing path i e the different value of X absolute coordinates between A and A The system defaults Au 0 when U_ CAu _ is not input i e there is no X finishing allowance for roughing cycle Z finishing allowance range is as the following table diameter with sign symbols X coordinate offset of roughing path compared to finishing path i e the different value of X absolute coordinates between A and A The system defaults Aw 0 when U_CAw is not input i e there is no Z finishing allowance for roughing cycle Cutting feedrate S Spindle speed T Tool n
271. eeding axis and e v D 9 on the machine panel the machine moves one step in the selected axial direction The minimum distance which machine moves is the minimum input increment and each step can be 1 time 10 times or 100 times of the minimum input increment Increment feeding steps 9 1 Press MPG to select MPG mode e JUX1 DILx10 Tl1X100 TL1X1000 2 Press WFO Wes W50 W100 to select the amount of movement of each step moreover Tx00 faxo the distance of each step selected by W50 W100 is rewritten by parameter 7113 and 7114 sp Mes lt a v D c s 3 Press the feeding axis and I v 9 the machine moves along the selected axial direction Press the switch for one time it moves for one step Its feedrate is same as the manual continuous feedrate 4 Press rapid traverse switch when the feeding axis and the direction selection switches are on the machine moves at rapid traverse speed The rapid traverse override is valid during the rapid traverse Note The minimum input unit input and the minimum command increment output are set by the 1 bit of parameter 1004 The minimum input increment is the minimum unit of the programmed amount of movement the minimum command increment is the minimum unit of the tool traverse on the machine and the two increments are represented by millimeter or inch 5 4 MPG Feeding Qe Press MPG to access MPG mode the appearance of MPG is shown as below MPG outside drawing
272. eeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeensess 375 1 9 GSK CAN Communication PEIompls secuta petu ree aces ta c rini Edel bre Ra dE en 375 110 Seno a ats gy c cct t tS rU UTC T 377 Appendix 2 Standard Ladder Function Allocation ccccccceccecceecseeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeenaees 381 2 1 X Y Addresses DennitlOple s oii er dat tet ee ex senere I Ub tto eoe teak Ent tbe autism Met sii 381 2 2 slahdard Operation Parece o ueri hoe Erie e e dE lc ea cero vut dean o a 384 2 27 Adress S cundquiceucue DE M MUI E A C MEI CUIR EUN Se EAU PPS ENS HIE ECL 304 2 2 2 JAQUIOSSAY aote tiii d octets LI m ue en cA bee tM LI Eat DA ELLA E Led 306 2 3 Standard PLC Parameter Instruction seeseeseseeen nenne 389 219 0 er eG Macnee tected etna age ete LL A eU A tea E LA d M tees 309 TOV MB V card rRET P RS 390 2 9 9 Taraineler Donde ORTON ES Ret PS MM IL DO AD I DM EC AM DM UM I A DL EM ILE MI 391 Va MER cic M D errei Ter 391 2 4 PLC Address A Alarms the Followings are Referred to V2 03b 392 Appendix o TristalldllOFissdsnceedesunbct eut e cs cate hs adag dsr eata dd and eod esto A a datas Aedes cene tria 394 31 G9K9891I ADbearance DIMENSION maririi ead ideae evt las pEvV eoi Mu Qu uL nuns 394 3 2 Machine Operation Panel MPUO2A of GSK988T seesseeseemenn 395 3 3 Machine Operation Panel MPUO2B Appearance dimension of GSK988T
273. eference is called as the machine zero which is taken as the origin of the coordinate system is called as the machine coordinate system After the system is turned on executing the manual reference position return sets the machine coordinate system which keeps till the system is turned off Command format G53 P Command function when the position of the machine coordinate system is commanded the tool moves the position at the rapid traverse speed Omitting one axis means the axis does not move when the system only specifies G53 without specifying the positions of any axes the system does not execute the motion Command explanation G53 is non modal IP the absolute coordinate value for each axis in the machine coordinate system must be specified by the absolute value As the following figure the specified axis rapidly moves from A 20 20 in the current workpiece coordinate system to B 8 10 in the machine coordinate system 53 v a O e 9 3 3 e GSE CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Machine coordinate system Z 10 Rapid feed X10 Z20 Workpiece coordinate system Coordinate system Z Fig 2 21 Note 1 G53 is non modal and is valid in other blocks Note 2 G53 specifies the absolute position value in the machine coordinate system The axis command is ignored when some axis uses the incremental value command Note 3 When G53 is commanded the system cancels the tool
274. el it reminds the current operation authority isn t enough in lower left in auto mode when the operation level isn t enough the machine stops moving and alarms 1 Access the authority level DEGRU Press LEVEL to degrade the operation authority level display the current operation authority level in the authority box MPUT When BH is pressed to input the password corresponding to the level to access the level operation authority Note The corresponding relation between the initial password relative to each authority level is shown as below Operation levels Initial password Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 9939999 Level 4 444444 Level 5 Without password 2 Rewriting the password ALTEH Firstly access the operation authority level to rewrite the password press FIL to rewrite the system authority register password the window is shown as below ALTER FYD Old password Mew password Confirm new CHANGE Input the old and new passwords in and press to Rs switch between the new and old passwords Finally press to complete the rewriting password 22 II O D cam 9 2r O 5 II O Oo mm 9 et O 5 C GSK CNC GSR GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual 3 3 4 System file management MEMORY DEY CE On the system window press to access the file management window The window is shown as below AUTO RESET orsIEM MEMORY DEVICE
275. em User Manual GSE Table 2 2 Command ae Initial value when power on address Move distance of tool retraction in G71 G72 cycle Ne52 parameter value R Cycle times of stock removal in turning in G73 No55 parameter value Move distance of tool retraction after Mas parameter value cutting in G74 G75 n R AlwaneoffnshnginG7 Neo parameter value R TwernGW GGLGM GE 0 Gw F Fedaeperrw G9 0 o F MepthG3 G92G7 0 mhpkNGS GE 0 S SmdeseedsecieiGU S Smnmdesw cespedspedie4GU oo o S Spindle speed switching value output Finishing times of thread cutting in G76 N957 parameter value Tool retraction width of thread cutting in G76 No19 parameter value Angle of tool nose of thread cutting in G76 Ne58 parameter value Q Min cutting value in G76 Ne59 parameter value Note 1 For the command addresses with functions such as F used for feedrate per minute feedrate per rev and metric pitch and so on they can be omitted not to input when executing the same function to definite words after the words are executed For example after executing G98 F_ without executing the thread command the pitch must be input with F word when machining metric thread Note 2 When the words in the aboved table except for F S are not omitted the input new command value is written to the corresponding parameter Note 3 When X U Y CV Z W A B_ orC H are used
276. em displays the current operation icc Auto mode and its state is run at the top left corner The system prompts LINEAR CUTTING The coordinate display area displays X Z coordinate values as the absolute position of the tool in the current workpiece coordinate system Technology data T Current tool number and tool offset number Actual speed F During actual processing the actual processing speed after feeding override Programming speed speed is set by F code in program Spindle actual speed S The spindle speed feed back by the spindle encoder can display the actual speed of the spindle only after installing the spindle encoder Programmed spindle speed S The spindle speed is specified by S code in program Comprehensive message Feedrate override It is selected by the feeding override switches Rapid override It is selected by the rapid override switches Spindle override It is selected by the spindle override switches Manual override It is selected by the manual override switches 206 Chapter III Windows MPG override Current MPG override Quantity of processing work pieces The quantity of the processing work pieces pluses one after the program executes M02 or M30 or M codes set by parameter 6710 Cutting time Executing time of auto running in one time without the time of stop and feeding pause timing begins from O after auto running starts each time the units in turn are hour minute and second Running time All execu
277. em in G50 is created Command explanation G50 is non modal G IP_ When the system uses the absolute command it specifies the new absolute coordinate position of the current point in the coordinate system when the system uses the incremental command after its executes G50 the absolute coordinate value of the current point is equal to the sum between the absolute coordinate value before execution and the coordinate incremental value 54 Chapter If G Commands Note 1 After G50 changes the workpiece coordinate system other workpiece coordinate system also performs the same offset Note 2 In G50 the system can omit one or all command addresses for each axis the current coordinate value is not input when the command value for each axis is not input When the axis command address is omitted the coordinate axis which is not input keeps its pervious coordinate value Note 3 When G50 and G command G00 G01 are in the same block the system only modifies the modal value of Group 1 and the coordinate value in the block is specified by G50 Note 4 When the system does not set G50 offset value it can set No 1202 Bit G50 to forbid G50 Note 5 After G50 sets the coordinate system the system must be turned off and then on the coordinate values set by G50 remain unchanged before power off Note 6 In NC program when LGT is set the coordinate offset mode to execute the tool offset and the system executes T function does not execu
278. ent specification specified later takes precedence Note 5 Calls can be nested to a depth of four levels including simple calls G65 and modal calls G66 This does not include subprogram call M98 Note 6 Whether the units used for argument without a decimal point correspond to the least input increment of each address is related to the parameter DPI No 3401 0 Note 7 G65 G66 cannot be in the same block with NC code otherwise the system alarms Note 8 In macro program nesting call the local variables from level 0 to 4 are provided for nesting When the level of the main program is 0 each time a macro is call the local variable level is incremented by one The values of the local variables at the previous level are saved in the CNC When M99 is executed in a macro program control returns to the calling program At that time the values of the local variables saved when the macro was called are restored Note 9 The line number of the command line of the macro statement must be home otherwise the system alarms Macro program nesting example Main prog ram Macro program Macro program Macro program Macro program Fig 2 60 Nesting macro program 00001 00002 00003 00004 00005 G65P0002 G65P0003 G65P0004 G65P0005 13 0 i199 TIT i99 199 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 137 A O e 9 3 3 e CiGSR CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual
279. ervo parameter press to save the rewritten parameter value after servo power off Note 1 Before using the servo system should be connected correctly and the configuration of the servo slave number should be right Note 2 Only in MDI mode when the parameter switch is on and the operation authority is above level 3 the parameter can be set and rewritten Note 3 The motor s default parameter cannot be modified at will if done please contact with us 217 II O D mm 9 ct O 5 CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR 3 3 2 Screw pitch compensation setting and rewriting window idi On the system window press to access the screw pitch compensation window which is shown as below MID mx sfoleEM PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION LL 16 53 14 PARAM aisiais T EN MEMORY PLO SERACH NFO DEVICE Fig 3 18 On the window the user can check and set the screw pitch compensation value corresponding to each screw pitch number B Q EE On the screw pitch compensation window press Or Or to select the compensation value of screw pitch compensation number to be set or press SEHAUH to search for the screw pitch compensation number and the cursor positions to the compensation value of screw pitch compensation to be rewritten INPUT When the operation authority is above level 2 press and the compensation value of the screw pitch compensation number can be rewritten the compensation
280. eser PROGRAM gt LOCAL DIRECTORY prog acounts 3 size byte 14 887 499 free byte 21 096 448 i name comment s size byte modified time LA Ona ongi 181 2010 10 06 18 57 42 opaze O25 14 887 384 2018 18 04 14 51 18 11 18 31 MD E r SERACH NEW LOAD OPEN gt j Fig 4 3 LOAD 3 In reset mode press ee and the selected program is loaded to the block area of the position window which becomes the current executable program the display window skips to the position window at the moment the system switches to Auto mode press START and a program can II run 4 1 4 Opening a program PROGRAM LOCAL 1 Press and then press o access the program windows which is shown in Fig 4 3 O Oo mm 9 O 5 r to select the program to be 2 In the program windows press 5 i ft O V SEHAGH opened or press to search and input the program name to be opened and then press 0k to search and the cursor positions in the program name the background of the selected program name changes into green based color such as 00001 shown in Fig 4 3 OPEN 3 Press to open the codes of the selected program in the screen which is shown in Fig 4 4 256 Chapter IV Editing and Managing Programs EDIT reser PROG gt LOCAL DIRECTORY gt PRG OBB E not selected pee E Onm25 08825 a x175 258 i 69 254 X85 Z 11 388 R85 RELATIVE X
281. ested that it should be I U O e im 9 3 3 e placed at the initial position in order to search and read 3 There can be many same block number in one program but the block number of target block of program skip has only one otherwise the program skips to the nearest block to the block 4 block number can be placed at will it is suggested that it should be placed by the rising or falling monotonously Note When the block number exceeds the range and the program runs or the grammatical check is done the relevant alarm occurs 1 5 5 Main program and subprogram To simply the programming when the same or similar machining path and control procedure is used many times its program commands are edited to a sole program to call The main program is defined to call others and the subprogram is to be called They both take up the program capacity and storage space of system The subprogram has own name and can be called at will by the main program and also can run separately The system returns to the main program to continue when the subprogram ends as follows 26 Chapter I Programming Fundamentals O 0001 O 1006 G50 X100 Z100 Gl X50 Z50 M3 SI T0101 U100 W200 G0 X0 Z0 U30 W 15 F250 B G1 U200 Z200 F200 M98 P21006 Y GO X100 Z100 B M5 S0 T0100 em 3 M30 E 5 e Main program Subprogram Fig 1 11 1 6 Program Run 1 6 1 Sequence of program run Running the current open
282. et imaginary tool nose numbers according to tool 152 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation direction in cutting Suppose there are 10 TO T9 kinds of tool nose setting and 9 directions for position relationship The tool nose directions are different in different coordinate system rear tool post coordinate system and front tool post coordinate system even if they are the same tool nose direction numbers as the following figures In figures it represents relationships between tool nose and starting point and end point of arrowhead is the imaginary tool nose T1 T8 in rear tool post coordinate system is as Fig 4 7 T1 T8 in front tool post coordinate system is as Fig 4 8 The tool nose center and starting point for TO and T9 as Fig 4 9 I 1 X axis Rear tool post coordinate system U im O e um 9 3 3 e Imaginary nose No 1 Imaginary tool nose No 2 Imaginary tool Imaginary tool nose No 3 nose No 4 Imaginary tool nose No 5 Imaginary tool nose No 6 153 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Imaginary tool nose No 7 Imaginary tool nose No 8 Fig 4 7 Imaginary tool nose number in rear tool post coordinate system U im O ta m 9 3 3 e Front tool post coordinate system X axis Pd 7 js Se 7 fe PP d d P vd amp Imaginary tool Imaginary tool nose No 2 nose No 1 Imaginary tool Imagi
283. et path without changing compensation direction in compensation mode a Tool traversing inside along corner a2180 1 linear linear 2 linear circular s Programmed path Programmed path G42 pe ke Tool nose center path Fig 4 23 linear linear moving inside Fig 4 24 linear circular moving inside 3 circular linear 4 circular circular a Programmed path Tool nose center path Fig 4 25 Circular linear moving inside Fig 4 26 Circular circular moving inside 163 CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE 5 Machining inside a 1 and zoom in the compensation vector S L Tool nose center path Programmed path Fig 4 27 Linear linear a lt 1 moving inside U im O e um 9 3 3 e b Tool traversing outside along corner 180 2290 1 linear linear 2 linear circular Programmed path Programmed path ee ee S Tool nose center path Tool nose center path Fig 4 28 Linear linear moving outside Fig 29 Linear circular moving outside 3 circular linear 4 circular circular Programmed path Tool nose center path Tool nose center path C Fig 4 30 circular linear moving outside Fig 4 31 circular circular moving outside 164 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation c Tool traversing outside along corner a 90 1 linear linear 2 linear circular d
284. eter Type Word axis Value Range 0 1023 Default Setting 0 The parameter sets the number of the furthest screw pitch error compensation point for each axis in positive direction The parameter setting value should be greater than that of parameter NO 3620 3623 Magnification for pitch error compensation PCM for each axis Way of Validating After power on Parameter Type Word axis Value Range 0 100 Default Setting 0 Set the override for each axis screw pitch error compensation If the override is set as 1 the detection unit is same as that of compensation If the override is set as O the override is same as one when it is set as 1 3624 Interval between pitch error compensation positions PCl for each axis Way of Validating After power on Parameter Type Word axis Value Range 0 100 Default Setting 0 99 999 999 Default Setting 0 Metric input 0 001 0 0001 mm II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 Raya 0001 000i deg The screw pitch compensation points are distributed in equal interval and the interval value for each axis is set respectively The minimum value of the interval is limited and set by the following formula the minimum value the maximum feedrate rapid feedrate 7500 Unit Screw pitch compensation minimum interval mm inch and deg Maximum feedrate mm min inch min and deg min For example When the maximum feedrate is 15000mm min the
285. etraction and the spindle stop are executed When the outer direction is MEASURE executed the diameter is measured is pressed to input X the measured value for the tool compensation number corresponding to the tool offset and so the operation is completed when the end face being executed the length between it and the datum level is measured the datum level MEASURE Z 0 is pressed to input X the measured value for the tool compensation number corresponding to the tool offset and so the operation is completed e yum m Note 1 If 19 9 5 is pressed many time the coordinate position when the ess pressed last is only recorded by the CNC Note 2 In the point to point toolsetting mode the position record is used after the reference tool is set and 1 other tools reach the toolsetting points is pressed i e the current coordinate position can be recorded the tool offset is input based on the fixed point toolsetting method after the tool retraction Is executed O Oo D um 9 O 5 7 5 Automatic Tool Compensation When an automatic toolsetting device is installed on the machine the CNC sends commands used to the automatic measure and automatically measures or determines the compensation amount of the tool Firstly the CNC sends a command used to the measure and the tool traverses to the measure position The CNC automatically measures the coordinate difference between the measure point and the commanded me
286. eturning to menu the first left soft key 6 Some soft keys and their window are not displayed based on the different allocation POSITION POS EABS F MODAL NC INFO RELATIVE COORDINATE SETTING CLEAR PART CNT REL MODAL NC INFO Ln RELATIVE COORDINATE SETTING CLEAR PART CNT c MODAL NC INFO Es RELATIVE COORDINATE SETTING CLEAR PART CNT LALL MODAL NC INFO a RELATIVE COORDINATE SETTING CLEAR PART CNT Note Press RELATIVE COORDINATE SETTING key in all position windows and the system automatically skips the relative coordinate window to execute the relative coordinate setting 200 Chapter III Windows PFROGEALL PRG SERACH CRENAME CNEAD SAVE AS LOAD DELETE OPEN OUTPUT SORT BY NAME SORT BY SIZE SORT BY TIME SERACH OUTPUT SORT BY NAME SORT BY SIZE SORT BY TIME 9 EDN DEL BLE CLEAR 3 CUR NEXTI Note It can be displayed after U disk is inserted in the U disk catalog 201 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR SYSTEMI SYS 4E AM CCNC PARAM BACKUP SEARCH SERVO PARAM Ex 7 5 SAVE SEARCH PITERREOR SEARCH SYSTEM INFOY DEGRD LEVEL MEMORY DEVICE C SWITCH LIST e Em OUTPUT VERSION II uoljes0doC MONITOR Ewindow1 Ewindow2 Ewindow3 Ewindow4 SELECT SEARCH PLC DATA EK ED EDT DC ADDR SRH X Ys Fe G
287. evel Pause at hole Operation 4 2 Fig 2 76 118 Chapter If G Commands Note 7 The tapping cycle temporarily cancels the tool nose radius compensation and it recovers when the fixed cycle is cancelled Note 8 When the fixed cycle is cancelled in rigid tapping the used S value is also cleared its state is the same that of the specified S0 The specified S for rigid tapping cannot be used in the program followed by the one for cancelling rigid tapping Note 9 Specify S again after cancelling the fixed cycle of rigid tapping Note 10 NO 5209 0 0 i e drilling axis is selected by the levels in rigid tapping mode When G17 G18 G19 is separately specified in G84 the drilling axes separately correspond to the basic axis X Z Y when G17 G18 G19 is separately specified in G88 the drilling axes separately correspond to the basic axis Y X Z Note 11 In default condition when G84 88 executes the rigid tapping infeed the spindle rotates forward D O Q Q 3 3 Q when the tool retraction is executed the spindle does CCW In some special applications the spindle rotates reversely but the spindle does forward when the tool retracts When the reverse thread tapping is needed GSK988T uses the selection signal of the rigid tapping spindle rotation RGROD i e G61 2 of PLC address to realize the reverse thread tapping Before G84 G88 is executed the CNC checks the selection signal s state of rig
288. evolving CNC won t stop until the remaining pulse is completed 11 23 Parameters Related to PLC Axis Control 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 fp Nec RE ove MLE Default Setting 0000 0000 0 MLE Whether all axis machine lock signal MLK is valid for PLC controlled axes 0 Valid 1 Invalid 2 OVE Signals related to dry run and override used in PLC axis control 0 Same signals as those used for the CNC 1 Signal specific to the PLC 3 RDE Whether dry run is valid for rapid traverse in PLC axis control 0 Invalid 1 Valid 357 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE 5 NCC When a travel command is issued for the PLC controlled axis according to the program 0 An alarm is issued when PLC controls the axis with an axis control comang When the PLC does not control the axis a CNC command is enabled 1 An alarm is issued unconditionally 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 E ER E EE es URE CRER Default Setting 0000 0000 0 RPD Rapid traverse rate for PLC controlled axes 0 Feedrate specified with para NO 1420 1 Feedrate specified with the feedrate data in an axis control command 1 DWE Minimum time which can be specified in a dwell command in PLC axis control when the increment system is IS C 0 1ms 1 0 1ms 3 F10 Least increment for the feedrate for cutting feed per minute in PLC axis control II 0 immmn O9tmcmin Onc 44 115 PR1 PR2 In PLC axis control the least increment unit of cutting feed
289. ext block the programmed contour in G64 is different from the actual and the difference condition is determined by F value and the angle between two paths the more the different is the more F value is Command format G61 exact stop mode G64 cutting mode I Command explanations 1 A block including G61 eactaly stops the end point of the program before the system executes the next block which is used to process sharpt edges and corners G61 is modal and valid till G64 is commanded The programmed contour is the same that of the actual 2 G64 is modal valid and default before G61 is commanded G64 path is different from that of G61 as Fig 2 27 3 G61 G64 belong to Group 15 and their relations with other G groups are referred to 5 A O Q y Q 3 3 Q Group 5 4 When G01 is executed it is in the exact stop in cutting mode because it is non cutting command 5 When G61 G64 is specified it is value in the next commanded block Tangential point Tool path in cutting mode _ ye Tool path when specifying exact stop Tangential point Fig 2 27 Note The system defaults G64 cutting mode 2 14 Fixed Cycle Command To simplify programming the system defines G command of single machining cycle with one block to complete the rapid traverse to position linear thread cutting and rapid traverse to return to the starting point G90 axial cutting cycle G92 thread
290. f 1 is 123 000 Note 7 The negative sign of variable value which changes the reference should be placed in the front of such as G00X Note 8 The variable 1 33 24100 7 199 are cleared out after they reset which are set by NO 6001Bit7 CLV and Bit6 CCV and which cannot be executed in MDI mode Note 9 When the variable value overflows the command address referring to the variable is ignored Note 10 NO 6000 Bit5 SBM sets whether the single block stop is valid in user macro program Note 11 The number in expression including brackets can be omitted For example X 10 actual value is X10 000 2 22 2 System variable The system variable is used to read and write NC internal data For example some system variable only read the tool offset value and current position data The system variable is the base of the automatic control and general machining program development 1 Interface signal The interface signal can program the exchange message between the machine controller and user macro programs i e it completes the exchange with PLC by G F signals and the interfaces 127 I BHurwiweiboid C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE with IO are defined by PLC The input signal can be only read and the output signal can be read and written Variable System variable of interface signal 1000 Read the signal with 16 bits according to corresponding to G54 0 G54 7 1032 Read the signal wit
291. f CNC machine tools according to requirements of machining technology edit user programs and input them to CNC then CNC outputs motion control commands to the servo stepper motor drive devices and last the servo or stepper motor completes the cutting feed of machine tool by mechanical driving device logic control commands in user programs to control spindle start stop tool selections cooling ON OFF lubricant ON OFF are output to electric control systems of machine tools from CNC and then the electric control systems control output components including buttons switches indicators relays contactors and so on Presently the electric control systems are employed with Programmable Logic Controller PLC with characteristics of compact convenience and high reliance Thereof the motion control systems and logic control systems are the main of CNC machine tools The system has simultaneously motion control and logic control function to control two axes of CNC machine tool to move and has PLC function Edit PLC programs ladder diagram according to requirements of input and output control of machine tool and then download them to GSK988T Turning Machine CNC system which realizes the required electric control requirements of machine tool is convenient to electric design of machine tool and reduces cost of CNC machine tool Softwares used for controlling GSK988T Turning Machine CNC system are divided into system software NC for short and PLC so
292. ference position return toolsetting Offset execution mode modifying coordinate mode tool traverse mode Precision compensation Backlash compensation compensation range 9999 9999 x check unit Memory pitch error compensation 1024 compensation points compensation point number of each is set by the parameter each point compensation range 700 700 x check unit PLC function 13 basic commands 30 functional commands 4 Chapter I Programming Fundamentals PLC ladder on line edit real time monitoring 2 level PLC program up to 5000 steps the 1 level program refresh period Many PLC programs Cup to 16 programs the current running PLC program can be selected I O unit Basic I O 40 input 32 output Operation panel I O 96 input 96 output Human computer interface Display in Chinese English and others Two dimensional tool path and solid graph display Servo state monitoring Servo parameter on line allocation Real time clock On line help Operation management Operation mode Auto Manual Edit MDI DNC MPG Reference position return Multi level operation Authorization Management Alarm log Timed stop Program edit Program capacity 36M 10000 programs including subprogram and macro program Edit mode full screen edit part program edit on the background Edit function searching modifying and deleting program block word copying deleting block Program format ISO code word without blank space relative coordinates a
293. ferring to para 5006 1 TGC Modify the program Too many axes commanded Attempt was made to move the tool along more than 031 maximum number of simultaneously controlled axes Modify the program Illegal axis for interpolation An axis not included in selected level commanded in interpolation command or basic axis with its parallel axis were commanded simultaneously that impossible to interpolate Modify the program Illegal level axis n axis T eee in ARA level commanded in 2 In circular ETET R I J K has not been specified referring to para 340325 CIR Modify the program e In circular interpolation R specifies incorrect value referring to para 3403 4 RER Modify the program Over tolerance of radius In circular interpolation difference of the distance between start point and the center of an arc and that 036 between end point and the center of an arc exceeded setting value referring to para 3410 CRE Modify the program Chamfering amount J K Chamfering amount exceeds permissive range The was specified error in thread number followed K is less than zero in G32 G34 The 032 d cutting commands number followed J or K is less than zero in G92 Modify the program Illegal lead command Lead specified by F is out of range or in variable 038 threading the lead incremental and decremental specified by R exceeded permissive range Modify the program Chamfering amount too Chamfering amount of long axis wa
294. fied in DNC and cannot be used in DNC and MDI mode Modify the program MDI program Missing end statement DO END does not correspond to 1 1 nOr has other ilegal cmd exists in END block incorrect format Or control jumped into loop Modify the program 210 Substution statement of User s authority is too low to execute subtution custom macro not allowed statement of custom macro Modify the program 211 Illegal loop number In DOn 1Sns3 is not established Modify the program L4 and macro statement in NC and custom macro coexist Modify the program same block Illegal macro sequence The sequence number specified in the branch number statement was not 1 99999 or it can t be searched Modify the program 214 Illegal argument address An unallowable argument address was used which is not in Argument Designation Modify the program Illegal argument The argument is incorrect or the argument is illegal 370 gt D 5 Q x Appendix 1 Alarm List OOOO Medi the program Operand of logical operation Operand of logical operation statement OR XOR AND statement error are negative Modify the program G67 custom macro cancel G67 was commanded while corresponding G66 N command was not found Please check the program NO Co whether G66 should be added and referring to para 600021 G6 nModify the program The same axis was Axis control command was given by PLC to an axis
295. for each axis in basic coordinate system ASA Way of Validating After power on Parameter Type Word axis 314 Chapter XI Parameters Value Range 0 7 To ensure the levels of the arc interpolation the tool offset and the tool nose radius etc G17 X Y level G18 Z X level G19 Y Z level Set each control axis to be one of three basic axes X Y or an axis parallel to the X Y Z Only one axis of the basic three axes can be set X Y and Z the parallel axes can be set as two more axes which is paralleled with the basic axis Setting value Meaning They are neither basic three axes nor the parallel axes X axis of the basic three axes Y axis of the basic three axes Z axis of the basic three axes Parallel axis of X axis Parallel axis of Y axis Parallel axis of Z axis 1023 Number of servo axis for each axes NSA Way of Validating After power on Value Range 1 quantity of controlled axes Parameter Type Word axis Set each control axis as the corresponding N servo axis Generally the setting value of the control axial number and that of the servo axial number are same The so called control axis number is to set parameter in the axis or the serial number of the signal in the axis When the spindle is taken as the control axis it is set as 5 11 4 Parameters Related to Coordinate System 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 wR Iz T Modification authority Equipment management authority
296. formation and advice for the users User s Responsibility Be trained with the safety operation of CNC system and familiar with the safety operation procedures Be responsible for the dangers caused by adding changing or altering to the original CNC systems and the accessories Be responsible for the failure to observe the provisions for operation adjustment maintenance installation and storage in the manual This manual is subject to change without further notice This manual is reserved by end user We are full of heartfelt gratitude to you for supporting us in the use of GSK s products GIGS CNC SK VI GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Contents Contents ME eco csee tC eS 1 Chapter Programming Fundamentals ccccccccsccscecececeeeeceeeseeeseneeseeeseeeseueeseeesseessgeeseeeseeetaaes 3 14 X59 9909 TM IMMOCUCHONM 22526 e ae ee tester aster eee Anas uot csset ontbd Moe eee Reeder 3 1 2 CNC system of machine tools and CNC machine tools eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee 5 T1 29 Programming F ridarmeritals zcisute eeu hd ea n eet teo e oin Senes een Una Urt sewed OUR eux ditas deu T kod CoordmatesdelinitoN scerna deedeu tate ct tea hit Slay eee tue c Aue 7 1o22 JINCHSMMCTICSY Sie Maicaset T E T I 9 too MIX WVE ere en er eee ee ee oe eee 10 1 3 4 RETEFENCE DOSINOM sxscrcevine nana ida ber ea dala ob ecd cda rv eur nda 10 1 5 0 3Machibiecoordihate SVSTOEii gie o Co
297. ftware PLC for short NC system is used for controlling display communication edit decoding interpolation and acceleration deceleration and PLC system for controlling explanations executions inputs and outputs of ladder diagrams Standard PLC programs are loaded except for the special order when GSK980TDa Turning Machine CNC System is delivered concerned PLC control functions in following functions and operations are described according to control logics of standard PLC programs marking with Standard PLC functions in GSK980TDa Turning CNC System User Manual Refer to Operation Manual of machine manufacturer about functions and operations of PLC control because the machine manufacturer may modify or edit PLC programs again Programming is a course of workpiece contours machining technologies technology parameters and tool parameters being edit into part programs according to special CNC programming G codes CNC machining is a course of CNC controlling a machine tool to complete machining of workpiece according requirements of part programs Technical flow of CNC machining is shown in Fig 1 2 Chapter I Programming Fundamentals Analyse workpiece drawings and confirm machining processing Q5 67 Edit part programs and record into CNC O0001 I G00 X3 76 Z0 G01 Z 1 28 F50 Test part programs and execute trial run Hulwiweiboid Execute toolsetting and set tool offsets and coordinates Run part progr
298. fy other axes not included in ZX level in 127 included in ZX level in G70 G76 and move command between ns nf Modify 124 26 1 G70 G76 the program Illegal G code in G70 G73 Specify unusable G code between ns nf specified by P amp 128 Q Modify the program 129 30 1 G70 G73 cannot operate in G70 G73 with P amp Q was specified in MDI mode Illegal macro statement in Macro statement is unallowable in G 0 G73 Illegal subprogram call in Subprogram call is unallowable in the end move 131 G70 G73 command specified by P amp Q in G70 G73 nModify the program G70 G73 command Modify the program G70 G73 G70 G73 command Modify the program in G70 G73 found in G70 G71 G72 or G73 Modify the program in G70 G73 G70 G73 nModify the program The tw O blocks as The two blocks as components of G71 G73 command components of G 1 G73 are discontinuous which is possible to cause error command are discontinuous Modify the program exceeds 100 in G70 G73 Modify the program Target shape between Ns amp A target shape which is not monotonous increase or 136 Nf is not monotonous in decrease is specified in multiple repetitive cycle G71 138 G71 G73 command or G72 or in G73 Z axis isn t monotonous or X axis isn t monotonous while there is chamfering or finishing 367 gt D 5 Q x 36 Sit CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual allowance along Z axis referrin
299. g 4 43 Linear circular without intersection changing compensation direction lii Circular circular G42 C S E C E Programmed path N Tool nose center path center center N Fig 4 44 Circular circular without intersection changing compensation direction 167 CGSN CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual 4 2 4 Tool traversing in Offset canceling mode In compensation mode when the system executes G04 it enters the compensation canceling mode which is defined to compensation canceling of block The system cannot execute the circular command G02 or G03 in canceling tool compensation mode otherwise the system alarms and stops run a Tool traversing inside along corner a2180 1 linear linear 2 circular linear Programmed path D Programmed path U im O e um 9 3 3 e G40 OK Tool nose center path S Nae N M G42 Ls G42 IC Tool nose center path Fig 4 45 Circular linear moving inner Fig 4 46 CircularJinear moving inner and canceling offset and canceling offset b Tool traversing outside along corner 180 a290 1 linear linear 2 circular linear Programmed path Programmed path L Tool nose center path Fig 4 47 Circular inear moving outside and canceling offset Fig 4 48 Circular inear moving outside and canceling offset c Tool traversing outside along
300. g the next T code and subsequent blocks become valid 1 A block to be buffered next and subsequent blocks become valid 6 EVO When in tool offset compensation mode the compensation amount is changed 0 A block specifying the next T code and subsequent blocks become valid 1 A block to be buffered next and subsequent blocks become valid O 9 O 5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 uw ter twr Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 0 LD1 Offset number of tool offset 0 Specified using the lower two digits of a T code 1 Specified using the lower one digit of a T code 2 LWT Tool wear compensations is performed by 0 Shifting the coordinate system 1 Moving the tool there isn t any connection with LWM and compensate in the block of T code 4 LGT Tool offset compensation 0 Compensated by the shift of the coordinate system there isn t any connection with LWM and compensate in the block of T code 344 Chapter Xl Parameters 1 Compensated by the tool movement 6 LWM Tool offset when LGT 1 0 Is done in the T code block 1 Is done together with the axis movement Note When LGT is 0 the offset is executed in T code block and there isn t any connection with the parameter 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 we een 1 Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 2 CCN When automatic reference postion return G28
301. g to para 5102 1 MRC Modify the program Start point was on cutting Start point was on cutting path in G71 G73 which may path in G71 G73 cause interfere of tool and workpiece referring to para 5104 2 FCK Modify the program Direction of chamfering and Direction of chamfering and finishing allowance along X finishing allowance along X axis is inconsistent in G73 nModify the program axis is inconsistent in G73 Direction of chamfering and Direction of chamfering and finishing allowance along 142 finishing allowance along Z Z axis is inconsistent in G73 nModify the program axis is inconsistent in G73 Finishing allowance in Finishing allowance in G70 G73 is out of range Modify 143 G70 G73 out of range the program G00 or G01 move command GOO or G01 move command should include in first 144 not found in first block of block of G71 G72 nModify the program G71 G72 145 X axis motion in the first X axis increment was not commanded in first block of 146 block of G71 G71 or X axis increment is zero or Z axis increment was commanded Modify the program Z axis motion in the first Z axis increment was not commanded in first block of 147 block of G72 G72 or Z axis increment is zero or X axis increment was commanded Modify the program Depth of cutting is less than Escaping amount is less than zero in G71 or G72 zero in G71 or G72 Modify the program Escaping amount is less Escaping amount is less
302. gkeyWdetr ooo Y Spindle COW Keyindicator OOo vm Tef dedoneymdcwo vm Ze amp GedonCjeymdety ooooo YE Yesari keyini ooo YE3 Zeismamezeopontmdcdo Ym4 Yaxismactine ero pointindeator vs Zaxismactine ero poitindestor vm Xaxis drecton Oc reyindcstor YE Rakwwesekeymdcdor Y26 0 Indicator of space key below the cycle start key Y26 1 L4 L4indicator o 13 imer Yms mar Yma incisor Ym5 SyemumigRUNdeRo 7 Ym5 Cais mechne zero ponnier er ae meene zero sonnir a to panel button Y29 0 Connected to terminal strip P 5 indicator cycle start Connected to panel button Y29 1 Connected to terminal stri Y29 2 Y29 7 Connected to terminal strip Note The PLC addresses Y18 Y26 are the fixed addresses of indicator output on the panel their functions fixed Addresses Y27 Y29 are lead to the terminal strip on the gt D 5 Q x backboard of the panel the exact functions are defined by PLC 388 Appendix 2 Standard Ladder Function Allocation 2 3 Standard PLC Parameter Instruction 2 3 1 Parameter K Note K0 K7 do not need to be set K8 0 X axis manual movement direction ME Uv K8 1 Y axis manual movement direction OU oo emenehememend K8 2 Z axis manual movement direction 1 reversed 0 not reversed MEM The 4 axis manual movement direction DO s emes samem C axis manual mo
303. gle is converted into the movement distance of linear axis along the surface in the CNC inside which makes the rotary axis and other axis execute the linear interpolation or circular interpolation After interpolation the distance is converted into the movement amount of the rotary axis which is shown below Developed Fig 2 9 Command format 39 Incremental system Metric input Inch input X U ISB system 99999 999 99999 999 9999 9999 9999 9999 ISC system 9999 9999 9999 9999 999 99999 999 99999 ER EN ISB ISC 0 99999999 0 99999999 Hulwiweiboid GSE C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual X U Y V ZW a G07 1 n r Activate the cylindrical interpolation code G07 1 can be written to G107 B C or G7 1 but must not be with other command in a line v A O e 9 3 3 e G07 1 n o Disable the cylindrical interpolation mode It must not be with other command in a line Command explanation G7 1 is non modal r is the cylindrical radius Note 1 The rotary axis in the cylindrical interplation mode is specified by No 1022 X Y Z or the axis parallel with it is also done G17 G19 is specified to select the level for which the rotary axis is the specified linear axis For example when the rotary axis is X G17 must specify XY level which is determined by the rotary axis and Y axis The rotary axis in the cylindrical interpolation mode must be set to the only one
304. gram Input a new program name in the dialog box RENAME PRHGOHRHKHI OK press and the selected program is renamed as the input new CANCEL program name and the system returns Press to cancel the rename operation and the system returns to the previous menu Note 1 The file which has been loaded or is running cannot be renamed Note 2 Only when the operation authority is equal to or more than level 3 can renaming a program be executed 4 2 2 Saving a program as V In PROGRAM window press to move the cursor to select a program RENAME press to save the selected program as another name Input a new program name in the SAVE PRG As Ok dialog box press to save the program as For example OK input 2222 press and No 00011 program is saved as 02222 and the cursor skips to the new program name which is shown in Fig 4 6 EDIT reser PROGRAM gt LOCAL DIRECTORY prog acounts 3 size byte 14 887 499 free byte 21 096 448 name comments size byte modified time Ch OnAZ6 OBme5 14 887 384 2818 18 84 14 51 18 00111 00111 14 2010 10 06 11 09 18 SAVE PRG AS 0 2224 11 23 12 ee a SS Se Fig 4 6 Note Only when the operation authority is equal to or more than level 4 can saving a program as be executed 258 Chapter IV Editing and Managing Programs 4 2 3 Deleting a program amp E y 2 In PROGRAM window press l l or to select the p
305. h 6 bits one time Corresponding to G54 G55 signal states 1100 Write the signal with 16 bits according to Corresponding to F54 0 F54 7 F55 0 1115 its bit to PLC F55 7 signal states 1132 Write the signal with 16 bits to PLC one Corresponding to F54 F55 signal states time 1133 Write the signal with 32 bits to PLC one Corresponding to F56 F57 F58 F59 time Specify from 99999999 to signal states 99999999 2 Tool compensation value The system variable can read write the tool compensation value The system variable of the tool compensation storage area is 1501 2999 The variable numbers divided exactly in the above range are illegal The variable number of 2201 2299 2901 2999 alarm The concrete range are referred to the following table Set the axis number to be n 1 5 the compensation number to be m 1 99 the offset variable number of the axis to be 1600 n 1 100 m the wear variable number to be 2300 n 1 100 m number a be COE CH ONE oe 9 Compensation 5 axis Radius compensation Tool Rem de m ST e 99 209 2799 2199 2899 1599 Note Range of 1501 1599 0 9 and is rounded when it is with decimal point 3 Marco program alarm There is the alarm and the alarm message specified by the user in program The variable is only written instead of being read Function 3000 When the system executes the assignment statement of 3000 XXx it stops the run and alarms
306. h error OK compensation Value and download the screw pitch compensation file Upload and download the HEN D LL The parameter switch on OK Allowable rewriting the parameter The program switch on OK Allowable editing the program Set tool lift and download IN its files Input he tool MEN sas Value allowable tool setting and download the tool compensation and the tool offset files Upload me screw pitch OK EE foe or ar bna the tool NN compensation and the tool offset files If execute the operation limited by the authority level the corresponding authority must be II O Oo mm 9 O 5 SYSTEM obtained Press on GSK988T panel to access the system window and then press orol EM DEGRU ALTER MPUT to access the password window finally press LEVEL l FID Or _ PWD to 220 Chapter III Windows access the corresponding setting and input the password corresponding to the operation level the relative authority is obtained On the password setting window the password of the level or lower than the level can be rewritten and the current password level can be degraded The operation authority of level 1 isn t saved after power off and access level 2 after power on again The operation authority of levels 2 5 are saved restore the operation authority level after power on again When execute the operation which doesn t reach the authority lev
307. he current window 2 Operate on the current secondary window such as editing and rewriting the Value or displaying the content etc 1 5 Machine Operation Panel 1 5 4 Division of machine operation panel GSK988T matches two kinds of operation panel including MPUO2A and MPUO2B MPUOAA is with MPG and MPUO2B is without MPG shown in Fig 1 10 190 Chapter Overview ALM RUN u LL er Ld ff 0 LS Hus Lt lz La La CAAT FI ry Q g BEEHHEN M Pre eee EDIT REF RETURN MANIN MARC B D 2 E w D roa Prono frn uer ss ma Tum Tone feos 2 sup toon et 2 E WFO BVL25 Vv S096 0 sor nl cong l E KLS es ukud HiL g o e g A JAANE sofa ef y X Qu ec Sow on OME UMAG CW ESAT DOOR OWC scene g e e e g o m p p SEEPEEEEE Qoz RAPID s S 36 TOOL OFFSETRLLBRICAT ING TALSTOOX i vor TCR CTETUR MANON e e e a IE ce l Dc f j E 2 DUNG THG HT ANT Fig 1 10 II Note The operations related to the machine operation panel described in the manual has two types and when the panel allocated by the user is different from the two please refer to the attached message 1 5 2 State indicator and press key definition on the panel O D m 9 O 5 The function of keys on GSK988T machine panel is defined by PLC program ladder diagram and about the detailed function of each key refer to the manual of the machine manufacturer The machine panel is taken as the reference
308. he cylindrical interpolation mode the alarm occurs when the cylindrical interpolation is enabled in the used tool radius compensation mode Note 6 In cylindrical interpolation mode the movement amount of rotary axis specified by the angle is converted into the movement distance of linear axis along outerside surface which makes rotary axis and another axis execute the linear interpolation or circular interpolation After interpolation the distance is converted into the angle and the movement amount for the conversion is rounded to least input increment So when the diameter of the cylindrical is lesser the actual movement amount is not equal to the specified movement amount but the error does not acculmulate MOTION REV 2x 2n 2x2n7 MOTION REV MOTION REV movement amount per rotation of rotary axis its value is set by No 1260 R Radius of workpiece Round to least input increment Actual motion amount x command valuex Note 7 In the cylindrical interpolation mode the system alarms when the positioning operation rapid movement command G00 and other commands to bring rapid traverse including G28 G53 G73 G74 G76 G80 G89 cannot be specified Note 8 In the cylindrical interpolation mode the system alarms when the workpiece coordinate system G50 G54 G59 or the local coordinate system is specified Note 9 In the cylindrical interpolation mode the system resets to clear the cylindrical interpolation
309. he details refer to the manual of the machine manufacturer Pressing relatives keys to stop 1 During auto running press 2 and the machine is shown as below 1 Machine feeding decelerates till stopping 2 The mode function and the state are saved 3 Press m the program continues to execute 2 Press 1 All axes running decelerates till stopping 2 M and S functions output invalid After pressing j whether auto switch off signals of spindle CW CCW lubricating cooling etc is set by the parameter 3 After auto running ends the mode function is hold 273 II O Oo um 9 ct O 5 GSR C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual 3 Press emergence stop button During machine running in the dangerous or the emergency case press the emergency stop button the external emergence stop signal is valid CNC accesses the emergency stop then the machine running stops immediately all output is off such as the spindle revolving and the cooling fluid etc Press the emergency stop button the emergency stop alarm clears and CNC resets 4 Switching the operation mode During auto running switch into the reference position return MPG single or manual the current block pause at once during auto running switch into edit or MDI mode the running stops after running the current block Note 1 Confirm the trouble is shot before clearing the emergence stop alarm Note 2 Before powe
310. he selected program 9 to be loaded is displayed in the block column of the position window press and the system enters Auto mode press D and the system executes the loaded program SAVE save the program being saved currently 260 Chapter IV Editing and Managing Programs CANCEL pressing the key can cancel the previous step of the program being edited cancel up to the last edited 10 steps RECOVER pressing the key can recover the previously cancelled program d LOCATE L pressing the key can rapidly position to the specified line exactly COPY BLE J copy the block where the current cursor is PASTE 8 E mm kin the place where pressing it can paste the previously copied block DEL BLK J delete the block where the current cursor is Press and a and CHECK appear in the current window SEARCH EM it can rapidly find the character string and positions the cursor to the behind of FROM d NEXT the searched character string Select the three search mode and PREY in the course of search CHECK After a program is edited pressing CHECK Ican check whether the program has mistakes if have there is a prompt below screen please refer to the prompt check and rewrite the program Note 1 When No 3404 6 is 0 the program ends with M02 M30 M99 otherwise the system prompts the E mistake when program runs Note 2 A big file cannot be edit it ex
311. he thread with 10 teeth inch is machined using F 25 4 10 programs Note 14 The system automatically checks the spindle speed before machining the thread the system alarms when the spindle speed is not commanded The spindle speed cannot be checked in the course of the machining D O Q Q 3 3 Q Example Pitch 2mm 61 3mm 62 2mm total cutting depth 2mm with two times cut in Starting point Z axis Fig 2 57 Program O0009 G00 X28 Z3 First cut in 1mm G32 X51 W 75 F2 0 First taper cutting GOO X55 Tool retraction W75 Z returns to the starting point X27 Second tool infeed 0 5mm G32 X50 W 75 F2 0 Second taper thread cutting G00 X55 Tool retraction W75 Z returns to the starting point M30 2 16 2 Thread cutting with variable lead G34 Command function G34 can machine the metric inch pitch Machine metric or inch straight taper end face thread with variable pitch Command format G34 XU Z W F J K R Command specifications G34 is modal IP J K Q Meaning and value range are the same those of G32 93 C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE It is the first thread pitch from starting point and its range is the same that of G32 Incremental value or decremental value of spindle per pitch R F2 F1 R is with a direction F1 gt F2 the pitch decreases when R is negative F1 F2 the pitch increases when R is positive R range 0 01 inch pitch
312. he tool offset value is valid to the linear axis instead of the rotary axis Note 2 The linear axis and the rotary axis are specified cannot be 0 by the axis attribution for each axis of No 1022 Note 3 The name for each axis is set by No 1020 Note 4 No 5004 Bit1 sets the tool offset value for each axis to be the diameter or the radius value designation No 1006 Bit3 sets the amount of movement for each axis to be the diameter or the radius designation Note 5 When the operation authority level is more than 4 the tool offset setting the wear value setting and others can be executed Note 6 The system supports the tool offset of the most 4 linear axes when the linear axes is more than 4 the system only displays 4 linear axes 3 4 1 2 Tool life Press TOOL LIFE to enter the tool offset setting window which is shown in Fig 3 34 230 Chapter III Windows MD RESET Tool life SETTING gt TOOL SETTING gt TOOL LIFE preview LIFE INFO GROUP 0 TOOL NO DOCE LIFE Ws ell oT MBLE gt USED E JUMP amp IN LIFE GROUP 01 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 9 LIFE LEFT a If AAA HARA DOO oo00 000 000 Group 000 0000 0o00 0000 000 0000 000 000 info p GROUP 0 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL LIFE LEFT Iool 0003 oo anon noon 100 m 0000 nooo info gt DUO 0000 NH 0000 0o00 0000 000 000 GROUP 03 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL LIFE LEFT DUO 0000 DOO BUD DOO oo00 000 DUO DUO DOO DOO 0000 DOO oo00 000 000 G
313. he toolsetting point as shown in Fig 10 4 point A 10 X axis Z axis Fig 10 4 MEASURE 8 Switch into the tool offset window the cursor moves to 002 offset press to access the measuring window and input X135 in and then OK wes Use the same method to input Z0 9 The toolsetting is completed and the tool traverses to the safe position 10 Press A automatically machine the workpiece in Auto mode 11 Modify the tool wear value to the tolerance range of the workpiece dimension when the measured workpiece dimension is different from the actual 2 Compound Machining Machining the workpiece is shown in Fig 10 5 and the rod is b136x190mm 304 Chapter X Processing Examples o 130 Bar stock II Fig 10 5 2 tool opo Outer finishing tool O Oo D um 9 oO 5 Outer roughing tool Grooving tool its width is 3mm 3 tool 4 tool Thread turning tool the nose angle is 60 3 Editing a program According to the mechanical processing and introduction of the commands in the manual set the work piece coordinate system shown as Fig 12 1 edit the programs shown as below C GSK CNC GSE GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual O00001 Program name N0000 GO X150 Z50 Position to the safe place to change the tool N0005 M12 Clamp the chuck N0010 M3 S800 The spindle is on and its speed is 800 N0020 M8 The cooling is on N0030 T0101 Change into the 1 tool N0040 G
314. i O SETTING gt TOOL SETTING gt T00L LIFE 0000 O O Ol Z2 LIFE INFO GROUP 01 TOOL NO 0000 LIFE USED 0 o SYMBLE x USED ft JUMP 6 IN LIFE o GROUP 01 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 2 LIFE LEFT 0 f o DB 40002 E M ann 0000 0000 0000 0000 x 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 GROUP 02 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 8 LIFELEFT 0 0003 0001 0000 0000 100 0000 ooo0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 GROUP 03 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 0 LIFE LEFT 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ooo 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 GROUP D4 SPECIFY BY TIWE LIFE TOTAL 0 LIFE LEFT 0 10 14 00 a GRP SET DEL GRP TOOL SET DEL TOOL SEARCH Fig 3 37 4 Delete the tool In MDI mode move the cursor to the tool number press DELETE TOOL set the current tool number to zero simultaneously clear the tool life of the tool number 5 Delete group In MDI mode press DELETE GROUP to delete all tools in the group i e clear the tool number in the group simultaneously and clear the reset life in the group as Fig 3 38 232 Chapter III Windows MDI ss SETTING gt TOOL SETTING gt TOOL LIFE LIFE INFO GROUP Di TOOL NO 0000 LIFE USED 0 SYMBLE x USED ft JUMP IN LIFE GROUP 01 SPECIFY BY TIME LIFE TOTAL 2 LIFELEFT 0 f vooo1 oooz 00
315. id tapping spindle rotation to confirm the rotation of tapping axis When RGROD signal is set to 1 and G84 G88 executes the infeed the spindle rotates forward when the tool retracts the spindle rotates reversely which is the normal thread tapping when RGROD signal is set to 1 and the infeed is done the spindle rotates reversely but when the tool retracts the spindle rotates forward which is the reverse thread tapping After the CNC is turned on RGROD signal is default to 0 In the course of G84 G88 rigid tapping RGROD state is not changed After G80 is executed RGROD state can be reset Or reset it before G84 G88 is executed Adding RGROD signal to the PLC ladder can realize the reverse thread rigid tapping Program example Suppose that the current system is ISB and its least input unit is 0 001 mm G98 feed per minute M29 S1000 switch to the rigid tapping mode command the spindle speed 1000 After the block is executed the spindle does not rotate GO X50 ZO X and Z position to the stating point G84 Z 50 P3000 F2000 Starting point is X50 ZO and the hole position is the same that the starting point the hole bottom position is X50 Z 50 and the pause time is 3s the thread lead is 2 according to the commanded F and S value Q is not commanded and is the standard rigid tapping cycle G80 the fixed cycle is cancelled and the motive tool stops rotation 119 I 5 A O Q y Q 3 3 Q CGS C
316. if the chamfering C or corning R R is specified in other blocks besides G01 and G02 G03 except for G32 G34 it is ignored Note 2 The block following chamfering or corning R for the chamfering or corning operation must be the one of G01 or G02 G03 The alarm no movement after chamfering corning R occurs when other commands are specified But only one G04 dwell block can be inserted between these blocks The system pauses after the inserted chamfering corning R block is executed Note 3 When the system exceeds the previous interpolation movement range caused by the inserted chamfering or corning R block the alarm commanded movement being excessive small in the block following chamfering corning R occurs Block to insert chamfering G02 U 20 W10 RK10 C10 CO U10 V1 4 Kid MU Full line is tool paths without chamfering Fig 2 81 Note 4 The chamfering or corning R block can be inserted into the movement commands included in the same level When the level selection G17 G18 G19 in the next block after the chamfering or corning R is specified the alarm occurs the level selection command is specified after chamfering or corning R Note 5 When two linear interpolation operations are executed and their angle difference is within 1 the movement of chamfering coring R block is 0 When linear interpolation and circular interpolation operations are executed and angle difference of their tangent at
317. ignal 0 Causes reset state 1 Causes clear state G23 When the power is turned on 0 G22 mode stored stroke check on 1 G23 mode stored stroke check off 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AD2 CIR RER J TT Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 4 RER When arc radius R not out of tolerance is so small that end point is not on the arc in arc interpolation 0 Calculate new radius for semicircle 1 Alarm is issued 5 CIR When neither the distance l J K from the start point to the center nor an arc radius R is specified in circular interplation 0 The tool moves to end point by linear interplation 1 Alarm is issued 6 AD2 Specification of the same address two or more times in a block 0 Next specification is enabled 1 Alarm Note It alarms when the parameter is 1and two or two more G codes of one group are commanded in one block 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ee J Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 4 M30 When M30 is executed in automatic operation II O D um 9 my O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE 0 Control returns to the head of the program 1 Control does not return to the head of the program 5 M02 When M02 is executed in automatic operation 0 Control returns to the head of the program 1 Control does not return to the head of the program 6 EOR When an end of reco
318. imit rate of feed per revolution during PLC axis control 8028 Linear acceleration deceleration time constant of speed command for PLC axis control EPAT Parameter Type Word axis Default Setting 200 Value Range 0 3000ms Set the time required for the servo motor rotation speed to increase or decrease in JOG feed INCREMENT SYSTEM VALUE UNITS II O Oo m 9 O 5 Note If it is set to 0 the system doesn t control the acceleration and deceleration 11 24 Parameters Related to Basic Function 8130 Total number of controlled axes TCA Way of Validating After power on Default Setting 2 Value Range 2 5 Set the total number of controlled axes by the CNC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SL Way of Validating After power on Default Setting 0000 0001 0 HPG Manual handle feed is 0 Not used 1 Used 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Ld 4 ee ee ee TTF Way of Validating After power on 360 Chapter XI Parameters Default Setting 0000 0000 0 TLF Tool life management is 0 Not used 1 Used 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 se ses Axc ssc Way of Validating After power on Default Setting 0000 0001 0 SSC Constant surface speed control is 0 Not used 1 Used 1 AXC Spindle positioning is 0 Not used 1 Used 2 SCS CS contour control is 0 0 Not used 1 Used 3 MSP ulti spindle control is 0 0 Not used 1 Used 11 25 Parameters Related to GSK CAN C
319. infeed 5mm and tool retraction 0 5mm each time rapid return to starting point Z5 after cutting feed to end point Z 20 X tool infeed 3mm and cycle the above mentioned steps M30 End of program 2 15 6 Radial Grooving Multiple Cycle G75 Command function Axial Z tool infeed cycle compounds radial discontinuous cutting cycle Tool infeeds from starting point in radial direction retracts infeeds again and again and again and last tool retracts in axial direction and retracts to position in radial direction which is called one radial cutting cycle tool infeeds in axial direction and execute the next radial cutting cycle cut to end point of cutting and then return to starting point starting point and end point are the same one in G75 which is called one radial grooving compound cycle Directions of axial tool infeed and radial tool infeed are defined by relative position between end point X U Z W and starting point of cutting G75 is used to machine the radial loop groove or column surface by radial discontinuously cutting breaking stock and stock removal Command format G75 R e G75X U _ ZW __ PAD Q AK R Ad F Command explanations 1 The cycle movement is executed by X WD and P Ai blocks of G75 G75 is not executed when there is no X U in G75 block When only G75 R_Ce block is executed and only No 5139 value is modified the cycle operation cannot be executed 2 Ad and e are specified by the same
320. ing CNC System User Manual G55 workpiece coordinate system 2 G56 workpiece coordinate system 3 G57 workpiece coordinate system 4 G58 workpiece coordinate system 5 G59 workpiece coordinate system 6 Command explanation G54 G59 are modal J O To Note 1 The workpiece is created after the system is turned on and executes the reference position o return When the system is turned on it automatically selects G54 as the current workpiece E coordinate system zi Note 2 G54 G59 describing the 6 workpiece coordinate systems can change their positions by the external workpiece zero offset value or workpiece zero offset value and their relationship is as Fig 2 22 A A Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece coordinate system G54 coordinate G55 coordinate G56 coordinate G57 1 system 2 system 3 system 4 gt Zero offset value 2 of workpiece Zero offset value 3 workpie Zero offset value 1 of workpiece Zero offset value Workpiece 4 of workpiece coordinate G58 system 5 Zero offset value 6 Zero offset value of workpiece of outer workpiece Zero offset value of workpiece 6 Workpiece coordinate system 6 G59 gt Machine zero Fig 2 23 Note 3 Use the following method to change 1 MDI input changes the workpiece coordinate system zero 2 Use G50 to move the workpiece coordinate system Specifying G50 IP makes the workpiece coordinate system G54 G59 to set
321. ing measure and so on of workpiece measure Command format G31 IP F Command explanations non modal G command 00 group Its address format is same that of G01 Cancel the tool nose radius compensation before using it Feedrate should not be set to too big to get the precise stop position The following block execution when skipping 46 Chapter If G Commands 1 The next block of G31 is the incremental coordinate programming below G31 W100 0 F100 U50 0 Input skip signal here I 100 0 Actual motion Motion without skip signal U im O ta um 9 3 3 e Fig 2 13 2 he next block of G31 is the absolute coordinate programming of one axis below G3 7200 0 F100 X100 0 Input skip signal here Actual motion Motion without skip signal Fig 2 14 3 The next block of G31 is the absolute coordinate programming of two axes below Program G31 Z200 F100 G01 X100 Z300 100 300 Input skip signal here Actual motion Motion without skip signal Fig 2 15 Skip signal explanation SKIP signal SKIP X3 5 Type input signal Function X3 5 ends the skip cutting l e in a block containing G31 the skip signal becoming the absolute coordinate position of 1 is to be stored in the macro variable 5061 47 I U A O Q y Q 3 3 Q C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE 5065 its last bit
322. ing point and the end point 66 Chapter If G Commands are the same one The command is applied to the formed roughing of non formed rod Command format G71U Ad Re F S T 1 G71P ns Q nf U Au W Aw 2 N ns F U S O To Ln 3 e N anf 7 3 5 To Command specifications 1 ns nf blocks in programming must be followed G71 blocks If they are in the front of G71 blocks the system automatically searches and executes ns nf blocks and then executes the next program following nf block after they are executed which causes the system executes ns nf blocks repetitively 2 ns nf blocks are used to count the roughing path and the blocks are not executed when G71 is executed F S T commands of ns nf blocks are invalid when G71 is executed at the moment F S T commands of G71 blocks are valid F S T of ns nf blocks are valid when executing ns nf to command G70 finishing cycle 3 For G71 I type ns block is only G00 G01 which has no Z W in Group 01 otherwise the system considers it G71 II type machining 4 X and Z dimensions must be changed monotonously always increasing or reducing for the finishing path 5 In ns nf blocks there are only G commands G01 G02 G03 G04 G96 G97 G98 G99 G40 G41 G42 and the system cannot call subprograms M98 M99 6 G96 G97 G98 G99 G40 G41 G42 are invalid in G71 and valid in G70 G96 G97 G98 7 When G71 is executed the system
323. input Address N or R was not entered A number not specified for a parameter 063 was entered The axis No is too large The axis number was not specified in the axis type parameter An axis was specified in the parameter which is not an axis type Modify the program 065 Cumulated shift out of range The result of calculation is out of allowable range Modify the program A stroke limit check inhibited The coordinate for para of the plus side inhibited area area error is not greater than that of the minus side inhibited area 068 or the difference is not greater than 2000 output increment referring to para No 1322 amp No 1323 nModify the program 071 opindle orientation please Without any spindle orientation an attempt was made for spindle indexing Perform spindle orientation C H code and move cmd in A move command of other axis was specified in same 072 same block block as spindle indexing address C H Modify the program M code and move cmd in A move command of other axis was specified in same 073 same block block as spindle indexing address M Modify the program legal command G12 1 The conditions are incorrect when polar interpolation is G13 1 started or cancelled An1 n modes other than G40 074 G12 1 G13 1 was specified An2 An error is found in level selection Para assignment incorrect Modify the program Improper G code Specify G code which can t be used in polar coordinate ys Improper Cote in
324. int is valid Note 2 Subprogram block and single block running with M98P or M99 or in G65 block the single block stops Note 3 About executing the fixed cycle and multiply cycle in the single block mode refer to the relative content in the command manual 6 4 4 Feedrate override The feedrate of programming can be decreased or increased through selecting the percent 96 on the override dial which is for checking the program For example the machine move at 50mm min when the specified feedrate is 100mm min in the program and the override is set as 50 The steps of changing the feedrate override before automatic running or during running the feedrate override dial can be set as the expected percent 96 280 Chapter VI Auto Operation AVATAV AVAE AM Feedrate override button The override can be specified from 0 to 150 For some machine the range is stipulated in the manual Override of the thread cutting During the thread cutting the override is invalid but the feedrate specified by the program is still valid 6 4 5 Rapid traverse override For the rapid traverse speed there are four overrides FO 25 50 and 100 The rapid traverse speed for each axis is set by parameter 1420 FO is set by parameter 1421 II The step of changing the rapid traverse override During the rapid traverse select one override through pressing O Oo um 9 oO 5 The following types of the rapid travers
325. interpolation in JOG feed JET for each axis Modification authority Equipment management authority Parameter Type Word axis Value Range 0 4000ms Default Setting 100 Set the acceleration and deceleration in exponential type for each axis JOG feeding and the time constant of acceleration and deceleration in linear type after interpolation The detailed type is set by parameter JGLx NO 1610 4 If JGLx sets the acceleration and deceleration in linear type after interpolation the maximum time constant of acceleration and deceleration is limited in 512ms and even it exceeds 512ms it is dealt as 512ms FL rate of exponent acceleration deceleration in jog feed CFLJ for each axis Modification authority Equipment management authority Parameter Type Word axis Value Range VALID RANGE DEFAULT SETTING UNITS VALUE UNITS IS B IS C SETTING 0 1 inch min 0 6 15000 30 1 degimin Set the low limit speed FL speed of acceleration and deceleration in exponential type during each II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE axis JOG feeding Time constant of acceleration deceleration in thread cutting cycle TET for each axis Modification authority Equipment management authority Parameter Type Word axis Value Range 0 4000ms Default Setting 100 Set the time constant of acceleration and deceleration in linear and exponential
326. ion signal is not found A0004 0 1032 Pre indexing proximity switch signal is not received A0004 1 Lock proximity switch signal is not received A0004 2 1034 The current tool sd I dheonsistent with the expected one when tool change is finished A0004 3 1035 No lock proximity signal when the tool change is finished A0004 4 1036 Tool post overheat A0004 5 1037 DO setting error only 8 10 and 12 are allowed A0005 0 1040 Expected tool number not found alarm A0005 1 1041 Tool post rotation stop and lock signal not found A0005 2 1042 No lock signal when tool change is finished The current tool number is inconsistent with the expected A0005 3 1043 one when tool change is finished A0005 4 1044 DO setting error only 8 is allowed Note PLC alarm described in the user manual is for the standard ladder and the concrete PLC alarm messages are referred to the corresponding ladder notes 393 User Manual GSK988T Turning CNC system GSK CNC Installation Appendix 3 GSK988T Appearance Dimension 3 1 RU lt a User installation machining drawing e o c D E O Y O C C D Q Q OO OO O xX 0 O ok co D LL Appendix 394 Appendix C 3 2 Machine Operation Panel MPUO2A of GSK988T O x O v o z o 4 o c ORUN OLI F rererersrepeper HE a l Mae Be eee eS a feo f aere cel Semel CE zl 1923 5 2 Fig 3 2 Machine operation panel MPUO2A appearance dimension In
327. ircular R tool radius compensation a angle between two blocks 161 CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE a Tool traversing inside along corner a2180 1 linear linear 2 linear circular s Programmed path Programmed patl 642 J 0 2 G Y oo vu Vu S Tool nose center path m 7 O d 2 L um c Tool nose center path m Fig 4 16 Linear linear starting tool inside Fig 4 17 Linear circular starting tool inside co b Tool traversing inside along corner 180 a290 1 linear linear 2 linear circular Programmed path Programmed path Tool nose center path Tool nose center path Fig 4 18 Linear linear starting tool outside Fig 4 19 Linear circular starting tool outside c Tool traversing inside along corner a lt 90 1 linear linear 2 linear circular G42 2 Programmed path Tool nose center path P Tool nose center path Fig 4 20 Linear linear starting tool outside Fig 4 21 Linear circular starting tool outside 162 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation d Tool traversing inside along corner a 1 linear linear U im O te um o 3 G41 To Fig 4 22 Linear linear a lt 1 starting tool outside 4 2 3 Tool traversing in Offset mode Offset mode is called to ones after creating tool nose radius compensation and before canceling it Offs
328. is added to the life of the selected tool But when the tool life counting is not specified and M command is activated the new tool selection and counting are done after the system runs from the reset state to start state in Auto mode and it executes the No 1 tool group command and the tool change command The tool life is up to 65535 times Note Even if the same tool group number is specified many time in one program the used times cannot be accumulated and the new tool is not also selected 3 3 2 3 Tool Life Counting and Activating M Command When the life counting is specified by times the life reaches when the tool life counting is specified and M command is activated The tool change signal does not output even if there is only one tool in the tool group In the tool group command T command which tool life is counted and M command is activated the tool which life does not reach in the specified group 1 is added to the tool life counter Tool life counting and activating M command are specified by No 6811 3 3 2 4 Tool Life Management Command in Machining Programs The tool life is used in machining programs and T command specifies the tool group according to the following format Command format Too99 end the tool life counting in the previous group use the tool which life does not reach in Group aa and output T signal count the tool life of tools in Grouco Tun88 end the tool life management of Group oo cancel the too
329. is and parameter ROTx No 1006 0 must be 1 1 RABx In absolute command the axis rotats in the direction 0 In which the distance to the target is shorter 1 Specified by the sign of command value Note RABx is valid only when parameter ROAx is 1 2 RRLxRelative coordinates are 0 Not rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation 1 Rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation Note 1 RRLxis valid only when ROAx is 1 Note 2 The movement amount of each turn is set by parameter No 1260 II Number of CNC controlled axes CCA Way of Validating After power on Value Range O total number Set the maximum number of axes controled by the CNC 0 total others are controlled by PLC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 wwe 1l 1 Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 6 WIC Direct input measured values for workpiece origin offsets is 0 Enable only in a selected workpiece coordinate system 1 Enable In all coordinate systems 7 DWT The unit of data followed P specifying dwell time is 0 IS B is 1ms IS C is 0 1ms 1 1 ms Program axis name CAN Parameter Type Word axis Value Range 88 X 89 Y 90 Z 65 A 66 B 67 C Set program name for each controled axis Note 1 The same axial name can not be set O Oo 9 O 5 Note 2 The address used by the 2 miscellaneous function can not be taken as the axial name Setting
330. is moved to find the file to recover the Value INPUT is selected and is pressed to directly recover the file in the local directory The system is turned on again after the file is recovered otherwise maybe some Value is invalid 297 GSR C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Note 1 When the parameters are recovered their switches must be opened and some parameters cannot recover because of authority Note 2 Recovering the pitch compensation can be done with the authority more than Level 2 9 2 2 Servo parameter backup 9 2 2 1 Exporting servo parameters 1 Insert the U disk and confirm the system has read it SYSTEM PARAM SERV PARAM 2 Press to enter the system page press and then to enter the servo parameter management page The page is shown in Fig 9 4 MDI reset SYSTEM gt PARAMETER gt SERVO PARAMETER X AXIS No data No data No data e NEN o 0 aa 184 B CO 0 8M n B5 400 B BB GET 5p 8p8 50A pag 4 B8 0 2898 802 813 814 B 85 0 me 20 807 5200 BIB 6 B9 Bae 821 120 822 0 83 2500 O as 500 e5 zona B26 1008 5 az 1500 e8 sa eg 18 D 838 18 831 032 3 e 0000 Password Oo 0 9999 E uS 11 01 18 Z AXIS S AXIS NO SRH SAVE BACKUP ed LOAD gt Fig 9 4 EXPORT 3 As the above figure select X axis servo parameter press
331. ishing allowance for roughing cycle It is Z finishing allowance as the following table 99 999 99 999 unit mm and is the Z coordinate offset of roughing contour compared to finishing path i e the different value of Z absolute coordinate of A compared to A Aw gt 0 it is the offset of the last roughing path compared to finishing path in Z positive direction The system defaults Aw 0 when W_ Aw is not input i e there is no Z finishing allowance for roughing cycle Feedrate S Spindle speed T Tool number tool offset number They can be specified in the first G73 or the second ones or program ns nf M S T F functions of M S T F blocks are invalid in G73 and they are valid in G70 finishing blocks MERGE c4 73 w ai ee eee U Au ISB system 99999 999 99999 999 mm 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch ISC system 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 999 99999 999 99999 inch W Aw ISB system 99999 999 99999 999 mm 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch ISC system 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 999 99999 999 99999 inch Execution process Fig 2 40 D AA4 Rapid traverse 2 First roughing A B C A4 8B4 Rapid traverse speed in ns block in GO cutting feedrate specified by G73 in ns block in G1 79 I 5 A O Q y Q 3 3 Q CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE B C4 Cutting feed 3 C44 Rapid traverse 4 Second roughing A2 B C Ao 8B Rapid traverse speed in
332. istory record EEE NENNEN CNC diagnosis Servo diagnosis D See section 3 5 5 1 See section 3 5 3 2 The interface of The interface of CHC diagnosis servo diagnosis Setting Waveform monitoring See section 5 5 3 3 See section 3 5 4 4 The interface The oscillograph II 3 5 1 Alarm message check window ALARM On the message window press MESSAGE to access the alarm message window display the quantity CNC and PLC alarms and detailed message The window is shown in Fig 3 38 MDI reser ALANCL T ALAPM 400 NESSAGE gt ALARM MESSAGE O mm 9 et O 5 alm Mo content 11 He 45 ALARM ALARM DI AGNOS MESSAGE HI TORY Fig 3 47 On alarm message window the alarm message of CNC and PLC is listed in one window and 240 Chapter III Windows differed through the alarm number Press and to scroll the list line by line or press and to scroll the list page by page When PLC alarms or prompts display message of address A in black When CNC alarms or reminds the reasons and trouble shooting is shown as black below the message line Cancel alarm Press 4 to cancel all alarms Note 1 When PLC alarms or reminds the message of address A displays in green below the message line Note 2 When CNC alarms or reminds the reason and the trouble shooting display in green below the message line Note 3 Alarms of 0 1000 are CNC alarms of 1000 200
333. it will auto cover the previous memory area 2 The unit of the monitor property Value is same as that of the monitor Value corresponding to the servo diagnosis window CH2 Value unit Time axis unit Introduction of the soft key function STOP Button of start stop of the control Value sample it displays as stop during sampling and it displays as start when the sampling stops CHI CHI CH2 CH UUM TN ZOOM OUT Z0OM IN ZUUM QUI Respectively scale the wave forms of CH1 and 247 II O Oo am 9 2r O 5 GSR CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual CH2 in the vertical axis TIME TIME EOUM IN ZUUM QUT Scale the setting units of the time axis HISTORY M Press it to open the history Value of Read in the historical Value during sampling in the pulses automatically saved when the last memory oscillograph stops during the memory sampling FIME TUM The button is compound When the history waveform is viewed during the sampling stop point to point view history Value can view the sampling value of each sampling point along the time axis grid view history Value can fasten the browse speed of history Value The button is not display during sampling Besides the oscillograph executes the double waveforms to move up move down move to left move to right page up and page down The page up page down are valid during the sampling stop The above operations can be realized
334. ith spindle speed 1910 r min X80 W 20 F150 Cut from C to D with spindle speed 1910 r min and surface speed 1194 r min GO X100 Z100 Rapid retract to A point with spindle speed 955 r min M30 End of program spindle stop and cooling OFF 2 18 Feedrate per Minute G98 Feedrate per Rev G99 Command function Cutting feed rate is specified as mm min G98 is the modal G command G98 cannot be input if the current command is G98 modal Command format G98 Fxxxx F0001 NO027 the leading zero can be omitted feed rate per minute is specified mm min Command function Cutting feed rate is specified as mm min G99 is the modal G command G99 input may be omitted if current state is G99 Command format G99 Fxxxx F0 0001 F500 the leading zero can be omitted Command explanation When G99 Fxxxx is executed the actual cutting feedrate is gotten by multiplying the F command value mm r to the current spindle 105 v O e 9 3 3 e CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE speed r min If the spindle speed varies the actual feedrate changes too If the spindle cutting feed amount per rev is specified by G99 FXXXX the even cutting texture on the surface of workpiece will be gotten In G99 state a spindle encoder should be fixed on the machine tool to machine the workpiece F range in G98 G99 is shown below Incremental system Metric mm input Inch inch input F G98 ISB system 1
335. itional expression gt Do n n 1 2 3 g The condition is satisfied The condition is not satisfied ENDA 2 22 4 Macro program statement and NC statement The following blocks are macro program statements Including arithmetic or logical operation Including control statement such as GOTO DO END Including macro program call command G65 G66 G67 Any NC blocks except for macro program statement are NC statements In Single Block mode when No 6000 Bit5 SBM is set to 0 the system directly skips the macro program statement and the machine does not stop but it is set to 1 the system stops run and enters the stop state One block cannot have the macro program statement and NC statement simultaneously 2 22 5 Macro program call 1 Non modal call of macro program G65 Command format G65 P L argument list Command function The system calls macro program L times specified by P and transfers the argument to the called macro program Command explanations P specify the macro program to be called L times of calling the macro program and its default is 1 and its range is 1 9999 Argument list data transferred to macro programs Argument specification Two types of argument specification are available Argument specification uses letters other than G L O N and P once each Argument specification Il uses A B and C once each and also uses J and K up to ten times The types of argument specification is
336. ity Default Setting 0000 0000 2 TDR Cutting time constant in rigid tapping 0 Is the same during cutting and extraction 1 Not the same during cutting and extraction 6 TDK Specify K in tapping command 0 Take it as the cycle times 1 Ignore 7 TXZ Non tapping axis is taken as the orientation in tapping command 0 Allow to use 1 Alarm Rigid tapping mode specification M code RTMC Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 29 Value Range 0 255 M code is set to specify the rigid tapping method When it is set as 0 CNC takes it as M29 Override value during rigid tapping extraction RTOV Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 120 Value unit 1 or 10 Value Range 0 200 Set the override value during rigid tapping extraction 0 200 valid only when DOV NO 5200 4 is II O Oo 9 O 5 setto 1 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping RTMS Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 1000 350 Chapter XI Parameters Value Range 0 9999 Set the maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping The linear acceleration deceleration time constant for spindle and tapping axis RTLT in rigid tapping Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 200 Value Range 0 4000ms During the rigid tapping the time constant of linear acceleration o
337. jects on it Do not move or drag the products by the cables connected to it Forbid collision or scratch to the panel and display screen Avoid dampness insolation and drenching B Open package inspection Confirm that the products are the required ones Check whether the products are damaged in transit Confirm that the parts in packing box are in accordance with the packing list Contact us in time if any inconsistence shortage or damage is found m Connection Only qualified personnel can connect the system or check the connection The system must be earthed and the earth resistance must be less than 0 10 The earth wire cannot be replaced by zero wire The connection must be correct and firm to avoid any fault or unexpected consequence Connect with surge diode in the specified direction to avoid damage to the system owitch off power supply before plugging out or opening electric cabinet B Troubleshooting owitch off power supply before troubleshooting or changing components Check the fault when short circuit or overload occurs Restart can only be done after troubleshooting Frequent switching on off of the power is forbidden and the interval time should be at least 1 min MI IV SK CGSN CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual ANNOUNCEMENT This manual describes various possibilities as much as possible However operations allowable or unallowable cannot be explained one by one due to so many possibili
338. ke into acount tool nose radius compensation 6 DAL Absolute position O The actual position displayed takes into acount tool offset 1 The programed position displayed does not take into acount tool offset Note In T serial the movement coordinate system compensates the tool appearance parameter LGT NO 5002 4 is 0 and display the programming position which ignores 332 Chapter XI Parameters the tool compensation the parameter is set as 1 However the programming position without the tool appearance compensation value can not display DAC Absolute position O The actual position displayed takes into acount tool nose radius compensation 1 The programed position displayed does not take into acount tool nose radius compensation 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AZ 1SO0R REV DNC Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0001 0000 2 DNC Upon reset the program displayed for DNC operation is O Not cleared 1 Cleared 3 REV The actual speed in feed per revolution mode is displayed in 0 mm min or inch min 1 mm rev or inch rev 4 SOR Display of the program directory O Programs are listed in the order of registeration 1 Programs are listed in the order of program number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 I I CLOI IAeT T Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 2 AHC With a soft key the alarm history 0 Can be cleared 1 Can t be
339. kinds of I coordinate system 1 machine coordinate system 2 workpiece coordinate system 3 local coordinate system Fig 2 19 describes the relationship of the three coordinate systems 5 A O Q y Q 3 3 Q EXT M2 MO REF Fig 2 12 52 Chapter Il G Commands REF Reference position Origin of machine coordinate system is a fixed point on the machine No 1240 value confirms the relative position of the reference position and the machine origin The 2 reference position No 1214 set the 2 reference position position in the machine coordinate system The outer origin offset can be set by No 1220 or in the coordinate setting window G50 The offset set by G50 is O when the system is turned on Boule Ae T is also set in the coordinate window WO0 59 I The offset of the local coordinate system is 0 when the system is switched on All workpiece coordinate systems share i e the local coordinate system offset set in one workpiece coordinate system can exist in other workpiece coordinate system Origin of the local coordinate system D A O Q Q 3 3 Q Note The system has created the above coordinate system after the 1 reference position return is executed The coordinate system is created after the system is turned on with the absolute position encoder 2 13 1 Selecting machine coordinate system position G53 A particular on the machine as the machining r
340. l X cutting feed Ai from the starting point A of radial cutting cycle feed in X negative direction when the coordinates of cutting end point is less than that of starting point in X direction otherwise feed in X positive direction 2 Radial X rapid tool retraction e and its direction is opposite to the feed direction of D 8 X executes the cutting feed Ak e again the end point of cutting feed is still in it between starting point A of radial cutting cycle and end point of radial tool infeed 88 Chapter If G Commands X executes the cutting feed Aite again and executes 2 after X cutting feed Ai e is executed again the end point of X cutting feed is on B or is not on it between A and B cutting feed to Bn and then execute 2 4 Axial Z rapid tool retraction Ad radius value to C when Z coordinate of B cutting end point is less than that of A starting point retract tool in Z positive otherwise retract tool in Z negative direction 5 Radial X rapid retract tool to Dn No n radial cutting cycle is completed The current radial cutting cycle is not the last one execute if itis the previous one before the last radial cutting cycle execute 2 6 Axial X rapid tool infeed and it direction is opposite to 4 retract tool If the end point of tool infeed is still on it between A and A starting point of last radial cutting cycle after Z tool infeed AAd Ak radius value i e Dn Aq4 4 and then ex
341. l G97 modal other is the tangent speed of tool relative to the outer circle of workpiece defined by S command which is called constant surface speed control G96 modal and the spindle speed is changed along with the absolute coordinates value of X absolute coordinates in programming path when cutting feed is executed in the constant surface speed 3 2 2 Spindle override When the spindle speed analog voltage control is valid the spindle actual speed can be tuned real time by the spindle override and is limited by max spindle speed of current gear after the spindle override is tuned and it also limited by limited values of max and min spindle speed in constant surface speed control mode The system supplies 8 steps for spindle override 50 120 increment of 1096 The actual steps and tune of spindle override are defined by PLC ladder and introductions from machine manufacturer should be referred when using it Refer to the following functions of GSK988T standard PLC ladder The spindle actual speed specified by GSK988T standard PLC ladder can be tuned real time by the spindle override tune key at 8 steps in 50 120 and it is not reserved when the spindle override is switched off Refer to the operations of spindle override in I OPERATION 3 3 Tool Function 3 3 1 Tool offset T functions of GSK988T automatic tool change and executing tool offset Control logic of automatic tool change is executed by PLC and tool offset is executed by
342. l of the motor the reference position return completion light LED xO Y zO CO cO lights and the reference position return ends and the system automatically sets the coordinate system Note Because there is no dog the system checks the first PC signal of the encoder as the position of the reference position the set reference positions every time are different and so the tool offset must be set again after the reference position is set in the mode Reference position setting with an absolute encoder When the machine is allocated with the absolute encoder and the reference position return function with an absolute position encoder is valid and the system has not created the reference position the reference position return with the absolute position encoder must be executed After the tool returns to the reference position the reference position return completion light LED lights and the system automatically sets the coordinate system The reference position return steps 264 Chapter V Manual Operation E 1 Press RE RETURN and it is one of the mode selecting switches e 5 e Tax rixi T1X100 I1X1000 WuFO W25 Vv5096 VV100 puc dE lt a Uv gt o s 3 Press the feeding axis corresponding to the reference position return and 2 v B execute the reference position return The tool traverses to the deceleration point at the rapid traverse speed and then traverse to the reference position at FL speed set by paramete
343. l offset which is being used and T signal for the tool number is output M02 M30 end of machining program Command function Machining is executed according to the specified group and the tool life management is executed 148 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation Example bit number of imaginary offset number is 2 Select the tool which life has not reached in Group 1 Cimagine that T1001 is selected the tool number is 10 and the offset number is 01 Select tool life count in Group 1 Cexecute life count of tool number 10 I Cancel tool post offset which is being used in Group 1 the tool being used is T1001 the tool number is 10 and the offset number is 00 Select the tool which life has not reached in Group 2 y a O Q c 3 imagine that T2002 is selected the tool number is 20 and the 5 e offset number is 02 Select tool life count in Group 2 C execute life count of tool number 20 When tools being used in Group 2 command many offset numbers the next offset number is selected When the tool number has T2002 and T2003 T2003 is selected the tool number is 20 and the offset number is 03 The tool life count function ends in Group 2 the tool number is 03 and the offset number is 01 Note Too99 is not commanded before Too88 an alarm occurs 3 3 2 5 Automatic Input of Tool Life Data G10 G11 is used to input the tool life management data and its format is shown below 1 De
344. l tool mode MPG mode single Manual tool change change keys step mode and manual mode Auto mode MDI mode Record current coordinate Edit mode Reference Position record position used to input the tool position return mode TOOL OFFSET offset MPG mode Step mode DNC mode amp MPG de single ste D Spindle jog on off ne ng p JOG mode and manual mode e Auto mode MDI mode ux Lubricating key Machine lubricating on off edit mode reference LUBRICATING position return mode 192 B COOLING a E Joa T0 JILXQOO ILX 000 WW Vezh Vue Vidik MACHINE LOCK Names Cooling key Chuck key Spindle keys Rapid speed switch Manual feeding keys MPG axes keys Option keys of control option MPG single step increment and override Single switch Block switch Machine switch rapid block skip lock Function Cooling on off Chuck clamp release Spindle rotation CCW Spindle stop Spindle rotation CW Switch between feedrate rapid speed each axis moving positive negative in manual or single step mode Each axis option in MPG mode MPG movement value of each grid 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 mm Single step movement value of each step 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 mm Rapid override FO F25 50 and F100 Switch between the single block running continuous running when the single block is valid its indicator is on Whether skip and switch the block with a
345. larms when the negative program name is input The system ignores NC commands when program are edited and other NC commands are edited in the first line 1 5 2 Block format 1 Format NAA AA countless words I skip character A block can have or not it generally it is placed in the initial position of a program user can press SKIP on the operation panel to execute the operation when the skip function is valid otherwise the SKIP key on the operation panel is valid i e the skip character in the block is invalid NA ANA ZA block number A block can have or not it number AA AAA following N is o digit positive integer 00001 999989 and the system alarms when the input number is decimal Chapter I Programming Fundamentals Countless words one block can input countless words and one block can have one or more words or have no words T EOB is a end character when one block is completed is displayed in LCD there must be have one end character for one block 2 Format requirements 1 In one block there can be no blank space between block number and word and can be countless blank space the total characters of one block is within 255 2 ln one block there can be not or be countless space between skip character and block number or words 3 In one block there can be not or be countless space between end character of block and its front word or blocks Each block can be up to 255 characters inclu
346. le orientation selection signal 3 p CN62 17 CN62 19 CN62 26 CN6228 CN62 20 CN62 25 Note1 Addresses X0 0 X0 7 X1 0 X1 7 X2 0 X2 7 X3 0 X3 7 are valid at a high level i e when the input signal 24V is connected the state of address X signal is 1 when disconnected the state is 0 Note 2 When the state of address Y signal is 1 the output signal is connected to OV 0V output when the sate of address Y signal is 0 the output signal is at high impedance state 2 2 Standard Operation Panel 2 2 1 Address X Xmo Beksp mi Awiybk X2 SWdeoendemgene Xms Smebek xea meo ms Uy Xs Sweoemdederme Xr Sendeoemde 100 gt D 5 Q x C axis moves along direction C X19 0 X19 3 Tailstock The4 axis moves along direction 4 X19 4 BEN JMPG 4 NEN Z axis moves along direction Z X19 5 Y axis moves along direction Y X19 384 Appendix 2 Standard Ladder Function Allocation X axis moves along direction X X19 7 mi Wepesowadmmn Xm2 Wee ms Wepeimesemmbn Xm Gm Xms SsSwdesmp ms Wawswiwwewe Or Optonatstop Xmo Pewawsa Xni SwdeoW XAna smdek Xns eee eet X214 The 4 axis moves along direction 4th XH5 Caxsmoves along tden ms Seems
347. le speed analog output maximum voltage is 10V 3 Measure the output voltage 4 Set the value in the following formula in parameter No 3730 10 V measured voltage V 5 After setting the parameter command the spindle speed analog output as the spindle speed of the maximum voltage again and confirm the output voltage as 10V O Oo 9 O 5 setting value x 1000 340 Chapter XI Parameters 3731 Compensation value for offset voltage of analog output of the spindle speed CSS Value Range 1024 1024 Set compensation value for offset voltage of analog output of the spindle speed 1024 1024 1 Set the standard setting value as O 2 Command the analog output voltage as OV which is the theoretical spindle speed 3 Measure the output voltage 4 Set the value in the following formula in parameter No 3731 8191x offset voltage V 12 5 setting value 5 After setting the parameter command the analog output voltage as OV again which is the theoretical spindle speed and confirm the voltage as OV 3740 Time elapsed prior to checking the spindle speed arrival singal SAD Value Range 0 255ms Default Setting 6000 Set the time elapsed from the execution of the S function up to the checking of the spindle speed arrival signal 3741 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 MSG1 3742 Maximum spindle speed of gear 2 MSG2 3743 Maximum spindle speed of gear 3 MSG3 3744 Maximum spindle speed
348. lete data in all groups when the system logs in Symbol explanation G10 L3 delete all groups when the system logs in P group number L tool life value T tool number and tool offset number G11 log in ends G11 M02 M30 After the system deletes all logged tool life management data the system logs in programmed tool life management data 2 Change tool life management data Symbol explanation G10 L3 P1 G10 L3 P1 group data change starts 149 I U im O e um 9 3 3 e CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE P group number L tool life value T tool number and tool offset number G11 log in ends G11 M02 M30 The system can set the tool life management data in the unlogged tool life mangagement data group or change the logged tool life management data 3 Delete tool life management data Symbol explanation G10 L3 P2 G10 L3 P2 group data deletion starts P group number G11 deletion ends G11 M02 M30 G10 L3 G10 L3 P1 P L Q l Q life count type 1 times 2 time G11 M02 M30 Note When Q command is omitted life count type is set by setting value of parameter LTM No 6800 2 3 3 2 6 Processing after tool life ending The tool change signal is output when the tool life counting is done and the last tool life has reached in the group When the life counting is specified by time and the last tool life has reached in
349. level setting 4 level X tool offset CLEAR clear Z tool offset CLEAR clear Workpiece CLEAR amount PART CHT Position clear Word Parameter value MDI 2 level Parameter parameter mode 3 level Bit Parameter value MDI 2 level Parameter parameter mode 3 level Tool offset Chapter 7 1 5 setting Chapter 3 1 7 Chapter Z Chapter 3 4 3 2 level 3 level Macro Macro macro variable variable variable 2 level Tool offset 3 level 4 level MEASURE Z tool offset Z7 incremental measured value Tool offset input OK value MEASURE X tool offset incremental input Chapter 7 1 2 X measured Ok Chapter 7 1 2 INPUT 2 level h Tool offset 3 level ou 7 1 3 Tool wear value input OK 4 level Z 399 Gr M1 Bx F GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Param a Display Password Program 5 Function Operation eter window level witch switch LOCATE Search line line No Ok SEARCH T Search from Character dest home FROM TOP A vel Search i Program Chapter downward SEA AGH content asec 4 3 1 from the Character aey S Von PREY 4 level current position Search 7 downward SEARCH 2 level f Character 3 rom the 3 level current MEXI 4 level program SEHALCH Search the 2 level EN program Program Chapter specified OK DEAN 3 level 414 program 9 4
350. level Search system parameters SERACH Servo Program System M parameters OK MID or pitch compensatio p n parameters Character deletion at eat Prona ON mode content the cursor Shasize character 43 deletion BACK Edit Program 5n M before the SPACE mode content JO cursor D D D Delete a DEL ALE Edit Program 2 level ON Chapter single block mode content 3 level 4 3 1 Delete DELETE Edit Program 2 level ON Chapter blocks Select blocks mode content 3 level 4 3 3 Search the program to ON Chapter 4 2 3 Delete a Edit Program program DELETE mode catalog delete 400 The cursor moves to the home of a file The cursor moves to the end of a file The cursor moves to the home The cursor moves to the end Optional block selection Optional block copy Optional block cut Optional block past Create a program Rename a program Save a program as Execute a program 7 CHANGE T SEHAUH program OK name SAVE AS program OK HENAME program OK Select a program LOAD Edit mode Edit mode Edit mode Edit mode Edit mode Edit mode Edit mode Edit mode Display window Program content Program content Program content Program content Program content Program content Program content Program content Program content Program catalog Program catalog Program catalog Password level 2 level
351. lid during the rapid traverse The above is just one example refer to the manual provided by the machine manufacturer during actual operation Note 1 Acceleration deceleration Manual rapid traverse speed the time constant and the mode of acceleration deceleration can be set by parameter 1610 and 1624 Note 2 Changing the mode During JOG feeding when the mode is switched into the other mode JOG feeding becomes invalid To make JOG feeding valid firstly access JOG feeding mode and then press feeding axis and mode selection switch Note 3 Rapid traverse before the reference position return If the reference position doesn t return after connecting the power supply even press rapid traverse button it can t run while remain manual continuous feeding traverse The function can be set by parameter RPD 0 bit of 1401 Note 4 In manual mode whether JOG override is valid which is set by the 2 bit of parameter 1402 when it is invalid the override is fixed as 100 5 3 Increment Feeding In JOG mode during MPG or manual feeding whether the increment feeding is valid this is set by parameter JHD 0 bit of 7100 The corresponding relation is shown as below JHD 0 JHD 1 JOG mode MPG mode JOG mode MPG mode x x JOG feeding O x MPG feeding Increment feeding O O x Il 266 Chapter V Manual Operation O Valid x nvalid ev ts e a AL Qz Raro ES BIR In increment mode press f
352. lied because the cutting travel of roughing is undersize and the times of roughing is excessive which is caused the cutting travel of thread roughing gradually decreases After Q Admin is executed the command value Admin is value and the value of system parameter No 5140 is rewritten to minimum cutting travel when P Width of thread run out 00 99 unit 0 1xL L is the thread pitch with 2 digit digital It is valid after r command value is executed and the value of system parameter No 5130 is rewritten to r The value of system parameter No 5130 is the width of thread run out when r is not input The thread run out function can be applied to thread machining without tool retraction groove and the width of thread run out defined by system parameter P Q Admin is not input the system takes No 5140 value as the least r a cutting value R d It is the cutting travel of thread finishing and is the different value radius value without sign symbols of X absolute coordinates between cut in point Be of thread finishing and Bf of thread roughing After R d is executed the command value d is value and the value of system parameter No 5141 is rewritten to dx1000 unit 0 001 mm The value of system parameter No 5141 is regarded as the cutting travel of thread finishing when R d is not input R i It is thread taper and is the different value of X absolute coordinate between thread starting point and end point unit mm radius value
353. lowance in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 Finishing cycle times of G76 combined canned cycle G76FC Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 1 Value Range 1 99 Set the repetition count of final finishing in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 5143 Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 G76TNA Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 60 Value Range 0 99 deg Set the tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 O Oo D um 9 oO 5 11 16 Parameters Related to the Rigid Tapping 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FMD DOV CRG G84 Modification authority Equipment management authority 349 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSR Default Setting 0000 0000 0 G84 Method for specifying rigid tapping 0 AM code specifying the rigid tapping mode is specified 1 G84 G88 is used to specify rigid tapping mode 2 CRG Rigid mode when a rigid mode cancel command is specified 0 Cancelled after signal RGTAP G61 0 is set to 0 1 Cancelled before signal RGTAP G61 0 is set to O 4 DOV Override during extraction in rigid tapping 0 Invalidated 1 Validated the override value is set by para NO 5211 6 FHD Feed hold and single block in rigid tapping 0 Invalidated 1 Validated 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TK 7R Modification authority Equipment management author
354. m 5n44 Encoder type configuration The encoder type set by drive unit is inconsistent error with the encoder type of the motor EEPROM alarm in absolute encoder gt D 5 Q x Appendix 1 Alarm List EEPROM check error in 5n43 absolute encoder Coder type error Please check parameter No PA97 Data check error in Data check error in sensor mode absolute encoder Spindle DAY3025C DAY3100C DAP03C l V2 02 Message Contents i a The speed of the spindle motor exceeds the setting value 5n01 Motor overspeed The voltage of the main circuit power is excessive Main circuit undervoltage The voltage of the main circuit power is too low m The position deviation value exceeds the setting on04 Excess position deviation alae Motor overheat The temperature of the motor is too high 54 sed Unused eer es EN d M on08 overflow value exceeds 2 30 Sw Unmsed 5w2 sed EM 3 The bait ae eat ae ak ea de servo drive unit and motor are on16 Motor overheat overloaded temporary overheat Excess on rfe rini is issued when the discharging time is Braking circuit fault 1 No braking signal no braking feedback Braking circuit fault 2 No braking signal no braking feedback EEPROM error EEPROM error At f the R S T of three ph Phase lose alarm LAT One or mets o T ONNE Prase power The three phase U V W sequence is wrong on02 Main circuit overvoltag
355. m protection switch Control the machine movement MPG mode 195 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR Chapter I Power on Power off and Safety Protection 2 1 Power on Before GSK988T powers on they should be confirmed 1 The machine is normal 2 The power supply and the voltage comply with the requirements 3 The connection is right and fixed After GSK988T powers on the window is shown as below II O D um 9 et O 5 Loading pitch compensation Fig 2 1 Then GSK988T self detects and initializes After the system completes the self detection and the initialization the window of the present position absolute coordinate displays AUTO reser PAG DATA U 19 9766 d us F a mm min 100A mm min S a rev min AK PRG NAME 05555 NC INFO 3 9 FED OVRI 20 HDL F XI GA XA Fi A mary RAP OYRI FB PART CNT B Gl ZB SPI OYRI 50 RUN TIME 8B 88 88 GOJ X24 b Z 1 88 R75 5 F1 A GI X28 FBBB JOG F ams CUT TIME Ba pn AA 15 42 8 Fig 2 2 196 Chapter II Power on power off and safety protection 2 2 Power off Before power off they should be confirmed 1 Each axis of CNC stops 2 The miscellaneous function switches off such as the spindle and the water pump etc 3 Firstly cut off CNC power supply and then cut off machine power supply Note 1 The system can be restarted again after the power is hold OFF fo
356. m Cp ee bottom level Fig 2 72 2 19 3 Cancelling Drilling Boring G80 The command is used for cancel the drilling fixed cycle Command format G80 After G80 is executed the hole position data R and other drilling data are cancelled and the mode of drilling cycle is also done 2 19 4 Notes for Drilling Boring Cycle Note 1 When the reset or emergency stop is executed the mode of drilling cycle remains The user must pay more attention to it when the program is started again Note 2 The single block stops at end point of operation 1 operation 2 or operation 6 Note 3 When drilling boring cycle is executed creating or cancelling tool compensation command is executed the command is valid after the cycle ends 2 20 Tapping Cycle Command GSK988T CNC Turning System uses end tapping cycle G84 and side tapping cycle G88 to complete the tapping function Tapping is divided into common tapping flexible and rigid tapping mode In the common tapping mode the spindle rotation and feed amount of tapping axis are controlled separately their synchronous relationship is not controlled well In the rigid tapping mode the control of spindle motor is the same that of servo motor the spindle rotating one circle corresponds to some axial feed amount of the spindle even if the spindle accelerates decelerates In the rigid tapping the spindle can rapidly and exactly tap without using the floating chuck or variable screw tap use it in the
357. m can be set for easily programming called local coordinate system as follows Local coordinate system Workpiece coordinate system Machine coordinate system Fig 1 7 local coordinate system 1 3 8 Interpolation function Interpolation is defined as a planar or three dimensional contour formed by path of 2 or multiple axes moving at the same time also called Contour control The controlled moving axis is called link axis when the interpolation is executed The moving distance direction and speed of it are controlled synchronously in the course of running to form the required Composite motion path Positioning control is defined that motion end point of one axis or multiple axes instead of the motion path in the course of running is controlled GSK988T has linear arc and thread interpolation function Linear interpolation Composite motion path of X Z axis is a straight line from starting point to end point Circular interpolation Composite motion path of X Z axis is arc radius defined by R or the circle center l K from starting point to end point Thread interpolation Moving distance of X or Z axis or X and Z axis is defined by rotation angle of spindle to form spiral cutting path on the workpiece surface to realize the thread cutting For thread interpolation the feed axis rotates along with the spindle the long axis moves one pitch when the spindle rotates one rev and the short axis and the long axis directly interpolate
358. macro variable window which is shown as below 238 Chapter III Windows AUTO RESET SETTING CUSTOM MACRO 2 II Fig 3 45 On the macro variable window check and set the value relative to each macro variable E On macro variable window press E l E and ft V to select the macro variable to be rewritten the selected macro variable changes into the green based color O Oo am 9 O 5 aEARGH or press to input the macro variable serial number to be selected and then press OK and the cursor positions in the Value of the macro variable In MDI mode the operation authority level is more than 4 rewrite the macro variable Value INPUT through numerical and backspace keys or press and the macro variable Value can be rewritten such as the macro variable Value 100 and rewrite the macro variable Value through numerical and backspace keys INPUT And press again to complete the rewriting 3 5 Message Window MESSAGE Press to access the alarm window there are three windows of alarm message records and diagnosis and check the content in each window through pressing the corresponding soft keys The structure of the software layers is shown as below 239 CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR Alarm history diagnosis oscillograph information records L di See section 5 5 1 See section 5 5 2 The interface of The interface of alarm alarm information h
359. matic run See Chapter 6 1 program II program O o D E t et O workpiece Fig 1 1 Automatic run MDI run After a program is input in MDI window the machine runs according to the program command and this operation is called MDI mode run See Chapter 6 2 e Reference position return CNC machine has a special point which is used to determine the position of the worktable of the machine The point is called the reference position at which the tool change is executed or the coordinate system is set After the power is turned on the tool traverses to the reference position The manual reference position return is to traverse the tool to the reference position by the switch and the button on the operation panel See 4 1 183 GSE CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual reference point tool operation panel Fig 1 2 Manual reference position return The tool traverses to the reference position by the program command which mode is called the automatic reference position return See Programming MPG feed The tool traverses an distance which corresponds to the rotary angle by rotating the MPG See 5 4 II e Manual run The tool runs along each axis by the switch the button or the MPG on the machine operation panel O Oo um 9 O 5 workpiece Fig 1 3 1 Manual manual continuous feed see 5 2 When the press key is kept down the tool co
360. ment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 0 SAR The spindle speed arrival signal is 0 Not checked 1 Checked 1 SAT Check of the spindle speed arrival signal at the start of executing the thread cutting block 0 The signal is checked only when SAR is set 1 The signal is always checked irrespective of whether SAR is set Note When the thread cutting block is continuously executed the spindle speed reaching signal isn t checked in the thread cutting block after the 2 block 6 TSO During a threading or tapping cycle the spindle override is 0 Disabled tied to 100 1 Enabled Note In rigid tapping the override is fixed as 100 and there isn t any connection with the setting of II the parameter 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 st SA Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 0 SAM The sampling frequency to obtain the average spindle speed 0 4 Normally set to O 1 1 2 MSI In multi spindle control the SIND signal is valid 0 Only when the first spindle is valid 1 For each spindle irrespective of whether the spindle is selected 3730 Data used for adjusting the gain of analog output of spindle speed AGS Value Range 700 1250 Default Setting 1000 Value unit 0 1 Set data used for adjusting the gain of analog output of spindle speed Adjusting method 1 Set the standard setting value 1000 2 Command the spindle speed when the spind
361. message The introduction of each Value in the servo diagnosis window X The name of the current selected axis Slave number Number of the slave connecting with the axis Connecting state Check whether the servo communication link layers are connected Control mode The diagnosis Value relative to the servo control mode it may display as position and speed Command position The quantity of the position pulses which the diagnosis Value servo receives from the system Feedback position The quantity of the position pulses not include the servo gear ratio feed back by the diagnosis Value servo Command speed The speed command value which the diagnosis Value servo receives from the system Motor speed The actual speed of the diagnosis Value motor Spindle speed The actual speed of the diagnosis Value spindle Encoder value The current value of the diagnosis Value spindle encoder Servo current Diagnosis the present operating current value of the diagnosis Value servo Servo temperature The measured temperature value in the diagnosis Value servo IN Value of the servo input point UT Value of the servo output point BIT7 alarm clear input terminal The detailed explanation of the marked servo input and output points A ARIS AXIS 5 AALS Axis switch press to switch the parameters of the displayed 244 Chapter III Windows servo of X Z S axis Note The servo diagnosis can display normally only when th
362. message and operation authority levels eeseeeseeee 219 3 3 4 System file management ccc ee cece ceeeceeeece cece eeseeeesaeeeeeeseeeceueeseeeseeeseeeseess 222 299 Ladder diagr aisre eee ee eee el eee eee 223 SEURI VVIdOoWs sse ducta i dites eL tide teet ea oi Oa ec oid EpL apa 229 94 1 Tolose Seti oui ot erga ln or rtc n RM rst entes spa dd Ru oa dti qut 229 3 4 2 CNC setting windOw sseessseseseeseeee nennen nnnm nnne nnn nnne nnne nni r nns n nenne nnn rns 233 9 4 9 Macro variable WINDOW sisse Qaae ita o uice i fee ea cea neds s oad aes ks 238 WESSAGC ee et sree nena ree aes hte ase eae eee oat 239 3 5 1 Alarm message check window cccccecceecceeeceeeeeece cece esse eeseeeeeeseeeseesaeeseeeseeeaees 240 3 5 2 Alarm record check window sesssssssssssssessseeeee nennen nenne nnne nnns 241 9 5 9 Diagnosis WI COW 2 52 ets Quite an oat is teda Pad tales oca Mf teria Herd Mae MO dE 242 3 94 Qscillographi WIDOOW oo Gert nic orna S be pec abes nde at RR Ro eu e pd dide balia 245 299 SOI CAIN WIBIOW isi tatur weenie ees cuta ieee echo 248 Graph VWVINGOW I T Uu 249 3 6 1 Setting graph paramet ss seco qao ed seun o US E resto E ta tu eee dU reste ta 249 9 0 2 Processing graph Delhi ss ssunsen ated apes nee ur east ns quim aE s eua deP 0E 250 369 SIMUIANOM graD MR ERE TNR 251 FACIO VVC OW ce c TEE 252 IV Editing and Managing a Program
363. mmand address G and its following command value used for defining the motion mode of tool relative to the workpiece defining the coordinates and so on Refer to G commands as Fig 2 1 G un Command value Command address Note 1 The leading zero of the command value can be omitted Example G02 is equivalent to G2 G01 to G1 Note 2 The leading zero following the command value cannot be omitted Example G20 and G2 are different G commands in the different group G12 1 is legal but G12 10 is illegal Note 3 The command value can be up to 8 bit digit Example G00000002 is correct and valid equivalent to G02 Note 4 Except for G12 1 and G13 1 other G command cannot be with the decimal point otherwise the alarm occurs For example G20 0 G00 0 G18 are illegal 2 1 1 G command classification G commands are divided into modal G command and non modal G command After a G command is executed its defined function or state remains valid till other G command is specified in the same group this G command is called the modal After the modal G command is executed before its defined function or state is changed the G command cannot be input again when the following block executes the G word After a G command is executed its defined function or state is valid once its word must be input again when it is executed and so the G command is called the non modal Example 1 G01 and GOO are modal G01 X VS G01 is valid in the r
364. mmand without J Por extraction BL 5211 Note 2 Specify P Q in the blocks for drilling operation It is not taken as the modal data to store when it is specified in the blocks not for drilling operation The deep hole rigid tapping operation is not executed when QO is specified Note 3 Retraction amount d is set to the value No 5213 which does not exceed the cutting amount q when the deep hole tapping cycle is executed Note 4 R is the distance from the initial level to point R and is specified by radius value and the initial level is considered to R level after it is omitted Note 5 G84 88 is used for dry run Feedrate F is the one in Dry run mode Note 6 For feed pause single block when G84 G88 fixed cycle is at the operation 1 2 and 6 Feed Pause is pressed to decelerate when it is at the operation 3 4 5 tapping the movement does not immediately stop until the tool returns to the level where point R is When G84 88 is executed in single block mode or the single block mode is opened in the cycle the single block stops run at the end point of the operation 1 2 6 operation 3 4 5 6 are combined into one block Operation sequence Note the tapping infeed Tool cycle is called operation 3 Operation 1 Hole position Starting Q me level t Eon y Operation 6 PointR i Point R level Operation 2 7 lt Operation 5 Operation 3 SS Imaginary workpiece Hole bottom l
365. mmanded the spindle speed is limited by the maximum spindle speed 2 When the setting value is 0 it is not limited by the speed 3 When PLC controls the spindle speed the parameter is invalid and the spindle speed isn t limited by the maximum speed 4 When multi spindle control the maximum speed of each spindle is set through the following parameters The maximum speed of the 15 spindle is set by parameter NO 3772 The maximum speed of the 2 spindle is set by parameter NO 3802 3773 Quantity of the spindle encoder pulses CNT Way of Validating After power on Value Range 100 9999 Default Setting 1024 The parameter sets the quantity of the spindle encoder pulses 3802 Maximum speed of the 2 spindle MSS2 Value Range 0 32767r min Default Setting 6000 The parameter sets the maximum speed of the 2 spindle The actual spindle speed is limited by the maximum speed set by the parameter when the commanded spindle speed exceeds the maximum spindle speed or the spindle speed after override exceeds the maximum spindle speed Note 1 When the multi spindle controls the parameter is valid 2 When the constant surface speed controls no matter whether G96 or G97 is commanded the spindle speed is limited by the maximum speed 3 When the setting value is 0 parameter NO 3772 is valid the maximum speed of the 15 spindle When parameter NO 3772 is 0 the spindle speed is not limited 4
366. mode It must be specified again when the syste enters the cylindrical interpolation mode again Note 10 The tool offset must be specified before the cylindrical interpolation mode is set and the alarm occurs when the offset value is changed in the cylindrical interpolation mode 41 ES A O Q Q 3 3 Q C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE Example 00001 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION NO1 GOO Z100 0 N02 M14 the spindle is switched into position control mode NO3 G28 HO zero return of C axis N04 G18 CO N05 G07 1 C67 299 NO6 G01 G42 Z120 0 F250 NO7 C30 0 N08 G03 Z90 0 C60 0 R30 0 NO9 G01 Z70 0 N10 G02 Z60 0 C70 0 R10 0 N11 G01 C150 0 N12 G02 Z70 0 C190 0 R75 0 N13 G01 Z110 0 C230 0 N14 G03 Z120 0 C270 0 R75 0 N15 G01 C360 0 N16 G40 Z100 0 N17 G07 1 CO N18 M15 the spindle is switched into speed control mode N19 M30 I g O Q Q 3 3 Q The above figure is the side unfolded cylindrical in the program In the figure when the movement amount of rotary aixs C axis specified by the angle is converted into the distance of linear axis of outside surface of the cylindrical and the rotary axis and another linear axis Z axis 42 Chapter If G Commands together execute interpolation which is taken as the interpolation of Z X level coordinate system in G18 level When decoding N07 C30 0 the angle movement amo
367. ms LO ERI RR IRR RR DRIN Fig 3 27 The setting method of DT parameter is the same that of D parameter 221 C GSK CNC GSR GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual 1 DC parameter setting DC In PLC Value state display window press to enter DT parameter setting display window shown in Fig 3 28 AUTO FESE SYSTEM gt PLC PLC DATA gt DC value Min value Max value I DCHA 9 58 peaaa2 j peaaas E peaaas 8 DCAABS A DCBBAB A Depag DCHBBB A DCHABS A DCHAI A A DCAHI 1 A lel DCABBA transducer voltage value output when spindle is JOG unitB Bl V 18 15 48 II Fig 3 28 The setting method of DT parameter is the same that of D parameter 3 3 5 3 PLC state search display O Oo mm 9 et O 5 HE In the ladder window M and Se to enter PLC state display window shown in Fig 3 29 AUTO mr SYSTEM gt PLC gt PLC STATE gt X F G X y F G o GB BBIBBDBDO 8 laaanoa A oaaanoa paaaaaaa 88818881 1 1000000A paaaaaaa 2 BBBBBDBO 2 BBBBBDBO 2 BBBBBEDBO 2 BBBBBBDBO 3 mB80BBnBO 3 PA0AAAAA 3 AAIAAAAA 3 goaaaaaa 4 BBBBBDBO 4 BBBBBDBO 4 gaan aa 4 BBBBBDBO 5 BB8BBDBO 5 AAAI AAAA 5 BBOBBBBDEO 5 BOBBBDBO 6 gsaaaaaaa 6 gsaaaaaaa 6 gsaaaaaaa 5 saaaaaaa 7 gaanaaaa 7 BBBBBBDED 7 goaaaaaa 7 gaaaaaaa 8 BBOBB
368. multiple cycle commands include axial roughing cycle G71 radial roughing cycle G72 closed cutting cycle G73 finishing cycle G70 axial grooving multiple cycle G74 axial grooving multiple cycle G75 and multiple thread cutting cycle G76 When the system executes these commands it automatically counts the cutting times and the cutting path according to the programmed path travels of tool infeed and tool retraction executes multiple machining cycle tool infeed cutting retract tool tool infeed automatically completes the roughing finishing workpiece and the starting point and the end point of command are the same one G76 multiple thread cutting cycle command is described in Thread Function 2 15 1 Axial Roughing Cycle G71 Command function G71 is divided into three parts D 1st blocks for defining the travels of tool infeed and retract tool the cutting feedrate the spindle speed and the tool function when roughing 2 2nd blocks for defining the block interval finishing allowance 3 3rd blocks for some continuous finishing path counting the roughing path without being executed actually when executing G71 According to the finishing path the finishing allowance the path of tool infeed and tool retract the system automatically counts the path of roughing the tool cuts the workpiece in paralleling with Z and the roughing is completed by multiple executing the cutting cycle tool infeed cutting tool retraction The start
369. n 3 blocks without movement command following the block used to create the tool radius compensation the system does not immediately create the tool radius compensation but does it in the block following the non movement command The system executes the above vertical before the last movement command when there is a optional symbol in tool radius compensation So please do not use the optional block function in the tool radius compensation to avoid the overcut When No 6000 Bit5 SBM is set to 1 the macro statement can stop in single block and is taken as the non movement block in the tool nose radius compensation at the moment which causes the abnormal path It is suggested that No 6000 Bit5 SBM is set to 0 when the system uses the macro statement in the tool nose radius compensation mode in the course of normal machining G42 N6X100W10 N7X90W20 N8S200 NOMO3 eT N10F100 N11X65W15 N12W20 Pd Tool nose center path Maybe create overcutting Programmed path Fig 4 2 continuous 3 or more than 3 blocks of non movement command e Subprogram call and macro statement call in G code In tool nose radius compensation mode when the system specifies the code for calling the subprogram it can execute the normal compensation the compensation method of calling program is transferred to the subprogram which is to execute the corresponding compensation The command for calling subprogram and subprogram return has no movement comma
370. n MDI mode when the parameter switch is on and the operation authority is above level 3 the parameter can be set and rewritten 3 3 1 2 Servo parameter window Fig 3 17 PARAMETER On the system window press and FAHAM to access the servo parameter setting window MDI e SYSTEM gt PARAMETER gt SERVO PARAMETER X AXIS EE No data No data No data f on oo We i B o a 0 e 308 BE 38 TF 5g wWwe 600 g 4 eB a e 2000 82 H3 84 2 a5 8 ws 20 87 5200 aie 0 mg 0 ww 1 Wl d G2 B Ww3 2508 84 5B WO 2008 026 1000 827 1508 We8 9 gms 18 oa 18 gH m 3 833 B p34 300 835 388 0208 Password m B 9999 18 24 54 E zm ES oo HIE md ex SAVE READ rer ll a E O The servo parameter window mainly includes checking the servo parameter and rewriting and saving the servo parameter in CNC side A AALS ARIS s ARDS Switching axes Press and to switch the servo parameters among X Z and S axes INPUT INPUT Rewriting a parameter Press to input the parameter value press again to complete the rewriting NO SRH Searching a parameter Press to input the parameter number and the operation is completed SAVE Saving a parameter After rewriting the s
371. n rigid tapping among which the parameter OVU NO 5201 3 is used to set the setting unit of extraction override parameter in rigid tapping when the parameter OV3 NO 5201 4 confirms the extraction override by the address specifying whether the spindle speed is valid Namely unit of No 5211 is 1 or 10 2 When OV3 is set to 1 J address specifies the spindle speed in tool retraction Spindle speed when tapping J command Tapping override 96 x 100 Spindle speed S command Besides when the override value is out of the range 100 2000 it becomes 100 When the extraction is executed the spindle speed address J is valid before the fixed tapping cycle is cancelled in rigid tapping mode 117 5 A O Q y Q 3 3 Q GSE C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual OVE No 5202 6 0 Spindle speed command when extraction is done DOV 1 DOV 0 OV3 1 q OV3 0 0 Spindle speed command with Within 100 200 4 landi Ricci 5211 100 J specifying extraction Outof 100 200 of 100 200 100 Spindle speed command without J eee extraction OVE No 5202 6 1 Spindle speed command when extraction is done DOV 1 DOV 0 OV3 1 OV3 0 Spindle speed command with Within 100 2000 Programmed No 5211 100 J specifying extraction command Outof 100 2000 of 100 200094 3006 Spindle speed co
372. n t auto generate the block number the block number can be edited manually during programming In the setting window CNC setting window when auto generating number switch is on CNC INPUT auto generates the block number during editing press to enter a new line and auto generate the number of the next block the increment value of the block number is set by CNC Value parameter 3216 4 6 Background Editing a Program PROGRAM In Auto or DNC mode press to enter the program window at the moment the user can open the program to edit or create a program to edit and the operations is the same those of the above Note 1 The user cannot edit the program which is running currently Note 2 In Auto or DNC mode the user cannot press when the background editing program is executed otherwise the running program resets to stop 263 II O um 9 O 5 II O Oo 9 O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE Chapter V Manual Operation 5 1 Manual Reference Position Return There is a specified point in CNC machine which can set the position of the machine working table The specified point is taken as the reference position in the position the tool is changed and the coordinate system is set After connecting the power supply the tool traverses to the reference position Manual reference position return is to use the switch and the button on the panel to traverse the t
373. n the metric input the least input increment unit are set to 0 001 Program command The corresponding actual The corresponding actual value when value when DPI is 1 DPI is O X1000 without decimal 1000mm 1mm command value Unit mm Unit least input increment set to 0 001 X1000 0 with decimal 1000mm 1000mm command value unit mm Unit mm The decimal which is less than the least input increment unit is discarded in course of program being executed Example X2 34567 When the least unit of input increment is 0 001mm X2 34567 becomes X2 345 when the least unit is 0 0001inch it becomes X2 3456 The system alarms when the specified is more than 8 digit value 1 4 4 Conversion between the metric and the inch Metric input or inch input is set by NO 0000 Bit2 INI G commands corresponding to metric inch system is as follows G20 inch input G21 mm input Input data unit becomes the inch or metric input unit when NO 0000 Bit2 INI setting is changed But the angle unit is not changed Input data unit becomes the inch or metric input unit when NO 0000 Bit2 INI setting is changed But the angle unit is not changed F feedrate position command zero offset of workpiece tool compensation value Chapter I Programming Fundamentals graduation unit of MPG movement distance in incremental feed NO 1001 BitO INM can set MM or INCH input of least command increment in lin
374. nary tool nose No 3 nose No 4 Imaginary tool nose No 5 Imaginary tool nose No 6 154 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation Imaginary tool nose No 7 Imaginary tool nose No 8 Fig 4 8 Imaginary tool nose number in front tool post coordinate system Fig 4 9 Tool nose center on starting point Note The general imaginary tool nose direction 1 8 are used to G18 level the imaginary tool nose 0 or 9 is used to G17 and G19 levels The imaginary tool 0 or 9 used to G18 is valid but the imaginary tool nose direction 1 8 are used to G17 and G19 levels the system uses the nose 0 to execute the compensation 4 1 3 Compensation value setting Preset imaginary tool nose number and tool nose radius value for each tool before executing tool nose radius compensation Set the tool nose radius compensation value in TOOL OFFSET amp WEAR window as Fig 4 1 R is tool nose radius compensation value T is imaginary tool nose number and the radius compensation value is the sum of offset radius and wear radius Table 4 1 Display window of system tool nose radius compensation value Tool offset No X Offset 0 000 0 000 0 380 0 000 0000 01000 EK Offset 10 000 10 000 EM 0 250 Wear 0 020 0 040 EUE 0 000 Offset 14 000 15 000 ETE 1 200 Wem 105 912 999 Blsi ic Wear ME AN NECEM NIE CINA COS ETC Of 31090 1209 039 In toolsetting the tool nose is also imaginar
375. nate value set by G50 adds or subtracts the unexecuted tool compensation value Note 5 T command can use the leading zero When T00cc is commanded or only tool offset number is commanded in the program and the current tool number is not changed the system only correspondingly modifies the current tool offset value Note 6 After executing the miscellaneous function lock is valid the system does not execute the tool change when T command is executed but the tool offset is executed When using the miscellaneous function lock checks the program function it is executed in the safety position 3 3 2 Tool Life Management When the tool life management is used TLF No 813270 is set to 1 The tools are divided into many groups Each group specifies its corresponding tool life the used time or used times and the used time or times are accumulated When the current tool life arrives the next tool in the same group is selected according to the preset order The system alarms when all tool life are used in the same group 3 3 2 1 Tool Life Management Data Set the used most group number in No 6813 BitO and Bit1 GS1 and GS2 of No 6800 set the actual group number and the most tool in each group o jo 1 8 of 1 most group number N0 6813 o Jt 1 4 of 1 most group number N0 6813 4 1 2 of 1 most group number N0 6813 m Im 1 most group number N0 6813 Note 1 After the above No 6813 or No 6800 BitO and Bit1 GS1 an
376. nce min command increment is taken as the unit to the reference position when the parameter sets the top point of the forbidden area Note 4 Whether the limit range is the inner side or outer side of the area is set by No 1300 BitO OUT and it is the inner side when it is set to 0 Note 5 The limit is valid after the system executes the reference position return the system alarms when the reference position is in the limit area in G22 v A O e 9 3 3 e Note 6 The tool reversely traverses when the travel alarm appears Note 7 G22 G23 is commanded in an alone block Note 8 The system is switched from G23 to G22 in the forbidden area there are as follows the system alarms in the next movement block when the forbidden area is in the inner side alarms when the forbidden area is in the outer side Note 9 When the set forbidden area is set by mistaken sequence the system executes the area check of the two points as the top points Note 10 When No 1310 Bit 0 OT2x of the stored travel limit check 2 is set to 1 executing the stored travel limit 2 check the system executes G22 and then the check the system does not execute the check when it is G23 2 10 Skip Interpolation G31 Command function In the course of executing the command when the outside skip signal X3 5 is input the system stops the command to execute the next block The function is used to the dynamic measure such as milling machine toolsett
377. nction The constant surface speed control is valid the cutting surface speed is defined m min and the constant rotational speed control is cancelled Command format G96 Sxxxx Command explanation G96 is modal G command If the current modal is G96 G96 can not be input it is the cutting surface speed in Sxxxxx constant surface control Command function the constant surface speed control is cancelled the constant rotational speed control is valid and the spindle speed is defined r min Command format G97 Sxxxx Command explanation G96 is modal G command If the current modal is G97 G97 cannot be input it is the spindle speed in Sxxxxx constant speed control r min I D O Q Q 3 3 Q Relative command G50 Command function define max spindle speed limit r min in the constant surface speed control r min Command format G50 Sxxxx Command explanation After the system is turned on and the max spindle speed is not specified the system does not limit the spindle speed state Max spindle speed limit is valid for G96 and is invalid for G97 S value set by G50 is modal and is value before the new max speed is set Note when G50 SO is executed the spindle speed is limited in O r min the spindle does not rotate in the constant surface control The system does not set the current workpiece coordinate system when G50 sets the constant surface speed control Incremental system Metric mm
378. nd 4113 M command 4119 S command mo Temm o Example When the system executes 1 4016 1 value is 17 18 or 19 The system alarms when the reading writing modal value is G command which cannot be used by the system 7 Current position The position message is only read instead of being written Variable Position signal Coordinate Tool compensation number system value 5001 5005 End point of block absolute Workpiece Not including coordinate coordinate system 5021 5025 Current position machine Machine including coordinate coordinate system 5041 5045 Current position machine Workpiece including coordinate coordinate 130 Chapter If G Commands 5061 5065 Skip signal position Workpiece including coordinate system 5081 5085 Tool length compensation value The read is the position value after the last block execution The units digit from 1 to 5 of variable number corresponds the No n axis 8 Compensation value of workpiece coordinate system The workpiece zero offset value can be read and written 5001 5205 526 1 5265 G56 workpiece zero offset value 528 1 5285 G57 workpiece zero offset value 530 1 5305 G58 workpiece zero offset value 532 1 5325 G59 workpiece zero offset value The units digit from 1 to 5 of variable number corresponds the No n axis 9 Note The system variable is the state value of the system and is buffered in advance when m
379. nd it is taken as the non movement block When the system specifies G code in the radius compensation mode in the subprogram G code is valid at the same time the system cancels the radius compensation mode when the subprogram does not end the compensation mode is transferred to the called program which will continuously executes the corresponding compensation 178 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation Cutting inner of the whole circle In the tool nose radius compensation when the system machines the inner of the whole circle and the compensation direction is not changed the overcut or undercut creates at the moment it determines whether it alarms based on No 5008 Bit5 CNF When Bit5 is set to 0 No 259 alarms I U im O e um 9 3 3 e Tool h Programmed path Maybe create overcut or undercut ROSE CANGE pal Fig 4 73 overcut in machining inner of the whole circle Inserting MDI operation in tool compensation In MDI mode the system does not execute the tool nose radius compensation When the system specifies G41 or G42 the system determines No 5008 Bit4 MCR When Bit is set to 1 No 258 alarms The system does not alarm and ignores the specified G41 and G42 when it is set to O When the system runs in AUTO mode in absolute command programming and the single block run stops to insert MDI mode and then starts AUTO mode at the moment transfers the vector of starting point of the next block and forms
380. nd format G70 P_ ns Q nf Command specifications 1 ns Block number of the first block of finishing path nf Block number of the last block of finishing path G70 path is defined by programmed one of ns nf blocks Relationships of relative position of ns nf block in G70 G73 blocks are as follows G71 G72 GT73 N ns C RETE E da 9 Blocks for finishing path N nD G70 P ns Q nf 2 G70 is compiled following ns nf blocks If they are in the front of G71 blocks the system automatically searches and executes ns nf blocks and then executes the next program following nf block after they are executed which causes the system executes ns nf blocks repetitively F S T in ns nf blocks are valid when executing ns nf to command G70 finishing cycle 4 G96 G97 G98 G99 G40 G41 G42 are valid in G70 5 When G70 is executed the system can stop the automatic run and manual traverse but return to the position before manual traversing when G70 is executed again otherwise the following path will be wrong 6 When the system is executing the single block the program pauses after the system has 82 Chapter If G Commands executed end point of current path 7 G70 cannot be executed in MDI mode otherwise the system alarms 2 15 5 Axial Grooving Multiple Cycle G74 Command function Axial X tool infeed cycle compounds radial discontinuous cutting cycle Tool infeeds from starting point in radial di
381. ng CNC System User Manual 00001 N10 T0202 Virtual axis N100 GOO X150 CO ZO Path after tool nose C N110 G12 1 radius compensation N120 G42 G01 X80 F200 N130 C20 Program path N140 G03 X40 C40 R20 N150 G01 X 40 N160 G03 X 80 C20 R20 N170 G01 C 20 N180 G03 X 40 C 40 R20 N190 G01 X40 N200 G03 X80 C 20 R20 N210 G01 CO N220 G40 X150 0 N230 G13 1 N240 Z100 0 Fig 2 11 N500 M30 Note 1 When the system is turned on or resets the polar coordinate interpolation is cancelled G13 1 G12 1 and G13 1 are modal Note 2 The linear axis and turn axis for the polar coordinate interpolation must be set in advance in NO 5460 NO 5461 the axis undefined by the parameter does not execute the polar coordinate interpolation in spite of specifying the movement value in the polar coordinate interpolation mode Note 3 The used level selected by G17 G18 or G19 before G12 1 is cancelled after G13 1 cancels the polar coordinate interpolation the level recovers when the system resets the polar coordinate interpolation is cancelled and the system uses the level selected by G17 G18 or G19 Note 4 In the polar coordinate interpolation mode the program commands use the rectangular coordinate command in the polar coordinate level The linear axis in the level uses the diameter or radius programming and the turn axis uses the radius programming Note 5 G codes in the polar coordinate interpolation mode can be used as follows
382. ng Examples 10 1 Outer End Face Machining 1 Machining the workpiece is shown in Fig 10 1 and the rod is 50x100mm Em n Q Ke 4 um gt 5 material Fig 10 1 2 2tools used to machine below N No 2 tool EM Cutting tool with the tool width 3mm 3 Editing a program According to the mechanical processing and introduction of the commands in the manual set the work piece coordinate system shown as Fig 10 1 edit the programs shown as below 00001 Program name N0000 GO X150 Z50 Position to the safe place to change the tool N0005 M12 Clamp the chuck N0010 M3 S800 The spindle is on and its speed is 800 N0020 M8 The cooling is ON 301 II O O D Q O C GSK CNC GSE NO NOO NOO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 302 LE e eae e eae e eae eae o oOo o o QW Un A o N a CO O NO WN OS O o o o o o o o o o oD NO N N N N N N N NNN NN NDN WO O00 NU A OA Q Qs Q t d o N FY ODO OO Wo vU o Ww wY Wo N ae C n oO o o oD Un O oO O QV Pee N O O O O O O O T0101 GO X136 Z2 G71 U0 5 RO 5 F200 G71 P0060 Q0150 U0 25 W0 5 GO X16 G1 Z 23 X39 98 W 33 X40 W 30 G3 X80 W 20 R20 G2 X120 W 20 R20 G1 W 20 G1 X130 W 5 G1 W 25 GO X150 Z185 T0202 G70 P0060 Q0150 GO X150 Z185 T0303 GO Z 56 X42
383. ng zero X measured position Z measured position w y 380 Fi aEHt no A iuc diceris rseui emet eed i Tm UU A O Q Q 3 3 Q Offset value Offset value Before measure After measure X 100 0 98 0 Z0 4 0 Fig 2 18 2 12 Reference Position Function 2 12 1 Reference position return G28 Command function move from the starting point at the rapid traverse speed to the middle position specified by IP and then return to the reference position Command format G28 IP Command explanation G28 is non modal IP it is the middle point coordinates is specified by the absolute value and incremental value Omit one or all command address for each axis omitting some axis means the axis does not return to the reference position omitting all means the middle point is the tool starting point in the current workpiece coordinate system and the tool does not return to the reference position and keeps stopping Command execution process as Fig 2 18 1 Rapidly position from the current position to the middle position of the command axis AB 2 Rapidly position from the middle point to the reference position BR 50 Chapter If G Commands Fig 2 19 Note 1 After the system is turned on it does not aa the manual reference position return when the system executes G28 reference position return it judges it alarms or executes like the manual reference position return according to No 1002 Bit 3
384. nged After the cutting is completed the speed can be switched The dry run function cannot be activated or closed really and it is done after the single block stops or pauses Even if the dry run is switched in the course of drilling its speed remains the previous feedrate it is dry run mode before cutting it runs at the dry run speed and reversely does at the commanded speed and the speed can be switched after cutting is completed 6 4 3 Single block running When execute the program at the first time select the single block running to prevent the malfunction due to the programming mistakes In auto mode the method of opening the single block switch is as below H Press SINGLE to start the single block mode and the single block indicator is on In single block mode press m to execute one block and then the machine stops continue to execute the next block press m again repeatedly until the program running ends In the single block mode check the program through executing the blocks one by one Steps of the single block running 2 EB 1 Press SINGLE on the machine operation panel press to execute one block in the program After executing the current block the machine stops 2 Press the cycle start button and execute the next block after executing the block the machine stops Note 1 Reference position return and single block running if commands of G28 and G29 are sent the single block function in the intermediate po
385. ning workpiece Note 3 The tool does not create the offset and starts compensation in the next movement command when there is no movement command in creating the tool compensation When there is no movement command in cancelling tool compensation the tool does not create the offset and the system cancels the compensation vector in the next movement command Note 4 The next block to create the tool compensation block has the tool compensation cancel modal command the system does not execute the tool compensation creation process but at the moment the modal command will change normally Note 5 The tool nose radius compensation creation and cancel only use G00 or G01 instead of G02 or G03 When they are specified No 252 alarms Note 6 In tool nose radius compensation the tool nose center moves to the end point of the last block and is vertical with the programmed path of the last when the system executes 3 or more than 3 blocks without movement command At the moment the overcut or undercut creates and the system should not machine the workpiece in the next block in programming When 3 or more than 3 blocks without movement command following the movement command to create the tool nose radius compensation the system does not create immediately the tool nose radius compensation but does it after the 159 GSE CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual non movement command Note 7 The system does not execute the tool nose radiu
386. nna a y 38 439 wear A pan A nam A nnn ofset B AAA B Bn B Bn aad B wear B AAA B Bag B Bn ofset A AAA A 00A 8 888 MACHINE Bas A X aes vear B AAA B Bn B Bg Z 3g 439 ofset B Bn B Bn B Bn AAE B wear B Bn B Bn B Bg ofset B Bing B Bn B Bn L wear 8 Aaa a aaa B aaa B T gona V 15 35 20 TOOL CNC MACRO SERACH MEASURE INPUT C INPUT CLEAR SS SETTING Fig 7 2 INPUT 4 Press to complete the input or rewriting or switch into the other window to complete the rewriting 5 Move the cursor to set the other tool offset value wearing value or T value of the assumed tool nose direction Note The maximum value of the tool wearing compensation value can be rewritten through parameter 5013 7 1 2 Measuring mode d 1 1 On the setting tool offset window press mew to access the tool offset management window 2 Press E Or E to select the window and press Q Or V to select the tool offset number to be rewritten or press Or to select the axial tool offset Value or the wearing value to be rewritten MEASURE 3 Press to access the measuring window to measure the tool offset value which is shown as below 283 II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual DNC RESET ABSOLUTE i 188 HEE Fi 18 BRE RELATIVE U 158 HEH I 18 BRE MACHINE i 158 HEH 18 BRIE MEASURE 3E CANCEL
387. nose radius compensation Note 4 After the system is turned on the system performs the manual reference position return or G28 automatic reference position return and automatically creates the origin position of the machine coordinate system according to the value set by No 1240 Note 5 The machine coordinate system must be set before the system commands G53 So the system must execute the manual reference position return or G28 automatic reference position return after it is turned on the operation is not operated when the system uses the absolute position encoder Note 6 The system executes G53 and G00 G01 in Group 01 in the same block G00 or G01 only modifies G modal value in Group 01 2 13 2 Workpiece coordinate system setting G50 The coordinate system used to machining the workpiece is called as the workpiece coordinate system The workpiece coordinate system can be set in advance The set workpiece can change its origin position to set again the position of workpice coordinate system in the machine coordinate system Command format G50 IP Command function The absolute coordinate of the current position can be set by setting the absolute coordinate of current position to create the workpiece coordinate system called as the floating coordinate system After the workpiece coordinate system is created the absolute coordinate programming inputs the coordinate value in the coordinate system till the new workpiece coordinate syst
388. nsation modify the tool offset according to the dimension offset I U im O ta um 9 3 3 e Fig 3 5 Tool offset The tool offset is used for the programming The offset corresponding to the tool offset number in T command is added or subtracted on the end point of each block X tool offset in diameter or radius is set by No 5004 Bit1 ORC For X tool offset in diameter or radius the external diameter is changed along with diameter or radius when the tool length compensation is changed Example When the state parameter No 5004 Bit1 is set to O and X tool length compensation value is 10mm No 5004 Bit1 is set to 1 and X tool length compensation value is 10mm the diameter of workpiece external diameter is 20mm Fig 3 6 is to create execute and cancel the tool offset in movement mode gt Programmed path i 3 Motion path of coordinates Fig 3 6 Creation execution and cancellation of tool length G01 X100 Z100 T0101 CBlock 1 start to execute the tool offset G01 W150 Block 2 tool offset G01 X50 Z300 T0100 Block 3 canceling tool offset There are two methods to execute the tool offset they are set by No 5002 Bit4 LGT 1 The tool length compensation is executed by the tool traversing 2 The tool length compensation is executed by modifying the coordinates Example Table 3 1 o f ow 000 5000 0000 12000 23 000 13 452 145 GSK988T Turning CNC Sy
389. nt the tool approaches the workpiece with G1 speed Note 4 For grooving the finishing path ns nf block Z dimension must mononously change always increase or decrease Note 5 For G71 Il type when there is arc in finishing path ns nf 3410 parameter the arc radius permits error cannot be non zero i e the permitting function of arc radius error cannot be activated Note 6 Radius error is irrelevant to cutting allowance and radius error is permitted and checks whether the alarm occurs 2 15 2 Radial Roughing Cycle G72 Command function G72 is divided into three parts D 1st blocks for defining the travels of tool infeed and tool retraction the cutting speed the spindle speed and the tool function in roughing 12 Chapter If G Commands 2 2nd blocks for defining the block interval finishing allowance 3 3rd blocks for some continuous finishing path counting the roughing path without being executed actually when G72 is executed According to the finishing path the finishing allowance the path of tool infeed and retract tool the system automatically counts the path of roughing the tool cuts the workpiece in paralleling with Z and the roughing is completed by multiple executing the cutting cycle tool infeed cutting feed tool retraction The starting point and the end point of G72 are the same one The command is applied to the formed roughing of non formed rod Command format G72 W Ad Re F S T
390. ntersection to a point for canceling compensation vector The tool directly moves again to the intersection after the compensation mode is resumed e Setting coordinate system in G50 G52 Programmed path G50 program block Fig 4 57 Temporary compensation vector in G50 G52 Note SS indicates a point at which the tool stops twice in Single mode e Reference position automatic return G28 G30 In compensation mode the compensation is cancelled in a middle point and is automatically resumed after executing the reference position return in G28 G30 171 GSE CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual G28 G30 Middle point Programmed path i Tool nose center path Machine reference point Fig 4 58 Cancel compensation vector temporarily in G28 G53 automatic return to reference position In compensation mode when G53 is commanded the system creates the offset vector which is vertical with the tool motion direction before the end point of the last block When the tool moves to G53 position the compensation vector is cancelled The compensation vector is automatically recovered when the system executes the next movement command U im O e um 9 3 3 e S Tool nose center path Programmed path Fig 4 59 G53 temporarily cancelling compensation vector e G7 1 G76 compound cycle G92 fixed cycle G84 G88 drilling cycle When executing G71 G76 G92 fixed cycle G84 G88 drilling
391. ntinuously traverses 2 Incremental feed see 5 3 The tool only traverses some distance when the key is pressed once DNC run The system directly reads the programs to run the machine by the external input output device instead of that the program is saved to the CNC memory See 6 3 1 2 System Setting The operator executes a series of setting to the CNC by its press keys and the common setting including tool offset CNC setting and macro variable setting 184 Chapter Overview Tool offset setting each tool has its own dimension length diameter When a workpiece with some shape is machined the tool dimension is different according to the amount of movement If the dimension Value of the tool is set in the CNC even if the different tools are used the tool path is also automatically given in the same program so any tools can machine the workpiece shape specified by the programs The Value related to the tool dimension is called the offset See Chapter Vil CNC setting CNC setting includes system setting coordinate setting system time setting system IP setting See Chapter 3 4 e Macro variable setting The system can support all kinds of macro program edit the variable required by the macro program is set here 1 3 Display Program display 1 Display the current program content being executed shown in Fig 1 4 clue to function clue to function
392. ock the program pauses after the system has executed end point of current path 9 Ad Au are specified by the same U and different with or without being specified P Q commands 10 G72 cannot be executed in MDI otherwise the system alarms Relevant definitions Finishing path the above mentioned Part 3 of G71 ns nf block defines the finishing path and 73 I U im O ta um 9 3 3 e GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual the starting point of finishing path i e starting point of ns block is the same these of starting point and end point of G72 called A point the first block of finishing path ns block is used for Z rapid traversing or cutting feed and the end point of finishing path is called to B point the end point of finishing path end point of nf block is called to C point The finishing path is A 5B C The finishing path is the one after offsetting the finishing allowance Au Aw and is the path contour formed by executing G72 A B C point of finishing path after offset corresponds separately to A B C point of roughing path and the final continuous cutting path of G72 is B C point It is each travel of Z tool infeed in roughing without sign symbols and the direction of tool infeed is defined by move direction of ns block Ad is reserved after the system executes W Ad and NO 5132 value is modified The value of system 5 A O Q y Q 3 3 Q parameter NO 05
393. of a program 4 Toolsetting and run 1 The tool traverses to the safe position in MDI mode the system executes T0100 and cancels the tool offset on the program window 2 The tool traverses and cuts along the work piece face as shown in Fig 10 2 Fig 10 2 3 When Z axis remains still the tool is released along X axis and the spindle rotation stops the MEASURE system is switched to the tool offset window the cursor moves to No 001 offset is pressed and the system enters the measure input window ZO in the input window JK is input and is pressed and so Z offset value has been input 4 The tool traverses and cuts along the outer circle of the work piece as shown in Fig 10 3 Fig 10 3 5 When X axis remains still the tool is released along Z axis and the spindle rotation stops and the outer dimension of the workpiece is measured the measured value is 49 5mm the system is 303 II O Oo um 9 r O 5 II O D um 9 oO 5 GSR C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual MEASURE switched to the tool offset window the cursor moves to No 001 offset is pressed and the system enters the measure input window Z0 in the input window is OK input and 0 is pressed and so Z offset value has been input 6 Traverse the tool to the safe position press the tool change key to execute No 2 tool in Manual mode 7 Start the spindle and traverse the tool to t
394. of gear 4 MSG4 Default Setting 6000 Value Range 0 32767r min The parameter sets the maximum spindle speed of each gear w II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 3770 Axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed control ACS Default Setting 0 Value Range 0 1 quantity of the control axes Set the axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed control Note When it is set as 0 default X axis Then P value commanded in G96 block is not significant to the constant surface speed 3771 Minimum spindle speed in constant surface speed control G96 CFL Value Range 0 32767r min 341 II O D m 9 Oo 5 GSR C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual Default Setting 0 The parameter sets the minimum spindle speed in the constant surface speed control During the constant surface speed control G96 if the spindle speed is lower than the speed set by the parameter it is limited in the parameter speed 3772 Maximum spindle speed MSS Value Range 0 32767r min Default Setting 6000 The parameter sets the maximum spindle speed The actual spindle speed is limited by the maximum speed set by the parameter when the commanded spindle speed exceeds the maximum spindle speed or the spindle speed after override exceeds the maximum spindle speed Note 1 When the constant surface speed controls no matter whether G96 or G97 is co
395. of thread cutting depth C Starting point of thread cutting D End point of thread cutting X 2 Z axis Fig 2 63 Cut in method is shown in Fig 2 64 100 Chapter If G Commands Fig 2 64 Execution process DO Q9 CFD The tool rapidly traverses to B4 and the thread cutting depth is Ad The tool only traverses in X direction when a 0 the tool traverses in X and Z direction and its direction is the same that of A D when a 0 The tool cuts threads paralleling with CD to the intersection of DE r 0 thread run out The tool rapidly traverses to E point in X direction The tool rapidly traverses to A point in Z direction and the single roughing cycle is completed The tool rapidly traverses again to tool infeed to B is the roughing times the cutting depth is the bigger value of Jn x d vn 1 xAd Admin and execute 2 if the cutting depth is less than k d if the cutting depth is more than or equal to k d the tool infeeds k d to B and then execute to complete the last thread roughing The tool cuts threads paralleling with C 0D to the intersection of DE r 0 thread run out X axis rapidly traverses to E point Z axis traverses to A point and the thread roughing cycle is completed to execute the finishing After the tool rapidly traverses to B the cutting depth is k and the cutting travel is d execute the thread finishing at last the tool returns to A
396. ograms in the state of reset in Auto mode Current operation mode The current coordinate interface he current coordinate interface ABSOLUTE Thecurrent coordinate value Program block Information the current program content information under AUTO MDI and DNC mode The display area of each soft key marking information in which the concerned soft key and operation information can be displaved Note The displayed content is different according to the different allocation and the diagram form and all content of the related window are based on the standard 2 axis turning machine allocation The display area of run status PRG DATA anao a 188 Avs NC INFO FED OVRI RAP oval SPI OVRI Joa F 00081 OBBI G99 M8 M3 S2 TAJ HDL F PART CNT RUN TIME CUT TIME FH SET REL Fig 3 1 POSITION Press The display area of alarm information CLEAR PART CNT Technology data the information of current tool information actual and instruction feed speed actual and instruction spindle speed etc e mm min mm min B rev min The display area of complex and mode Xl information which can AR pa AA AB an nn 14 28 14 be switched by pressing soft key The complex information includes feedrate machining numbers and cutting time The modes inform
397. oment F S T commands of G73 blocks are valid F S T of ns nf 71 I U im O ta um 9 3 3 e CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE blocks are valid when executing ns nf to command G70 finishing cycle 3 There are only G00 G01 in ns block 4 n ns nf blocks there are only G commands G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G96 G97 G98 G99 G40 G41 G42 and the system cannot call subprograms M98 M99 5 G96 G97 G98 G99 G40 G41 G42 are invalid in G73 and valid in G70 6 When G73 is executed the system can stop the automatic run and manual traverse but return to the position before manual traversing when G73 is executed again otherwise the following path will be wrong 7 When the system is executing the feed hold or single block the program pauses after the system has executed end point of current path 8 Ai Au are specified by the same U and Ak Aw are specified by the same U and they I are different with or without being specified P Q commands 9 G73 cannot be executed in MDI otherwise the system alarms 10 Z must be the monotonous in the cycle body specified by P and Q Z tool retraction and finishing allowance are set to O when the system executes X non monotonous workpiece When No 5102 BitO MRI is set to 1 the system does not alarm 11 When the programming is executed and the initial positioning point retreats one tool infeed value in the direction of cutting but the result i
398. ommunication Function 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Eo oL LLL LLL LLLACAN Way of Validating After power on Default Setting 0000 0000 0 ACAN GSK CANA function on all system servo is 0 Not used Communication baud rate of GSK CANA function on all system servo ABPS 1 Used Way of Validating After power on Default Setting 500 kbps Value Range 500 600 800 or 1000 kbps ABPS Set communication baud rate of GSK CANA function on system servo Note The baud rate set by the servo drive unit parameter should be consistent with the one set by the parameter Slave number corresponding to each axis during servo communication SIDx Way of Validating After power on Value Range 0 5 361 II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 II O Oo 9 O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSR Default Setting 0 SIDx The parameter sets the slave number corresponding to each axis during servo communication Note 0 represents the axis doesn t connect with the servo subunit 1 5 represent the servo slave number corresponding to each axis Slave number corresponding to the extended servo spindle communication SIDS1 Way of Validating After power on Default Setting 0 Value Range 0 5 The parameter sets the corresponding slave number during the servo spindle communication when the total controlled axes exceed the range Note 0
399. on of position on absolute position detector when using absolute postion encoder 0 Not reverse 1 Reverse 4 APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the absolute position detector is used O Not corresponding 1 Corresponding Note When use the absolute position detector during the initial setting or after changing the absolute position encoder the parameter must be set as 0 and connect power supply again after power off and manually return to the reference position Therefore the mechanical position consists with that of the position encoder and the parameter will be auto set as 1 II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 5 APCx Position detector 0 Other than absolute position detector 1 Absolute position detector 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 O OM a ONE OM qe X SS Way of Validating After power on Parameter Type Bit axis Default Setting 0001 0001 0 ISAx Servo ALM signal level select 0 High 1 Low 4 46 DM1x DM3x The setting of detection multiplier ratio DMR BEES DETECTION MULTIPLIER DMR W XN HE PM 321 SSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual Command multiplier ratio CMR for each axis Parameter Type Word axis Value Range RATIO CMR VALUE SET BY NO 1820 SETTING Set the command multiplier CMR for each axis 1 When the command multiplier CMR is 1 2 1 27 the setting value 1 CMR 100 2 When the command multiplier CMR is 1 48 th
400. ool to the reference position GSK988T system has three kind of reference position return mode zero return with a dog zero return without a dog and absolute encoder zero return gt Setting a reference position with a dog When DLZx No 1006 Bit 1 is set to 0 the reference position setting with a dog is invalid i e the reference position setting with a dog is valid a deceleration switch must be installed on the machine to realize the reference position return Process The tool traverses in the direction specified by ZMI No 1006 Bit5 to the deceleration point at the rapid traverse speed and then at the FL speed to the reference position The reference gt position return completion light LED C v 2 h cO ights and the reference position return ends and the system automatically sets the coordinate system Note The rapid traverse speed the rapid traverse override F0 the reference position return FL speed for each axis are separately set by the parameters No 1420 No 1421 No 1425 Setting reference position without a dog When DLZx No 1006 Bit 1 is set to 1 the reference position setting without a dog is valid The reference position return can be completed without a deceleration switch installed on the machine Process The tool traverses in the direction specified by ZMI No 1006 Bit5 when the machine is turned on every time and the reference position return is executed and after the system has checked the 1 PC signa
401. or maz Lubkaionoupusgmi cnezs wa Rew CNc24 Yos vos SpndeCCWsgmi cne2s voa woa Spindle CWsignal cneze vos Wo Spndesiopson O J CN628 YO SPZ Spindle braking output signal CNe29 vro mn Spndegeart ouputsor cne210 vii maz Spindle gear 2 outputsignal EM c esa EM UEM Spindle gear 4 output signal gear 4 output signal Outer chuck cl tput CN62 13 M12 DOQPJ ul LE Inner chuck unclamping output signal CN62 14 Y15 M13 DOQPS Outer chuck uncamping Qupa inner chuck clamping output signal signal Tool post motor braking signal Yantai CN62 29 AK31 tool post unclamping output Liuxin Tool Post Tool post pre indexing electromagnet CN62 30 signal Yantai AK31 Tool post lock output Liuxin Tool Post Tri col CN62 37 YLAMP ri colored lamp yellow norma state non running non alarm CN62 32 GLAMP Tri colored lamp green running state ee CN6234 v25 mo Talstock advancing output signal CNe23s v26 Wii Taisckreradmgoupusgnd Nas Yap Reseed Owasr Yap Feed eneasa vas Reed Owaas vag Reed 383 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE PLC address Function defined by standard PLC address Remark CN62 41 SORI Spindle orientation signal a CN62 42 SECO Spindle orientation selection signal 1 MEN CN62 43 SEC1 Spindle orientation selection signal 2 CN62 44 SEC2 opind
402. or the programs of the four window and the user can press teel J Level2 m O P to separately search the corresponding ladder block of each window at this time the system correspondingly displays the ladder of the block of the correspondingly selected window O Oo mm 9 r O 5 2 Select the window block window 1 Select the window which is required to select the block i e separately press E Levele Jt Pu FI J to select the windows SELECT 2 Preseli to select the window program at the time the display is shown in Fig 3 23 224 Chapter III Windows AUTO reser PLC gt MONITOR STDPLC ENU LD2 gt window Level R0 0 logic 1 Ro 0 RO 0 ES RO 0 2 network2 RO 2 logic 0 R0 2 R0 2 R0 2 3 iii 9 SELECT address symbol igh low level alarm Level2 Level2 G8 4 PA Initial Power On P1 Work Mode Main P2 Work Mode Kev P3 MPG Main P4 MPG Axis Choose Kev P30 PS MPG OVERRIDE a 9 38 77 a ES SF Bt S 3 Press to select the ladder block corresponding to the window OK CANCEL 4 Pros A to confirm the selection and to return the previous menu press to cancel the selection operation and the system return the previous menu II 3 Search parameters commands and network 1 Search the block windows of the required commands the parameters and the network i e
403. orming the shortcut keys y with the other keys during editing the program BACK Backspace SPACE ey Delete the program and the character etc ahead Cancel l CANCEL Cancel the operation key C the program and the character etc DELETE Delete key ps backward C Control the cursors to move up down left and right Switch the windows in one window POSITION Press it to switch the position display window POSITION PROGRAM SYSTEM SETTING Function PROGRAM key Press it to switch the program display MESSAGE GRAPH HELP window SYSTEM Press it to switch the system display window 189 II O O D Q O CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE SETTING Press it to switch the system display window MESSAGE Press it to switch the message display window POSITION PROGRAME SYSTEM SETTING Press it to switch the graph display window Custom window II Press it to switch the help display window After using the function keys switches the windows using the corresponding soft key can display the content of some sub page in the current window or some operations in the current window are O Oo um 9 O 5 executed The soft keys of GSK988T have 10 in the below of the screen shown below JOUUUUUUE ooo l Continue the Retur to the Operation soft keys menu key previous menu key interface soft keys Soft key function 1 Switch the sub pages in t
404. ous FUNCION jaime inen bigs teoe doit Poe PEE a dede bec teor oot ie eoo dudde 139 CR B ME 919 216 rz rS 139 VIII 9 2 JEnd Of program FUDM SU ou ea esae R rptu paleta aee I nee aie Sea e etude 139 Oslo Prograni Stop MOO Lsccitestipbcbus dum ndis Cena use gama bnt epaductu mi dex bennnns tem ebenso bud Uns 139 29 14 Opional stop MOT acetum eciam tty ste che ded padre Eh b d echa ter e m Pe eie ota ces 140 3 1 9 oubprogram call M9O iiei ice ri cete e epe redu stb otn t ea ul a oen deese 140 9 1 0 S5UbbI gratn C all MIIO iie cti decise psei erts Dione n ise trs coms acento vibes vende 141 3 1 7 Return from Subprogram M99 sssssssssssssseeesee nennen nennen enar nna nnnns 141 3 1 8 The Following M commands for standard ladder some functions modified by K sIzE pictje T E M E 142 3 1 9 M Commands defined by standard PLC ladder eeeeeeeeessess 143 Meise xmi nea OO EET 143 3 2 1 Spindle speed analog voltage control eeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeree 143 S22 SPINGISsOV SUN IG Cites rai matu tau tb Od Vn d canemaanecen tener ena iD ud m edd 144 9 9 TOOLEURCUONL zt da ER UR dtes x tes enobu amer pad dated vaa citur a desdcudLrbe VR RENS pL MEE 144 SR M Mood Utt 144 8 0 2 Tool ite Management 5 optas epa iia aeu x odasci angie Metus Emi aaa 147 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation cccc cec
405. ow in the direction of the bottom side U W Movement to cutting end point C point in the figure below in the direction of bottom side Cutting feedrate R o Taper Taper radius value with direction range referred to the table below 63 CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Address Incremental Metric mm input Inch inch input system ISB system 99999 999 99999 999mm 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch ISC system 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 999 99999 999 99999 inch Cycle process D Z rapidly traverses from starting point to cutting starting point 2 Cutting feed linear interpolation from the cutting starting point to cutting end point 3 Z executes the tool retraction at the cutting feedrate opposite direction to the above mentioned D and returns to the position which the absolute coordinates and the starting point are the same 4 The tool rapidly traverses to return to the starting point and the cycle is completed I 5 A O Q y Q 3 3 Q eeina Rapid traverse Cutting feed A Starting point end point B Cutting starting point C Cutting end point Z axis Fig 2 33 64 Chapter If G Commands Cutting path Relative position between cutting end point and starting point with U W is as Fig 2 32 1 U 0 W 0 R lt 0 2 U 0 W 0 R lt 0 I D O Q Q 3 3 Q 3 U gt 0 W gt 0 R lt 0 R s W 4 U 0 W 0 R lt 0 R
406. peed after Z reaches to end point of cutting as Fig 2 52 and Fig 2 53 Command format G92X U Z W F J KL Q straight thread cutting D O Q Q 3 3 Q cycle G92X U ZOWD RF JKL Q taper thread cutting cycle X absolute coordinate of end point of cutting Different value of X absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting Z absolute coordinate of end point of cutting Different value of X absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting Different value R value of X absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting When the sign of R is not the same that of U R lt U 2 Metric thread pitch is the same that of G32 After F value is executed it is reserved and can be omitted Travel in the short axis in thread run out is same that of G32 and cannot be less than 0 without direction automatically define its direction according to starting position of program and it is modal parameter If the short axis is X its value is specified by radius Travel in the long axis in thread run out is same that of G32 without direction automatically define its direction according to starting position of program and it is modal parameter If the long axis is X its value is specified by radius Multi threads 1 99 and it is modal parameter The system defaults it is single thread when L is omitted Shift angle of initial angle at the beginning of thread cutting Its range
407. point and so the thread finishing cycle is completed If the finishing cycle time is less than m execute 9 to perform the finishing cycle the thread cutting depth is k and the cutting travel is 0 if the finishing cycle times is equal to m G76 compound thread machining cycle is completed Note 1 When G76 is executed after FEED HOLD is pressed and the system executes this thread cutting cycle the system enters pauses state and Stop appears in the status column Note 2 The single block is executed during the course of thread cutting the run stops after the system returns to starting point one thread cutting cycle is completed Note 3 The thread cutting speed stops when the system resets emergently stops or the drive unti alarms 101 I v A O ta 9 3 3 e U O Q y Q 3 3 Q GSE CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Note 4 All or some addresses of G76 P m r a QC Admin R d are omitted and omitted addresses runs according to the setting value Note 5 m r a uses the same address P to be input one time When m r a are all omitted the system runs at the setting value of No 5142 No 5130 or No 5143 when P is with non regular value the system takes the last two digits of P value as a value and the last threeth and fourth digits as r value and the left as m value Note 6 Signs of U W determines direction of A gt C D E R i determines that of C
408. polation Axis rotary axis specification for polar coordinate interpolation Value Range 1 quantity of the control axes Default Setting NO 5460 is 0 NO 5461 is 5 Set control axis number of rotary axis to execute polar interpolation II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 CGK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual Maximum cutting feedrate during polar coordienate interpolatoin MFI Default Setting 8000 Value aei 0 6 24 000 0 6 10 000 deg min Set the valid maximum feedrate of the polar coordinate interpolation If the commanded speed is greater than the value the speed is limited by the maximum one When the parameter is set as 0 the speed in the polar coordinate interpolation is limited by the maximum cutting feedrate parameter NO 1422 value 5463 Allowable automatic override percentage in polar coordinate interpolation API Value Range 1 quantity of the control axes Default Setting 0 Value Range 0 100 When the polar coordinate interpolation is set the percentages of the auto override are allowed to limit the cutting feedrate of the rotary axis The allowable speed of the rotary axis Maximum cutting feedrate X override percentage In polar coordinate interpolation the more closely the tool is near to the work piece center the bigger the speed vector of the rotary axis is When it exceeds the allowable speed the feedrate automatically multiplies by the override value calculated
409. program must be in Auto mode GSK988T cannot open two or more programs at the same and runs only program any time When the first block is open the cursor is located in the heading of the first block and can be moved in Edit mode In the run stop state in Auto mode the program starts to run by the cycle start signal CYCLE START key is pressed or external cycle start signal from a block pointed by current cursor usually blocks are executed one by one according to their programming sequence the program stops running till executing M02 or M30 The cursor moves along with program running and is located at the heading of the current block Sequence and state of program running are changed in the followings The program stops run after pressing RESET or EMERGENCY STOP button The program stops running when the system or PLC alarms The program runs and single block stops the program run stops after the current block runs completely in Edit MDI mode and then a block pointed by the current cursor starts running after the system switches into Auto mode the CYCLE START key is pressed or external cycle start signal is switched on The program stops run in Manual Jog Handwheel MPG Single Block Program Reference position Return Machine Reference position Return mode and it continuously runs from current position after the system is switched into Auto mode and the CYCLE START key is pressed or the external cycle start signal is switched on
410. put INPUT Direct input select the coordinate axis to be modified press to input the offset value and the operation is completed MEASURE Measure input select the coordinate system to be modified press E input the measured value for X axis input X for Z axis input Z and so the operation is completed input it is used to modify the input offset value and is the incremental input For example X adds the offset value 0 2mm in G54 coordinate system the cursor moves to X position INPUT in G54 coordinate system E pressed 0 2 is input and so the operation is completed In the right column the system simultaneously displays the current absolute coordinate value and the relative coordinate value and the used tool number in the current program running Note 1 Only in MDI mode when the operation authority level is more than 4 the coordinate offset can be set or rewritten Note 2 The quantity of axes is set by parameters 1010 and 8130 Note 3 The name for each axis is set by parameter 1020 Note 4 The origin offset value of each coordinate in each coordinate system can be set by the parameter and the corresponding relation is shown as below Parameter 1220 The external work piece origin offset value for each axis Parameter 1221 Each axis origin offset value of work piece coordinate system 1 G54 235 II O Oo am 9 2r O 5 II O Oo mm 9 et O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T
411. r After the tool returns to the reference position the reference position return finish indicator LED a 2 ZO ma is on 4 Execute the same operations for the other axes 2 To decelerate press one of the rapid traverse override switches Note 1 Manual reference position return can only return to the 1 reference position after the manual reference position return finishes the coordinate system is auto set Note 2 Once the reference position return finishes reference position return finish indicator is on the machine doesn t move anymore until the reference position return switch is cut off Note 3 When reference position off or during emergency stop the reference position return finish II indicator is off Note 4 The direction for each axis reference position return is set by the 5 bit of parameter 1006 Note 5 Setting the 2 bit of parameter 1404 After set the reference position manually return to reference position and moves to the reference position at the rapid feedrate or manual rapid feedrate Note 6 After the system reference position of the absolute encoder is set auto set the coordinate system after power on again and it doesn t require reference position return But the non absolute encoder system requires executing the reference position return after power on again O D um 9 ai O 5 The above is just one example refer to the manual provided by the machine manufacture during the
412. r 20m Note 2 About the operation of cutting off the machine power supply refer to the manual of the machine manufacturer 2 3 Overtravel Protection To avoid the damage of the machine due to the overtravel for each axis the machine must take the measure of overtravel protection Install the limit switches on the maximum stroke in each axis positive and negative directions on the machine When it overtravels the limit switch is on the system decelerates till stopping and it alarms overtravel During auto running when the machine moves along one axis and touches the limit switch the tool decelerates and stops as long as it traverses along all axes and the system alarms overtravel During the manual operation only the axis which the tool touches its limit switch decelerates and stops while the tool still traverses along other axes The method of canceling the alarm of overtravel In the manual mode the working table moves in the opposite direction For example Overtravel is in the position direction it moves negatively negative positively and leaves off the limit switch Reset the alarm is cleared Note The overtravel release method on the machine is different that of the User Manual and the concrete operations are referred to the machine manufacturer s 2 4 Overtravel Protection in Memory Travel Limit The tool can t enter the area stipulated by the travel limit check 1 2 and 3 in memory type Ys pees CE Stored tr
413. r deceleration of the spindle and the tapping axis is the time parameter NO 5241 of the spindle maximum speed when the spindle reaches the rigid tapping The actual time is the ratio between the specified spindle speed and the maximum speed multiplies by the parameter 5271 Time constant for spindle and tapping axis in extraction operation RTET Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 200 Value Range 0 4000ms Set the time constant of linear acceleration or deceleration of the spindle and the tapping axis during the rigid tapping run out The parameter is valid only when parameter TDR NO 5201 BIT2 is set as 1 11 17 Parameters Related to the Polar Coordinate Interpolation 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Op Oc Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 0 AFC In polar coordinate interpolation mode automatic override and feedrate clamp are O Not performed 1 Performed Note In the polar coordinate interpolation mode the more closely the tool is near to the work piece center the bigger the speed vector of the rotary axis is If the center part exceeds the maximum cutting speed parameter NO 5462 the servo NO 411 alarms Auto feedrate override and auto feedrate limit function auto controls the feedrate then the speed vector of the rotary axis doesn t exceed the maximum cutting feedrate Axis linear axis specification for polar coordinate inter
414. r directly skips to the program O0005 For example the input does not exist in the CNC the system at in the lower left corner prompts The file does not exist 4 1 2 Creating a program Only when the operation authority is above level 4 can the program be created and edited 254 Chapter IV Editing and Managing Programs PROGRAM LOCAL 1 Firstly press and then press to access the program windows which is shown in Fig 4 1 NET 2 On the program window press to access the creating window which is shown in Fig 4 2 o for example input 0123 press to access O0123 program editing window which is shown in Fig 4 2 EDIT reser PROG gt LOCAL DIRECTORY gt PRG OBIT1 not selected po 0 111 08111 7 69 254 3 Input the new program name in NEW M RELATIVE U 3l 552 LI 69 254 n m MACHI NE Y 31 552 7 59 254 O 4 um Q en T 9000 O 11 09 21 5 LOAD SAVE CANCEL RECOVER LOCATE COPY am PASTE DEL BLK gt Fig 4 2 4 1 3 Executing a program PROGRAM 1 In Edit mode press to enter PROGRAM window ES V 2 In program window press SEHACH program name Or press to search the program name which requires to run The selected line is displayed against a green backdrop shown in Fig 4 3 to move the cursor to select the 255 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR EDIT r
415. r on or shutdown press emergency stop button to reduce the electric shock to the equipment Note 3 After clearing the emergency stop alarm return to the reference position again to gurantee the correctness of the coordinate position 6 2 MDI Running 6 2 1 Editing and running the program in MDI mode i 1 the program window press amp to access MDI mode then the window is shown as below M D I RESET PROGRAM gt MDI GH x156 1 ABSOLUTE i B TRA MODAL G E adr 388 Gaz bal G25 Gee Gori abf God Gla alla A rev min F E mm min m T HHHH 14 24 23 LOCAL EM ibat DEL ai CLEAR Fig 6 3 274 Chapter VI Auto Operation 2 The running block is input maximum 10 lines in the edit bar which is at the downside of the block MDI The editing method is similar with that of editing the common program If the program is created in MDI mode the characters can be rewritten and deleted About editing the program refer to chapter 5 3 After the block is input the cursor moves toward the beginning of the block and executes If the cursor is in somewhere of the program the program is begun to execute Press m MDI command characters are executed from the line which the cursor is When the program end codes M02 or M03 are executed the program running ends rather than return to the beginning of the program After running the program the system accesses the stop mode f
416. rameter setting display window shown in Fig 3 26 AUTO reser SYSTEM gt PLC gt PLC DATA gt D value Min value Max value Daag 16 DABAI l B 5 paaa2 B 5 pages 2 5 DAABA 8 5 D g S B B 5 DANAS A paaa B D gg B D mag B DBBIB B DaBTI B E DAAA total tool position of tool post LESEN EL ES OS U Em n 2 Press to select the required D parameter or press is ADOR H EX D and input the required D parameter press and the cursor positions to the zi parameter The parameter meaning is displayed in the blew of the window S INPUT 3 Press to make the selected D parameter in the state of modification INPUT 4 Input the modification value and press and the modification is completed 3 DT parameter setting DT 1 In PLC Value state display window press to enter DT parameter setting display window shown in Fig 3 27 AUTO reser SYSTEM gt PLC gt PLC DATA gt DT value Min value Max value peo s ga prea 189 BBRao DEO 3000 appo praaa3 5008 189 5008 praga4 15000 1800 5000A praaes 188 189 500A DG 500 189 500A praaa7 500 Hh 4908 pragas 500 4ppo Dragog 1000 4p00 DB B 1 8000 pTaat 1 50 5000A la DTAAAA spindle shift time 1
417. ration and Deceleration 324 11 8 Parameters Related to Servo and Backlash Compensation 326 11 9 Parameters Related to Input Output eeseeeseeeseeeseeneennnmenrn 330 11 10 Parameters Related to Display and EGIting cc ecccecceecseeeeeeeaeeceeeseeeseeeseeseeeees 332 11 11 Parameters Related to Programming ccccccceccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeceeeseeeaeeeseeeeeesaes 334 11 12 Parameters Related to Screw Pitch Error Compensation 336 11 13 Parameters Related to the Spindle Control cccccceccseeceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeseeeseteetaes 339 11 14 Parameters Related to the Tool COMpPeNSaAtiONn cccecceecceeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeeseesseteeeaes 344 11 15 Parameters Related to the Canned Cycle eeseeseeeeeeneeeenenn 347 11 15 1 Parameter of the Drilling Canned Cycle eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 347 11 15 2 Parameters Related to the Thread Cutting Cycle ssssusse 348 11 15 3 Parameters Related to the Combined Canned Cycle 348 11 16 Parameters Related to the Rigid Tapping ccccccccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseesaeeseeeaeeeaees 349 11 17 Parameters Related to the Polar Coordinate Interpolation 351 11 18 Par
418. rd mark is read during program execution 0 Alarm occurs 1 No alarm occurs 7 M3B The number of M codes that can be specified in one block 0 1 1 Up to 3 3410 Tolerance of arc radius CRE Modification authority Equipment management authority Value Range 0 9999 9999 Default Setting 0 3001 0001 Inch input 0 0001 0 00001 Set the allowable error value of arc interpolation G02 G03 starting point radius and its finishing point radius P S alarms when arc interpolation radius error is more than the limit value Note II O m 9 Oo 5 When the setting value is 0 it doesn t require checking the arc radius error 11 12 Parameters Related to Screw Pitch Error Compensation 3620 Number of the pitch error compensation position for reference position NPR for each axis Way of Validating After power on Parameter Type Word axis Value Rangel 0 1023 Default Setting 0 3621 Number of pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position NEN for each axis Way of Validating After power on Parameter Type Word axis Value Range 0 1023 Default Setting 0 The parameter sets the number of the furthest screw pitch error compensation point for each axis in negative direction 3622 Number of pitch error compensation position at extremely positive position NEP Way of Validating After power on 336 Chapter XI Parameters Param
419. read cutting must be installed with spindle encoder the transmission ratio between spindle and encoder is set by the parameter X or Z traverses to start machine after the system receives spindle signal per rev in thread cutting and so one thread is machined by multiple roughing finishing without changing spindle speed GSK988T CNC system can machine many kinds of thread cutting such as thread cutting without tool retraction groove There is a big error in the thread pitch because there are the acceleration and the deceleration at the starting and ending of X and Z thread cutting and so there is length of thread lead in and distance of tool retraction at the actual starting and ending of thread cutting X Z traverse speeds are defined by spindle speed instead of cutting feedrate override in thread cutting when the pitch is defined The spindle override control is valid in thread cutting When the spindle speed is changed there is error in pitch caused by X and Z acceleration deceleration and so the spindle speed cannot be changed and the spindle cannot be stopped in thread cutting which will cause tool and workpiece to be damaged Note When the modal function is used M30 M30 modal in MDI mode cannot be cancelled in Auto mode or G codes in Group 01 can cancel the mode state 2 16 1 Thread Cutting with Constant Lead G32 Command function Executing G32 can machine the metric or inch straight taper end face thread and continuous multi se
420. rection Z retracts infeeds again and again and again and last tool retracts in axial direction and retracts to the Z position in radial direction which is called one radial cutting cycle tool infeeds in axial direction and execute the next radial cutting cycle cut to end point of cutting and then return to starting point starting point and end point are the same one in G74 which is called one radial grooving compound cycle Directions of axial tool infeed and radial tool infeed are defined by relative position between _ Hulwweiboid end point X U Z W gt and starting point of cutting The command is used to machine radial loop groove or column surface by radial discontinuously cutting breaking stock and stock removal Command format G74 R e G74X U _ Z CW __ P CAD Q Ak R Ad F Command specifications 1 The cycle movement is executed by Z W and P Ak blocks of G74 and the movement is not executed if only G74 R e block is executed 2 Ad and e are specified by the same address and whether there are Z W and P Ak word or not in blocks to distinguish them 3 The tool can stop in Auto mode and traverse in Manual mode when G74 is executed but the tool must return to the position before executing in Manual mode when G74 is executed again otherwise the following path will be wrong 4 When the single block is running programs pauses after each axial cutting cycle is completed
421. rface speed in G96 when there is no saved value Note 3 From G96 to G97 if none of S command r min is commanded in the program block in G97 the last spindle speed in G96 is taken as S command in G97 namely the spindle speed is not changed at this time Note 4 The constant surface speed control function is still valid when the machine is locked X Z do not move when the system executes X Z motion commands Note 5 In G96 when the spindle speed counted by the cutting surface speed is more than max speed of 104 Chapter If G Commands current spindle gear at this time the spindle speed is limited to max one of current spindle gear Note 6 In thread cutting To gain the precise thread machining it should not be adopted with the constant surface speed control but the constant rotational speed G97 in the course of thread cutting Note 7 No 3031 sets the numerical digit permitted by S Note 8 X 0 the theory speed is infinite but the actual speed corresponds to 10V voltage because the maximum voltage of sent analog is 10V Example B y X O a E z 90 l D 30 3 90 m C B e 90 o 8 7 E N Fig 2 67 Program M3 G96 S300 Spindle rotates clockwise the constant surface speed control is valid and the surface speed is 300m min GO X100 Z100 Rapid traverse to A point with spindle speed 955 r min GO X50 Z0 Rapid traverse to B point with spindle speed 1910 r min G1 W 30 F200 Cut from B to C w
422. ri amp 4 During running press gt l 4 7 orthe emergency stop button to stop MDI command characters Note 1 Deleting the program DEL BLK CLEAR a In MDI mode press to delete the block which the cursor is press to clear all the blocks in MDI edit bar b When parameter MCL NO 3203 7 is set as 1 press and the program is auto cleared c When parameter MER NO 3203 6 is set as 1 in single block mode after running the last block the program is auto cleared Note 2 When MDI running stops after editing m Is pressed to run again the running starts from the position where the cursor is Note 3 The program which is created in MDI mode can t be saved Note 4 In MDI mode the subprogram and the macro program can t be called 6 2 2 Running from any block ft y In the position window in MDI mode press Or the cursor moves toward the block to run press B to start the program and the program begins executing from the block which the cursor is 6 2 3 Stop MDI running MDI running can be stopped through the following methods Command stopping or press the relative keys on the machine panel to stop The run stop in MDI mode is the same that in Auto mode please refer to Chapter 6 1 4 6 3 DNC Running 988T is equipped with DNC function and DNC communication software is connected with CNC then the program is running in high speed and large capacity 275 II O D um 9 O 5 SSK CNC GSK988T
423. rogram if it offsets 180 with spindle one rev if Q180 or Q180 0 it is 0 18 When the system specifies the value more than 360000 it counts based on 360000 180 4 It is suggested that the system should use G97 instead of the constant surface cutting speed control in thread cutting Address Incremental Metric mm input Inch inch input system ISB ISC ISC 001 500mm 01 500 mm 001 999nch 01 9 99inch es e R 99999 999 99999 999mm a ET inch C 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 999 99999 999 99999 inch e m ooon TEE ise HEEEHKEERISD impr BRE TCU ogee 9 I Huirwweiboid GSE CGS CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Programmed end point of thread Tool path Fig 2 54 thread run out Command path v O e 9 3 3 e Fig 2 55 G32 path Difference between long axis and short axis End point Lx Zis long axis when Lz2Lx as45 X is long axis when Lx2Lz a gt 45 Starting point Fig 2 56 long axis short axis Note 1 When the thread run out the short axis executes the thread run out at the rapid speed and the long does it at the current thread cutting speed Note 2 J K are modal The thread run out is previous J K value when they are omitted in the next block in continuous thread cutting Their mode are cancelled when no thread cutting are executed Note 3 There is no thread run out when J or J K are omitted K J is the threa
424. rogram to be deleted the selected program is against the green backdrop DELETE 3 Press to delete the selected program 4 2 4 Outputting a program When the system USB interface has the U disk the following is shown EDIT reser PROGRAM gt USB DIRECTORY prog acounts 3 nane comments bea byte nodi fied time 08826 2818 18 86 11 29 58 0888 ORBI 2818 18 86 11 38 28 1 31 81 31 81 uli CUR NEXT SERACH mn E LOAD OPEN gt Fig 4 7 fend OUTPUT Press J to copy the program in an U disk directory to the local directory vice versa The detailed steps of the program in the U disk being copied to the system are shown below USE 1 Press to access the directory of the U disk OUTPUT 2 Press or to select the program to be copied press to copy the selected program to the local directory LOCAL 3 Press to access the system program directory OUTPUT 4 Press Or to select the program to be copied press to copy the selected program to the U disk File OF111 CNC al ready exists Whether to cover it VES Cover it NO Save as CANCEL Cancel 5 When the copied program exists a dialog box pops up PROGRAM EXISTS RECOVER 6 Press yes to replace the existed program press no and the program can be saved as another name press cancel to cancel the operation 259 II O um 9 O 5 GSR C Esta CNC GSK9
425. rting point It is the travel diameter value of radial X discontinuous tool infeed for each axial cutting cycle without sign symbols and its value range is referred to the following table It is the travel of Z discontinuous tool infeed without sign symbols of the axial Z cutting and the value range is referred to the following table I Hulwweiboid C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE cutting with sign symbols and its value range is referred to the following table The system defaults the axial Z tool retraction is 0 when R Ad FIQ Ak are omitted The system defaults to be the negative tool retraction when Z W is omitted I Address Incremental Metric mm input Inch inch input system n BHurwiweiboid Z 2 W 2 r Df An Dn A2 D2 Pa G Af A A 1 A x xd 3 D1 6 t lt eves gt Rapid traverse Cutting feed O Ak Ak lt U 2 0 lt Ai Ai An Starting point of radial cutting cycle Bn End of radial feed Cn Starting point of axial tool retraction AET E NEN E ENEE IE E E AEE EA TE Nc LL EIC Rc E LL E A W e A Eun Dn End point of radial gs oet S din cessi e C1 cutting cycle o Y n 1 2 3 amp A x 2 Z axis Fig 2 52 G75 path Execution process as Fig 2 52 D Radia
426. s MEASURE switched to the tool offset window the cursor moves to No 001 offset is pressed and the system enters the measure input window X135 in the input window JK is input and Io is pressed and so X offset value has been input 6 Traverse the tool to the safe position press the tool change key to execute No 2 tool in Manual mode 7 Start the spindle and traverse the tool to the toolsetting point as shown in Fig 10 8 point A A X axis II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 Fig 10 8 MEASURE 8 Switch into the tool offset window the cursor moves to 002 offset press to access the measuring window and input X135 in and then OK veel dl Use the same method to input Z0 9 The tool traverses to the safe position press the tool change key to execute No 3 tool in Manual mod 10 The spindle is started the tool traverses to the toolsetting point as shown in Fig 10 9 point A 308 Chapter X Processing Examples Fig 10 9 11 The system is switched to the tool offset window and the cursor moves to No 003 offset X135 ZO are input and the input steps are the same those of the above 8 12 The tool traverses to the safe position and the tool change key is pressed to execute the No 4 tool in Manual mode 13 The tool traverses to the toolsetting point as shown in Fig 10 10 point A II O Oo um 9 r O 5 Fig 10 10 14 The system is switched to the tool
427. s 1 G72 P ns Q n U Au W Aw 2 N CDS por 9 4 F i big og rs 3 N nf RENIA Command specifications 1 ns nf blocks in programming must be followed G72 blocks If they are in the front of G72 blocks the system automatically searches and executes ns nf blocks and then executes the next program following nf block after they are executed which causes the system executes ns nf blocks repetitively 2 ns nf blocks are used for counting the roughing path and the blocks are not executed when G72 is executed F S T commands of ns nf blocks are invalid when G72 is executed at the moment F S T commands of G72 blocks are valid F S T of ns nf blocks are valid when executing ns nf to command G70 finishing cycle 3 There are G00 G01 without the word X U in ns block otherwise the system alarms 4 X Z dimensions in finishing path ns nf blocks must be changed monotonously always increasing or reducing for the finishing path 5 In ns nf blocks there are only G commands G01 G02 G03 G04 G96 G97 G98 G99 G40 G41 G42 and the system cannot call subprograms M98 M99 6 G96 G97 G98 G99 G40 G41 G42 are invalid in G72 and valid in G70 7 When G72 is executed the system can stop the automatic run and manual traverse but return to the position before manual traversing when G72 is executed again otherwise the following path will be wrong 8 When the system is executing the feed hold or single bl
428. s S neat anes 183 wl Operat OVelvIQW ennea Bade Seawsbanen E Eee Deb hp ria dub dad DRE Phu b bert 183 Mucius a a a 184 To DISplaY dees 185 TAS SyS leM eaa a a T ae aaa 187 VA System partiel aiite Ea a a A EE ad E 187 1 4 2 System key definitions cc cceccceccceeeceneeceeeceeeseeeeseeeceeeseuessueeseeesueeseeeseeesaaes 188 1 5 Machine ObDerauob Palklel use aad tob ova cmd ED MEE cube oki aei oct ER am OE 190 1 5 1 Division of machine operation panel sesseeseeeseenen 190 1 5 2 State indicator and press key definition on the panel 191 Chapter I Power on Power off and Safety Protection eseesseeeseeseeeeeeereen 196 Contents GSE 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 Chapter 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 Chapter CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual OW GI OWN er E 196 meom 197 Overtravel Protec lofi sien secco de tiq utbs ems eua date doti iban cetus lies nues 197 Overtravel Protection in Memory Travel Limit ccccceccceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaes 197 sisse Alo ries EE T IT LT NUES 199 ZONE SO Wat crete a Ua Cutis uU MU DD PIRE ELM A iLI UD EE 199 2 92 EIerdellU sioDus adore Ett men atta dita hens MM DUM EE mE 199 29 weed Nod sa SNe SEE UR ten OEE MC PN a IN
429. s compensation in G50 G52 G32 G34 G92 G71 G72 G73 G74 G75 G76 and temporarily cancels the compensation mode Before the system temporarily cancels the compensation execution and when the system modal is G02 or G03 No 262 alarms Note 8 In G40 for the inner or outer machining the system moves to the intersection of two paths and executes the tool nose radius compensation cancel here and then moves to the target point after the cancel When there is no intersection and the tool reaches the normal line position of the end point of the last block the system cancels the tool nose radius compensation and then moves the target point after the cancel At the moment the overcut creates the workpiece must not be machined Note 9 In tool nose radius compensation mode the system must not be switched to other levels otherwise No 253 alarms Note 10 In tool nose radius compensation mode the system cancels the tool compensation mode in RESET M30 or M02 mode Note 11 In MDI mode the system cannot execute the tool nose radius compensation creation and its cancel When the system specifies the tool nose radius compensation command it executes the command according to No 5008 Bit4 MCR When the parameter is set to 1 the system alarms U im O e um 9 3 3 e 4 1 7 Application Machine a workpiece in the front tool post coordinate system as Fig 4 14 Tool number T0101 tool nose radius R72 imaginary tool nose number T
430. s cutting amount every time and specified by radius value Cutting amount radius value every time unit and range are shown in the following table a Cutting feedrate K Program execution times execution times M command for clamping C axis Cit is used when C is needed to clamp Metric input mm Inch input inch system ee al rc ECKEN rey EE K In G83 87 high speed deep hole drilling cycle deep hole drilling cycle and standard drilling cycle can be selected by Q value cutting amount every time and RTR NO 5101 2 Q value is specified Q value is not zero and the High speed deep hole drilling cycle parameter RTR NO 510122 0 Q value is specified Q value is not zero and the Deep hole drilling cycle parameter RTR NO 510122 z 1 Standard drilling cycle Q value is not specified or Q value is zero G83 G87 are modal remain valid once are specified until the fixed cycle is cancelled e High speed deep hole drilling cycle CQ value is specified it is not zero and RTR NO 5101 2 0 The system executes the intermittent cutting and chip removal with the specified tool retraction amount before entering the hole bottom which is executed repetitively until the tool infeeds to the bottom and then the tool retraction is performed so the machining is completed Command format and definition are referred to the previous description 108 Chapter If G Commands Execution process High speed
431. s greater than 039 large of long axis in thread length Modify the program threading 364 Appendix 1 Alarm List Chamfering amount too Chamfering amount of latitude axis in G92 was greater 040 large of latitude axis in than the distance between start point and end point threading Modify the program the same direction are selected Modify the program Metric inch conversion Metric inch conversion code G20 G21 was not 042 command error specified in an independent block at the beginning of the program or execute metric inch conversion in subprogram call Modify the program Reference return incomplete Reference return can t be performed normally because the start point is too close to the reference position or 043 the speed is too slow Separate the start point far enough away from the reference position Or specify a sufficiently fast speed for reference point return In auto operation halt state manual reference point return can t be performed point Check the program content G28 found in sequence A command of program restart was specified without return the reference position return operation after power on 046 or emergency stop G28 was found during search Perform the reference position return reference point Perform the reference return first Illegal reference point Address P specifies other values than 2 4 in og ogai reference pont G30 nModify the program G37 arrival signal not
432. s in the contour range the dry run is executed to observe whether its own path of the system has overcutting because the tool retraction direction is the same that of tool infeed in programming state U A O Q y Q 3 3 Q Relevant definitions Finishing path The above mentioned Part 3 of G73 ns nf block defines the finishing path and the starting point of finishing path start point of ns block is the same these of starting point and end point of G73 called A point the end point of the first block of finishing path ns block is called B point the end point of finishing path end point of nf block is called C point The finishing path is A B C It is one group of offset path of finishing one and the roughing path times are the same that of cutting After the coordinates offset A B C of finishing path separately corresponds to An Bn Cn of roughing path n is the cutting times the first cutting path is A4 B4 C4 and the last one is Ag Ba Ca The coordinates offset value of the first cutting compared to finishing path is CAix2 Au Aw Ak diameter programming the coordinates offset value of the last cutting compared to finishing path is Au Aw the coordinates offset value of each cutting compared to the previous one is CAix2 d 1 Ak d 1 Travel of X tool retraction in roughing is the following table radius value with sign symbols Ai is equal to X coordinate offset value radius value of A4 point compar
433. s lt s w gt P 120 D60 J Lb t E Z axis gt gt 30 30 Program G00 X130 Z5 M3 S1 G94 X0 Z0 F200 End face cutting ATE ae cut outer 120 G00 X120 ZO 65 I 5 A O Q y Q 3 3 Q C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE G94 X108 Z 30 R 10 X96 R 20 X84 R 30 X72 R 40 COB A cut 60 X60 R 50 M30 Note 1 These fixed cycle commands are used to ZX level The system alarms when other axis motion in the block of the fixed cycle command is commanded Note 2 After X U Z W R are executed in the canned cycle command their command values are value if X U Z W R are not redefined by executing a new canned cycle commands The command values of X U Z W R are cleared if non modal G command 00 Group except for G04 or G00 G01 G02 G03 G32 is executed Note 3 In MDI mode the previous canned cycle can be executed by pressing the cycle start key after the canned cycle is completed Note 4 One cycle cannot be executed repetitively in G90 G94 when the next block of G90 G94 is M S T command the previous cycle is executed repetitively in G90 G94 when the next block is ended EOB Example N010 G90 X20 0 Z10 0 F400 N011 Cexecute G90 one time again Note 5 Pause or single block is executed in G90 G94 the single block stops after the tool moves end point of current path 2 15 Multiple Cycle Commands GSK988T
434. s the diagnosis window and press to access the servo diagnosis window shown in Fig 3 41 243 II O Oo am 9 2r O 5 II O Oo mm 9 r O 5 GSR C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual MDI reser i MESSAGE gt DIAGNOSTICS gt SERYO DIAGNOSTICS ABSOLUTE X CHD POS 8 pulse abc SERVO ID 1 ACTUAL POS B pulse 7 B pps CONNECTED VES ACTUAL SPD B rpm CONTROL POS SER CURRNT 8 8 RELATIVE NET MODEL GSKLink SER TEMPTR 32 T u 0 0105 y B Bes IN ALAS SON RSTP FSTP RIL FIL SC2 SCI sees E 1 2 MACHI NE GINI ZL X 0 0105 IOT GOUT SADY ZSP COIN RLYOUT HOLD i i i z ALARM zz Es B Bnps BIT Alarm clear input terminal T 4500 5 41 87 Ll z axis s axis Fig 3 41 There provides the following functions in 988T servo diagnosis mode Through the Value of the servo communication feedback real time monitor the system control axis then the operator can learn the servo and the motor working state etc including 1 The follow error analysis of the axis the Value are composed of two parts The command Value received by the servo and the Value feed back by the encoder 2 The axial state diagnosis message The present operating current of the servo the motor real time speed the internal temperature of the servo the servo IO point state 3 The servo alarm
435. s the tool infeed to B point and then the next step is executed Cutting feed from B to C point along the roughing path Rapid traverse to A from C point and the program jumps to the next clock following nf block after G71 cycle is ended I Q g O Q Q 3 3 Q CRS Ad Gua ii Finishing path O Ns Rapid traverse Cutting feed A Starting point End point Program path A B C roughing path e ooooowcoco o wse l Fig 2 36 G71 cycle path Coordinate offset direction with finishing allowance Au Aw define the coordinates offset and its direction of finishing and their sign symbols are as follows Fig 2 35 BC for finishing path B C for roughing path and A is the tool starting point 69 I 5 A O Q y Q 3 3 Q C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Au lt 0 Aw lt 0 Aw0 Aw gt 0 Fig 2 37 Example Fig 2 38 o 100 o 60 o 40 y A Fig 2 38 Program 00004 G00 X200 Z10 M3 S800 Spindle clockwise with 800 rev min G71 U2 R1 F200 Cutting depth each time 4mm tool retraction in diameter 70 Chapter If G Commands G71 P80 Q120 U0 5 WO 2 roughing a e X machining allowance 0 5mm Z 0 2mm N80 G00 X40 1200 Positioning G01 Z 30 F100 a b X60 W 30 bc a b c d e blocks for finishing path W 20 cd N120 X100 W 10
436. same that of the main program compiling format Subprogram Onnuuu subprogram name M99 return from subprogram O 0001 O 1006 G50 X100 Z100 G1 X50 Z50 lt 9 GO X0 ZO U30 W 15 F250 G1 U200 Z200 F200 Y M99 M98 P21006 of GO X100 Z100 M5 SO T0100 M30 Return Main program Subprogram Fig 3 1 subprogram call 140 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation The called subprogram can call other subprograms The subprogram called by the main program is called as the one embedded subprogram and the one called by the one embedded subprogram is called as the two embedded subprogram and so forth One main program can call 12 embedded subprogram including macro program call The following is the four embedded subprogram M ain program Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram I 01001 21002 01003 01004 y M98P1002 M98P1003 M98P 10044 M98P1005 M T ro o eo 8 o eo o 3 3 e Level2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 1 Fig 3 2 Subprogram nesting Note 1 The system alarms when it has not searched the subprogram specified by P Note 2 The system alarms when M98P is input in MDI and the subprogram call cannot be executed Note 3 The system alarms when P98P call itself Note 4 The system alarms when M98 is commanded and the subprogram is called without P command 3 1 6 Subprogram Call M198 Command format M198 Poooonnuunu L2 Called subprogram number in I O C
437. scellaneous function commands following the motion commands are executed Refer to the tool manufacturer s user manual to selection the method The second method is executed for GSK s standard ladder 3 CNC permits there are up to specified 3 commands in one block when NO 3404 Bit M3B is set to 1 some M commands cannot be specified simultaneously because of machinery operation such as the spindle s automatic gear change commands M41 M43 M44 4 No 3010 sets the delay time of the strobe signal MF SF TF signals 5 No 3011 sets the width of M S F function end signals FIN 3 2 Spindle Function S command is used to controlling spindle speed In GSK988T spindle speed control NC outputs 0 10V analog voltage signal to spindle servo device or inverter to realize the gradeless spindle speed 3 2 1 Spindle speed analog voltage control Command format S oo000 Command function the spindle speed is defined and the system outputs 0 10V analog voltage to control spindle servo or converter to realize the stepless timing S command value is not reserved and it is O after the system is switched on Command explanation spindle speed analog voltage control command o0000 means the set spindle speed its value range is referred to Table 1 4 and the leading zero can be omitted When the value exceeds the range set by No 3772 the most spindle speed limit is specified in the program and S value is specified to the most spindle speed
438. se generators can be connected which is set by parameter 7110 The two generators can operate one selected axis meanwhile II O O D Q O 269 II O Oo um 9 ct O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR Chapter VI Auto Operation 6 1 Auto Running The program should be saved in the memorizer in advance when one program is selected and m is pressed on the machine operation panel the program automatically runs and the cycle start indicator is on During cycle NA auto running pauses When ig is pressed once more is pressed on MDI panel auto running ends and resets auto running starts again When 6 1 1 Selecting the running program PROGRAM 1 In auto or edit mode press to access the program windows amp E V 2 In the program windows press l or and the cursor moves to SEHAGH select the program name or press to search the program name to run The selected program line displays against a green backdrop which is shown in Fig 6 1 AUTO RESET PROGRAM gt LOCAL DIRECTORY prog acounts Sizvetbyte 14 887 499 freetbyte 271 096 960 nane comments size byte nodi fied time L OFA ORME 15 20 A 1A A6 10 57 42 04111 0411 4 ealgu5 11 B88 18 4 28 33 LOCAL MD CUR wl SEHACH MEN LOAD OPEN gt Fig 6 1 270 Chapter VI Auto Operation LOAD 3 During resetting press the selected program is uplo
439. signal MP120 MP271 7114 Manual handle feed magnification N MFN Value Range 1 1000 Default Setting 1000 Set the magnification when manual handle feed movement selection signal MP1 1 MP2 1 MOVEMENT VALUE MOVEMENT VALUE MPG ELECTING SIGNAL Ee ee FEEDING Pz 0 Mimumse nguntti 9 1 az Minimum setting unit 10 a Minimum setting unit M 1 Minimum setting unit N manual handle feed APM Value Range 0 99999999 Default Setting 10000 When MPG feeding instance exceeds the rapid movement speed the pulse exceeding the rapid movement is not canceled but saved The parameter sets the allowable value of the memory II O D um 9 oO 5 capacity Note When overrides such as X100 or more than it are selected MPG rapidly turns round MPG feeding is more than the rapid movement speed the speed is limited by the rapid movement speed The pulse exceeding the rapid movement speed is ignored therefore the scale value of MPG doesn t comply with the actual movement value Then If the allowable value is preset in the parameter the pulse exceeding the rapid movement speed is not canceled but saved in CNC temporarily the part exceeding the allowable value is ignored When MPG revolving speed becomes slower or the revolving stops the saved pulse changes into the movement command and outputs Pay attention to it if the allowable value is set too big even MPG is stopped r
440. ss to move the cursor to the one behind the command to copy at the moment a block displayed in invert color is selected again v Deleting a block DELETE After a block is selected is pressed i e the deletion operation is completed v Copying a block CHANGE O Simultaneously press and to copy the selected block v Cutting a block C CHANGE x v Simultaneously press and to cut the selected block 262 Chapter IV Editing and Managing Programs v Pasting a block CHANGE Simultaneously press and i to past the copied or cut block 4 4 Block Comment When a block is commented EOB is pressed with behind the block the content following is the comments Example O0001 G50 X0 Z0 set the coordinate zero G00 X100 Z100 rapid traverse to the position X100 Z100 M30 In the above program the comment is added to the 2nd and the 3rd block among which the content following the 1st semicolon is the comment and the 2nd is the block s end character which is INPUT automatically added after a block is completed to press the key Note The Chinese comment must be edit by a PC because the system does not support Chinese input 4 5 Generating a Block Number In the program the block number can be edited or not edited the program is executed based on the editing sequence of the block except calling In the setting windows CNC setting window when auto generating number switch is off CNC ca
441. ss than tool radius search 5008 6 CNS Modify the program Radius of arc is less than Radius of arc is less than that of tool in inner surface 259 60 2 261 that of tool in inner surface arc cutting which might cause overcut Modify the arc cutting program Arc cmd exists when cancel While NRC is canceled temporarily as a result of a 262 temporarily or create NRC non NRC G code an arc command was specified Modify the program NRC detected error Detect error in tool nose radius compensation This is due to program or operator Modify the program Illegal tool group number Tool group number exceeds maximum allowable value 263 281 CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE O Modify the program 282 Tool group number not Tool group number commanded in machining program found is not set Modify the program or parameter No space for tool entry The number of tools within one group exceeds the 283 maximum value registerable Modify tool number 284 T code not found In tool life registeration a T code was not specified where is should be Modify the program P L command not found P L commands are missing at the head of program in which the tool group is set Modify the program allowable value Modify the program setting value incompleted was turned off Set again 1 2 Parameter Alarms KENN NN NNNM ENNEEMMEMEM 400 Parameter switch is ON Press RESET key to cancel the alarm E
442. stallation 395 gt D 5 Q x G GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual 3 3 Machine Operation Panel MPU02B Appearance dimension of GSK988T O x O v o z o COC OAM ORUN OLI OLR OW OM OU lle eme eee mm I ETE elles fae 081 63 63 _ a e9 fel eze i Fal L F MM 5 Ap gt D 5 Q x Fig 3 3 Machine operation panel MPUO2B appearance dimension 396 Appendix C Installation 3 4 GSK988T H Appearance Dimension Note GSK988T H is the horizontal GSK988T CNC System Fig 3 4 GSK988T H appearance dimension 3 5 Appearance Dimension of GSK988T H Operation panel gs ay os ey CER Oe OT OMI E OAM ORUM OH OL Ob OW GL a a p p In a ReRe s E i i ONG a a ri a a a ri m Prae ruo Pru ruso BALA HAARE oy KA en Tai HONORE Pi C XeESEREI CIR E TEL S iei 5c DARE Jam augdgagaa nn 397 CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSR a 21D Fig 3 5 Horizontal operation panel appearance dimension gt o D 5 Q x 398 od Je9 2 Dumes geq Appendix 4 Operation List Displa Password i i window X SE REL incremental Position DATA clear value o PUT coordinate HN el HEE p numerical value 0 Position DATA INPUT Param eter Program itch switch numerical Chapter Z 3 3 5 incremental coordinate clear Chapter 7 1 5 Tool offset 3
443. stem User Manual State of T 10202 State of T T0303 Coordinates displaying Coordinates displaying Incremental coordinates U 24 560 W 13 452 Absolute coordinates Coordinates X 0 000 displaying Incremental coordinates U 12 000 W 23 000 Absolute coordinates Incremental i X 0 000 coordinates U 0 000 W 0 000 Absolute coordinates X 0 000 I Z 0 000 Z 0 000 Z 0 000 U im O e um 9 3 3 e Change N93 tool and execute its offset by the tool traversing with 12 56mm in X positive direction and 36 452mm in Z positive direction Change Ne2 tool and execute its offset by the tool traversing with 12mm in X positive direction and 23mm in Z negative direction Ne 01 tool without the tool compensation Coordinates Coordinates displaying Incremental coordinates U 0 000 W 0 000 Absolute coordinates X 0 000 Z 0 000 Coordinates displaying Incremental coordinates U 0 000 W 0 000 Absolute coordinates X 12 000 Z 23 000 displaying Incremental coordinates U 0 000 W 0 000 Absolute coordinates X 24 560 Z 13 452 Ne 01 tool Change Ne2 tool Change N93 tool without the tool and execute its and execute its compensation offset by modifying offset by the coordinates modifying the coordinates ur eee ee dl Fig 3 8 Modifying the coordinates mode to e
444. stem mainframe plane is adopted 8 4 LCD its fun Uns LEVEL In board multiple PLC programs PLC ladder diagram edit on line and real time monitor Parts parogram background edit It owns internet interface supports remote supervisory and file transmission It owns USB interface supports disk U file operation syst page 1 2 zl Fig 3 50 Each window is separated as two parts the left column and the right relative content The shortcut keys can be operated as below Content Window up turn to the last window in the content Window down turn to the next window in the content Directory Upward direction key Check the last directory Downward direction key Check the next directory Right direction key Return to the previous directory Left direction key Open the next directory Alter window up key turn to the last window in the directory Alter window down key turn to the next window in the directory Besides there are the search functions in PROGRAMMING HELP ALARM HELP PARAMETER HELP window the rapid search can be executed correspondingly by inputting the code the SERACH miscellaneous function the alarm number the parameter number Shown in Fig 3 51 press in PROGRAMMING HELP window input GO1 in the dialog box and then press ENTER to directly find G01 code help shown in Fig 3 52 252 Chapter III Windows AUTO RM LINEAR CUTTING E PROGRAM NG EOY ERY El EH S
445. stri EE c feedrate override OV4 X29 0 Connected to terminal strip ARCE PANA Unm ever Start C ted t f X29 1 Connected to terminal strip SUERTE hold X29 2 Connected to terminal strip dd y e button program protection lock Connected to panel knob Connected to terminal strip normally open terminal spindle rotation allowed X28 1 Connected to terminal strip X28 2 Connected to terminal strip Connected to panel knob Connected to terminal strip normally closed terminal feed allowed X29 5 X29 7 Connected to terminal strip xipueddy Note The PLC address X18 X24 are the fixed addresses input by keys on the panel and their functions are fixed Addresses X25 X29 are lead to the terminal strip on the backboard of the panel the exact functions are defined by the PLC run in the system 2 2 2 Address Y Address defined Gonecoondinaikeuenthoicanel by PLC 2 nd i Y18 0 Block skip indicator Y18 1 Auxiliary lock key indicator OF 386 Appendix 2 Standard Ladder Function Allocation vus Swesskmkxy L wu Meheskie mie yes ovwweneir vs G swieh ey L Wer Gi xis ares fey mao OOO ves earan SW mike Y191 The 4 axis direction 4 key indicator O v8 Geeswi ier Wes resmWiymkay va Poorer restart ey mao vs optenastop key mw vus smdeweWederemsieymdr vor Sorde verd
446. t Greater or equal to SIN SI Sine Functional function is used to count expression value value ROUN Ro Founding ot FIX FI FK Fi Down integer FP FU Up integer LN nature logarithm EXP EX Exponent function Converse from BCD to BIN Converse from BIN to BCD 123456 With to compose the value of word the leading 0 can 0 Word is 0 and is different with Null value Number count and number expression 21 U im O e um 9 3 e e VI VIV 3 eToy Pe G GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Skip command selectively skip the commands following the character Floating point number with number Variable assignment Prior operation of expression and conditional judgement prompt Variable End of program in the block following annotation Annotation start in the block Example X20 W 10 not execute X20 Annotation end in the block End of program Note 1 The 2 digit following the decimal point of F value is value and the more following the two digit is ignored Note 2 The expression can follow the word the value counted by the expression is taken as the value of the word and the expression should have and there must not be the space between the word and the expression For example X 1 110 Z 1 SIN 120 1 When the address values in the above table X Y Z C A B C U V W H I J K Rare taken as word address their val
447. t GOO G01 D After the system cancels the tool radius compensation the imaginary tool nose point moves to the positioning point and when the tool is in the cycle inner the tool diameter exceeds the length of the rapid traverse of the first block the overcut creates and No 255 alarms el Fig 4 62 Offset direction of tool nose radius compensation in G90 U im O e um 9 3 3 e Fig 4 63 Offset direction of tool nose radius compensation in G94 173 GSE CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual I G50 program block U im O e um 9 3 3 e Fig 4 64 G90 G94 radius compensation mode e G70 command When G71 G73 is executed the system temporarily cancels C tool compensation When G70 is specified again the system automatically recovers the compensation mode Because the system executes G71 G73 it does not execute the radius compensation there must be the finishing allowance in programming to avoid the overcut in roughing In G70 the compensation mode is not cancelled after the cycle end the system continuously executes the compensation in the fixed point which causes the undercut of the finishing cycle in the last block so the last should exceeds one tool radius value of the workpiece in programming Cycle the last point should exceeds one tool radius value of the workpiece in G70 r Tool nose center path D 4 G70
448. t again and is done again after it is deleted 3 4 2 CNC setting window ot ol EM On the setting window press INFO to access CNC system setting window and it mainly includes the system and the coordinate setting system time and IP 3 4 2 1 System setting window o1 al EM On CNC setting window press iid to access the system setting window which sets the program and the parameter switches auto sequence number and input units etc which is shown as 233 II O Oo 9 O 5 II O Oo mm 9 r O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR below AUTO RESET SETTING gt CNC SYSTEM SETTING PME TT Y B B PROG SWITCH E ce 7 A PAA PARA SWITCH CON FF EE U B Bn AUTO SEQNCE ON ie OFF T A PAA INPUT UNIT METRIC INCH MACHINE Y B Ban 7 B AAA 15814 Too TR MACRO SW STEM COORD TIME ETHENET SETTING ERSAN Fig 3 40 On the window it mainly sets on or off of the program and the parameter switches etc U On the window press Or to switch among the program switch the parameter switch auto sequence number and the input units etc In MDI when the operation authority is above gt INPUT level 3 press l or to select on off and metric inch system In the right column it also displays the current absolute position coordinate and the relative coordinate position value and the tool number of current running program Note 1 Only when
449. t buffer is valid Fig 4 70 changing compensation value U im O e um 9 3 3 e b Positive negative compensation value and tool nose center path When the compensation value is negative G41 and G42 exchange in programming When the tool center moves along the workpiece outer it moves along the inner and vice versa Note The compensation value is equal to the offset value adding the wear value When the compensation sign is changed the tool nose offset direction changes but the imaginary tool nose direction does not change So do not change the compensation sign optionally End point of programmed arc is not in the arc In the radius compensation process when the system uses IJK to specify the circle center and the end point of the arc is not in the arc the system positions again the circle center position specified by IJK and confirms the circle center position according to the radius counted by IJK to execute the radius compensation When the counted radius is too small not to reach the end point of the arc No 254 alarm creates Note At the moment there is a difference between the counted arc and the specified in programming and the function is sued to regulate the error of the radius out of tolerance in some range in programming Programmed path l nw r Tool nose center path L Fig 4 71 End point of programmed arc be not in the arc e Continuous 3 or more than 3 blocks non movement comm
450. t force to stop G84 G88 I Note 6 N0 5209 0 0 i e drilling axis is selected by the levels in rigid tapping mode When G17 G18 G19 is separately specified in G84 the drilling axes separately correspond to the basic axis X Z Y when G17 G18 G19 is separately specified in G88 the drilling axes separately correspond to the basic axis Y X Z Program example machining thread M10x2 is shown below aa AZ ammmmm Su D O Q Q 3 3 Q E Fig 2 78 G98 feed per minute GO XO Z200 X and Z position to the starting point M3 S800 the spindle rotates CW at the speed 800 r min the spindle starts rotation after the block is executed G84 Z160 P1000 F1600 starting point is XO Z200 which is same as the hole position hole bottom position is XO Z160 and the pause time is 1s the thread lead is 2 according to F and S value G84 is the common tapping cycle when it is not specified in advance the spindle stops rotation after the block execution ends G80 Fixed cycle is cancelled M30 End of program 2 21 Automatic Chamfering Function Command function Automatic chamfering function is defined to automatically insert chamfering block or coring R block between machining blocks Blocks where the automatic chamfering can be inserted Between linear interpolation and linear interpolation Between linear interpolation and arc interpolation 123 I U A O Q y Q 3 3
451. t in the corresponding offset number 16 The tool cuts along face B1 17 When X axis remains still the tool retracts along Z axis and the spindle stops revolving 18 Measure distance a MEASURE SS 19 Press to access the measuring window input and the measuring value 0K and then press and X axis tool offset value or its a in wearing value is set in the corresponding offset number 20 About the method of setting other tools repeat the steps of 10 19 Measuring method is to set the differential value between the tool reference position such as the tool nose position and the actual tool nose position during processing as the tool offset value For example when the coordinate value of face B is 50 0 the actual measured value is a 49 0 then the tool offset value in X direction is 1 0 Note After the machine zero return toolsetting is executed G50 cannot be used to set a workpiece coordinate system 289 II O Oo um 9 O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR 7 4 Position Record The position record key on the machine panel is valid when the parameter PRC No 5005 2 is set to 1 Position record toolsetting operation mode 1 Cut the outer or end face in Manual mode 1 2 When maosa on the operation panel the workpiece coordinate values of X X axis of three basic axes and Z Z axis of basic axes have been recorded to CNC 3 Then the tool r
452. t the beginning When the block skip switch is on its indicator is on When the machine is locked its indicator is on and each axis output is invalid Chapter Overview valid Mode function during MPG mode single step mode manual mode and DNC mode Auto mode MDI mode edit mode reference position return mode MPG mode single step mode manual mode and DNC mode MPG mode single step mode and manual mode Auto mode MDI mode manual mode and DNC mode Reference position return mode single step mode and manual mode MPG mode Auto mode MDI mode reference position return mode MPG mode single step mode manual mode and DNC mode Auto mode MDI mode and DNC mode Auto mode MDI mode and DNC mode Auto mode MDI mode edit mode reference position return mode MPG mode single step 193 II O m 9 O 5 GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Mode during valid function mode manual mode and DNC mode When miscellaneous function is locked its indicator is on and the Auto mode MDI mode function of M S and T output is and DNC mode invalid Function Miscellaneous function lock switch When dry run is valid its indicator is on and the machine Auto mode MDI mode program MDI command block and DNC mode begins dry running When optional stop is valid its Optional stop indicator is on when there is Auto mode MDI mode ke
453. te illl setting x Select Select workpiece coordinate system2 coordinate system 2 TE Select workpiece coordinate system 3 coordinate system 3 Select workpiece coordinate system 3 Modal Select Select workpiece coordinate system 4 coordinate system 4 Non modal ao I Select workpiece coordinate system 5 coordinate system 5 e Select workpiece coordinate system 6 coordinate system 6 pr LL stop mode Modal Cutingmode mode E i e Non modal macro program call M I m x Cancel macro program mode call macro Cancel macro program mode call mode call Finishngcyde cycle Non modal Axial Sse ai cycle EE Radial e aeeoo cycle Co O O putung Closed cutting cycle 3 Chapter If G Commands Radial cutting multi cycle Multi thread cutting cycle End rigid common tapping cycle 01 Thread cutting cycle Modal Radial cutting cycle f 02 Constant surface speed contro Modal Constant speed control Feed i d Feed per revolution Note 1 G commands in Group 01 05 09 separately set their state in No 3402 Bit0 G01 Bit4 FPM Bit7 G23 when the system is power on the G commands in Group 06 in No 0000 Bit2 INI when the system is turned on the modal G command in other groups are at the state designated by Note 2 When the system resets No 3402 Bit6 CLR is set to 0 the modal of the G command remains unchanged when it is set
454. te the absolute value command the coordinate system is set by G50 the absolute coordinate value displayed by G50 is the one that the coordinate value set by G50 adding the tool compensation value which is not executed The difference between the relative coordinates and the machine coordinates is 80 10 when the system executes N4 the difference value is caused because X100Z10 setting G50X20Z20 to create the workpiece coordinate system offset i e the user does not think over the tool offset influence when G50 is set in NC program ES A O Q Q 3 3 Q Program Absolute Relative Machine coordinate coordinate coordinate N1 T0100 G00 X100 Z10 100 Z 10 100 Z 10 100 Z 10 N2 T0101 No 01 tool Z 13 X 100 Z X 100 Z compensation value X12 Z23 N3 G50 X20 Z20 ae 20 Z 20 100 Z 10 N4 NAGO0X10Z10 Z X 102 2 28 Zi 29 2 13 3 Workpiece coordinate system selection command G54 G59 Command function One of G54 G59 is specified one of workpice coordinate system 1 6 can be selected After the workpiece coordinate system is specified the specified point in the block is in the specified workpiece till a new workpiece coordinate system is created as Fig 2 21 The tool positions X60 0 Z20 0 in the workpiece coordinate system 3 G56 G00 X60 0 Z20 0 X Workpiece coordinate system 3 G56 20 0 Fig 2 22 Command format G54 workpiece coordinate system 1 55 GSE CGS CNC GSK988T Turn
455. ter Type Word axis This is one parameter to set the origin location of the work piece coordinate system G54 G59 The parameter is the valid common offset amount for all work piece coordinate system Linear axis Metric input 0 001 0 0001 Linear axis Inch input 0 0001 0 00001 Rotary axis 0 001 0 0001 Workpiece zero point offset value in G54 workpiece coordinate system WO1 Workpiece zero point offset value in G55 workpiece coordinate system WO2 1223 Workpiece zero point offset value in G56 workpiece coordinate system WO3 Workpiece zero point offset value in G57 workpiece coordinate system WO4 Workpiece zero point offset value in G58 workpiece coordinate system WO5 Workpiece zero point offset value in G59 workpiece coordinate system WO6 AGEL Modification authority Equipment management authority Parameter Type Word axis 316 Chapter XI Parameters Value Range 99 999 999 99 999 999 This is one parameter to set the origin location of the work piece coordinate system G54 G59 The parameter is the valid common offset amount for all the work piece coordinate system Linear axis Metric input 0 001 0 0001 mm h Linear axis Inch input 0 0001 0 00001 inc Coordinate value of 1st Reference Position on each axis in the machine coordinate system RF1 Coordinate value of 2nd Reference Position on each axis in the machine coordinate system RF2 Coordinate value of 3rd Reference Position on each
456. terface module failure Absolute pulse encoder alarm overtime error 1 4 Servo Alarms No Message Contents digital servo unit detect fault Check the servo or modify para No 1816 The coordinate system became inacurrate when the control command to the servo is interrupted Please return to the reference position 604 Servo alarm Power supply to the servo is turned off 1 5 Overtravel Alarms Ne Mes Comis ae Exceeded the sides stored stroke limit 1 Modify para 700 Stored stroke limit1 A Exceeded the sides stored stroke limit 1 Modify 701 ke limit1 eee seria No 1321 or No 1327 ree ict zu CR ipei the sides stored stroke limit 2 Modify para 704 ioi coke Wiese Exceeded the sides stored stroke limit 3 Modify para No 1324 705 stored stroke limits ii the sides stored stroke limit 3 modify 373 HP epe the sides stored stroke limit 2 modify CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE Exceeds side overtravel limit Press overtravel 706 Over travel cancel and manual exit overtravel area or modify para No 3004 Exceeds side overtravel limit Press overtravel 707 Overtravel cancel and manual exit overtravel area or modify para No 3004 1 6 Spindle Alarms Wo Wem tee Spindle 1 alarm Spindle 1 alarms Spindle 2 alarm Spindle 2 alarms 1 7 System Alarms No Message Contents 900 Memory alarm Storage allocation error
457. terpolation Modify the program Address P not defined Address P program number was not commanded in er rete block including M98 G65 or G66 Modify the program program Program number not found The program number was t found specified by P in em rm RH M ew Cos or 098 Nosy epg o Subprogram call error A program cant call main program or itself in M98 G65 EXE vr 995 mn GONG operon opereton amt speed Moye progam 085 T run in MDI amp DNC operation operation isn t supported Modify the program Axis specified error in In G96 modal the specified axis by parameter is 366 gt D 5 Q x Appendix 1 Alarm List Message Contents Over speed of spindle in In threading the spindle speed specified is too fast for threading the threading axis Modify the program 124 Canned cycle cmd in non ZX Canned cycle can t command in non ZX level Modify level the program Specify other axes not Specify other axes not included in ZX level Modify the included in ZX level program NO N K The R value radius value is Absolute values of R is greater than that of U in greater than the U value G90 G92 while their signs are inconsistent Modify the absolute value in G90 program Zi NO OO G92 commands Absolute values of R is Absolute values of R is greater than that of W in G94 Illegal level select in multiple Multiple repetitive cycle was commanded in non ZX Specify other axes not Speci
458. th parameter No 1820 command multiplier CMR and the minimum movement units about the relations between the setting units and the minimum movement units refer to parameter No 1820 introduction 1852 Backlash compensation value used for rapid traverse BCVR for each axis Parameter Type Word axis Value Range 9999 9999 Detection units Default Setting 0 Set the backlash compensation value during each axis rapid movement It is valid when parameter NO 1800 4 RBK is set as 1 It can change the backlash compensation value based on the cutting feedrate rapid movement speed to process in higher precision Note 1 Manually continuous feeding JOG is taken as cutting feed 2 After connecting power supply and before the reference position return completes at the first time it doesn t compensate the backlash in cutting feed rapid movement No matter the compensation value is the cutting feed or the rapid movement it should be compensated based on parameter NO 1851 3 When parameter NO 1800 4 RBK is set as 1 parameter NO 1851 is the backlash compensation value of cutting feed parameter NO 1852 is the backlash compensation value of rapid movement When parameter NO 1800 4 RBK is set as 0 parameter NO 1851 is the backlash compensation value of cutting feed rapid movement II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1853 CPF5 CPF4 CPF3 CPF2 CPF1 Default Setting 0000 0111 CPF1 CP
459. than zero in G71 or G72 Increment cutting amount Increment cutting amount out of range in G73 Modify The number of division R d The rounding number of division is less than 1 or more Z axis increment not Z axis increment was not specified in G74 Modify the Number followed address Q Number followed address Q is out of range in G74 X axis increment not X axis increment was not specified in G75 Modify the Number followed address P Number followed address P is out of range in G74 R e is less than zero in G74 Return amount R e is less than zero in G74 or G75 R Ad is less than zero in Relief amount of tool at cutting bottom R Ad is less G74 or G75 than zero Modify the program 14 14 1 1 8 9 50 51 5 1 2 153 5 15 4 6 15 15 5 7 15 IH Appendix 1 Alarm List Message Contents Depth of cut in G74 or G75 Depth aul in X or Z direction in G74 or G75 is out of read gil G7 Repetitive count in finishing Repetitive count in finishing is less than 1 or greater than is less than 1 or greater than 99 in G76 nModify the program 99 in G76 Chamfering amount out of Angle of tool tip out of range in G76 Modify the range in G76 program Q Admin out of range in Minimum cutting depth Q Admin out of range in G76 G76 Modify the program In G76 Q Admin exceeds Minimum cutting depth Q Admin out of range in G76 the permitted range Modify the program Finishing
460. the thread finishing cut in point B is the X Z displacement formula for B X absolute coordinate of thread end point U Difference value of X absolute coordinate between thread end point and starting point Z absolute coordinate of thread end point W Different value of Z absolute coordinate between thread end point and starting point P m Times of thread finishing 00 99 unit times with 2 digit digital It is valid after m command value is executed and the value of system parameter No 5142 is rewritten to m The value of system parameter No 5142 is regarded as finishing times when m is not input The thread is finished according to the programmed thread path the first finishing cutting travel is d and the following one is O 98 LLL 7 Chapter ll G Commands Il G Commands No 5130 is valid for G92 G76 Angle at taper of neighboring two tooth is 0 99 unit degree with 2 digit digital It is valid after a command value is executed and the value of system parameter No 5143 is rewritten to a The value of system parameter Ne058 is regarded as angle of thread tooth The actual angle of thread in defined by tool ones and so a should be the same as the tool angle AQ Admin Minimum cutting travel of thread roughing radius value without sign symbols When vn vll 1l xAd lt Admin Admin is regarded as the cutting travel of current dici i e depth of current thread cutting is vil lxAde Admin Admin is app
461. the local coordinate system is created its coordinates are used to the axis motion command Using G52 to command the zero of the new local coordinate system workpiece coordinate system can change the position of the local coordinate system Making the zero of the local coordinate system coincide with the one of the workpiece coordinate system can cancel the local coordinate system and returns to the workpiece coordinate system i e command G52 X0 ZO Note 1 The local coordinate system setting does not change the workpiece coordinate system and the machine coordinate system Note 2 Commanding G52 can temporarily cancel the offset in the tool nose radius compensation Note 3 In local coordinate system when G50 sets the workpiece coordinate system and the system has not specified the coordinate values to all axes in the local coordinate system the axis which is not specified in G50 in the local coordinate system still keeps the local coordinate system corresponding to G50 axis is cancelled For example G50 X100 at the moment Z coordinate value is not change the local coordinate system corresponding to X is cancelled Note 4 When the system selects the workpice coordinate system command G54 G59 to change the workpiece coordinate system in the local coordinate system the local coordinate system also moves to the new workpiece coordinate system Note 5 Whether the local coordinate system in reset is cancelled is determined by No 120
462. the machine in limited time Level 3 User equipment management with the authority of rewriting the parameter editing the part program and the tool compensation Value Level 4 Machine operation level with the authority of editing the tool compensation Value and selecting the part program namely operate the tool setting select the part program of auto running but the parameter can t be rewritten and the part programs can t be edited Level 5 Operation limit level without operation password the operation password is canceled the parameter can t be rewritten the tool compensation Value can t be edited and the part program neither be selected nor edited namely the tool setting is invalid only run the current part program manual MPG zero return MDI running and auto running can be operated the part files of the system can back up rather than download Note Upload means uploading the files of CNC to PC and download means downloading the files to CNC 219 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR The list of operation function relative with the operation authority levels Operation authority level Operation function Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level Development Machine Equipment Machine limited manufacturer management operation xo a software upgrade mmm m Set the limited time of the OK rae a e n PLC program editing OK downloading and uploading Input the screw pitc
463. the polar coordinate level The axis address of the turn axis is taken as the one of the 2 axis imaginary axis in the level When the system executes G12 1 the tool position of the polar coordinate interpolation starts 44 Chapter If G Commands from the angle 0 So the spindle must be positioned before the polar coordinate interpolation is executed Note 12 The current position displays the actual coordinates in the polar coordinate interpolation However the remainder distance is displayed according to the coordinates in the polar coordinate interpolation level rectangular coordinate level Note 13 Must not switch the spindle gear in the polar coordinate interpolation The system must be in the spindle speed control mode when the gear shifting is needed 2 8 Metric Inch Switch G20 G21 Command function realize the metric inch switch of the system input mode Command format G20 inch input G21 metric input Command explanation G20 G21 is modal in Group 6 and can be set to the initial mode by No 0000 BIT2 INI G20 G21 The units of the following value will change after they switch between the metric and the inch F feedrate position command zero offset of workpiece tool compensation value scale unit of MPG movement in incremental feed D O Q Q 3 3 Q Note 1 The initial mode of G20 G21 is set by NO 0000 BIT2 INI when the system is turned on Note 2
464. the program The variable value is assigned by the program command or is set directly by the keyboard One program can use many variables which can be distinguished by their variable number e Variable expression Use variable number to express Format 1 i 200 202 203 Example 205 209 225 Besides the expression can be used to specify the variable number At the moment the expression must be in the brackets Example 20 30 4 e Variable reference 1 Use variable to permute the number following address Format lt address gt i or lt address gt i means to take the variable value or the g O Q Q 3 3 Q negative value of value of the variable as the address value Example F 203 203 15 it is the same those of F15 functions Z 210 210 250 it is the same those of Z 250 functions G 230 230 3 it is the same those of G3 functions When the variable value is used in program the decimal point can be omitted Example 111 123 the actual value of 1 is 123 000 When the variable value followed the axis command address has the decimal point the data less than the least setting unit executes the rounding For example 1 1 23456 the axis least setting unit is 0 001 the tool to execute GOO X 1 positions to 1 235 position 2 Use variable to permute variable number Format variable number Example 5 uses 30 to execute the permutation in 5 is written
465. the program switch or the parameter switch is on can the program and the parameter be edited rewritten or set Note 2 Only when the operation authority level is more than 3 can CNC system be set Note 3 Only when the program protection switch is on which is installed on the machine panel can the program and the parameter switches on off be set 3 4 2 2 Coordinate setting window SETTING GOORD Press to access the setting window on CNC setting window press to access the coordinate setting window which is shown as below 234 Chapter III Windows AUTO reser SETTING gt CNC gt COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING ABSOLUTE X 8 aaa Y 7 G54 9 808 p gpp RELATIVE G55 A 028 A oaa Illy 8 aaa G56 A 028 A aaa G57 B Bing aaan y B Bn BT EL p 000 Il ee G59 0 008 0 000 y Z 8 aaa 18 35 45 MEASURE INPUT L wd ddl Fig 3 41 In coordinate setting window it displays the origin offset value for each axis and the offset value of each coordinate axis in each coordinate system Set the origin offset value relative to each axis and the offset value of each coordinate axis in each coordinate system y In coordinate setting window press or to select the coordinate system to be set and press or to select the coordinate axis to set the offset there are three kinds of modifying offset value direct input measure input and in
466. the same that of cutting end point Starting position of radial tool infeed for each radial cutting cycle defined by B n 1 2 3 X coordinates of B is the same that of cutting end point Z coordinates of B is the same that of An and the end point B of the last radial tool infeed is the same that of cutting end point End position of axial tool infeed travel of tool infeed is Ad after each axial cutting cycle reaches the end point of axial tool infeed defining with Cn n 1 2 3 X coordinate of C is the same that of cutting end point and the different value of Z coordinate between C and A is Ad End position of radial tool retraction from the end point of axial tool retraction defined by D n 1 2 3 X coordinate of D is the same that of starting point Z coordinates of D is the same that of C the different value of Z coordinate between it and A is Ad It is defined by X U ZWD and is defined with B of the last radial tool infeed It is the travel of tool retraction after each radial X tool infeed without sign symbols and its value range is referred to the following table The command value is reserved and the value of system parameter NO 5139 is rewritten after R e is executed The value of NO 5139 is regarded as the travel of tool retraction when R Ce is not input X absolute coordinate value of cutting end point B unit mm Different value of X absolute coordinate between cutting end point B and sta
467. the setting of AZR If G28 is executed before reference point setting P S alarm is issued 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IRR le Way of Validating After power on Default Setting 0000 0000 Least input increment amp command increment 1 ISC Least input unit least command increment Abbreviation II O m 9 Oo 5 L3 0 001mm 0 001deg or 0 0001inch 0 0001mm 0 0001deg or 0 00001 inch 6 RPR Least input increment of rotary axes tenfold of least command increment 0 Not perform 1 Perform 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ae Paa Parameter Type Bit axis Default Setting 0000 1000 0 ZRNx Specify move command except for G28 without reference positon set causes MEM DNC or MDI 0 Alarm 1 Not alarm 1 DLZx Function for setting the reference positon without dogs 312 Chapter XI Parameters 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note Parameter DLZ No 1002 1 is valid when it is 0 When DLZ No 1002 1 is 1 there is no connection with the parameter and setting the reference position free of the link stopper is valid for all axes 43 HJZx Manual reference position return with reference position already set was performed 0 With deceleration dogs 1 Using rapid traverse without deceleration dogs 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 a ba Ros ROT Way of Validating After power on Parameter Type Bit axis Default Setting 0000 0000 0 1 ROTx ROSx Set linear
468. the tool paths of tool nose center programming and imaginary tool nose programming when tool nose radius is executed or not U im O e um 9 3 3 e Starting point Starting point Programming with tool nose center Programming with imaginary tool nose Fig 4 3 Fig 4 4 Tool nose path is the same as programming Finishing when using tool nose radius path without using tool nose radius compensation compensation Tool nose Tool nose center path center path Start compensation Programmed path Programmed path Tool nose path is the same as programming Finishing when using tool path without using tool nose radius compensation nose radius compensation Fig 4 5 Tool path in tool nose center programming Imaginary tool nose path Imaginary tool nose path Start compensation Programmed path Programmed path Fig 4 6 Tool path in imaginary tool nose programming The tool is supposed to one point in programming but the actual cutting blade is not one ideal point owing to machining technology Because the cutting blade is not one point but one circular machining error is caused which can be deleted by tool nose circular radius compensation In actual machining suppose that there are different position relationship between tool nose point and tool nose circular center point and so it must create correct its direction of imaginary tool nose From tool nose center to imaginary tool nose s
469. ties that may involve with so the contents that are not specially stated in this manual shall be regarded as unallowable WARNING Please read this manual and a manual from machine tool builder carefully before installation programming and operation and strictly observe the requirements Otherwise products and machine may be damaged workpiece be scrapped or the user be injured CAUTION Functions technical indexes such as precision and speed described in this user manual are only for this system Actual function configuration and technical performance of a machine tool with this CNC system are determined by machine tool builder s design so functions and technical indexes are subject to the user manual from machine tool builder Though this system adopts standard operation panel the functions of the keys on the panel are defined by PLC program ladder diagram It should be noted that the keys functions described herein are for the standard PLC program ladder diagram For functions and effects of keys on control panel please refer to the user manual from machine tool builder Contents Safety Responsibility Manufacturer s Responsibility Be responsible for the danger which should be eliminated and or controlled on design and configuration of the provided CNC systems and accessories Be responsible for the safety of the provided CNC systems and accessories Be responsible for the provided in
470. tion 1323 on each axis NC2 Modification authority Equipment management authority Parameter Type Word axis Default Setting NO 1322 is 99 999 999 NO 1323 is 99 999 999 Value Range 99 999 999 99 999 999 Respectively set the coordinate values of boundaries in positive and negative directions in the mechanical coordinate system in each axis stroke detection 2 in memory type The outside or inside of boundary is the restricted area which is set by parameter OUT No 1300 0 Note The axis specified by diameter must be set by the diameter value 319 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the positive direction 1324 on each axis PC3 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the negative direction 1325 on each axis NC3 Modification authority Equipment management authority Parameter Type Word axis Default Setting No 1324 is 99 999 999 No 1325 is 99 999 999 Value Range 99 999 999 99 999 999 Respectively set the coordinate values of boundaries in positive and negative directions in the mechanical coordinate system in each axis stroke detection 3 in memory type Set inside of the boundary as the restricted area to tools Note The axis specified by the diameter must be set by the diameter value II Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the positive 1326 direction on each axis PC12 Coordinate value I of s
471. tion time of system in auto mode without time of stop and feeding pause is the accumulative cutting time G function codes The mode values of G codes in each group MODAL Switch between the mode and comprehensive message through pressing and 4G INF Program display area display the program which is being executed The block with green is a program which is being executed 3 1 2 Relative coordinate display REL In position window press to switch into the relative coordinate window Then on the left top corner display the relative coordinate value U and W coordinate value is the relative coordinate value of the current position U and W coordinates can be cleared during stop and resetting state The window is shown as below AUTO AUN LINEAR CUTTING RELATIVE PRG DATA II O Oo am 9 O 5 U 103 42183 1 9 iu mim min FAR mmy minm c A 2008 rev min W 41 450u PAG NAME 000A NC INFO tj FED OVRI HR F Kd HAP OVAL 100 PART CNT T SPI OVAL SHE AUN TIME HB H4 5r JOG F IHE CUT TIME BB HH He eb ld Fig 3 4 207 II O Oo mm 9 et O 5 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSR 3 1 3 Machine coordinate display HAC On the position window press to switch into the machine coordinate window The machine coordinate system is set through the reference position The window
472. to Z 730 3 Refer the undefined variable When the variable is not defined it becomes the Null variable When the variable 0 is Null it is only read instead of being written When the system refers to the undefined variable it ignores the variable and the word Example when the variable 10 value is 0 the variable 1 value is Null and the system executes G00 X 10 Y 11 the execution result is GOO X0 Y 11 to be ignored Beside using the Null to assign the variable value is 0 in other conditions When 2 lt Null H 1 2 1 lt Null gt 1 2 3 1 0 1 2 2 11 0 Null in conditional expression is different with O 126 Chapter If G Commands When 2 lt Null gt 2 EQ 0 2 NE O the condition is tenable When 2 0 2 EQ 0 2 NE O the condition is not tenable 2 Variable Type The variable is divided into the different variable types according to the variable number their use and prosperity are different as follows Variable range Variable ype Fumdon Null variable The variable is null and is not assigned The local variable is used to store data in the macro program such as result When the system is turned off the local variable is initialized to be null When the macro program is called the argument assigns to the local Local variable A O e 9 3 3 e 100 199 The share variable has the same meaning in the different macro program When the system is turned off th
473. tool compensation used ith signal XAE2 II Value setting ETTIN ye VALUE UNIT VALID RANGE IS B IS C DEFAULT O Oo 9 O 5 Met O 1inch min These two parameters set the feedrate during automatic tool compensation Note When the setting value of parameter No 6242 is valid the setting value of parameter No 6241 is valid too y value on X axis during automatic tool compensation ATOR1 y value on Z axis during automatic tool compensation ATOR2 Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 1000 Value range 1 99999999 These two parameters set the y value in tool compensation function in sequence Note The value is set in radius no matter diameter or radius programming is specified e value on X axis during automatic tool compensation ATOE1 e value on Z axis during automatic tool compensation ATOE2 Modification authority Equipment management authority Value range 1 99999999 354 Chapter XI Parameters MEN ee ee NEN NENNEN Linear axis inch 0 0001 0 00001 inch input Roary axis 0001 00001 deg These two parameters set the value in tool compensation function in sequence Note The value is set in radius no matter diameter or radius programming is specified 11 20 Parameters Related to Graphic Display 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 o po a J Modification authority Equipment management authority
474. tored stroke check 1 in the negative 1327 direction on each axis NC12 Modification authority Equipment management authority O m 9 O 5 Parameter Type Word axis Default Setting NO 1326 is 99 999 999 NO 1327 is 99 999 999 Value Range 99 999 999 99 999 999 Respectively set the positive and negative boundary coordinate values for each axis stroke detection 1 in memory type in the machine coordinate system Set outside of the boundary as the restricted area When parameter LMS No 1300 2 is 1 and the stroke limit switching signal EXLM G7 6 in memory type is 1 the restricted area is valid but it is invalid if it is set by No 1320 and 1321 Note 1 The axes programmed by the diameter must be set by the diameter value 2 The parameter is invalid when parameter LMS No 1320 2 is 0 or the stroke limit switching signal EXLM G7 6 in the memory type is 0 Then the restricted area set by parameter No 1320 or No 1321 is valid 11 6 Parameters Related to Feedrate 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ROR TOR RFO RPD Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 0 RPD Manual rapid traverse during the period from power on to completion of 320 Chapter XI Parameters reference position return 4 5 6 Modification authority Equipment management authority Default Setting 0000 0000 2 6 5 4 3
475. traverse 0 4000ms Time constant for acceleration deceleration afer interpolation in cutting feed for each axis ATC Modification authority Equipment management authority Parameter Type Word axis Value Range 0 4000 ms Default Setting 100 324 Chapter XI Parameters Set the acceleration and deceleration for each axis cutting and feeding in exponential type or the time constant of acceleration and deceleration in linear type after interpolation And the detailed type is set by parameter CTLx NO 1610 0 If CTLx sets the acceleration and deceleration in linear type after linear interpolation the maximum time constant of acceleration and deceleration is limited in 512ms and even it exceeds 512ms it is still dealt as 512ms Except the special usage of the parameter all axes must be set as the same time constant If the different time constants are set the correct linear or circular can t be shaped 1623 FL rate of exponent acceleration deceleration in cutting feed FLC for each axis Modification authority Equipment management authority Parameter Type Word axis Value Range VALUE VALID RANGE DEFAULT sient UNITS IS B IS C SETTING Vere macine 0 6 15000 Inch machine 0 1 inch min Rotary axis 1 deg min 30 Set the low limit speed FL speed of acceleration and deceleration in exponential type for each axis cutting and feeding Time constant for acceleration deceleration after
476. traverses to the tool setting point which is shown as figure B b 8 On the setting window press m s to access the tool offset management window press SERACH E EJ to select the tool offset number or press Or to select the window and press if or V to select the tool offset or wearing Value to be rewritten C INPUT G INPUT 9 Press to access C input window input axial name OK press and the tool offset value or the wearing value is set in the corresponding offset number 10 Repeat the steps of 7 9 other tools can be set 7 3 Trial Cut Toolsetting After the coordinate system is set the trial cutting tool is to set the tool offset value through measuring input method The steps are as below set the work piece coordinate system based on the work piece face 287 II O Oo D um 9 oO 5 CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual Face B HHA ma l Fig 7 8 1 Ensure each axis on the machine has executed the machine zero return 2 Any tool is selected and the tool offset number is 0O such as T0100 T0300 3 The tool cuts along face A 4 When Z axis remains still the tool retracts along X axis and the spindle stops revolving b 1 5 On the setting window press 9 to access the tool offset management window press SERACH n to select the tool offset number or press Or to select the window and o 2 Q y mu o press Or to select the tool offset or th
477. udes two types one can be modified manually after the communication is disconnected etc You could select the MM and logining in the drive unit the read servo parameter or other one can only be modified by other parameter stored in rading servo software When th CNC servo parameter files Ku dies ce Hess two types are not consistent the parameter read from the servo system should take priority and the stored value in CNC current parameter file should be overwritten one such as the encoder zero drift drive unit version 1 10 Servo Inner Alarms Note 1 n represents the sequence number of GSK CAN servo slaves set by system parameters ranges from 1 9 2 The examples shown in the following table are feed servo V1 03 and spindle V2 02 Previous versions are compatible 3 The following content is valid till this user manual is issued and it is changed without further notice Please refer to the latest servo manual Feed DAT2030C DAT2050C DAT2075C DAT2100C ie V1 03 or the earlier version Message I oo em EMEN servo motor exceeds the setting Overvoltage The main voltage is too high Undervoltage The main voltage is too low The position deviation value exceeds th tti Excess position deviation a m iL E The temperature of the motor is too high Speed amplifier saturated The speed regulator is saturated for a long time Drive unit inhabitati 5n07 IVe un INAADKANON The
478. ue ranges are controlled by the following parameters 1 No 000022 INI INI input unit 0 metric 1 inch 2 No 100620 ROTx ROTx set linear axis or rotary axis 0 linear axis 1 rotary axis 3 No 000421 ISC ISC set least input unit and least command increment Table 1 5 2 set least input unit and least command increment Least setting unit 0 001mm 0 001deg or 0 0001inch 0 0001mm 0 0001deg or 0 00001 inch Table 1 5 3 least command unit and value range Address Parameter setting Least command unit X Y Z C A B C U V W H ROTx 0 Rotary ISC 0 0 001deg 99999 999 Rotary axis axis is not ISB 99999 999 deg 22 Chapter I Programming Fundamentals related to ISC 1 0 0001deg 9999 9999 NENNEN ee 8 X Y Z C A B C U V ROTx 1 INI 0 ISC 0 0 001mm 99999 999 W H I J K R Linear axis Metric Fd ull ISC 1 0 0001mm 9999 9999 se eat mm ISC 0 0 0001inch 9999 9999 FUN ISC 1 0 00001inch 999 99999 FM When these word addresses follow data data precision is least command unit and excessive data is ignored When a word address follows variable number or has expression the word value has decimal data and its precision is the least command unit but its excessive data rounds 4 No 3401 0 DPI DPI can use decimal address When the decimal is omitted its setting is as follows 0 least setting unit 1 unit mm inch sec When parameter DPI is set to 1 word range is referred to T
479. ulti cycles are executed so the attained system variable is the value before the multi cycle command instead of the current value to avoid using the system variable in the cycle body of the multi cycles 2 22 3 Operation and jump command 1 Operation command Variables can execute all kinds of operations and their operation command format is as following i lt Expression gt The right lt expression gt of an operation command is a compose of constant a variable function and operator GSK988T defines the following operations and logic commands Function Format Use assignment Zi Hj Assignment statement assigns j value to i i is Null when j is Null addition i j k Addition When j value is Null it it taken as 0 0 value and the following functions are the same that of it Subtraction i j K Execute subtraction operation Multiplication i j k Execute division operation i j k Execute addition Sine i SIN j Execute sine operation Angle unit is degree 131 I D A O Q Q 3 3 Q C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE Arc sine Zi ASIN Zi Execute arc sine operation j value is from 1 to 1 cosine i COS j Execute cosine operation Angle unit is degree i ACOS j Tangent i TAN I Angle unit is degree j value cannot be 0 90 270 Arc tangent i ATAN J k Specify the lengths of two sides execute the arc tangent ee fee j
480. umber tool offset number M S T They can be specified in the first G71 or the second ones or program ns nf M S T F F functions of M S T F blocks are invalid in G71 and they are valid in G70 finishing blocks Incremental system metric mm input inch inch input U Ad ISB system 0 001 99999 999 0 0001 9999 9999 ISC system 0 0001 9999 9999 0 00001 999 99999 W caw Execution process as Fig 2 36 X rapidly traverses to A from A point X travel is Au and Z travel is Aw 68 Chapter If G Commands 2 X moves from A is Ad tool infeed ns block is for tool infeed at rapid traverse speed with GO is for tool infeed at feedrate F with G71 and its direction of tool infeed is that of AB point Z executes the cutting feeds to the roughing path and its direction is the same that of Z coordinate A B point X Z execute the tool retraction e 45 straight line at feedrate the directions of tool retraction is opposite to that of too infeed Z rapidly retracts at rapid traverse speed to the position which is the same that of Z coordinate After executing X tool infeed Ad e again the end point of traversing tool is still on the middle point of straight line between A and B the tool does not reach or exceed B and after executing the tool infeed Ad e again execute 3 after executing the tool infeed Ad e again the end point of tool traversing reaches B point or exceeds the straight line between AB point and X execute
481. un in MDI Command cannot run in MDI mode Modify the mode program Too many M codes Multiple M codes can t be specified in a block referring to para 3404 7 M3B Modify the program Divided by zero Divisor was O including tan90 Modify the program E Para modified failure Check that the para file be abnormal User partition is possibly damaged Part prog operation failure Reset to clear alarm End of record Specify end symbol 96 of record or not specify end of 019 program referring to para 3404 6 EOR Modify the program Feedrate out of range Feedrate was not commanded to a cutting feed or the 021 feedrate was inadquate The meaning of F is 011 12 0 determined by G98 G99 please check current modal 363 gt D 5 Q x CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual GSE O of G98 G99 Modify the program 022 Spindle speed out of range Improper spindle speed or spindle surface speed value referring to para 3031 SCB Modify the program Number followed M code out pee undefined M code referring to para 3030 MCB 98 Jie a mepa s VO Improper G code he G code can t in the same block with other G EB codes Modify the program Illegal tool No Specify a tool No which doesn t exist referring to para 3032 TCB Modify the program program the program T code not allowed in the Can t specify T code in a block in which G50 G10 and 028 G04 exists re
482. unt of the rotary axis C si converted into the movment amount of linear axis zZx67 299 180 Thereafter the operation result of C s linear movement and Z s tool compensation is output to x30 35 23mm the real time interpolation value 2 Polar Coordinate Interpolation G12 1 G13 1 Command function the contour is controlled by the programming command in the rectangle coordinate system being switched into one linear motion tool motion and one turn motion workpiece turn motion The function is used to end face cutting Command format G12 1 enter the polar coordinate interpolation mode written to G 112 G13 1 cancel the polar coordinate interpolation mode written to G113 Command explanation G12 1 G13 1 are specified by an single block After the polar coordinate mode is activated the linear or arc interpolation in the rectangular coordinate system which consists of the linear axis and the rotary axis can be commanded G12 1 activates the polar coordinate interpolation mode and select a polar coordinate interpolation level and the polar coordinate interpolation is completed in the level Rotary axis virtual axis Linear axis Origin of workpiece coordinate system Fig 2 10 Execution process The polar coordinate interpolation program based on X linear axis and C rotary axis 43 I ES A O Q Q 3 3 Q U O Q y Q 3 3 Q GSE C GSK CNC GSK988T Turni
483. value 0000 is shown as below 218 Chapter III Windows 3 3 3 System message and operation authority levels ot al EM On the system window press INFO to access the system message window which is shown as below MDI reser SYSTEM gt SYSTEM INFORMATION SYSTEM INFO CNC MODEL GSK9B8T SW VERSION v1 88C Hy VERSION v3 82 807 BOOT VERSION V2 3 SERIAL NUM FB2CUBB 19T PLC MODEL IPLC NI PASSWORD SETTING Level present 3 Component management level Allowed to modify parameters edit program modify tool compensat ion 16 54 57 PARAM dus SYSTEM NENOBY PLC DEGRD ALTER PUT gt Fig 3 19 On the system message display window it mainly displays the product type software hardware and BOOT versions system serial number PLC modal and the operation authority On the window the operation authority level password can be rewritten and the operation authority level can be set etc II O Oo am 9 2r O 5 To realize the multi level operation authority management of the development maintenance machine design and equipment management etc GSK988T CNC system sets operation authority of 5 levels 1 is the superlative 5 is the lowest Level 1 Development with system software maintenance authority Level 2 Machine manufacturer with the authority of PLC program editing screw pitch error compensation Value input and switch off
484. ve is less than those the negative the soft limit function disables 198 Chapter II Power on power off and safety protection 2 5 Emergence Operation During the processing due to the user programming operation and the product default etc some unexpected situations may occur then GSK988T should stop working immediately In this chapter it mainly introduces the measures taken in emergency About the machine in emergency refer to the relative introduction of the machine manufacturer 2 5 1 Reset When GSK988T output and the coordinate axis moves abnormally press and GSK988T resets 1 All axes movement stops 2 Function of M and S output invalid 3 Auto running completes the mode function holds Note The parameter sets whether the system automatically closes the spindle CW CCW the lubricating the cooling signal after ag Is pressed 2 5 2 Emergency stop During the machine running in the dangerous or the emergency situation press the emergency stop button and the external emergency stop signal is valid and then CNC works in the emergency situation and the machine stops moving at once all output is off such as the revolving of the spindle and the cooling fluid After releasing the emergency stop button the alarm is released CNC resets Note 1 Before releasing the emergency stop alarm confirm the trouble is shot Note 2 Before power on and off press the emergence stop button to reduce the electric shock of
485. vement direction 1 reversed 0 not reversed BN Shield program protection lock 1 shield 0 does not shield o3 7 K9 7 Alarm occurs when invalid M code is commanded 1 yes 0 no K10 0 Feed override Feed override 1 inversed 0 notinversed inversed 0 not inversed K10 1 Turn off the spindle cooling and lubrication output during ENS a K10 2 Axes overtravel input signal alarm level 1 low level alarm 0 high level alarm NM i03 Machnepanelfeedispindeenebe knob valid mal 1T Ki4 Shinde ype Fegan analogy OU Ege aam O omea 1 high level alarm 0 low level alarm nl eee K11 1 Tool position signal L Toor position signal 1 low level O high level low level 0 high level K11 2 Tool change method when standard tool change mode is Pike m KWH4 Checktooi postiock signal 1 Yes O N 1 K11 6 Tool post selection PB8 PB7 00 standard tool post 01 Yantai O nm a K11 7 Tool post selection PB8 PB7 00 standard tool post 01 Yantai eee mdPebt ed i20 V manvalinversed tool change is vadinvald 0 0 i22 Zero return drecion Tocked automatioaly i Yes 0 No 0 125 Trreolored tamp output function T enabled 0 disabled 0 i26 External handheld unt enabled 0 disabled 0 K12 7 Machine tool operation panel 1 MPUO2B 0 MPU02A OO K13 0 Chuck control function 1 enabled O disabled 1 389 C Esta CNC GSK988T Turning CNC system User Manual
486. when it is not specified the upper and lower limit of S value is specified The system alarms when the decimal is input to the specified of the S value The system can set the digit number by No 3031 The first spindle of the CNC can execute 4 gear spindle speed and the second spindle has 2 gear spindle speed In executing S command the system counts the analog voltage value corresponding to the specified speed according to setting value corresponding to No 3741 No 3744 of max spindle speed analog voltage is 10V of current gear and then outputs to spindle servo or converter to ensure that the spindle actual speed and the requirement are the same After the CNC is switched on the analog output voltage is OV The analog output voltage is reserved except that the system is in cutting feed in the surface speed control mode and the absolute value of X absolute coordinates is changed after S command is executed The analog output voltage is OV after SO is executed The analog output voltage is reserved when the system resets and emergently stops 143 I U im O e um 9 3 3 e I U im O e um 9 3 3 e CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE When the spindle speed analog voltage control is valid there are 2 methods to input the spindle speed the spindle fixed speed is defined by S command r min and is invariant without changing S command value which is called constant speed contro
487. which X absolute coordinate and the starting point are the same 4 Z rapidly traverses to return to the starting point and the cycle is completed Note 1 When J K is omitted the thread run out is confirmed by No 5130 chamfering value and No 1531 run out angle the run out value of the long axis No 5130 setting value x0 1xF and F is the thread pitch When No 5131 the run out angle is set to 0 the long axis and the short axis execute 45 run out when the setting value is positive integer the run out is done based on the run out value and angle of the long axis the system automatically counts the run out value of the short axis Note 2 Length of thread run out is K in the long direction and is specified by No 5130 when J is omitted Note 3 Length of thread run out is JZK when K is omitted Note 4 There is no thread run out when J 0 or J 0 K 0 Note 5 Length of thread run out is J K when J 0 K 0 Note 6 There is no thread run out when J 0 K 0 Note 7 After executing the feed hold in thread cutting the system does not stop cutting until the thread 96 Chapter If G Commands cutting is completed with Pause on screen Note 8 After executing single block in thread cutting the program run stops after the system returns to starting point one thread cutting cycle is completed Note 9 Thread cutting decelerates to stop when the system resets emergently stops or its driver alarms Note 10 The system alarms when the thre
488. xecute the tool offset When T command and the motion command are in the same block they are executed simultaneously in executing tool change the system executes by adding the current tool offset to coordinates of motion command and whether the cutting feedrate or the rapid traverse speed is 146 Chapter IV Tool Nose Radius Compensation defined by the motion command Note 1 In tool traversing compensation mode when the system executes the tool offset NO 5002 Bit6 sets the valid method of the tool offset LWM 0 it is valid in the block of T code LWM 1 it is valid in the axis movement block Note 2 No 5001 Bit6 EVO sets the valid method of modifying tool wear tool when the system executes the program EVO 0 itis valid in the next specified T code EVO 1 it is valid in the next buffer block Note After the tool wear value is modified the system executes the wear value in the tool traversing method to avoid the too big wear value Note 3 It is suggested that the program should be complied according to the normative method that is the tool change is executed in the safe position and then the absolute value command is used to position to the starting point of the machining Note 4 In the coordinate offset compensation mode when the system executes the tool offset and executes T function command instead of movement command it uses G50 to set the coordinate system the displayed absolute coordinate value is that the coordi
489. y L 7 G42 J G42 a Programmed path Programmed path Tool nose center path Tool nose center path Fig 4 32 Linear Linea moving outside Fig 4 33 Linear circular moving outside 3 circular linear 4 circular circular Programmed path G42 q Programmed path Tool nose center path Fig 4 34 Circular linear moving outside Fig 4 35 Circular circular moving outside d Special cutting 1 Without intersection There is an intersection of Alarm and stop compensation paths when the tool radius is small no one when Big compensation d the radius is big the tool stops A at the end point of previous block and the system alarms Programmed path The center of circular B Vu M E CNET The center of circular A Fig 4 36 Paths without intersection after offset U im O e um 9 3 3 e CGSN CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual 2 Center point and starting point of circular being the same one Tool nose center path regem qe eroe m im stop No 254 alarm occurs and the tool stops the end point of the previous block N3 i N4 G41 N3 G01 W20 N4 GO2 W10 I 0 KO N5 N5 G03 U 10 I 10 Programmed path _ U 2 Fig 4 37 Center point and starting point of circular being the same one 9 3 3 Offset path of compensation direction in compensation mode e The compensation direction of tool nose radius is specified by G41 and G42 and the sign symbol
490. y M01 in the block move to the and DNC mode block and the running stops 2 Edit key Access edit mode Edit mode EDIT II O Oo D um 9 O 5 E MDI key Access MDI mode MDI mode e Ref Lai i Access reference position return Reference position return position return mode mode REF RETURN key Access single step or MPG Single J P Single step mode MPG mode One mode is selected by step MPG key mode manual mode parameter Manual key Access the manual mode Manual mode MANUAL Access DNC mode DNC mode Auto mode MDI mode edit mode reference Feed spindle position return mode Feed hold funct hold knob uide ee MPG mode single step 130 mode manual mode DNC mode Chapter Overview Mode during valid Keys Auto mode MDI mode In emergency the system and edit mode reference the machine stop running all position return mode output is closed MPG mode single step mode and DNC mode Function Emergency stop key Auto mode MDI mode edit mode reference Power position return mode System power of off switch on off keys pow MPG mode single step mode manual mode and DNC mode II Overtravel E MPG mode and manual Cancel machine limit release key mode uoieiado Auto mode MDI mode edit mode reference The protection program cant be position return mode changed at random MPG mode single step mode manual mode and DNC mode Progra
491. y and Operation i ater Punk na t I EO kei Ub E E e er E P E 293 8 3 Simulation graph display and operation cceccceccseecseeteecceeeseeeeeeceeesseeesetseeteeneeeaeeees 294 Chapter K Wisk WSC r 296 OF Sendo a F FOGIAM eto mr ETE 296 DZ ien icc X c ae ome eat 297 SPAEEV IN Seceij 297 9 2 2 Servo parameter backup ccccceccseeesseeseeteeeceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeneeseeteeeeeetseeeeeeseeaaes 298 chapter X Processing Example S us niadtieen dist bu ia a 301 10 1 Outer End Face MachiniNg iesieta ia ae En tede 301 10 2 Compound Machining reses a a trs i dade E ere te enon 304 Chapter AL Parame lel S anina a A 310 11 1 Parameters Related to System Setting seeseesssesseeseeeeeennennnnn 311 11 2 Parameters Related to Interfaces of Input and Output essueseuesse 311 11 3 Parameters Related to Axis Control Setting UNnit cece cececeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaes 311 11 4 Parameters Related to Coordinate SySteM ccccccccecccseceseeeceeeeseeeeeeeteeeeseeseeesaeeeaes 315 11 5 Parameters Related to the Stroke Detection ccc cece ceccceccceeeeseeeeeeseeeeaueeseeesaeeeans 317 11 6 Parameters Related to Feedrate ccccccccccecceccceeceeceeeeeeceeseeesseceeceeeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeaes 320 11 7 Parameters Related to Control of Accele
492. y specifies G17 G19 in the same block and No 3403 Bit 6 AD2 is 0 the last G17 G19 word is valid the system alarms when the parameter is set to 1 Note 6 The multi compound cycle command G70 G76 and the fixed cycle command G90 G92 G94 are used to ZX basic axis level when their functions are specified in other levels the system alarms Note 7 The motion command is not related to the level selection besides the arc interpolation and tool nose radius compensation command when the system commands the axis beyond the levels it does not alarm and the axis can move when the system selects the axis motion beyond the level in the arc interpolation command the system alarms For example G17 G01 X100 Y50 Z20 F100 the system does not alarm Z moves Example the level selection when X and A are parallel axis G17 X_Y_ select XY level G17A Y select AY level G18 X_Z_ select ZX level G17 select XY level G17A select AY level G18Y select ZX level Y motion is not relative the level 2 13 6 Exact stop mode G61 cutting mode G64 G61 function After programmed axis of the block must exactly stop at the end pont of the block the next block is executed G64 function When the programmed axis of each block following G64 starts to develerate it has not reached the programmed end point the system starts to execute 59 D O Q Q 3 3 Q C GSK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual GSE the n
493. y tool nose point of Tn n 0 9 when taking Tn n 0 9 as imaginary tool nose For the same tool offset value from standard point to tool nose radius center imaginary tool nose is T3 is different with that of ones from standard point to imaginary tool nose imaginary tool nose is T3 when TO and T3 tool nose points are selected to toolsetting in rear tool post coordinate system taking tool post center as standard point It is easier to measure 155 I U im O ta um 9 3 3 e GSE CESK CNC GSK988T Turning CNC System User Manual distances from the standard point to the tool nose radius center than from the standard point to the imaginary tool nose and so set the tool offset value by measuring distance from the standard point to the imaginary tool nose tool nose direction of T3 p V OFX i le X tool compensation OFX Q X tool compensation V 3 7 5 Co OFZ OFZ Z tool compensation Z tool compensation Define distance from standard point to Define distance from standard point to tool nose for compensation value center of tool nose for compensation value V lt 7 Starting point on center of tool nose Starting point on imaginary tool nose Fig 4 10 Tool offset value of tool post center as benchmark 4 1 4 G40 G41 G42 command function Taking the previous and the current position increment as the programmed path can cancel the tool compensation mode and its direction is the compensation direction of th
494. ycle are selected by Q value cutting amount every time and PCP NO 5200 5 in GG84 88 114 Chapter If G Commands Standard rigid tapping cycle Q value is not specified or Q value is O High speed deep hole rigid Q value is specified Citis not zero and PCP NO 5200 5 0 tapping cycle Deep hole rigid tapping Q value is specified Cit is not zero and RTR NO 520025 z 1 I cycle e Standard rigid tapping cycle Q value is not specified or Q value is 0 Command format G84 X U _ C H Z W R P F KM or G88Z W C H X U R PF KM Execution process Standard rigid tapping cycle Operation sequence CP Pause g O Q Q 3 3 Q D The tool rapidly positions to the hole from starting point the hole is qoo _ Rapid traverse determined by the hole position Y data at the initial level Sere ates Rapidly position to point R f Hole position eee 3 The spindle starts rotation and Starting O EO tapping axis is executed to the hole pom Operation 1 I Operation 6 bottom level at the speed specified Operation 2 e Spindle stop Spindle rotati by F and the spindle stops when VALL EN Ponte leyel the axis reaches the hole bottom 4 Pause is executed in the time specified by P The spindle starts rotation Operation 3 Operation 5 reversely and tapping axis retracts to the R level at the speed specified by F Hole bottom level 6 The spindle stops rotation and lt Se

GSK988T User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents